Home

13.3 MB - Spansion

Contents

1. e Trace control Trace start Trace stop Specifies trace operation when the trace trigger which was previously set hits e Address Specifies address to set trace trigger e Address mask Specifies mask value for address to set trace trigger e Pass count Specifies the number of times the PC passes through the specified address to hit trace trigger e Size Byte Word Long Specifies access size at the time of data access When not specifying size check Ignore e Attribute Read Write Write Read Specifies attribute at the time of data access e Access detect CPU DMA Specifies detection method of the bus master at the time of data access e Comparison condition Specifies conditions of data comparison Disable Does not specify data for trigger condition Data agreement The case that the specified data matches is the trigger condition Data not The case that the specified data does not match is the trigger condition July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 237 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual AS Data Specifies the data for comparison e Data mask Specifies mask value for specified data 238 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 8 6 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 This section explains the trace function for emulator debugger MB2100 01 E Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2100
2. The files stored in project for making or building are listed SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 47 a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window Software Support Manual A S E Function e Display the workspace name e Display all projects stored in workspace e Display the subproject The subproject in the project is displayed below the parent project e Display of the project target file name e Display of all the source file names registered in the project When a source file name is double clicked the editor opens to enable the editing of the source file e Display of the include files that are in dependency When an include file name is double clicked the editor opens to enable the editing of the include file Displaying Debugger setup name When the Debugger setup name is double clicked debugging is started based on the setup information Drug and drop The member in the SRC tab can be moved in the Project window and stored from the explorer E SRC Tab Bitmap Image List BLL Wee r Pe aa 3 r B BBE r Esme Nie Ee al Pi e Workspace file name Target file name Subproject name Folder Category C source file C source file not subject to making or building C source file in which individual options specified C source file in which individual options specified not subject to making or building Assembler source file Assembler sou
3. cccccecceceeee 506 Macro iin tela aiavabimidoa in aleialarn Gia elaid susimvatQiasbid a Spa elmcnibiate pres mvalefala soalble maieceistmialate 96 L nduade Resetting a Macro Name 0 cee 293 300 ee Tools 2 Setting a Macro Name eeeseeeesessssernrnrnns 292 299 Setting of Options Included in Language Mailbox i fanti etailed Display of Mailbox Specifications cess eee eeee eee 296 Detailed Display of Mailb 244 Latch Main Window Displaying the Latch Measurement Result 375 Main Window ccceccescseeceeceeceseueceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 40 Setting Latch E 375 Make LCD Changing Subproject Configuration at Making or LCD Display at Normal State ccccccccceccceceeeee 512 Building SaPan Ria SIDEST EAR EROPA ERINEVA ee 32 Librarian Creating a Program Source and Executing Setting Librarian Options eeeeeeeeeeees 314 Make a oS r Starting LibrariaN sssssiisisi esise isiirns insiren 315 N Bcec nH s cscc ccecc ce ceeccsseseczccsteces 266 i Making or Building of Project ee 32 Changing the Library Retrieval Path Retrieval Making or Building Specified Project 32 l Order dias savadantsaebiaccugsduvewasdend 308 MB2100 01 Resetting a Library Retrieval Path 308 i Setting a Library Retrieval Path 307 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger Seting of Options for Library Canttl surih 307 MB2100 01 risi esses iccsssventieteit neccddenriens 258 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of th
4. ssssssssrrrrrsrrrrrereeeee 186 Wizard Activating Setup Wizard eerie 439 Changing the Description of the Setup File A E A 448 Setup WIZE vevcscceesiecictenrcnedecanasaecindsentesssaesavan 439 Setup Wizard Operation Procedure 000 440 Workspace Adding a Currently Opened Project to WOLKSPAaCO cscscccnnssnsccsenesiestedeereeeecceneranes 22 Adding a New Project to Currently Opened WOLKS PAC csnscccrnnsnstavennstesciceereeecccenmmanes 22 Creating a Workspace or Project File 138 Creating Empty Workspace 0 00000eeeeeeeees 21 Creating Workspace ccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 20 Creating Workspace Duing Project CHEATION Lesset bicicccveiescnctesanceseknwntosindesvives 20 Creating Workspace when Opening a PROJOC ws cicis sositsensnvesssunia shins teenetenskccvernnes 20 Deleting a Project Added to Workspace 23 Opening the Existing Workspace File 149 Procedure for Adding a Project to Currently Opened WOPKSPACO os wncinessetnesdevtrseenteccneraneccesees 270 Recent Workspace File eee ees 156 Setting of Workspace c ccna 34 Setup Workspace isiisisinssisisiissicrsnnresissnsnriessiaanns 275 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Workspace Name 0 ceee 49 When the Currently Open Workspace File is Not Edited at AW cerisiers ennai 150 When the Workspace is Open sssssssrrrrrrrrrrnne 157 WOrKSpaCE wecsscsnncisccsecntiassrasn
5. 0 0 eee e rere eee 136 Customize Customization Procedure Color c seseeeeeees 69 Customization Procedure Deletion of Keyword cece 70 Customization Procedure Font c eseseeeeeeee 69 Customization Procedure Initialization of Keyword 70 Customization Procedure Keyword Addition eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 69 Customization Procedure Tab Count 006 69 Customization Procedure View ceeceeeeeeeeees 68 Customize Bar Menu ccccccsececeseeeeeeeeeesaes 487 Customize Build Function ccccccceeeeeeeeeees 323 Installing Customize Bar cece e ees 485 Registering in Customize Bat 488 What is Customize Bar eee cere eens 485 Cut CU E AT 160 Cyclic Handler Detailed Display of Cyclic Handler 245 D Data Data Formula si ivcc ccnctsisscesnascvenaeditsasseesessaccnusterens 6 Data to be Printed cece e errr e eens 155 Displaying Memory Data c ees 193 Operators Usable in Data and Address POT aS E 12 Searching Memory Data 0 0 cee 195 Data Break Data Break ssiicsicsacadecsincssdacxavedoeansscccceianaan 347 361 Setting of Data Break 347 362 Data Watch Break Hardware Data Watch Break 1 0 0 ees 358 Setting of Hardware Data Watch Break 358 Debug Debug Baleiras aiara aeaa 41 Debug SeSS1OM i cosiesis csediecetadsieeiecwesteveiabedevavevie 166 Debug Start and Termination
6. Blank project Creates a new project without using template project Template Select one of the displayed template project to create a project Browse for template Creates a project based on template project which is not displayed e Project Type Loadmodule ABS Relocatable REL Library LIB REALOS ABS Selects the target file type managed by the project This cannot be specified when a template project is selected e Function call interface Stack argument passing Register argument passing Selects the function call interface This cannot be specified when a template project is selected For details see CHAPTER 4 OBJECT PROGRAM STRUCTURE in F MC 16 FAMILY SOFTUNE C COMPILER MANUAL e Create new workspace This cannot be specified here e Add to the current workspace Registers a project to the currently opened workspace July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 269 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual v e Chip type FMC16 FMC16F FMC16FX FMC16H FMC16L FMC16LX Selects the chip type This cannot be specified when a template project is selected e Target MCU Selects the target MCU The selectable MCU varies depending on the chip type This cannot be specified when a template project is selected e Project name Specify the project name Target file name Specify the target file name The extension is abs and it is automatically set when inputting a project name The default setting
7. Cancel Close the edit window when debugging If placing a check mark for this item the edit window will be closed when the debugger is started This is disabled by default Place for user template project Specify the directory for the location storing the project used for template The projects placed in sub directories including this directly are displayed as templates in the new dialog of the project For details see 2 3 Creating Project or 4 2 1 New Specify an absolute path for the directory This setting is restored when Workbench is restarted 402 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual 4 7 2 Debug Environment SPANSION a Debug Environment sets the debug environment it is valid only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session E items to be Set Select and set the following items from the submenu T O Port Interrupt Debug Environment Selecting Debug Function Setup Wizard July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 403 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a gt lt SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 7 2 1 1 0 Port This section explains the I O port setup procedure E Setting an Input Port Figure 4 7 4 Input Port Setup Dialog Box Setup I O port mx Input port Output port Port address H o00000 Update cycle D o Mask data HFFFFFFFF Data size C Ascii _Anpend Binary Size Byte m
8. July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 4 Creating Workspace SPANSION Software Support Manual v 2 4 Creating Workspace This section explains how to create a workspace E Workspace A workspace is the unit for managing projects together Workbench SOFTUNE manages created projects in the workspace Be sure to create a workspace Multiple projects can be managed in a workspace E Creating Workspace There are three methods to create workspaces Creating workspace duing project creation When creating a new project you can create a workspace to store the project at the same time In this case the workspace name and the directory name is set to the project name Creating workspace when opening a project When opening a project with File Open Workspace menu the workspace is created at the same time to store the project In this case the workspace name and the directory name is set to the project name However if a workspace file exists the workspace file is opened instead of the project file Creating empty workspace An empty workspace is created without registering any project A project must be registered separately In this case the workspace can be created with the workspace name and the directory name which are not used with any project in the workspace E Creating Workspace Duing Project Creation Same as the procedure for creating a project For details see 2 3 Creating Project
9. Does not terminate SOFTUNE Workbench If no file is being edited SOFTUNE Workbench terminates immediately If there is a file being edited processing explained in When a file is being edited is performed E When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug Session As in processing explained in When the workspace is open the dialog box for asking the operator whether to save the current workspace information opens Clicking Yes or No from this dialog box continues processing and automatically terminates the debug session If no file is being edited SOFTUNE Workbench terminates immediately If there is a file being edited processing explained in When a file is being edited is performed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 157 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 3 Edit Menu The edit menu provides such functions as file editing find string and error jump E File Editing Function The file editing function includes the following Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Delete All Select E Character String Search Function The character string search function includes the following Find Replace Find in Files E Jump Function Enables to move to any place in a window quickly Jump E Bookmark Function Enables to setup a bookmark or to jump to the bookmark Bookmark E Error Jump Function The error jump function includes the following Previous Error Next Error To
10. LN 3 7 Source Window The source window displays the source program at debugging E Source Window Figure 3 7 1 is an example of the source window Figure 3 7 1 Example of Source Window Bookmark Line number maini The position of the 71 int i 72 struct table yvalue 16 current instruction pointer is displayed for i 0 i lt l6 i The breakpoint position i H 0000 H 000AD6 is displayed sort_val value 16 Pop up display of variable value The value in parentheses is the address of variable E Function e Breakpoint setting releasing A breakpoint can be set or released by left clicking gt O of O at the left edge of the source window e Instruction execution to specified line address An instruction can be executed at the specified line address by left clicking of gt O of gt at the left edge of the source window Step execution step into is also enabled by clicking at the PC location e Pop up display of variable value By placing cursor of mouse on the name of variable that variable value can be viewed as pop up e Bookmark setup function By setting a bookmark it enables to view the specified line using search bar or key operation Please refer to 4 3 7 Bookmark for details e Drag and Drop It is possible to drag a character string selected at source window and drop it to memory disassemble an
11. SPANSION Software Support Manual iN 4 6 4 5 Code Break Hardware Count This section explains hardware count among code breaks in the emulator debugger E Hardware Count Break For details on the hardware count break function refer to each relevant section in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual MB2100 01 2 6 6 1 Code Break Hardware E Use Conditions This function can be used in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2100 01 For MB2100 01 set the pass count mode to the pass count break mode For details refer to Section 2 4 3 2 Switching Debug Function in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Setting of Hardware Count Break Setting dialog Figure 4 6 16 Code Break Hardware Count Setting Dialog Break x Code Data Break address H 000000 Set Type Hardware count Detail Remain 2 Event list Break list Pass count Symbol e Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified 356 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION va e Type In this field the type of the breakpoint is selected Select Hardware Count e Remain Displays the remaining number of breakpoints which can be set e Event list This button is used to display the event list dialog used to check the setting of all events Details dialog Detail button is pushed the following details dialog
12. Section information sc Section information is all cleared A warning is output when a ROM RAM area outside the range of the internal ROM RAM check_rora is specified Setting is performed so as to output a warning However when an MCU without single chip mode is selected setting is performed so as not to output a warning A warning is output when a section is placed outside the specified ROM RAM area range check_locate Setting is performed so as to output a warning July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 313 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 5 5 7 Setting Librarian Options This section explains how to set librarian options E Setting Librarian Options 1 Click Librarian from the project setup dialog box 2 Select category General or Output List can be selected as category The specified options are displayed in the lower part of the project setup dialog box E Setting Options in General Figure 4 5 46 Librarian Option Setup Dialog Box General Setup Project MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librarian Cony 4 gt Category General v 7 Outputs start message Target of setting MBSOF394 z MV Outputs debug information V Control of default option file Option i Cancel Apply The following options can be set Output start message v Output debug information g Disable default
13. Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 7 5 Tool Tool sets the tools to be directly started by SOFTUNE Workbench E Tools Tool is not a tool that takes charge of basic SOFTUNE Workbench functions such as a C compiler and assembler It is a function that builds auxiliary tools e g simple filters into the system so that they can be started directly from SOFTUNE Workbench Building dir into the system for example enables the output of the result obtained as a result of executing the dir command at the DOS prompt to the SOFTUNE Workbench Output Window Figure 4 7 62 Tool Setup Dialog Box Setup Tool Title fo Execute Filename i Browse Option pO Executing Directory pO Browse Designate additional option when executing F Use output window Tool List Macro define Z Filename d File Path F Filename M ain e Filename Extension a Loadmodulefile D Loadmodulefile path amp Loadmodulefile M ain ZE Loadmodulefile E xtension Projectfile Path Projecttile M ain Cancel July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 459 a SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual a E Tool Setup Procedure 1 T Select Tool from the Setup Menu The tool setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 62 opens Set a title that differs from the registered names Specify the execution file name of the tool to be registered Click
14. sesssssssseseessressrnssrrnsrsrssrinsrrntetinterntstinnsrunateunetrnnttrnennnntnnnenenne 374 4 6 6 2 Sequence Setting MB2147 01 eeecccecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteeeeseaeeeseaaeeseaaeeseeeeseeeeesenaeeesaes 376 4 6 6 3 Sequence Setting MB2198 o ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeetaaeeeeeaeeesaaeeseaaeeseaeeeseeaeesenaeeenaaes 379 4 6 6 4 Sequence Setting MB2100 01 0 cecccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseaeeeseaaeeseseeeseeaeeeseaeeessaeeeseeeenaas 383 AGT Stak E teens cece tees ce vavene chees sbsacs Gale adaat eepess gies E E E 386 4 6 8 TIME MEASUPEMOM sec scicecsccce du tie eia EEEN eee ene EERE 387 4 6 8 1 Measurement Unit During the Execution Time Measurement cceeeeceereeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeees 391 4 6 9 Call siiven i denviieisvie Hcieieintiavat r edie wie ene ei ee its 392 4 60 10 Clear Call cciccsestcccscpesteccceents codutesscaleecasteeseaqaphabeseveiesscda degaucgaestsaavesseayccevauaeacageeaeded Heseneeneaneencle 394 AGAI VECO cenon a O E E tile occbel atelemeeecetass 395 4612 Load Target File gurseensesrir kidun na KaRa Anea ARENE EAE A A aAA TASAK EEN AREAN 396 4 6 13 StartDeb g End DeEbUg sivssec cesses scceee dives coaszeerescegidast ene aieeas ceeeisnned ede eevee iaaa aiana E AEAEE 397 4 7 SOUP csovisieie es ate este ee Mr eae ii te a a ie see 398 4 7 1 DOVEIOPMOMU six ccscnesesc Heavies cevteacc peeves de A E A EE A belornnaes 399 4 7 2 Debug Environment se c vii de cceceecicee iene neee
15. 0008 118 263 Variable Refresh All WING OWS ricvisesacddeveuseanveverts ceardeneteens 474 Environment Variable a nn 399 Refresh Window a EA ngey os EEEE sh EARE 473 Local Vanable NGAGE in vs cae 87 201 Register Window era iaer inaid dosniai idia ia 82 Modifying a Variable Value 201 203 Sequence Window A AA oe 109 110 112 Vatlable sivisscictieriencsvanssrdsdenel nn 95 Setting a Sequence in Sequence Wind Weser ocr eisa assa aaaeeeaa eti 110 vetor Setting a Sequence in the Sequence Display and Setting Vectors eee 395 5 a eq q Vector 395 Wid OWortsspenccsssetsecedi ororena engecascceettens 113 MIS SUSE cookers iinoa inariana Shortcut Ment Click the Right Button of the Mouse Version on Space in the Project Window 62 Version Information cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeee 476 568 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Space in the Project Window sis feng awe akaa eaea E Aaa N 57 Source WINdOW sissioni nioena inina 72 Symbol Window ssssssiseissssinodisspninnsi iinei iaukennaa 77 Tab Display of the Windows sssssssrernrerreeeeeeee 38 Trae WIDOW ssiidcnssnscsrcessavessssnnssecidcse seamed ceneranes 90 Use Output Window ccc 325 Watch WIndow ccscccseccseeceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeas 88 202 Window Display Debug Session ee 186 Window Name Display ccceee cree ees 469 Window View Non vView
16. Access address unsigned long total_cycle Total cycle count EXECUTE_EVENT Return value None Explanation Posts the occurrence of a fetch access event by instruction execution This event posts only the starting address of the instruction immediately before instruction execution Remarks 532 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual SPANSION va G 9 SSDI_Interrupt_Event Post Interrupt Format void SSDI_Interrupt_Event INTERRUPT_EVENT info Argument typedef struct int int_number Interrupt number unsigned long total_cycle Total cycle count unsigned long int_cycle Cycle count of interrupt processing unsigned long cycle Count of cycles delayed INTERRUPT_EVENT Return value None Explanation Posts the occurrence of an interrupt event by instruction execution Set the count of cycles generated during processing as the count of cycles delayed info cycle In the ISS this value is added to the cycle count If this event causes an error stop instruction execution by using SSDI_Request_Abort Remarks The cycle count of interrupt processing int_cycle is always posted as 0 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 533 a SPANSION APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual a G 10 SSDI_Timer_Event Post Timer Format void SSDI_Timer_Event TIME
17. Browse After Browse Finish Cancel lt Back CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 444 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a 8 Select debug information sessions to be restored immediately after startup of the debugger Figure 4 7 46 Setup Wizard Setup File Setup Wizard X Select item on setup file m Select setting item Select All Specification Specification Finish Cancel When Specify is selected and Specification button is clicked the session setup dialog box is displayed thereby selecting a session to be restored immediately after the activation enabled Only the information of the specified sessions will be set in the setup file July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 445 a SPANSION Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup va Figure 4 7 47 Session Setup Setup Session nese Select restoration session just after boot Session MV Window MV Cardinal number Emulation IV Map MV Monitoring M Eror V Execute V Path V Watch V Break F Cancel Figure 4 7 48 Setup Wizard Settings will be completed when you click finish Emulator debugger setup has now been completed 446 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION va Procedure when the simulator debugger is selected 1 Select the simulato
18. If an Old project format prj is selected it saves information on active project configurations in old project format incompatible to workspace The project file opened in workspace project format cannot be overwritten in old project format In this case save the file as a different name Saving the Binary File Specify a save start address in Start Address When the binary file has been already loaded the start address at that time is set Specify a save end address in End Address When the binary file has been already loaded the end address at that time is set 152 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a Note If the project file in a different directory from the original one is saved the members described in a relative path may not be referred In this case move the members with the original directory configuration kept being unchanged July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 153 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 2 8 Save All Save All saves all the files currently being edited E Files to be Saved The files to be saved include text files such as the source file open in the edit window Data in the workspace project file and output window is not saved Even the text file open in the edit window is not saved if it is not edited When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session the b
19. Old project file prj gt VO1 SOFTUNE Workbench V3 p03 e Change the extension of the backup project file p03 and option data file d03 to prj and dat respectively SOFTUNE Manager V01 V02 v01 e Change the extension of the backup project file v01 to prj Notes e Tool options are not passed to projects of SOFTUNE Manager V01 V02 Reset these options after read has terminated e Be sure to reset User Include File Directory set by Set Environment Variable of an old version as the Include Path option of the C compiler or assembler Also be sure to reset Library File Search Path set by Environment Variable Setup of the old version as the Library Search Path option of the linker e If the workspace file having the same name as that of the specified project file is in the same directory the workspace file is opened instead of the project file and no project file is converted 36 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 15 Moving Project Files Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 15 Moving Project Files This section explains how to move a project file to another directory or a personal computer E Procedure 1 Set the path to the member stored in the project file to the relative path from the project file In SOFTUNE Workbench files in the same drive as that of the project file are usually stored in the relative path To check whether the files are stored in
20. SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 6 6 2 Sequence Setting MB2147 01 This section explains the sequence setting dialog box for the emulator debugger MB2147 01 E Setting the Sequence The Sequence dialog box is used to set a sequence up to 3 levels The dialog box appears when you select Debug sequence menu in the Sequence Window Figure 4 6 31 Sequence Setting Dialog 4 Sequence x Sequence Sequencer RESTART B Code sTAaRT ee END zi i Attribute 1 T LEYEL2 2 LEVEL3 3 e me LEVEL1 1 Address __1 Status Enable Disable Set List Symbol 4 w b Event list e Sequencer The transition condition for the sequencer is set A maximum of 3 levels from LEVEL1 to LEVEL3 can be set Also RESTART to return control to the starting state of the sequencer can be set Setting must be performed in sequence starting with LEVEL1 When correct setting is not performed or when the setting is deleted the subsequent setting will be entirely deleted 376 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a Attribute The attribute of the transition condition is specified The attribute is selected from between code and data Address The address or symbol for which the transition condition is to be set is specified Details The details of the transition condition are set The dialo
21. Trace data for each file type will be saved as shown below Logging file Figure 4 4 25 is displayed to make sure if you want to add the data to the existing file Trace file The existing file is overwritten The trace data over writes the existing data Figure 4 4 25 Trace Data Save Dialog f Softune907 E Do you want to append open in G Softunesample 907 Project sample log file Yes No Cancel The trace data is appended The trace data over writes the existing data Cancels the trace data saving process E Measuring Time Between Trace Data Frames Time between frames on the trace window can be measured Set a start frame number for time measuring and then move a cursor to the frame numbers Pop up message shows time from the start frame number To set the start frame for time measuring display the shortcut menu at the frame then select Measurement point The frame line set for start frame turns green This function is available with emulator debugger MB2147 01 210 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu mw Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 4 4 26 Display of Time Measuring on Trace Window frame no address mnemonic startup asm 163 A BNKSYM DTRANS S startup asm 164 MOV DTB A 00066 F80076 DTB A startup asm 165 MOVW RW1 DTRANS_S 00064 F80078 RW1 047E Sstartup asm 179 MOVW A RW1 jstart LABEL2 00056 F80091 A RW1 star
22. to open the Viewer dialog box Figure 3 21 7 Select the using log file when the RAM Checker viewer is opened use the button Execute to open the RAM Checker viewer Figure 3 21 8 Figure 3 21 7 Viewer Dialog Box Base log file name fe te mp6 srl File list Cancel 126 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 21 RAM Checker Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 3 21 8 RAM Checker Viewer FH RAM Checker viewer Fie View Search Help ca Ud BE Bh cen om GR BG xe me at tie Ch3 dat 0x00000100 Value 0x00000170 Ch4 0x00000102 Value OxO0000FE93 Time View Cursor Other way execute the RAM Checker Viewer Menu from SOFTUNE V3 of FFMC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench Tools of the Start Menu Refer to RAM Checker Viewer Manual FswbRViewE pdf and Help for details of the RAM Checker Viewer July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 127 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 22 Terminal Window SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 3 22 Terminal Window The Terminal Window is used to display the result of an output requested to the debug I O E Terminal Window The Terminal Window is used to display the message output by a user program For instance when an output is requested to the Message Buffer Register MBR on the debug I O the debugger displays the output content in the Terminal Window after receiving the content This function i
23. 3 7 Source Window SPANSION Software Support Manual va Figure 3 7 2 Search Dialog Box in Source Window p Find x Find what e o YS i M Direction r Positio Il Find Match case C Up Cur Regular Exp Down Top Cancel C I Ambiguot C Bott e Jump Specifies the position to display in the source window Perform this operation in the following procedure 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the source window to display the shortcut menu then select Jump from the menu See Section 4 3 6 Jump 2 Specify a specification format 3 Select a display position 4 Click the OK button e Go to Defined Line Goes to the line defined by a function Perform this operation in the following procedure 1 Select a function name in the source window or move the cursor on the function name 2 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Go to Defined Line from the menu 3 If a function with the same name already exists the Resolve Ambiguity dialog box appears Select the desired function name and click the OK button Figure 3 7 3 Resolve Ambiguity Dialog Box Resolve Ambiguity Ed Symbols smp func Cancel A global or static variable that cannot jump to the defined line may also be displayed in the dialog box when on demand load is in use i e when an unloaded symbol exists ui Note 74 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CH
24. E Creating Workspace when Opening a Project Perform steps below to create a workspace For details see 4 2 2 Open 1 Select the File Open Workspace menu 2 Select Workspace Project File for File type on the open dialog box 3 Select Project File for File type on the workspace open dialog box and then select the project file The workspace is automatically created with the same name as that of the project 20 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 4 Creating Workspace Software Support Manual SPANSION va E Creating Empty Workspace Perform steps below to create a workspace For details see 4 2 1 New 1 Select the File New menu 2 Select Workspace Project File for File type on the creation dialog box 3 Select the Workspace tab on the creation dialog box and then select Blank workspace for workspace type 4 Input the workspace name The input name is applied to the following settings Workspace file name Workspace directory can be changed 5 Click the OK button An empty workspace is created in the set directory July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 21 a SPANSION a 2 5 Setting Project CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 5 Setting Project Software Support Manual This section explains how to change the project in the workspace E Adding Project There are the following two methods to add a project to a workspace Adding a new project to currently opened
25. E Detailed Display of Cyclic Handler e ID e Address e Operation mode e Entry address Left time e Activation interval Figure 4 4 50 Detailed Cyclic Handler Display Dialog Cyclic handler x ID 0001 Address 000802 Operation mode Entry address Left time Activation interval ID number of cyclic handler Address of cyclic handler control block Cyclic handler state Enable Disable Cyclic handler address Residual time till activation Cyclic time interval July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 245 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Detailed Display of Alarm Handler Figure 4 4 51 Detailed Alarm Handler Display Dialog Alarm handler x ID 0002 Address 000828 Entry address Left time 0 s e ID Alarm handler number e Address Address of alarm handler control block e Entry address Alarm handler address e Left time Residual time till activation E Detailed Display of Ready Queue Figure 4 4 52 Detailed Ready Queue Display Dialog Priority 02 Close Address O005aa Queueing task i e Priority Priority e Address Address of ready queue header table e Queueing task ID number of queued task E Detailed Display of Timer Queue Figure 4 4 53 Detailed Timer Queue Display Dialog Address 000604 Close Queueing task or cycle handler T0001 e Address Timer queue address e Queueing task
26. Edit See Section 4 4 6 Local Memory window Display the memory window and setup bookmark Property Displays symbol properties Close Closes local window e Memory window When selected the following two submenus are opened Jump To display memory window by using selected address of variable Add bookmark By using selected variable address bookmark will be added to memory window For details see Section 4 3 7 Bookmark e Property Information for the variable is displayed For details see Section 4 3 9 Property July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 87 a SPANSION AN 3 13 Watch Window CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 13 Watch Window Software Support Manual This window is displayed only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session The watch window is used to display and modify the values of the specified variables Variables are displayed in the tree format E Watch Window The watch window can be opened independent 4 windows When being registered a variable user select watch window no 1 2 3 or 4 Because the watch window can be registered the variables for each window Figure 3 13 1 is an example of the watch window Figure 3 13 1 Example of Watch Window a E Function E watchi rae C fe IEE einnnnnnno ad i H 00000008 q F tblp H 00000AB6 E target 16 g A normal variabl
27. Figure 4 5 53 Setup Customize Build Dialog Box Target of setting E E Assembler E After 4 Compiler 0 E After EJ Linker m G After 3 Librarian D ososasososs Sy After 3 Converter 8 Sy After sample prj X TreeView al x t E Before Before G Before E Before G Before iF NEWT OOL Export Reset Setup Customize Build Title NEWTOOL Option gt MV Enable Designate additional option when executing F Use output window Contents of the temporary file Cancel Execute Filename Browse Executing Directory Browse July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 323 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a SPANSION Software Support Manual E Tool Button List Setting Target There are two types of setting targets in Target of setting Default and Project name See Target of setting for which one is currently set e Default When the Customize Build is set when no project is opened the default setting can be changed The Customize Build setting is referred when creating a new project and is copied to that project Default is displayed in Target of setting Note When a project created in an older version is opened this setting is also referred and copied to that project e Project Name Customize build is set for the project The tool operates at Com
28. PERFORM The following document contains information on Cypress products Although the document is marked with the name Spansion the company that originally developed the specification Cypress will continue to offer these products to new and existing customers Continuity of Specifications There is no change to this document as a result of offering the device as a Cypress product Any changes that have been made are the result of normal document improvements and are noted in the document history page where supported Future revisions will occur when appropriate and changes will be noted in a document history page Continuity of Ordering Part Numbers Cypress continues to support existing part numbers To order these products please use only the Ordering Part Numbers listed in this document For More Information Please contact your local sales office for additional information about Cypress products and solutions About Cypress Cypress NASDAQ CY delivers high performance high quality solutions at the heart of today s most advanced embedded systems from automotive industrial and networking platforms to highly interactive consumer and mobile devices With a broad differentiated product portfolio that includes NOR flash memories F RAM and SRAM Traveo microcontrollers the industry s only PSoC programmable system on chip solutions analog and PMIC Power Management ICs CapSense capacitive touch sensing controll
29. e Data mask Specifies mask value for specified data Note Trace execution has to be forcibly stopped in order to make settings while a user program is running in trace enhancement mode And perform Start of trace after settings are made in order to validate the setting changes July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 221 a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual a E Data Watch Trace Trigger Details Dialog Perform the procedure below to set data watch trace trigger for details 1 Select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window and then select Trace trigger tab 2 Select Data Watch for Type 3 Press Detail Details settings of data watch trace trigger Figure 4 4 33 Data Watch Trace Trigger Details Setup Dialog Trigger address Trigger address DataWatch Trace trigger details H o00000 Trace control Function when trigger hitt Resume v Watch condition Attribute Address H o00000 PA Bead Address mask HFFFFFF V write Size Byte v Comparison condition C Disable Data agreement Data not Data H ooo0 Data mask HFFFF Cancel Specifies the address set for data watch trace trigger Trace control Specifies operation of trace acquisition when hitting the specified address Selectable items are shown below in each mode single trace mode Multi trace mode Single trace Resume Pause Stop Multi trace
30. int SSDI_Clear_Cycle void Argument None Return value None Explanation Initialize total cycle number managing with ISS Instruction Set Simulator Remarks SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 543 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator a SPANSION Software Support Manual a G 20 SSDI_Execute_MCU Execute Target Program Format void SSDI_Execute_MCU void Argument None Return value None Explanation Starts execution of program When execution of program starts it already it is ignored Remarks 544 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual G 21 SSDI_GetCurrentExecuteAddr Get the Address in Execution Format unsigned long SSDI_GetCurrentExecuteAddr void Argument None Return value The address of currently executed instruction Explanation Get the address of the instruction currently in execution Remarks SPANSION va July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 545 APPENDIX APPENDIX H Sample Project for the Semihosting Function a SPANSION Software Support Manual a APPENDIX H Sample Project for the Semihosting Function This appendix explains a sample project for the semihosting function for MB2100 01 E Sample Project A sample project for using the semihosting function is included with SOFTUNE Workbench V30L36 or later F
31. lower part of display register setting dialog box are restored to the initial status 3 Click the OK button 84 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 11 Memory Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 11 Memory Window This window opens only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session The memory window is used to display and modify memory data at the specified address E Memory Window Figure 3 11 1 is an example of the memory window When debugging memory values can be displayed The register values can be directly rewritten To modify by specifying the expression and symbol in the memory values select Edit from the shortcut menu for the memory window Figure 3 11 1 Example of Memory Window Data display section Bookmark Can Characters e g control Column title This Displayed data can be be marked with a codes other than ASCII line is not scrolled directly modified specific color characters are all represented in E Function e Display the change The location where was changed from the previous contents will be shown in red while program execution is stopped or monitoring This function is only valid in a range where currently displayed by memory window e Display with 16 bytes fixed in size The number of bytes at one line can be chosen Auto which is corresponding to the size of window or 4byte 8byte 16byte
32. you can set Comment Ret Tab and User Keyword The color selection dialog box opens 3 Select a color from the dialog box then click the OK button The color of the button changes to the selected color 4 When not setting other items click the OK button When selecting a font and so on set all the related items then click the OK button E Customization Procedure Font 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the edit window to display the shortcut menu then select Customize from the menu The standard editor dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 2 opens 2 Click the Font button The font selection dialog box opens 3 Select a font and size then click the OK button 4 When not setting other items click the OK button When specifying a tab count and so on set all the related items then click the OK button E Customization Procedure Tab Count 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the edit window to display the shortcut menu then select Customize from the menu The standard editor dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 2 opens 2 Modify the value displayed in the Tab Count field 3 When not setting other items click the OK button When selecting view items and so on set all the related items then click the OK button E Customization Procedure Keyword Addition 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the edit window to display the shortcut menu then select Customize from the menu The sta
33. 3 4 select Jump from the menu The jump dialog box opens See Section 4 3 6 Jump Select a specification format Specify a cursor display position Click the OK button Display coverage 1 2 Click the right button of the mouse in the disassemble window to display the shortcut menu Check Display coverage A check mark attached to the left side of Display coverage indicates that Display coverage has already been turned on If a check mark isn t attached to the left side of Display coverage Display coverage is turned off Select Display coverage Display coverage is turned off and the check mark is disappeared when it has already been turned on Display coverage is turned on and a check mark is attached when it has been turned off Breakpoint Set Reset After moving cursor to the instruction where you want to set or to cancel a breakpoint click the right button to see shortcut menu Then please select Breakpoint Set Reset Breakpoint Enable Disable After moving cursor to the instruction where breakpoint is set to be enable or disable click right button to see the shortcut menu Then please select Breakpoint Enable Disable This enables to switch the breakpoint which is pointed by cursor enable or disable 80 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 9 Disassemble Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Activate when stop Specify whether the disassemble wi
34. 3 5 Output Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 5 Output Window The output window displays compiler version information and error messages etc when make or build is executed E Output Window Figure 3 5 1 is an example of the output window As shown in this example when the left button of the mouse is double clicked on the line to which an error message was output control automatically jumps to the source line where the error occurred Figure 3 5 1 Example of Output Window t Tool start message e g version and copyright Output Window Now linking F9011L Input file not found C Softune sample 907 ProjectMBS0F394 0BJ startup obj Fatal error detected WW Tool error message example of C compiler E Shortcut Menu There are seven menus below E Operation WwW N e Copy Copies the selected character string to the clipboard Clear Clears all the items displayed in the output window Docking View Sets or resets the docking view Nondisplay Places the output window in the nondisplay status Set Font Selects a display font in the output window Keyword Coloring Whether or not to highlight the error number of the error message is set Logging The result of output to the Output window is stored in a file Copy Select the character string you want to copy Click the right button of the mouse in the output window to display the shor
35. 32byte and 64byte which the size of bytes are fixed In order to set up the number of bytes use Setup at shortcut menu e Bookmark setup function Bookmark can be set by coloring the specified address range By setting a bookmark it enables to view the specified line using search bar or key operation Please refer to 4 3 7 Bookmark for details e Drag and Drop By dropping variable name function name label or address from source window to memory window the address of dropped character string is shown and address range will be chosen July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 85 a SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 11 Memory Window Software Support Manual E Shortcut Menu There are fourteen menus below Compare Find Special Inline Assemble Jump Bookmark Edit Setup Inaccessible area Break Event Watch Monitoring Close See Section 4 4 5 Memory See Section 4 4 5 Memory See Section 4 4 5 Memory See Section 4 4 3 Assembly See Section 4 3 6 Jump See Section 4 4 5 Memory See Section 4 4 5 Memory See Section 4 4 5 Memory Displays the Inaccessible area tab in the Debug environment of the Setup menu See Section 4 6 4 Break Point See Section 4 6 5 Event See Section 4 4 7 Watch Switches whether to enable or disable monitoring Closes the memory window Notes Emulator debugger MB2100 01 e The abort dialog is displayed while updati
36. 4 6 5 Event Emulator debugger MB2147 01 Performance Interval Setup dialog For details see 4 4 13 2 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 Emulator debugger MB2198 Performance Interval Setup dialog For details see 4 4 13 3 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2198 Emulator debugger MB2100 01 Performance Interval Setup dialog For details see 4 4 13 4 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 250 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Performance Display Setup To set the Performance Window display select Display Range from the shortcut menu of the Performance Window This function can be used only with the emulator debugger MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2198 Figure 4 4 58 Performance Display Setup Dialog Display scope Exa Display mode f Automatic C Manual Cancel Unit Ins e Display Mode Select Automatic or Manual When Manual is selected set Lower Value and Interval e Lower Value Specifies display start time for detailed measurement result display e Interval Specifies display interval time for detailed measurement result display e Unit The measurement unit is different as follows in each debugger MB2141 Setting value in Timer minimum measuring unit of Emulation tab of Debug Environment Setup Dialog Box MB2147 01 Ins fixed MB2198 Ins fixed Notes MB2141 or MB2147 01 Th
37. 5 I_ 1 6 I l 7 l Break at sort_val H 000F0054 by hardware breakpoint DEBUG MBS1V240 EML Break PON IP O00F0054 1 Displays the following information When the cursor is placed over the menu Description of the menu When a user program has caused a break Break factor Only when the debugger is activated 2 Displays whether or not the debug session is being executed Debug session Displays DEBUG Not debug session Nothing is displayed 3 Displays the MB number This item is displayed when the workspace project is opened Nothing is displayed if workspace project is not open 4 Displays the current debugger type SIM Simulator debugger EML Emulator debugger MON Monitor debugger 5 Displays whether or not the program is currently running For details about the sleep mode stop mode and watch mode refer to the hardware manual of model to be used Execute Indicates that the program is currently running Break Indicates that the program is inactive The following status is also displayed for the simulator debugger Stop Stop mode Sleep Sleep mode The following status is also displayed for the MB2100 01 emulator debugger Stop Stop mode Timer Watch mode Sleep Sleep mode Halt CPU inactive status Unknown Indicates that the CPU status cannot be detected For example the system is in the power on debug mode 44 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 3 Sta
38. ABORT Switch 509 Symbol Resetting Symbol Definition 0 0 305 Setting Symbol Definition ee 304 SYMBOL yo scssessd cece inaenea E naaa RN 9 188 Symbol Window cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee 77 Syntax Syntax Deletion Procedure 0000 00eee 466 Syntax Modification Procedure 000 467 System Communication with Host System 508 System Call Issuance 0ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 247 System Calls That can be Issued 247 Target System Configuration 508 Target System Creation Procedure 509 T Tab ABS Tabia arana EENES 58 ABS Tab Bitmap Image List ees 58 Customization Procedure Tab Count 0008 69 Display Non display the Window Switching Using the TAD vvcccetcncias sntaose denansidsdentevstacnenenae 186 SRE Tab siivticiicititnvadveei satiate ennai 47 SRC Tab Bitmap Image List 0 ee 48 E E A conical aes 241 Tab Display of the Windows ssnsrsnsrereeeeeeeese 38 Target Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Targeting taen 508 Loading the Target File ees 396 Loading the Target Program eee 33 Setting Tat get i ccciiisks ns cevesenacevenuinesscendsegenavanns bs 324 SOUP Target ois acovtiidetes in i rein 277 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Target Name ssssssssnnnrrrrrrrrrrrnne 49 Target sik jiccveva seesetoresencotranedogeseamens di aveeeaes 159 163 Target Depend Options eee 297 Target BI
39. Close e Symbol name The name of the selected symbol is displayed e Scope The scope position of the selected symbol is displayed e Storage class The storage class of the selected symbol is displayed e Address The address of the selected symbol is displayed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 183 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 3 9 5 Property Local Window This section explains the property in the Local window E Property General Figure 4 3 18 Property Local Window General Variable x General Expression mag Value H 00000010 Radix Hexadecimal Type Address H 000460 Cancel e Expression The selected item is displayed e Value The value of the selected expression is displayed e Radix The base in which the value is given is displayed e Type The type of the selected expression is displayed e Address The symbol address of the selected expression is displayed 184 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 9 6 Property Watch Window This section explains the property in the Watch window E Property General Figure 4 3 19 Property Watch Window General Variable General Expression mag Value H 00000010 Radix Hexadecimal Type Address H 000460 Cancel e Expression The selected item is
40. Code event Code event Data event Data event i Data event Data event Current shift status Trace acquisition stop Trace acquisition start Break The window size can be changed by dragging cells Figure 3 19 3 Changing Cell Size START LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 4 LEVEL 5 gt gt gt gt startup asn 93 gt main gt lt re lt DERA en 112 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 19 Sequence Window Software Support Manual Setting a Sequence in the Sequence Window There are two ways to set various sequencer levels using the Sequence Window SPANSION a 1 Direct input to the window As shown in Figure 3 19 4 when you enter an address or symbol condition in the window cell to be set and then press the Enter key the destination setting dialog box appears Select a destination level and press OK to complete the event setting process When events are set in this way conditions other than the address and destination level are set to the default values For the default value for each condition see the sequence details setting dialog box in Section 4 6 6 Sequence Figure 3 19 4 Event Setting by Direct Input E Sequence START LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 4 c0000 LEVEL 5 LEVEL 6 Figure 3 19 5 Setting Source Level Sequence pes From 2 Set
41. Count of access unaccessed addressed 3 8 8 3 Display tab This line is not scrolled Coverage rate 100 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 17 Coverage Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Function e Drag and Drop By dropping variable name function mode label or address from source window to disassemble window display will be jumped to a location where an address of dropped character E Shortcut Menu e Update Updates Coverage Window display e Jump Opens the jump dialog box e 16 Address Unit Displays the coverage measurement result in the unit of 16 addresses e 1 Address Unit Displays the coverage measurement result for each address e Set See Section 4 4 12 Coverage e Total Coverage Rate See Section 4 4 12 Coverage e Clear Clears the coverage measurement buffer e Close Closes the Coverage Window Note If the coverage function is enabled on MB2147 01 0 bank monitoring cannot be performed For details refer to Section 2 3 9 Real time Memory in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 101 CHAPTER 3 Windows a 3 18 Performance Window SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 3 18 Performance Window The Performance Window displays the performance measurement result E Performance Window The performance window is used to display the result of performance measuremen
42. Es _ Cancel 336 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a For MB2100 01 1 Enable the power on debug mode Select Debug Run Power On Debug 2 Successively execute user programs The following dialog box is displayed Figure 4 6 2 Message Dialog Power On Debug Please power on again the target board to execute power on debugging Please click the Cancel button if you want to cancel power on debug mode 3 Execute one of the following steps Issue an external chip reset Turn on the target power again Following the above steps enables the power on debug function To release the power on debug mode click the Cancel button Note For MB2198 The power on debug function may not be used depending on the type of evaluation MCU For details contact Spansion s sales department or support department For MB2100 01 When Security is enabled power on debug is not available For details on security refer to 2 6 1 3 Security in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 337 a gt SPANSION a 4 6 2 Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Abort This section explains the debugger program execution stop function E Abort Abort is used to forcibly interrupt the program being executed by the debugger When the program stops the PC moves to the next
43. File type on the Save as dialog box and then click the OK button A file dialog box appears to specify the directory and name for saving file Select the directory for saving file and specify the file name and then click the Save button E Adding the Created Files to the Project Select the File Add Member to project File menu The file dialog for selecting the file of addition is displayed Select the created source file select the folder to be inserted to the SRC tab of the project window then click the Open button The file is added to the project and the file name is displayed in the folder specified on the SRC tab of the project window E Adding the Created Files to the Project with Their Entire Directory Select the File Add Member to project Directory menu The dialog Add Member Directory for selecting the folder of addition is displayed Select the directory where the created source file is stored select the folder to be inserted to the SRC tab of the project window then click the OK button The file is added to the project and the files and folders under the specified directory are displayed in the folder specified on the SRC tab of the project window The type of files to be added can be limited with the setting of File type on the dialox box E Deleting the Files Added to the Project Select the file to be deleted on the SRC tab of the project window Multiple files can be selected Select Delete from the s
44. For details of this function see Section 2 1 7 STUB Function in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Note The hit count of breakpoints is not updated while a user program is running Therefore while a user program is running the hit count indicates the value before the user program is started 346 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 6 4 2 Data Break This section explains a data break in the simulator debugger E Data Break A breakpoint to stop the program when data at the set address is accessed is called the data break E Use Conditions This function can be used in the following environment Simulator debugger E Setting of Data Break Setting dialog Figure 4 6 9 Data Break Setting Dialog r Break x Code Data Attribute Break address H 000000 IV Read Set Pass count D M Write Extend Break point list Attribute e Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified e Pass count In this field the count of times the PC passes that point a particular point before causing a break is set e Attribute Specifies the attributes when data accessing July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 347 a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual v Details dialog When Extend button of the data break dialog is pushed a details dialog is displayed Figure 4
45. INF LIST D TEN 10 v i Cancel Apply 1 Select the Include Path category The include path setup dialog shown in Figure 4 5 28 opens 2 Specify the include path Clicking the Brows button to the right of the input field enables directory selection 3 Click the Add button The specified include path is added to the end of the Include Path List July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 293 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual a Resetting an Include Path 1 Select the Include Path category The include path setup dialog shown in Figure 4 5 28 opens 2 Select the include path to reset in the Include Path List 3 Click the Delete button E Changing the Include Path Retrieval Order Include paths are retrieved in turn from top of the Include Path List The order in which include paths are registered in the list can be changed as follows 1 Select the Include Path category The include path setup dialog shown in Figure 4 5 28 opens 2 Select the include path whose order is to be changed from Include Path List 3 Click the Up or Down button to move the cursor to a relevant position E Setting Optimize Options Figure 4 5 29 Optimize Option Setup Dialog Setup Project i Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt MBSOF394 m Category Optimize ptimize General purpose Optimization Level None v Detail optimize Target of setting Gener
46. It is only valid while running MCU Forced stop of the trace acquisition a Forced stop of the trace acquisition Forces to stop the acquisition of the trace data This doesn t stop any running user program except the trace acquisition It is only valid while running MCU Tracing Trace acquisition state Indicates the current trace acquisition state Tracing Trace data is being acquired Pause Trace acquisition is being paused End Trace acquisition has been terminated data exist Trace buffer state Indicates the current trace buffer state Data exist Data exist in the trace buffer no data No data exist in the trace buffer Buffer full Trace buffer is full 42 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 2 Tool Bar Software Support Manual SPANSION a Note Trace tool bar becomes valid only when the debug function of MB2147 01 is in Trace Enhancement mode For more information please refer to Section 2 3 1 6 Debug Function in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 43 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 3 Status Bar SPANSION Software Support Manual LN 3 3 Status Bar The current status of the SOFTUNE Workbench is displayed E Status Bar The status bar displays the current status of SOFTUNE Workbench The following information is displayed 1 2 l 3 1 1 4 I I
47. Paste from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench inserts the character string in the clipboard into the cursor position See Section 4 3 2 Cut Copy Paste Delete 66 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Delete 1 Select the character string you want to delete 2 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Delete from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench deletes the selected character string See Section 4 3 2 Cut Copy Paste Delete e Select All Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select All select from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench selects all the texts in the edit window and displays them in reverse video See Section 4 3 3 Select All e Print Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Print from the menu The print dialog box opens See Section 4 2 9 Print e Add to Project Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Add to Project from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench adds the file being edited to the project e Find Replace Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Find or Replace from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench sets the clipboard character string in Find What and opens the Find or Replace dialog box See Section 4 3 4 Find Replace e Find in Fi
48. Register value H o00001 AB Cancel e Register name Specify a register name e Register value Specify the value set in a register 192 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 5 Memory Memory displays the Memory Window E Displaying Memory Data When the Memory Window is opened memory data dump is displayed starting from the specified address Memory data can be also modified using the shortcut menu This function command can be used only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session e When the Memory Window has been already opened The Memory Window is activated e When the Memory Window is not open the dialog for specifying the display start address Figure 4 4 4 opens Figure 4 4 4 Dialog for Specifying Display Start Address Jump Type Address Position H 00007D30 Cancel Window Memory e Type Line number Address Frame Specify the type of display position e Position Display disassembling from the position specified in the above type e Window To specify the window where jump is implemented For details see Section 4 3 6 Jump If it is a memory window default will be shown as Memory E Changing Memory Data Memory data can be changed by rewriting the displayed dump value directly When a character string is entered from the ASCII character string display field the ASCII code of each character is set
49. SPANSION Software Support Manual a Resetting a Macro Name 1 Select the Define Macro category The macro name setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 34 opens 2 Select the macro name you want to reset from Macro Name List 3 Click the Delete button E Setting an Include Path Figure 4 5 35 Include Path Setup Dialog Box Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt MBS0F394 E Category Include Path zj Lon Include Path PPR SSCS Include Path List Add Delete Jp Dowr g A 2 D TEN 10 Zz G Softune sample S0 Project Cancel Apply 1 Select the Include Path category The include path setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 35 opens 2 Specify an include path Clicking the Browser button to the right of the input field enables directory selection 3 Click the Add button The specified include path is added to the end of Include Path List E Resetting an Include Path 1 Select the Include Path category The include path setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 35 opens 2 Select the include path you want to reset from Include Path List 3 Click the Delete button 300 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Changing the Include Path Retrieval Order Include paths are retrieved in turn from top of Include Path List The order in which i
50. Select All selects all the character strings displayed in a window E Select All Select All selects all the character strings displayed in a window This function operates only in the edit and output windows 162 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 4 Find Replace Find searches the text file displayed in the edit window for any character string Replace replaces the found character string with the specified character string E Target FIND and REPLACE can be executed only for the text files displayed in the edit window they cannot be executed in the output window and others E Find When the find dialog box shown in Figure 4 3 1 opens specify the character string you want to find from this dialog box Character string search conditions Table 4 3 2 can also be specified from this dialog box The found character string is displayed in reverse display The find dialog box is not automatically closed irrespective of whether the character string is found For this reason when search terminates click the Cancel button to close the find dialog box When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session the Source Window can also be searched Figure 4 3 1 Find Dialog Box Find Find what value v i Match whole word only Direction Pasition All Find Match case C Up Cursor Regular Expressions Down Top Cancel Ambiguous C Bottom E
51. Select the character string you want to cut 2 Click the right button of the mouse on the command input field to display the shortcut menu 3 Select Cut from the shortcut menu 92 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 15 Command Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Copy 1 Select the character string you want to copy 2 Click the right button of the mouse on the command input field to display the shortcut menu 3 Select Copy from the shortcut menu e Paste 1 Click the right button of the mouse on the command input field to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Paste from the shortcut menu e Delete 1 Select the character string you want to delete 2 Click the right button of the mouse on the command input field to display the shortcut menu 3 Select Delete from the shortcut menu e All select 1 Click the right button of the mouse on the command input field to display the shortcut menu 2 Select All select from the shortcut menu E Shortcut Menu Other than the Command Input Field Specify Batch file Opens the file dialog box for specifying the batch file Specify Alias File Opens the file dialog box for specifying the alias file Character String Replace Setup Displays Command Replacement Dialog Box Logging Sets log start log status display and log end Close Closes Command Window e Specify Batch File 1 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu 2
52. Setup Area to display the Setup Debug Environment Realtime memory Area menu Note Coverage function should be disabled for 0 bank monitoring For more information see Section 2 3 9 Real time Memory in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual 264 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 16 RAM Checker The RAM Checker window is displayed E RAM Checker Open the RAM Checker window to display the logging status and the monitoring of the monitoring address In addition the shortcut menus can be used to set the monitoring address and turn on off of logging July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 265 a SPANSION Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a 4 5 Project Project sets project related items and executes make build E Project related Item Setup e Active Project e Add Project e Add Member e Setup Workspace e Setup Project e Setting Customize Build e Project Dependencies e Project Configuration e Include Dependencies E Make Build Execution e Compile e Make e Build e Stop Note No selection can be made during debugger startup Quit the debugger 266 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 1 Active Project The active project is replaced E Active Project When the names of all projects in workspace are di
53. Software Support Manual v Debug area tab Figure 4 7 29 Debug Preferences Debug Area Tab r Setup debug environment Sa Monitoring Directoy Tab Enoroutput Load Execution Stepexecution Event Watch Radix Emulation Chip Debugging area Parallel port Area number 1 v Set Bank number H 00 Attribute Code v amp rea no Attribute Bank no Address range DEBUGL DEBUGZ i Cancel Settings of debug area are shown below Table 4 7 16 Setting Items on Debug Area Tab Debugger EML MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 e Area number Specify a number of debug area Select 1 2 with MB2141 Select 1 4 with MB2147 01 MB2147 05 With MB2147 01 or MB2147 05 Area 1 is fixed to Ox000000 OxOfffff and Area 2 is fixed to Oxf00000 Oxffffff These cannot be changed Furthermore same address area cannot be set to other area e Bank number Specifies bank number e Attribute Code Read Write Write Read Specifies attribute 432 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a Real time memory area tab Figure 4 7 30 Debug Environment Setup Real time Memory Area Tab Setup debug environment E Emulation Chip Debugging area Monitoring Directory Execution Step execution Event Watch Radx Tab Emoroutput Load Realtime memory area Area number Moo
54. Specifies address at which data transfer is to be started Copy to emulation memory is started at this address End Address Specifies end address of transfer source area Copy to emulation memory is continued to this address e Match with emulation memory Available only on the emulator debugger Figure 4 4 11 Memory Operation Dialog Match with Emulation Memory Memory operation x Fil Copy Copy to emulation memory Match with emulation memory Start ddress H F90000 End Address H F9004D i Cancel To collate user memory with emulation memory open the Match with emulation memory tag then set the collocation start address and collation end address Start Address Specify the address at which collation is to be started Collating user memory with emulation memory is started at this address End Address Specify the end address of the collation source area Collating user memory with emulation memory is continued to this address 198 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Comparing Memory Blocks To compare memory blocks click the right mouse button in the Memory Window to display the menu then select Compare from the menu The comparison dialog shown in Figure 4 4 12 opens e Start address Specifies start address of comparison source area Memory block comparison is started from this address e End address Spec
55. Specify whether to display a symbol name as a mangled name Refresh window The latest symbol information is displayed Close Closes Symbol Window e Jump Click the right button of the mouse on the function name to display the shortcut menu then select Jump from the menu The source window in which the function is defined opens July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 77 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 8 Symbol Window SPANSION Software Support Manual a e Watch Click the right button of the mouse on the variable or function name to display the shortcut menu then select Watch from the menu The variable or function is added to the watch and the Watch Window is displayed e Property Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Property from the menu File information is displayed See Section 4 3 9 Property e Mangled name Click the mouse right button to open the shortcut menu and select Mangled name Switch between display and non display of a symbol name as a mangled name e Refresh window Click the mouse right button to open the shortcut menu and select Refresh window The latest symbol information is displayed 78 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 9 Disassemble Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 9 Disassemble Window This window is displayed only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session The disassemble window displays the result obtaine
56. Tab Figure 4 7 11 Debug Environment Setup Step Execution Tab Setup debug environment Js Monitoring Directoy Tab Enoroutput Load Radix Emulation Chip Debuggingarea Parallel port Execution Step execution Event Watch Step scale Automatic Source line C Instruction Interrupt mask C Mask Nomask System call debug Enable C Disable Cancel Settings of step execution are shown below Table 4 7 4 Setting Items on Step Execution Tab Step mode Debugger EML MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Interrupt mask System call debug 412 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Step mode Automatic Source line Machine language Specifies a step unit for step execution Automatic Automatically sets the step unit according to the window display state Source Line Sets a step unit to the unit of a source line Machine Language Sets a step unit to the unit of a machine language e Interrupt mask Enable Disable Specify whether to pause acceptance of interrupt immediately after one instruction is executed at step execution e System call debug Enable Disable Whether the step in operation is performed by the INTP instruction is specified Enable Performs the step over operation by INTP instruction Disable Performs not the step over operation but th
57. by the Set tools button in the Select Tool Dialog Box 5 Add Check the input contents of 2 to 4 If they are correct click Add This completes the registration of the external tools The registered contents are displayed in Settings and are restored when the Workspace is opened 496 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar Software Support Manual SPANSION Figure 5 1 12 Setting Dialog Box External Tool File List Entry 1 G Softune lnitialize pre 2 3 RunBreak 4 SetupDbgenv 5 Wordpad 4 m Number 6 Up Kind Tool Down Browse Entry wordpad Browse _ Date e Execute G Program Files Windows Delete Option ti lt C C z C Executing Directory G Program Files Windows I Designate additional option I Use output window July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 497 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar SPANSION Software Support Manual a 5 1 4 Warning and Error Messages This section describes the warning and error messages displayed when using the customize bar E Warning Message 1 The following warning message Figure 5 1 13 is displayed when you click Add regardless of whether an input batch file does not exist in the Entry when registering a batch file in the customize bar See Section 5 1 3 1 Registering Batch File Figure 5 1 13
58. cee 326 Simulator External I F Specification 524 State Single Object State Display ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeees 98 Single Trace Mode Setup Dialog 227 Status SOFTUNE Workbench Restoring Registers to the Initial Status 84 Debugger Control When SOFTUNE Workbench is in Stat s a caer tier career aniden n aE 241 the Debug Session sssssseseereeees 334 Tool Bar Status Bar 2 c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 Information Display When SOFTUNE Workbench is Status Bar in the Debug Session sees eee 480 Status Baty caine secetensevecenars deaavagarsscaeerdecsethapsviiecess 44 Information Display When SOFTUNE Workbench is Stop not in the Debug Session 00008 479 SlOP ia icecias tse sannideasandunsvetsdacceunbtiee dtedhictacsesten 31 333 566 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual Subproject Changing Subproject Configuration at Making or Building cisavsacccccciavasscedessiescevsecverd coteranes 32 Defining Subproject Between Existing PLOJOCIS ieiiensssinsaddcvntensieesssvdsredsesdasuncenriaes 25 Definition of Subproject eee ees 25 Deleting Subproject from Project 25 Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Subproject Name ees 52 Support Support Information 0 ccs 478 Switch Display Non display the Window Switching Using the Tab wccssscsateiccccsnssesassstaesseastteeactanenes 186 Program Suspension
59. drop function between windows in the debugger The followings are the windows that currently support the drag amp drop function Please refer to the description of each window for the operation by the drag amp drop Project window Source window Memory window Disassemble window Watch window Coverage window Real time memory window RAM checker window E Confirmation of the Setting SOFTUNE Workbench has various dialogs to set up functions Each dialog requires you to click Set button to take effect after you set up If you attempt to close the dialog without clicking the Set button a dialog for confirmation will be displayed so that you won t fail to set up 38 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows This chapter explains SOFTUNE Workbench windows 3 1 Window Configuration 3 2 Tool Bar 3 3 Status Bar 3 4 Project Window 3 5 Output Window 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor 3 7 Source Window 3 8 Symbol Window 3 9 Disassemble Window 3 10 Register Window 3 11 Memory Window 3 12 Local Variable Window 3 13 Watch Window 3 14 Trace Window 3 15 Command Window 3 16 Object Window 3 17 Coverage Window 3 18 Performance Window 3 19 Sequence Window 3 20 Real time Memory Window 3 21 RAM Checker Window 3 22 Terminal Window July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 39 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 1 Window Configuration a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a
60. executed when the checkbox is unchecked To suspend execution of the tool uncheck the checkbox E Designate Additional Option When Executing This specifies whether or not to display a dialog in which additional options can be specified at executing the tool When adding options at executing the tool check the checkbox The option set in the specifying other parameter dialog is added as is to the end of the character string specified for Option E Use Output Window To display the tool execution result in the Output window check the checkbox There are some precautions to follow when using the Output window For details refer to Section 1 1 1 in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Contents of the Temporary File When the TEMPFILE macro is specified for Option SOFTUNE Workbench creates a new temporary file at executing the tool and deletes it at ending the tool execution In this field specify the data to be written to this temporary file For example when the tool option becomes very long it is possible to specify TEMPFILE for Option and specify that option in this field However this is only valid when the tool to be executed permits specifying the option in the file Macros can be input in this field For the macros refer to Section 1 1 1 in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Setting Procedure 1 Select Project Customize Build The Customize Build setting dialog is displayed Figure 4 5 53 2 Select the tool reg
61. is installed X Y Y Y LIB ZZZ SSDI folder X YYY It is the drive amp folder which it installed SOFTUNE in ZZZ CPU family name is used there F MC 16 is 907 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 537 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator a SPANSION Software Support Manual a G 14 SSDI_Write_Register Write to Register Format int SSDI_Write_Register int reg_no unsigned long data Argument int reg_no Register number unsigned long data Data storage area Return value 0 Normal end 0 Error Explanation Writes data to registers Remarks The register number is defined in the include file SSDI_LREGISTER H SSDI_REGISTER H is installed X Y Y Y LIB ZZZ SSDI folder X YYY It is the drive amp folder which it installed SOFTUNE in ZZZ CPU family name is used there F MC 16 is 907 Note Do not rewrite the value of PC while a user program is running 538 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual SPANSION a G 15 SSDI_Set_Interrupt Set Interrupt Source Format int SSDI_Set_Interrupt int int_no int sw Argument int int_no Interrupt number int SW Interrupt state 0 OFF 1 ON Return value 0 Normal end 0 Error Explanation Sets the interrupt state If an interrupt is accepted the call back SSDI_Interrupt_Event is called Remarks If the interru
62. the coverage rate of each item is displayed This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger Refresh Updates the contents of the window When Display coverage rate is turned on the display is updated with the latest coverage rate This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Property Information on the load module file is displayed See Section 4 3 9 Property July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 59 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window a SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Source File Name Figure 3 4 21 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 21 Shortcut Menu on a Source File Name Open Order by name Order by address Order by coverage rate Coverage v Coverage rate display Refresh Property e Open Opens the selected source file in the source window e Order by name Sort items in the tree in alphabetical order e Order by address Sort functions in the tree in address order and sort other items in the tree in alphabetical order e Order by coverage rate Sort items in the tree in ascending order This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Set coverage Opens the coverage setting dialog This functi
63. 01 The following trace function can be used in the emulator debugger MB2100 01 e Trace acquisition control while a user program is running For details refer to Section 2 6 9 Viewing Program Execution History Trace in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Trace Acquisition Control While a User Program is Running The following controls are available in this debugger while a user program is running e Forced stop start of trace execution Forced stop start of trace execution Trace execution means that trace acquisition state is Tracing or Pause Trace execution can be forcibly stopped or started while a user program is running This provides the following benefits e Can control trace acquisition without stopping user program e Can acquire any desired trace data while saving trace buffer There are two operation procedures listed below e Start or Abort in the shortcut menu on the trace window e Trace toolbar See the section 3 2 Tool Bar for details July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 239 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a ii Software Support Manual 4 4 9 Command Command displays the Command Window E Command A debugger command can be entered and executed directly from the displayed Command Window The command execution result is also displayed in the Command Window For the supported debugger commands refer to SOFTUNE Workbench Command Reference Manual 240 CM41 00312 9E July 31 20
64. 1 2 6 Click the right button of the mouse in the Command Window to display the shortcut menu Select Set Character String Replacement from the shortcut menu The character string replacement setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 2 opens Click the Macro tag The macro setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 4 opens Set a macro name Specify a macro name that does not conflict with the macro names that have been already registered Write the commands to be assigned to the specified macro name Aliases variables and other macros can be also written Click the Append button e Deleting a macro 1 2 Click the right button of the mouse in the Command Window to display the shortcut menu Select Set Character String Replacement from the shortcut menu The character string replacement setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 2 opens Click the Macro tag The macro setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 4 opens Select the macro name to be deleted from the macro list Click the Delete button Figure 3 15 4 Macro Setting Dialog Box Replace command x Alias Variable Macro Macro resetry Append dump 10000 100FF set memory 10000 00 00 dump 10000 100FF Command Macro list Macro name command Delete Close 96 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 15 Command Window Software Support Manual 3 15 2 Logging SPANSION a
65. 2 5 Setting Project To create a project and a workspace at the same time see 2 4 Creating Workspace Creating an empty project The following shows how to create an empty project 1 Select the Project tab on the creation dialog box 2 Select Blank project from Template 3 Specify the following items Project type Function call interfaces Chip type Target MCU Project name Target file name Directory 4 Click the OK button An empty project is created Workspace is also created at the same time 138 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION u Creating a new project based on template project The following shows how to create a new project based on template project Figure 4 2 4 When Selecting Template Project Workspace Template TERR Chip Classification Blank project p eae FMC16 MCU chanoe SR Target MCU sample pan E Browse for template AERES lt a m J gt Project Type Target Filename Function call interface Project Directory Create new workspace T 1 Select the Project tab on the creation dialog box Figure 4 2 4 2 Select a template project which is used as a base of new project from Template Only the files in the template directory is displayed here For details of template directory see 4 7 1 Development The following items cannot be specified becau
66. 2 File Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual XN 4 2 3 Close Close closes open files and windows E Close Close closes the files open in the Edit Window or debug windows e g Register Window e Edit Window When an unsaved modified file is in the Edit Window the dialog box for asking the operator whether to save the file opens Yes button Saves the file using the existing file name No button Does not save the file and closes the Edit Window Cancel button Processing is continued with the file being edited and opened e Debug windows e g Register Window SOFTUNE Workbench closes debug windows immediately 148 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 2 4 Open Workspace Open Workspace opens the existing workspace file E Opening the Existing Workspace File The file dialog box for selecting the file you want to open opens e When the existing workspace file has been already opened and SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session the dialog box for asking the operator whether to terminate debugging opens OK button Terminates the debugger and continues workspace open processing Cancel button Cancels workspace open processing e When the existing workspace file has been already opened but SOFTUNE Workbench is not in the debug session the file dialog box for selecting a workspace file opens Whe
67. 3 1 Window Configuration Each SOFTUNE Workbench window consists of a menu bar tool bar window screen and status bar Menus are explained in CHAPTER 4 Menus E Main Window Figure 3 1 1 shows the SOFTUNE Workbench Main Window As shown in this figure child windows e g project window and output window and the tool bar can be shown with the Main Window and displayed Figure 3 1 1 The SOFTUNE Workbench Main Menu PY SOFTUNE Workbench sample alla File Edit View Project Debug Setup Window Help El x W z ABE iy SE me ala olsa ole el EA 2 fist gala fae leser E Workspace sample sample abs sample Source Files a ay startup asm ff startup670 aser Include Files Dependencies 4 Debug Gi MB2100 01sur sf Sirmulator sup FFMC 16 Family Softune C Compiler s sample Copyright c 2609 2615 Spansion pragma intvect _start 8 61 extern void interrupt struct table 1 long val char name 16 3 1 FER 4 oid sort_val struct table tblp long r long i j k Project struct table p Window for k max 2 k gt 1 k a kit tblp i 1 4 U Output Status Bar Window MBS6F67342 40 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 2 Tool Bar Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 2 Tool Bar Command buttons to be used
68. 4 4 13 2 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 This section explains the performance function for emulator debugger MB2147 01 E Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 For emulator debugger MB2147 01 the following items can be set when the event mode is the performance mode e Performance mode Buffer full break e Measurement interval For details of each item see 2 3 8 Measuring Performance of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Performance Setup Dialog To set the performance function select Setup from the shortcut menu of the Performance Window To set the measurement interval select Event from the shortcut menu of the Performance Window Setup of performance mode Figure 4 4 60 Performance Mode Setup Dialog Performance ctrl Buffer full break Break C Not break ee ance e Buffer full break Specifies whether to break or not when the performance buffer becomes full July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 253 a SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual v Setup of performance measurement interval Figure 4 4 61 Performance Interval Setup Dialog eRe nm Interval Interval AREA ARE gt Set START END Code x Code E i Status Enable Disable List Areanu Status _ Type Address Type START is the performance measurement start condition while END is the performance m
69. 8 When search terminates click the Cancel button Figure 4 3 3 File Search Dialog Box Find in Files mx Find what In files xx In folder C Softune sample S07 Project v E F Match whole word only Match case July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 165 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 3 6 Jump Jump moves the cursor to any line in the text file being edited When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session this function command specifies the display start position of a source line disassemble memory or trace coverage E Edit Window When the jump dialog box shown in Figure 4 3 4 opens specify a jump destination line number When the edit window is active the cursor in the edit window jumps to the specified line irrespective of whether SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session Figure 4 3 4 Jump Dialog Box Edit mx Jump Jump line Cancel E Debug Session If a window other than the edit window becomes active when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session the dialog box shown in Figure 4 3 5 opens Select TYPE then specify POSITION in the selected format If Address is specified in Type window at source memory or disassemble window can be used to specify the window where jump is implemented The following can be selected as TYPE Line number Address Frame The following can be selected as WINDO
70. 9 Property e Open List File Select the list file you want to open from the submenu If the list file you want to open is not created no submenu item can be selected e Open HEX File Select the HEX file you want to open from the submenu If the HEX file you want to open is not created no submenu item can be selected E Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Subproject Name Figure 3 4 8 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 8 Shortcut Menu on a Subproject Name Delete Subproject e Delete Subproject The subproject in the specified project is deleted To define a subproject again see Section 4 5 7 Project Dependencies E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Folder Figure 3 4 9 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 9 Shortcut Menu on a Folder Create new folder Add Member to folder gt Set gt Make Build Delete Property e Create New Folder When selected the Create New Folder dialog Figure 3 4 5 is opened Enter the folder name and click the OK button When the folder name is entered a folder is inserted into the selected folder The folders are listed in the order in which they are created e Add Member to Folder When selected the following two submenus are displayed File A member is added in files to the currently selected project See Section 4 5 3 Add Member At default a member is inserted into the selected folder Directory A
71. 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 21 RAM Checker Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 1 Setup of Monitoring Addresses Input monitoring addresses using symbols or addresses Select either byte or word for data size of monitoring addresses Press the Append button to register them to the list Press the OK button to call the contents of the setup dialog box into the RAM Checker window 2 Deleting of Monitoring Addresses Select monitoring addresses to be deleted from the list Plural choices are possible Press the Delete button to delete them from the list Press the OK button to call the contents of the setup dialog box into the RAM Checker window 3 Changing of Display Position Select monitoring addresses to be changed from the list Plural choices are possible Select a display position using the Up or Down buttons Press the OK button to call the contents of the setup dialog box into the RAM Checker window E Setup File Use the shortcut menu Files to open the file setup dialog box Figure 3 21 5 Setup File Dialog Box Setup file File name o Release Softune sample 907 RamCheck Refer File format SOFTUNE format C CSV format When written to same file name existing file is automatically saved as new file filename srl gt filename_001 srl EF overwriting control Specify a log file and data saving format
72. Add Adds batch files Workbench menu or External tool to the customize bar If an item has already been registered in the specified number that number will be rewritten and registered e Delete Deletes the contents registered in the customize bar Specify the number to delete in the File List July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 489 a gt lt CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar SPANSION Software Support Manual va Figure 5 1 5 Dialog Box for Open File Lookin Ji Project ck a Name Type File folder d MB96F346RSB File folder J MB96F673AA File folder Figure 5 1 6 Parameter Setting Dialog Batch File G Softune Initiaize pre Parameter Cancel _ Figure 5 1 7 Menu List Dialog Function List FileNew Pr Cancel FileSaveAll FilePrint Explain New 490 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar S oftware Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 5 1 8 Select Tool Dialog Tool List Set Tool Figure 5 1 9 Setup Tool Dialog Title Wordpad Execute Filename G Program Files winde Browse Option fT Executing Directory G Program Files winde Browse l Designate additional option when executing I Use output window Set Tool List en Delete Macro define f Filename d File Path ZF Filename Main e Filename Extension a Loadmodulefile D Loadmodulefile path amp Loadmodulefile M ain
73. CM41 00312 9E 171 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu SPANSION ua Software Support Manual e All Delete button Delete all bookmarks from the list of a bookmark e Jump button Move a start position for displaying a memory window to position of bookmark selected in bookmark list E Setup or Cancel of a Bookmark 1 Please select a range of an address where you want to set or to cancel a bookmark 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Setup cancel bookmark Click on Setup cancel bookmark mark at toolbar Find Setup a book mark with shortcut menu Add a bookmark For details refer to 4 4 5 Memory Add or delete a book mark at tab Memory in the Bookmark dialog E Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark in the Current Window 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a memory window 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Next bookmark in the current window Click on Next bookmark in the current window at toolbar Find E Move the Caret to the Previous Bookmark in the Current Window 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a memory window 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Previous bookmark in the current window Click on Previous bookmark in the current window at toolbar Find E Clear All Bookmarks in the Current Window 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a memory window 2 Pleas
74. F80293 gt SEQUENCE LEVEL2 F8029D Event hit information can be checked by the procedure below 1 Select Event list from the shortcut menu of the trace window 2 Run a user program 3 O marks of events show hitting events with blinking July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 229 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 4 8 4 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2147 05 This section explains the trace function for emulator debugger MB2147 05 E Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 05 For emulator debugger MB2147 05 the following trace functions can be used For details of each function see 2 3 7 Trace of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual e Setup of trace mode Control of trace status Buffer full break Trace acquisition control during buffer full e Setup of trace area E Trace Setup Dialog Trace Tab To set the trace function select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window Setup of trace mode Figure 4 4 39 Trace Mode Setup trace Trace Filtering Status Enable Disable Buffer full break C Break No break Trace stop caused due to trace buffer full C Stop No stop e State Enable Disable Specifies trace control state 230 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a Buffer full break Break No break Specifies whether to enable or disabl
75. Figure 3 18 5 Performance Window When the Display Type is the Conversion Time for the Execution Cycle Measurement Display type Converted time Display event Measuring results Minimum Maximum Average us 32MHz us 32MHz 0 000us 32MHz2 Time us Count 0 e Display type Execution cycle Conversion time Selects the contents displayed in the window The default setting is Execution cycle Execution cycle Displays the measurement result in Cycle unit Conversion time Displays the measurement result in us Hz unit which is converted from cycle This can be selected only when the conditions below are satisfied When the execution cycle conversion frequency is set For details see 4 4 13 4 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 105 a SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 18 Performance Window Software Support Manual v Event display Displays the measurement interval Any items other than Interval 1 cannot be changed Measurement result The measurement results and the measurement count are calculated and the results are displayed as follows he measurement unit for the results vary depending on the display type specified Min No display with this debugger Max No display with this debugger Average Displays the average value of the measurement results passing through the specified interval Time No display with this debugger Count Display
76. Figure 4 5 19 CPU Information Setup Dialog Delayed Interrupt Standby Control Register Intelligent 1 0 Service Intemall O Area IntemalRAMArea IRQ andICR Delayed Interrupt m Specify delay interrupt Vector number D 42 Cancel Vector Number Sets vector number of delayed interrupt e Setup CPU Information Internal RAM Area Figure 4 5 20 CPU Information Setup Dialog Internal RAM Area Standby Control Register Intelligent 1 0 Service Delayed Interrupt Intemall 0 Area Intemal RAM Area IRQ andICR m Setup internal RAM area s Start address Hoo oo End address H 003FFF Cancel Start Address Sets start address of internal RAM area End Address Sets end address of internal RAM area July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 287 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual e Setup CPU Information Standby Control Register Figure 4 5 21 CPU Information Setup Dialog Standby Control Register Delayed Interrupt Internal 1 0 Area Internal RAM Area IRO and ICR Standby Control Register Intelligent 1 0 Service m Setup STBYC address Address Ho00040 Cancel Address Sets STBYC address e Setup CPU Information Internal I O Area Figure 4 5 22 CPU Information Setup Dialog Internal I O Area Delayed Interrupt Standby Control Register Intelligent 1 0 Service Intemall O Area IntemalRAMArea IRQ andICR
77. Function when trigger hit Resume v Attribute Address mask H FFFFFF M Read Size Byte X V Write Comparison condition C Disable Data agreement Data not ie H 0000 Data mask H FFFF E e Address The address that sets a trace trigger is specified e Trace control Specifies operation of trace acquisition when hitting the specified address Selectable items are shown below in each mode normal mode trace enhancement mode Normal mode Start Starts trace acquisition Stop Stops trace acquisition Trace enhancement mode Single trace Resume Resumes trace acquisition which was paused Pause Pauses trace acquisition End Ends trace execution Multi trace Trace End Moves trace buffer to the next block Multi trace End Stops trace acquisition e Address mask Specifies mask value for specified address 220 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Size Byte Word Long Specifies access size at the time of data access e Attribute Read Write Write Read Specifies attribute at the time of data access e Comparison condition Specifies conditions of data comparison Disable Does not specify data for trigger condition Data agreement The case that the specified data matches is the trigger condition Data not The case that the specified data does not match is the trigger condition e Data Specifies the data for comparison
78. Input type C Terminal File File name Browse Input port list address mask data size cycle input e Port Address Specifies a port address e Mask Data Specifies address mask Only the addresses whose bits are 1 are to be compared e Data Size Specifies a data input type When Binary is selected specify its size Byte Word Long e Input Type Specifies a port data input source Input Port List Displays the currently specified ports 404 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a input terminal When an input request is issued during program execution with Input Type set to Terminal the input terminal dialog box opens Specifying ASCII as Data Type in input port setting enables ASCII input Specifying Binary as Data Type enables binary input Figure 4 7 5 Input Terminal Dialog Box Input request occurred Ascit Cancel Binary fi q E Resetting an Input Port 1 Select the input ports to be reset from Input Port List 2 Click the Delete button 3 When resetting all the selected ports is completed click the Close button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 405 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup gt lt SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Setting an Output Port Figure 4 7 6 Output Port Setup Dialog Box Setup I O port al Input port Output port Port address H 000000 Mask data H FFFF
79. July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 379 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug SPANSION Software Support Manual a e Sequencer Sets transition conditions for the sequencer It allows you to set up to 3 levels LEVEL1 to LEVEL3 It also allows you to set 2 RESTART points that put the sequencer back in the initial state You must always set levels starting from LEVEL1 If they are not set correctly or a LEVEL setting is deleted all of the succeeding level settings are also deleted Attribute Specifies an attribute for transition condition Select Code or Data Address Specifies an address or symbol to which the transition condition is set Detail Sets detailed transition conditions The dialog box shown in Figure 4 6 34 appears e Status Enables or disables the set sequencer e Function when trigger hit Specifies the operation for when the set sequencer reaches END Select Break or Trace End e Set button Sets a transition condition for the specified sequencer e List Displays the transition conditions for the currently set sequencer e Event list button Displays the event list dialog box to check the setting status of all events e Delete button Deletes the settings 380 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Setting the 8 Level Sequence The Sequence details setting dialog box is used to set shift conditions for each level of the sequencer The Sequence d
80. MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Specification batch file before after load Only Debug Information Auto Mapping Synchronization immediately after load This sets the environment when loading a target file registered in the project e Specification batch file before after load Before This specifies the batch file to execute prior to the loading of the target file After This specifies the batch file to execute after the loading of the target file e Only Debug Information This specifies whether or not to load only the debug information When checked only the debug information is loaded 424 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual e Auto Mapping aN SPANSION a This specifies whether or not to enable the Auto Map Setting When checked Auto Map Setting is enabled e Synchronization immediately after load This specifies whether or not to automatically perform the synchronization with the flash memory immediately after loading a target file When checked the synchronization with the flash memory is performed Emulation tab Figure 4 7 22 Debug Environment Setup Emulation Tab a Setup debug environment Monitoring Directory Tab Error output Load Execution Stepexecution Event watch Radix Emulation Chip Debugging area Parallel port Memory verify operation Sampl
81. Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual ia gt E Saving Trace Data All data within trace buffer can be saved as files Select Save from the shortcut menu of trace window Figure 4 4 23 Save as Save in Ji Project ey Ev Name Type _ MB90F394 File folder J MB96F346RSB File folder J MB96F673AA File folder 1 r wm OOO Save as type Loggingt 109 Cancel Start frame o4 End frame D0 e File name Specify a file name to which the trace data will be saved e Save as type Specify a file type of the file to which the trace data will be saved Logging file log Saves in logging format Trace file stb Saves in SOFTUNE trace format This function can be used only with the emulator debugger MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 e Start frame Specifies the start frame number of trace data to be saved This is available only when an expansion trace board is used e End frame Specifies the end frame number of trace data to be saved This is available only when an expansion trace board is used When specifying an existing file name for File name the dialog window of Figure 4 4 24 is displayed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 209 a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual v Yes No Cancel Figure 4 4 24 Trace Data Save Dialog Confirm Save As sample log already exists Do you want to replace it ves Ne J
82. Mode Setup debug environmen eel Radix Emulation Chip Debugging area Parallel port Monitoring Directoy Tab Enoroutput Load Execution Step execution Event Watch Event mode Single trace Multi trace C Performance Cancel E Search Trace Data Trace data in the trace buffer can be searched To search for trace data select Find from the shortcut menu of the trace window Address This function can be used in the following environment Simulator debugger Emulator debugger MB2198 MB2100 01 Figure 4 4 20 Trace Search Dialog Address Address Search address H DF028F Find next Address mask H FFFFFF Close Searching start number D2 e Search address Specifies start address of search range 206 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual e Address mask Specifies end address of search range e Searching start number Specifies number of frame where starts the search Trace This function can be used in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 Figure 4 4 21 Trace Search Dialog Trace Search address HFCOOC4 OPE H FFFFFF Cose Search data Data size Word Data mask Access attribute Code Read W Searching start number D3 7 Level change point search e Search address Specifies start address of search range e Address mask Specifies m
83. Outline of External I F DLL eesessesesesseeseeseeeeee 523 PE amie Selec OR Tae OR eich tasemtnateeeta uae Simulator External I F Specification 00 524 Filtering ae External Tool Trace Setup Dialog Filtering Tab Dp pin a a Ban S o Aanand asandan 217 231 235 How to Register External Tool esseeeseseseeseenne 496 Starting an External Tool 468 Find Find EET A 163 F Fixed length Detailed Display of Fixed length Memory File Pool a E ats 245 Add Member File ccccseseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaee 273 Flag Backup Bilis cvasancantcascuscantissiacusacanvatcdassinesesssbeavs 35 Detailed Display of Event Flag etek ita eet ase 244 Checking Source File Saving 1 333 Flag Bar iranerne a nian 42 Contents of the Temporary File 1 seee 325 Register Name Flag Name cceeeeeeeeeees 11 Creating Source File and Document Files Flash Execution File Name gag FLASH Memory Area Operation ens 457 File Editing Function scesssscsssssessssseesesseeeeseees 158 Floating point _ File Name Specification c scsssssssseesseeeseeeseees 6 15 Floating point Number 7 File Search ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 165 Font related Items Files to be Saved eeccccccccccccccccecccececccecccccecceeececeee 154 Font related Items cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaee 186 Functions Related to Project and File Fonts JACCESSIND visiota enrian 135 Changing Font ic ccccccceccncssteseensssncseececee
84. Permit C Forbid This setting can be changed by Setup Debug enviroment Debug Enviroment Break Finish Cancel Select whether or not to use software break e When software break is enabled Software break becomes available For details refer to Section 2 4 5 2 Code Break Software in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual e When software break is disabled Software break is not available in FLASH memory area or RAM area This setting can be changed after the debugger has been activated For details refer to Section 4 7 2 3 Debug Environment July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 443 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a SPANSION au Software Support Manual 6 If there is a batch file to be executed immediately after the debugger is started set the batch file Figure 4 7 44 Setup Wizard Batch File Setting batch file for just after the start of the debugger Batch file Browse l Specification batch file 7 Set whether to load the target file automatically during debugging Also specify the batch files used before and after load as required The batch file specified with Specification batch file before after load is executed only when Load target file is selected from the Debug Menu Figure 4 7 45 Setup Wizard Target File Setup Wizard Make settings for the target file IV Auto load when starting debug Specification batch file before after load Before
85. ROM Object State Display c cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 98 Only MB2198 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 321 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Setting Options in General 006 314 319 on Library File Object File and Relative Setting Options in Setup cee 320 Format File ccceeeseseseseneeeeseneetenes 56 Target Depend Options ccceeeeeeseeeeeeenees 297 ON OFF When Initializing Placement Link Option Based on Analysis Order Change and Application MCU Information 0 00c cee 313 ON OFF a E TT 467 Other Online Other Functions sviseisreinansrnasrrii nin 135 Online Help aseccvicites cstenuteteccdveaanaccttsetbacdasetandens 476 QUEL S e E T cede essigatnenes 2 Open Setting Other Tools 0 0 398 Opening the Existing Workspace File 149 Shortcut Menu Other than the Command Input Field When the Currently Open Project File is Being tes reteteetettetettetetettetetetetettteteteetetetaeeneeas 93 Edited aati gee tenis cauatnestaciusentletesinasty 150 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse When the Currently Open Workspace File is Not on an Include File and Other User s Bethe ab AM sass canntisencsinnessiarinaatants 150 Registration File sssssesesseseeeseeerseneees 55 When the Workspace is Open seese 157 Outline Operating Outline of External I F DLL ee 523 Operating the Debugger 0 00 eee 33 Output Setting SOFTUNE
86. RW 7 0000 displayed A displayed register value can be rewritten by entering a new value E Shortcut Menu Display Setup See Section 3 10 1 Setting Register Display Edit Displays Register Edit Dialog Box Close Closes Register Window e Edit Edits register values Beside this operation the numerical values displayed in the Register Window can be directly edited See Section 4 4 4 Register 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the Register Window to display the shortcut menu then select Edit from the menu The register edit dialog box opens 2 Select a register name 3 Enter the value you want to set 4 Click the OK button 82 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 10 Register Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 10 1 Setting Register Display This section explains how to set register display E Setting Register Display Set the registers to be displayed in the Register Window in the following procedure Figure 3 10 2 Display Register Setting Dialog Box Setup display register Register list E Adding Registers Add the register you want to display in the following procedure 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the Register Window to display the shortcut menu then select Display Setup from the menu The display setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 10 2 opens 2 Select the register you want to display from Register List
87. Remarks July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 541 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator a SPANSION Software Support Manual a G 18 SSDI_Set_Area Set Area Format int SSDI_Set_Area int no unsigned long start unsigned long size int attribute int id Argument int no Area setting number unsigned long start Starting address of area unsigned long size Area size unsigned long attribute Attribute int id Always set 0 Return value Area setting numbers 0 to 31 1 Error Explanation Sets the area where a read event write event or execute instruction event occurs An event occurs only upon access to the area in which an area is set Set an area by using SSDI_Init Initialize If the area setting number is set to 1 the area setting address area size is valid In other cases set the attributes for the settings in the area setting numbers Set the attributes as follows attribute Read 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Write 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Execute 1 Enabled 0 Disabled To delete the area settings set the number of the area to be deleted in the area setting number and the attribute to 0 Up to 32 areas can be set If the maximum value is exceeded an error occurs Remarks 542 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual G 19 SSDI_Clear_Cycle Clear Cycle Count Format
88. Replace When the replace dialog box shown in Figure 4 3 2 opens specify a search character string and a replacing character string In this case character string search conditions Table 4 3 2 can be also specified from this dialog box The found character string is displayed in reverse video Clicking the Replace button replaces the specified search character string with the specified replacing character string Clicking the All Replace button replaces all the character strings found before search terminates The replace dialog box is not automatically closed irrespective of whether the found character string was replaced For this reason when search terminates click the Cancel button to close the replace dialog box July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 163 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual a Figure 4 3 2 Replace Dialog Box Replace ea Find what Replace with Direction Position E m Match whole word only C Up o ea Match case epee Top Regular Expressions C Bottom Cancel Ambiguous Table 4 3 2 Character String Search Conditions Condition Explanation Does not search partial character strings of words Effective in searching for Marella ord only independent words that may become parts of other words such as able Match case Distinguishes uppercase characters from lowercase characters or vice versa Specifies a search character strin
89. Response Speed Tab Debugger MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Optimization of response speed at debugging e Optimization of response speed at debugging Enable Disable Specifies whether or not optimize the response speed during debugging The response speed very slows when a break occurs during low speed CPU clock If During Debugging response speed optimization is enabled the response speed quickens Enable Specify to optimize response speed at debugging Clock is returned to the original state while a user program is running Disable Specify not to optimize response speed at debugging Note MB2100 01 When optimization of the response speed is enabled at debugging the clock is changed to the fast RC clock automatically at user program break For usage environment if failure may be generated when the clock is changed disable Optimization of response speed at debugging 434 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual Frequency tab Figure 4 7 32 Debug Environment Setup Frequency Tab MB2100 01 Execution Event Watch Rado Emulation Monitoring Directory Tab Eror output Load Frequency Break Response speed r High speed communication base clock frequency 4 Enable Frequency D32 MHz Execution Step execution Watch Radix Emulation Monitoring Directory Tab Erorou
90. SY Set Start address HFFFFFF The items that can be set for matters related to the real time area are as follows Table 4 7 17 Setup Item in Real time Memory Area Tab Debugger EML MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Area Number Starting Address Memory copy e Area Number 1 2 Specifies an area number of the set real time memory area e Starting Address The starting address of the real time memory area is specified The lower 8 bits are masked e Memory copy Specifies whether to copy the memory When the window is opened the content of the real memory is displayed when copying memory July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 433 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual DS Response speed tab Figure 4 7 31 Debug Environment Setup Response Speed Tab B Setup debug environment Execution Event Watch Radix Emulation Monitoring Directory Tab Emoroutput Load Frequency Break Response speed During Debugging response speed optimization C Enable Disable This is a function that forcefully changes a clock of the CPU CPU bus and the peripheral to a fast RC clock in order to ensure a minimum level of performance of debug function during break when operating on a low speed clock The item that can be set for matters related to the response speed is as follows Table 4 7 18 Setup Item in
91. Section 4 6 4 Break Point Additionally sets watch point See Section 4 6 7 Stack Please refer to Section 4 4 12 Coverage This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger Displays source window properties Switches on off the display of the coverage When Display coverage is turned on the executed lines are displayed in green and the unexecuted lines are in brown This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger Switches whether to display or not disassemble list Specifies whether to activate the window or not when the execution is stopped Closes source window Opens the edit window to modify the current source file See Section 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor e Find Searches the text in the current source file Perform this operation in the following procedure 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the source window to display the shortcut menu then select Find from the menu The search dialog box shown in Figure 3 7 2 opens nA BW N Set a search direction Set the character string you want to search If necessary display a check mark to Match case Click the Find Next button The fond character string is displayed in reverse video 6 To terminate search click the Cancel button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 73 CHAPTER 3 Windows
92. Source Window Register Window and Assembly Window E Cascade Cascade displays currently open subwindows in the main window E Vertical Vertical arranges currently open subwindows vertically and displays them E Horizon Horizon arranges currently open subwindows horizontally and displays then 470 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 8 Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 8 2 Split Split specifies where a window is vertically split E Split Split specifies where a window is vertically split The following windows can be vertically split e Source Window e Disassembly Window e Trace Window e Memory Window e Coverage Window July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 471 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 8 Window a gt lt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 8 3 Arrange Icons Arrange icons arranges the locations of the minimized window icons E Icon Arrangement Arrange icons arranges all the minimized windows in the SOFTUNE Workbench main window Figure 4 8 1 However unminimized windows are not affected Figure 4 8 1 Main Window State after Icon Arrangement re en Workspace sample A B sample abs sample me 8S ass e e Boal e E 23 il wa e Ee OEMS m N ls a e DEBUG MB96F346RS SIM Break 4 472 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 8 Window Software Support Manual SPANSION ua 4 8 4 Refresh
93. Specifies the start address of acquisition range of trace data e End address Specifies the end address of acquisition range of trace data July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 235 a gt SPANSION aa CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual Attribute Read Write Write Read Specifies the trace data attribute for acquiring DMA Clicking the Acquire button traces the access by DMA in addition to the access by CPU E Trace Setup Dialog Trace Trigger Tab Setup of Trace trigger Figure 4 4 43 Trace Trigger Address In this field the address or symbol that sets a trigger point is specified Type Code Data In this field the type of the trace trigger is specified Remain Displays the remaining number of trace triggers which can be set The number varies depending on models Event list Displays event list dialog window to check the event setting status 236 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu law Software Support Manual SPANSION a Trace Trigger Details Setup Dialog Code Data Figure 4 4 44 Trace Trigger Details Dialog Trace trigger details Ea Trace control Trace start Trace stop Address H o00000 Attribute Add x HFFFFFF i Haad ress MASK F Wite Pass count D1 Access detect Size V CPU Byte V Don t care M DMA Comparison condition Disable C Data agreement Data not H o000 H FFFF Cancel
94. Support Manual SPANSION a Note When the comparison result is true the relational operator becomes H 1 When false it becomes H O The SOFTUNE Workbench does not support the conditional operator comma operator increment operator and decrement operator of C language July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 13 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes SPANSION Software Support Manual a 2 1 5 Address Formula Specification Address formula specification is divided into the Full addressing and Address range specification E Full Addressing The full addressing format is as follows 32 bit addressing 32 bit addressing Expression for addressing E Address Range Specification Address range specification representing a memory range consists of two addressings it has any of the following two formats Addressing addressing from starting address to ending address Addressing offset from starting address to starting address offset offset Value relative to addressing starting address E Bit Addressing The notation below is used to represent a bit address Symbols for bit address attributes can be also used Bit addressing is valid when BIT is specified in the command qualifier addressing bit offset bit offset Value used to specify a bit position When addressing is omitted address 0 is assumed E Bank Addressing The bank addressing for
95. The trace function of emulator debugger MB2147 01 has two modes normal mode and trace enhancement mode Available trace functions vary depending on the modes In the trace enhancement mode the trace function is enhanced and the following functions can be used e Multi trace mode e Trace trigger enhancement e Trace delay e Event hit information e Trace acquisition control while a user program is running For details on each function refer to Section 2 3 6 Real time Trace in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Trace Acquisition Control While a User Program is Running While a user program is running the following controls are available in trace enhancement mode of this debugger e Forced stop start of trace execution e Trace acquisition range filtering setting e Trace trigger setting Forced stop start of trace execution Trace execution means that trace acquisition state is Tracing or Pause Trace execution can be forcibly stopped or started while a user program is running This provides the following benefits e Can control trace acquisition without stopping user program e Can acquire any desired trace data while saving trace buffer There are two operation procedures listed below e Start or Abort in the shortcut menu on the trace window e Trace toolbar See the section 3 2 Tool Bar for details 214 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual E Trace Setup
96. This window is displayed only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session E Object Window The Object Window displays the object information used by REALOS Figure 3 16 1 is an example of the Object Window Figure 3 16 1 Example of Object Window We Object lolx Object 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 WAlT cwai_flg wobjid 0001 READY DORMANT DORMANT READY E Object State Display Object Status display Task An object is selected Information for the selected object is displayed Task ID task state Semaphore Semaphore ID count of semaphores Flag 1 bit flag Flag 16 word flag Flag ID SET or CLEAR Flag ID event flag pattern Mail box Mail box ID count of message queues count of tasks Memory pool Count of free blocks count of tasks Cyclic handler Handler ID active state residual time till activation Alarm handler Handler ID set state residual time till activation Ready queue Priority count of tasks Alarm queue Handler ID Timer queue Task ID or cyclic handler ID 98 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 16 Object Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Shortcut Menu e Task Executes task system calls e Semaphore Executes semaphore system calls e Event Flag Executes event flag system calls e Mail Box Executes mail box system calls e Memory Pool Exe
97. Warning Message Softune907 9 This batch file does not exist Register in the list E Error Messages 1 The following error message Figure 5 1 14 is displayed when you click Add without entering a batch file in the Entry when registering a batch file in the customize bar See Section 5 1 3 1 Registering Batch File Figure 5 1 14 Error Message 1 Softune907 mtm A Please input batch file 2 The following error message Figure 5 1 15 is displayed when you click Add without entering a machine name in the Entry when registering the Workbench menus in the customize bar See Section 5 1 3 2 Registering Workbench Menu Figure 5 1 15 Error Message 2 Softune907 l me A Please select function on the list 498 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 The following error message Figure 5 1 16 is displayed when you click Add without entering a tool name in the Entry when registering the External tools in the customize bar See Section 5 1 3 3 Registering External Tool Figure 5 1 16 Error Message 3 Softune907 A Please input Tool July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 499 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 5 1 5 Note This section describes the precautions for using the customize bar E Note 1 The customize bar cannot be
98. Window MB2198 cccccecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeesaeeeeeeeesegaeeeseaeeeseueeeteneeesaas 112 3 20 Real time Memory Window cccccecccceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeesecaaeeeeeseaeeeeesesaaeeeeesesaeeeeesenaees 118 3 21 RAM Checker WindOW as ciscisscuinccasitt ater nieve ene 120 3 21 1 Setup of the RAM Checker ccceesececesseeeeseceeeneeeeeaceeesaaeeceaeeeeaeeesanesessaeeeseaenesenaeeseneneetnneeeeaes 122 3 21 2 Start the RAM Checker Viewer cceccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeteaeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseaaeeseaeeeecaeeeseaeeeseaeeene 126 322 Terminal WINDOW sess omida aa o e a a S eee EEEa a a d aaa 128 SEAE a S E E A E E E E E E de lecteasdiestease 130 CHAPTER Menus icsisssstisncstinssnsuinssinisnciaeessnsnsnattndncassdatandsensieasaduddansssininsaanansinidanmnvaaaons 131 4 1 Menu Configuration Tree cicscscfites ieeceh elt aoan aaa E E EN a aE EEEN 132 4 2 File Menu essiesann n eanan E aiia ae aKa aaa aaa EA Ea dees ear AE AEE 135 4 2 1 EN E E A A E E E 136 4 2 2 OPEN irissen ana aa a Eea E e a AE E ee Se eee ee 145 4 2 3 D e E EEEE IEA TEE A EE T O A A E EIE NNE AE EA N E NE 148 4 2 4 Open Workspace sissies soni alate dae nied neon oad nts 149 4 2 5 Close WOrkSPaGe seveseceveessswadaziocss cctuceuek eects tac aaa aiea aee oida aas Ea sender ea ccecenstinee Vit 150 4 2 6 SAVE E E E E A A AE E danas Sevan lensva dh A 151 4 2 7 SAVE E E E E S N A ENA E EAEE A E A A A EA 152 4 2 8 AVE E EE AAE E E A
99. Window This command updates information on an active window E Refresh Window Information on the current active window is updated 473 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 8 Window a SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 8 5 Refresh All Windows This command updates information on all the open windows E Refresh All Windows Information on all the open windows except the SRC tab of Project and Output windows is updated 474 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 8 Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 8 6 Close All Windows Close all windows closes all open windows E Close All Windows Close all windows closes all currently open windows other than the Project and Output Windows If the File Edit Window being edited has not saved yet the dialog box asking you whether to save the window opens The file opened by the external editor cannot be closed by this function Even if all windows are closed the SOFTUNE Workbench state remains unchanged For this reason register values etc are not affected even during debugging July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 475 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 9 Help a SPANSION Software Support Manual v 4 9 Help Help displays online help E Online Help e Help Topics e Support Information E Version Information e Version Information 476 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 9 Help Software Sup
100. Workbench Operating Method of Outputting Warning When ROM RAM Conditions sriciisccsenciacesneccisssessescdiesieneseeas 4 Area is Specified Outside Range of Internal Operation ROMIRAM piss ses ces days secsedetesid eeavecpeeiets 312 r etd cnc cede tne 63 Method of Outputting Warning When Section is Special Operation wi sccccieevescciacsseescavecsteneceertencs 196 Placed Outside Specified ROM RAM Area Operators Range ae aae Erone NEE Eii 312 Operators Usable in Data and Address Output Wand Ow sidcesicnicegecvsvaceeactecteseeuateetede 63 187 nET E ores ected ately ce 42 Property QUIPUl ccscsenccseccicccccessssesestnsreeastsanannnes 180 Resetting an Output Port ees 407 Selecting Output File eee 305 Setting an Output Port cee 406 562 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual Setting List Output eee 301 Setting the Output listing eee 315 Use Output Window cc ccc 325 P Password Connection Password cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 397 Paste PASO secu Ssciiewsaceddvivdes taddstveradeceiveiedscete vanncceeivteyes 160 PC Setting LAN Interface at PC Side ee 506 Performance Performance Buffer 0cccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 250 Performance Display Setup 251 Performance FUNCtION 0c cecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 250 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 cccccsseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaees 258 Performance Funct
101. Workbench User s Manual and 4 4 8 Trace in SOFTUNE Workbench Operation Manual for use of event functions July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 121 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 21 RAM Checker Window a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 3 21 1 Setup of the RAM Checker This section explains setup of the RAM Checker E Setup To set the RAM Checker use the shortcut menu in or input command line This section explains setup by using the shortcut menu Refer to SOFTUNE Workbench Command Reference Manual for setup by using the command line E Shortcut Menu Figure 3 21 3 Shortcut Menu RAM Checker Window Setup File Viewer Logging Close E Monitoring Address Use the shortcut menu Setup to open the setup dialog box Figure 3 21 4 Setup Dialog Box Setup Address list P interval Address address size z p7 ms main dat_1 H000130 main dat_0 Hooo000 H 00012E H 0001 2G main dat_2 Size fo ing interval H 000124 main dat_3 Too ae H 000128 main dat_4 H 0001 26 main dat_6 H 0001 24 main dat_6 H 0001 22 main dat_ H 000120 main dat_8 Gancel The RAM Checker window displays the set monitoring addresses in the order of the check address list It adds setting of new monitoring addresses at the end of the list The order of the list can be changed Sampling intervals 1 ms and monitoring intervals 100 ms cannot be changed 122 CM41 00312
102. Workbench is in the debug session the specified source file is displayed in the Source Window When SOFTUNE Workbench is not in the debug session the specified source file is displayed in the edit window e Compile Assemble The specified source file is automatically judged whether it is the C or assembler source and then compiled or assembled e Set When selected the following two submenus are displayed Individual Setting A project is set See Section 4 5 5 Setup Project Return to Common Setting All individual options in the specified folder are returned to common options e Delete The specified file is released from the project member The file itself is not deleted e Property File information is displayed See Section 4 3 9 Property e Open List File Select the list file you want to open from the submenu If the list file you want to open is not created no submenu item can be selected e Open Assemble file This menu is opened when a C source file is selected Of the specified C source file the assembler source file output by a compiler is opened No file can be selected when not compiled E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on an Include File and Other User s Registration File Figure 3 4 14 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 14 Shortcut Menu on a Include File Name Open Delete Property e Open When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session the specified include file is displayed
103. a bookmark to location of an edit window where cursor is put e Delete button Delete selected bookmark from a list When more than one bookmarks are selected delete all items e Jump button Move a start position for displaying a edit window to location of bookmark selected in bookmark list E Setup or Cancel of a Bookmark 1 Please move a cursor to line where you want to set or cancel a bookmark 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Setup cancel bookmark Click on Setup cancel bookmark mark at toolbar Find Click Add or Delete button at the Bookmark dialog July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 173 174 a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu E Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark in the Current Window 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a edit window 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Next bookmark in the current window Click on Next bookmark in the current window at toolbar Find E Move the Caret to the Previous Bookmark in the Current Window 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a edit window 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Previous bookmark in the current window Click on Previous bookmark in the current window at toolbar Find E Clear All Bookmarks in the Current Window 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a edit window 2 Pl
104. address is accessed regardless of the access data length e Comparison condition Specifies a data comparison condition Disable Does not specify data for the trigger condition Data agreement The case that the specified data matches is the trigger condition Data not The case that the specified data does not match is the trigger condition e Data Specifies data for the trigger condition This can be specified only when data is selected with an attribute e Data mask Specifies a mask value for specified data July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 255 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 4 13 3 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2198 This section explains the performance function for emulator debugger MB2198 E Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2198 For emulator debugger MB2198 the following items can be set when the event mode is the performance mode e Performance mode Buffer full break e Measurement interval For details of each item see 2 3 8 Measuring Performance of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Performance Setup Dialog To set the performance function select Setup from the shortcut menu of the Performance Window To set the measurement interval select Event from the shortcut menu of the Performance Window Setup of performance mode Figure 4 4 63 Performance Mode Setup Dialog Performance ctrl re Som Buffer full break Br
105. and coverage file are not displayed Figure 4 2 14 Save Dialog Box Overwrite save rm File type Workspace Project file Text file July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 151 a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual a 4 2 7 Save As Save As stores the previously saved file under a new file name E Save As Save As stores the previously saved file under a new file name The text file output window project file binary file alias file setup file or coverage file can be selected as the type of file If SOFTUNE Workbench is not in the debug session the binary file alias file setup file and coverage file are not displayed Figure 4 2 15 Save as Dialog Box en Save as File type Output Window Project file sample pri E Saving the Project File Save the active project file Select the format for saving the project file from the File Type combo box For the project formats refer to Section 1 2 Management Function for Project of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual If a Workspace project format prj is selected it saves all project information in workspace project format compatible to workspace When the project file opened in old project format is overwritten in workspace project format conversion is performed and restrictions on old project files are cleared Subsequent saving is performed in workspace project format
106. at address 00000000 and 0000000A is found 01 search data at other addresses is not found July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 195 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual va When Data Type is Byte Search Data is 01 and 02 and Skip Byte Count is 3 only 01 and 02 search data at address 00000000 and address 00000003 is found 01 and 02 search data at address 00000005 and address OOOO000A is not found E Special Operation To fill memory with data or to copy data to memory start debugging click the right mouse button in the Memory Window to display the menu then select Special Operation from the menu The memory operation dialog opens Clicking the OK button from this dialog starts the function of the open tab e Fill Figure 4 4 8 Memory Operation Dialog Fill Memory operation es Copy to emulation memory _ Match with emulation memory Start address H F90000 End address H F9004D Type Byte Fill data H 04 i Cancel To fill memory with data open the Fill tag then set the start address end address data type and filling data Start address Specifies start address of memory area to be filled with data Data filling is started at this address End address Specifies end address of memory area to be filled with data Data filling is continued to this address Type Specifies type of filled data Byte Word Long Ascii Fill data Specifies f
107. be canceled If the Set or Reset button is clicked by mistake set the key again e As for the keys that can be set see Table 4 7 21 462 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Key Definition Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 4 7 63 Keyboard Setup Dialog Box lt n Function List Set FileNewPr Dete FileNewSrc FileOpen F Close FileLdPrj FileLdSrc FileSave FileSvPrj Reset FileSaveall ileSave viton li FilePrint _Definition list New Assign Assign Key Explain New None Table 4 7 21 Keys That can be Set CTRL A to Z Explanation Press any of the A to Z keys while holding down the CTRL key SHIFT CTRL AtoZ Press any of the A to Z keys while holding down the SIFT and CTRL keys SHIFT F1 Press the F1 key while holding down the SHIFT key July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 463 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 7 7 Editor Editor enables any editor to be registered and used as the standard editor E Registering an Editor Register the editor to be used instead of the standard editor built into SOFTUNE Workbench in advance Set the registered editor as the SOFTUNE Workbench editor before editing the file actually Of the registered editors the editor set in Usable Editor is used to edit the file Figure 4 7 64 Editor Setup Dialog Box Setup Editor x Availab
108. be specified e Size byte word long The monitoring data size is specified Long can be set only with the emulator debugger MB2100 01 e Attribute Specifies the attributes when data accessing July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 359 a SPANSION v CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual e Comparison condition Disable Data agreement Data NOT The data comparison condition is specified Disable No data is specified for break condition Data agreement Data agreement data agrees with the specified data is specified for the break condition Data NOT Data mismatch data does not agree with the specified data is specified for the break condition e Data In this field data at the time of data access is specified e Data mask In this field the mask value for the specified data is specified Note With MB2100 01 this function can be set while a user program is running 360 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 6 4 7 Data Break This section explains a data break in the emulator debugger E Data Break For details on the data break function refer to each relevant section in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual MB2141 2 2 5 2 Data Break MB2147 01 2 3 4 2 Data Break MB2147 05 2 4 4 2 Data Break MB2198 2 5 4 2 Data Break MB2100 01 2 6 6 3 Data Break E Use Conditions This function can be u
109. be switched to Disable or vice versa during debugging The trace result is displayed in the trace window and display per machine instruction display per source display without analysis and change can be selected as trace result display E Update of Trace Data The trace window display is not updated in realtime according as debugging progresses Consequently to display the latest trace click the right button of the mouse in the trace window to display the shortcut menu then select Refresh from the menu E Trace Buffer Trace data is buffered in the trace buffer The trace buffer becomes full some time during debugging progresses because its size is finite If trace data exceeding the size of the trace buffer is obtained older data is overwritten When the trace buffer becomes full the program being executed can be stopped This is called buffer full break E Setting Event Mode There are two event modes single trace mode and multi trace mode The multi trace mode is available with MB2141 or MB2147 01 For details on the multi trace function refer to sections below in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual MB2141 2 2 8 3 Multi trace MB2147 01 2 3 6 2 Multi trace To switch between single trace mode and multi trace mode select Event mode from the shortcut menu of Trace window July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 205 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual va Figure 4 4 19 Event
110. becomes full e Trace stop caused due to trace buffer full Stop No stop Specifies whether or not to stop the trace acquisition when the trace buffer becomes full e Trace state established before the trace trigger hit Acquire No acquire Specifies whether or not to acquire trace data before trace trigger hit after a user program is executed 234 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Trace Setup Dialog Filtering Tab Trace acquisition range setting Figure 4 4 42 Filtering No compress data Status Acquire Acquisition area setting No acquire Area setting pa p Area number 1 7 a am Start address H 000000 Attribute V Read e Code Acquire No acquire Specifies whether or not to acquire instruction trace e Loop compress Compress No compress Specifies whether or not to show the trace data only once with the number of loops Loop compression display when displaying repeated instruction of trace data e Data trace Acquire all area Acquisition area setting No acquire Specifies trace data acquisition method Acquire all area Acquires trace data in all range Acquisition area setting Acquires trace data in specified range No acquire Does not acquire trace data e Area number Specifies the area number set for acquisition range setting of trace data It is fixed to 1 for this debugger e Start address
111. bit address I20 Outputs data in HEX 16 format in an allowable output range of 0x00000 to OxFFFFF Output file format HEX32 32 bit address I32 Outputs data in HEX32 format in an allowable output range of 0x00000000 to OxFFFFFFFF Adjust adjust Automatically calls the Format Adjuster to adjust a data output format Start address record output entry Outputs the starting address record The starting address record will be used as a starting address for loading at the time of debugging Output range ran Specifies the range to be adjusted by an address when selecting the option adjust for adjusting an output file Selecting Auto will obtain the starting ending address for adjustment from the absolute format load module to set automatically padding data p When selecting the option adjust for adjusting an output file the area of the file where no data exists is packed with data having a specified value The macro description can be used to describe options For the macro description refer to Section 1 11 Macro Descriptions Usable in Manager of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 317 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual Figure 4 5 48 Converter Option Setup Dialog Box C Compiler Assembler Linker Librarian Converter D gt Target of setting Mes0F334 o V Absolute module converter is started a Output Data
112. cect 279 Setting Options in General 000008 314 319 Guarded Access Guarded Areas Setup MB2198 Emulation Debugging oricisccsscwsscssstesscccsesveneraneres 455 H Handler Detailed Display of Alarm Handler 246 Detailed Display of Cyclic Handler 245 Hardware Hardware Count Break cceeee cece renee 356 Setting of Hardware Count Break 000 356 Setting of Hardware Data Watch Break 358 Hardware Break Hardware Break ic cccssscvcdexeetseseditens cnc catvenecccaests 349 Setting of Hardware Break 000cceeees 350 Horizon HOi ZON iced cestiwaniecdeetsvieaes eennwasiedenstnoarcenmenaceliivasds 470 Host Communication with Host System 508 l Icon Icon Arrangement 0 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 472 Identifier Identifier sssaaa aaiae iena TENNES 6 Include Resetting an Include Path eee 300 Setting an Include Path cee 293 300 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on an Include File and Other User s Registration File c eee 55 Updating Include File Dependency 0 332 Include Path Changing the Include Path Retrieval ONDER moroene aa aana 294 301 Resetting an Include Path eee 294 Initial Restoring Registers to the Initial Status 84 Initialization Customization Procedure Initialization of KEY WOOD visi ce E T 70 Initializing When Initializing Place
113. click the Set button The modified syntax and comment are newly set 4 Delete an unnecessary syntax syntax used before modification E Analysis Order Change and Application ON OFF e Analysis order change Error messages are analyzed from the patterns registered in the upper part of the syntax list To assure correct analysis the analysis order may have to be changed The analysis order can be changed in the following procedure 1 Select Error from the Setup Menu The error jump setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 65 opens 2 Select the syntax whose order is to be changed from the syntax list 3 Click the UP or Down button to move the cursor to the position where error jump is to be set e Application ON OFF When the check mark to the left of Apply is not set error messages are not analyzed according to the registered syntax When a check mark is set to the left of Apply ON is displayed in the syntax list When a check mark is not set OFF is displayed in the syntax list E Example of Error Jump Setup When the error format is error message line number file name Syntax 1 f Comment sample Note The syntax for which SYSTEM is displayed in the syntax list cannot be deleted July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 467 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a gt lt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 7 9 Tool Startup This section explains how to start a registered external tool E Start
114. debug session select Load target program from the Debug Menu to load the target program The created program is loaded to the debugger and all debugging preparations are completed now E Operating the Debugger For how to operate the debugger see CHAPTER 3 Windows and CHAPTER 4 Menus in this manual For debugger commands and debugger output error messages refer to the SOFTUNE Workbench Command Reference Manual For details of debugger functions refer to SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Refer to CHAPTER 1 Basic Functions for details of MCU common functions Refer to CHAPTER 2 Dependence Functions for details of MCU chip dependence functions July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E a SPANSION CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 13 Executing Debugging Only Software Support Manual a 2 13 Executing Debugging Only SOFTUNE Workbench can be used as the conventional debuggers E Creating a Project In SOFTUNE Workbench projects are a basis of all work This is not an exception also at debugging For this reason executing debugging only requires the creation of a project for debugging First create the project for debugging and the workspace which stores the project in the following procedure 1 2 Select New from the File Menu Select Project Workspace File from the file open dialog box Select the absolute format ABS from the new creation dialog box for the project Specify a project name Specify a pro
115. deleted from the editor list 3 Click the Delete button E Editor Change Procedure 1 Select Editor from the Setup Menu The editor setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 64 opens 2 Select the title of the editor to be changed from the editor list The values set in Title Execute Filename Option and Executing Directory are displayed 3 Change Execute Filename Option and Executing Directory When Title is changed the set editor is registered as another editor 4 Click the Set button The dialog box asking you whether to change the editor opens 5 Click the Yes button E Setting the Editor to be Used 1 Register the external editor to be used according to the editor registration procedure 2 Click the V button to the right of the Available Editor field The drop down list showing registered editor titles is displayed 3 Select the editor title to be used from the drop down list E Example Example of Fujitsu Power EDITOR setup Title Power EDITOR Execution File Name c Powered powered exe Option f g 1 Run Time Directory Px Entering the above and clicking the Setup button registers Fujitsu Power EDITOR in the editor list After registering Fujitsu Power EDITOR select Power EDITOR from Available Editor and click the OK button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 465 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 7 8 Error Error regi
116. files are modified Make links them to create a target file E Build Build compiles or assembles all the source files in the project regardless if they have been modified since the last Make or Build It also links all object and library files to create a target file E Stop Use Stop when you want to stop compile make or build execution for some reason E Checking Source File Saving When an unsaved file is being edited by the standard editor execute compile assemble make or build then save the file If a check mark is set to the left of Inquiry for Save at Compile Assemble in Setup Development Project however the dialog box for asking whether to save the file opens When the No button is clicked the source file is compiled without being saved July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 333 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 6 Debug Debug starts and terminates debugging and controls the debugger when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session E Debug Start and Termination Loading Target File e Start Debug Terminate Debug E Debugger Control When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug Session e Run e Abort e Reset MCU e Breakpoints e Breakpoint Set Reset e Event e Sequence e Stack e Time Measurement e Call e Clear Call e Vector 334 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANS
117. function to initialize the stream area _stream_init 3 Building a sample low level function Add the following files to a project member write c sbrk c stub c 4 Including a header file For a file using printf add include lt stdio h gt 5 Adding printf processing Add printf processing 548 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX H Sample Project for the Semihosting Function Software Support Manual SPANSION E Usage Restrictions When the following general purpose standard library using the low level function library included in the sample project is used the error is returned as a return value of the function e Standard library functions fopen or fclose except for the standard I O or the standard error output fseek Input functions e Standard library variables When the input is requested to stdin Note When standard library variable stdout or stderr is used it is unnecessary to issue freopen because standard output standard error output have opened as file number 1 2 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 549 a SPANSION APPENDIX APPENDIX Major Changes Software Support Manual a APPENDIX I Revision 7 1 Major Changes Section Change Results Company name and layout design change Revision 8 0 Deleted APPENDIX D Setting USB Interface 458 Added note for flash memory synchronization Revision 9 0 428 4 7 2 3 Setting Deb
118. in the Source Window When SOFTUNE Workbench is not in the debug session the specified include file is displayed in the edit window e Delete The specified file is released from the project member The file itself is not deleted e Property File information is displayed See Section 4 3 9 Property July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 55 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window a SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on Library File Object File and Relative Format File Figure 3 4 15 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 15 Shortcut Menu on a Library File Name Set gt Delete Property e Set When selected the following two submenus are displayed Individual Setting A project is set See Section 4 5 5 Setup Project Return to Common Setting All individual options in the specified folder are returned to common options e Delete The specified file is released from the project member The file itself is not deleted e Property File information is displayed See Section 4 3 9 Property E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a File in the Dependencies Category Figure 3 4 16 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 16 Shortcut Menu on a File in the Dependencies Category Open Property e Open When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session the specified source file is displayed in the Source Window When SOFTUNE Workben
119. instruction address of the last executed instruction Source line display and disassemble display are also updated according to the PC value set when the program stopped For details refer to the following section in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Simulator debugger Emulator debugger MB2141 Emulator debugger MB2147 01 Emulator debugger MB2147 05 Emulator debugger MB2198 Emulator debugger MB2100 01 2 1 9 5 Forced Break 2 2 5 7 Forced Break 2 3 4 9 Forced Break 2 4 4 5 Forced Break 2 5 4 7 Forced Break 2 6 2 2 Forced Break 338 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 6 2 1 Abort Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 This section explains the abort dialog in the emulator debugger MB2100 01 E Abort Dialog When the abort is executed in the emulator debugger MB2100 01 while a user program is running the following abort dialog is displayed When interrupt level of abort request is set Figure 4 6 3 Abort Dialog Stop Processing The MCU execution is now being stop This dialog is displayed until MCU stops Interrupt level of abort request 6 Cancel Force abort When interrupt level of abort request is not set Figure 4 6 4 Abort Dialog Processing The MCU execution is now being stop This dialog is displayed until MCU stops Eau Bebe e Chip reset Issue reset of MC
120. is displayed Figure 4 6 17 Code Break Details Dialog Hardware Count Code break point details Break address H 000000 H FFFFFF Cancel Pass count D e Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified e Address mask Cannot set Address mask in this debugger e Pass count Sets the number of times the data access passes through the specified address with specified attributes to break Notes e The hit count of breakpoints is not updated while a user program is running Therefore while a user program is running the hit count indicates the value before the user program is started e This function can be set while a user program is running July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 357 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual N 4 6 4 6 Code Break Hardware Data Watch This section explains hardware data watch among code breaks in the emulator debugger E Hardware Data Watch Break For details on the hardware data watch break function refer to each relevant section in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual MB2147 01 2 3 4 3 Data Watch Break MB2100 01 2 6 6 6 Data Watch Break E Use Conditions This function can be used in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2147 01 MB2100 01 In MB2147 01 it is necessary to set the event mode to single trace mode or multi trace mode For details refer to Section 4 7 2 3 Setting
121. measurement result are displayed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 103 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 18 Performance Window SPANSION Software Support Manual MB2147 01 MB2198 Figure 3 18 3 is an example of the Performance Window For MB2147 01 it is displayed only when the event mode is set to performance mode Figure 3 18 3 Performance Window gy Performance iol x Display type Measuring time z Display event Jinterval 1 v Measuring results Minimum Maximum Average 27 500 28 325 Time us 0 000 22 000 23 000 24 000 25 000 26 000 27 000 28 000 29 000 30 000 31 000 32 000 e Display type Content displayed in the window Select Measuring time only e Display event Select a measurement interval 1 to 4 e Measuring results The measurement result is totalized and displayed The minimum measurement result maximum measurement result and average measurement result are displayed 104 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 18 Performance Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a MB2100 01 Figure 3 18 4 to Figure 3 18 5 show examples of the performance window Figure 3 18 4 Performance Window When the Display Type is the Execution Cycle for the Execution Cycle Measurement Display type Cycle Y Display event Interval 1 v Measuring results Minimum Maximum Average OCycle Time us
122. memory whose address is resolved Relative format REL Creates a load module which combines multiple object files The address resolution is not performed with the relative format REL Library LIB Creates a library file in which multiple object files are collected up or archived Objects are not combined in the library LIB REALOS ABS Appears when REALOS is installed Specify when using REALOS For details see SOFTUNE REALOS Configurator Manual 7 Select the function call interface Select Function call Interface used with C compiler Table 2 3 2 shows description for each function call interface you can select Table 2 3 2 List of Function call Interfaces Function call interface Description Arguments by the stack Passes function arguments by the stack This is a default setting Arguments by registers Passes selected function arguments by registers This processing reduces the code size and stack usage to improve the program execution speed 8 Select chip type and target MCU Select chip and target MCU you will use 9 Input project name The input name e g sample is applied as shown below Change the items if necessary Target file name sample abs Directory Default directory sample The initial setting of the default directory is the directory where SOFTUNE is installed After a project is created the setting of default directory is updated to the upper directory of the proje
123. nA E E T 325 Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark seeeeeeaeens 169 Setting Absolute Format Assemble List Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark in the Current OptiONS goed A ctoteesnacervetehene 306 Window wssssesessersssereeierssien 169 172 174 Setting Assembler Options 000cseeeee 298 Next ETOT vccisccses ses csciseceatesasapassvacandssvencssanazancs 175 Setting C Compiler Options eses 291 Normal State Setting Converter Options sseeceeereerreeee 316 LCD Display at Normal State cscsseeens 512 Setting Debug Options c ccceceeteeeeeeteees 319 Note Setting General Options 00 291 298 303 NOG sss csctcccedsntecnasesansssnsinesccsasesavadsasssveanccancz seas 500 Setting Librarian Options 0 css 314 Notes in Addressing 0000000ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 311 Setting Linker Options c ects 303 Number Setting of Linker Options 0 ssssseeeeeeeeeees 29 Floating point Number ccccccccesceseesseeeseeeeees 7 Setting of Options for Library Control 307 Lime Number ccccceeseeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeseeeeees 10 Setting of Options Included in Detail Definition in Optimization crccceciccareenceiiessvecedinweeans 295 o Setting of Options Included in Language Specifications s sssisisisissenissiirinesisirunins 296 Object Setting Optimize Options 294 Object WIDOW 6 icisnciccvarcncvedennnneccneceavasedees 98 242 Setting Options in Boot
124. of Read Clear Write Clear etc Example e Lack of UART receive event Read by monitoring the receive register sets receive event flag RDRF to 0 This happens because the receive event flag is cleared by reading control register from the emulator as same as reading from CPU e Flash abnormal operation reaction Issued commands write erase etc is canceled User application misunderstands the toggle bit DQ6 of hardware sequence MB2147 01 The real time monitoring function may not be used depending on the emulator or connection format For details refer to Section 2 3 9 Real time Monitoring in SOFTUNE Workbench USER s MANUAL MB2100 01 When monitoring to GPR area 0x180 to 0x37F the correct data may not be read temporarily 420 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual Directory tab Figure 4 7 18 Debug Environment Setup Directory Tab Setup debug environment x Execution Step execution Watch Radix Monitoring Directory Tab Eroroutput Load Display path information Source file search path v Append path Browse fkl Directory i Cancel The items that can be set for directory related matters are as follows Table 4 7 9 Setup Item in Directory Tab Debugger EML Display Path Information MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 e Display Path Information Select th
125. of each array element or each member e g structure cannot be canceled When delete is executed in each element or member line display of the array or structure is canceled E Setting Display Range at Array Expansion When an array is expanded a range of the element displayed in the window can be specified When clicking the right button of the mouse on an array variable in the watch window to select Element in the short cut menu the array expansion dialog Figure 4 4 18 is displayed Figure 4 4 18 Array Expansion Dialog Array expand value 16 Start element D O End element D 5 Cancel e Start element number Specifies start element number displayed at array expansion e End element number Specifies end element number displayed at array expansion July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 203 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual v Only specified range is displayed at array expansion At default all elements are displayed In the watch window the setting value is restored when reactivating the debugger Note The value of one dimensional array registered as the watch variable is only restored 204 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 8 Trace This section explains the trace function E Trace This function retroactively displays addresses and instructions executed so far Enable can
126. refer to Section 5 6 SET REGISTER or 5 7 SHOW REGISTER in the SOFTUNE Workbench Command Reference Manual July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 503 a SPANSION Software Support Manual APPENDIX APPENDIX B Downloading Monitor Program a APPENDIX B Downloading Monitor Program To use the emulator debugger the monitor program corresponding to the chip to be used must be written to the emulator This processing is called monitor program download For MB2147 01 and MB2147 05 and MB2198 emulator data in the emulator can be checked at the beginning of debugging to automatically download the appropriate emulator monitoring program and version data into the emulator E Downloading Monitor Program e When the emulator is the MB2141 series The Downloading Monitor Program procedure is described below 1 Connect the emulator to a personal computer PC with an RS 232C or LAN interface When connecting the emulator to the PC see APPENDIX C Setting LAN Interface 2 Press the reset switch then turn on the emulator Check that the READY LED of the emulator body turn on 3 Execute the Monitor Loader Menu from SOFTUNE V3 of FFMC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench Tools of the Windows Start Menu The monitor loader program is started 4 Select the monitor program to be loaded Select the monitor program corresponding to the chip to be used 5 Specify a communication type To use the RS 232C interface specify a po
127. section explains the SOFTUNE Workbench menu configuration E Menu Configuration File Edit File Edit New Open Close Open Workspace Close Workspace Save Save As Save All Print Recent Text File Recent Project File Exit Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Delete All Select Find Replace Find in Files Jump Bookmark Previous error Next error Top of error Bottom of error Property View Project Debug Setup The following functions are assigned to each menu item Window The following menus are displayed in the SOFTUNE Workbench Main Window Help 132 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 1 Menu Configuration Tree Software Support Manual View Project Output Symbol Assembly Register Memory Local Watch Trace Coverage Performance Command Object Realtime memory RAM Checker Sequence Tool Bar Status Bar Bookmark Fonts Project Menu Active Project Add Project Add Member Setup Workspace Setup Project Customized Build Project Dependencies Configuration Include Dependencies Compile Make Build Stop Debug Run Abort Reset of MCU Breakpoints Breakpoint Set Reset Event SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 133 a SPANSION v Software Support CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 1 Menu Configuration Tree Manual Sequence Stack Time Measurement Call Clear Call Vector Load
128. select Exit from the File Menu or click the x button above and on the right of the window SOFTUNE Workbench cannot be terminated when compile assemble make build or tool is being executed Be sure to terminate SOFTUNE Workbench after compile assemble make build or tool has been terminated or suspended CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 3 Creating Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 3 Creating Project This section explains how to create projects E Project A project is the unit for managing a source file used to create a target program and other information together A project file must be created to develop software with SOFTUNE Workbench E Template Function When you create a new project you can create not only a brand new project but also create another project based on an existing project The function creating another project based on an existing project is called template function The projects used for template function called template projects have same structure as those of existing projects Every existing project can be used as an template project items applied from the template project When using template function information of the template project and the members are fully applied However the following items are not applied Specify them again Project name Directory for creating a project Location of the template project For proje
129. set See Section 4 5 5 Setup Project e Set Linkage Order When selected the Set linkage Order dialog Figure 3 4 6 is opened The files displayed in the Link Order box are linked from top to down To change the link order select the configuration to be set from the Setting Target box followed by the file name and use the Up or Down button to move the file to a desired position The Export dialog Figure 3 4 7 allows the current order to affect other configurations The files not subject to link are displayed in gray 50 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 3 4 6 Set Linkage Order Dialog Target of setting MBSOF394 z Linkage order sample c Esport Cancel Figure 3 4 7 Export Dialog C MB90553B Canca All select e Make Build Making or building is performed in the active configuration of the currently selected project to create a target file e Executing linker or librarian The linker or librarian is started in the active configuration of the currently selected project to create a target file e Delete Project The specified project is deleted from workspace The project file itself is not deleted July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 51 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window SPANSION Software Support Manual ua e Property File information is displayed See Section 4 3
130. set from Function List The explanation of the selected function is displayed in the explanation field lower part of the keyboard setup dialog box When an assigned function is selected the currently assigned keys are displayed in Assign key 3 Set a focus in New Assign then specify the key to be assigned to the selected function from the keyboard press the key 4 Click the Set button E Procedure for Deleting an Assigned Key 1 Select the function corresponding to the key to be deleted see 1 and 2 in the keyboard setup procedure above The currently assigned keys are displayed in Assign key 2 Select the key to be deleted from the key list displayed in Assign key 3 Click the Delete button The dialog box for checking to be deleted the key opens 4 Click the OK button E Procedure for Changing an Assigned Key 1 Delete an assigned key see the procedure for deleting an assigned key above 2 Set a focus in New Assign then specify the key to be assigned to the function from the keyboard press the key 3 Click the Set button E Displaying the Current Setup State List Click the Definition List button to display the key definition list E Restoring All the Set Keys to the Initial State Click the Reset button Notes e Several keys can be assigned to one function In this case the assigned keys have the same function e Once the Set or Reset button is clicked the set or reset key cannot
131. sirisser siasio 175 Setting Assembler Options eeeseeeeeeeenees 298 Break Assembly Break Dialog visscccssscsscscseccesonsieessnvesceessavesarancnne 342 ASS MDIY wy idviess secexiedeccseceics iol aceaiestldevdd anaana 189 Breakpoint Automatic BreakPoint coccesticcssveigcesesoctessesseteheesesczenansvcnenes 341 Automatic Downloading of Monitor Types of Breakpoints cece eee cree eee ees 341 PEO ST AUD ssevcacasusecengecdennsnsecsccussyusaecnetahix 33 Build Automatic Setting of Linker Options 00 00 29 Bul oss scscsiteidseasiaketitisiavientiaeiiecctineeens 31 333 Build Bat i2cceaheccet cece shectectte eves nara beeen se 41 B Changing Subproject Configuration at Making or Buldi 8 icsecciests ccnscsdeesensd cs dectecnsauvenccne ds 32 Back trace Creating a Program Source and Executing Back Mace cscisseccnnntinnateusritedssarsnvenrshevdenbinevenents 208 Make Build ccccscesececececeecececececeeceeeeees 4 Backup Customize Build Function seene 323 Backup Pile icscsciscensnscsencscscsesedeniesassaevesentagvenessess 35 Make Build Execution cece eens 266 Bank Addressing Making or Building of Project ee 32 Bank Addressing c cccccscscscsssssssssesssessesesesessees 14 Making or Building Specified Project 004 32 Bar Project Configuration Configuration at Build Ne ee ne a ee ee 41 BUNU sisipsspi iniisa n ae COMMON Bal sssini arenei ai eaa 41 Customize Bar Men isissisursescissrossssiivissesiinssa 48
132. stored and the folder into which the file is inserted are specified The character string enclosed between and is the project name E Procedure for Addition For the procedure for addition of a member see Section 2 5 Setting Project July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 273 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual 4 5 3 2 Add Member Directory A directory is specified to store its file and folder in the project E Add Member Directory Figure 4 5 4 Add Member Dialog Directory Add Member Directory es Directory V Sub directory also targeted Browse Filetype cS asm X Mem Type Automatic v Insertion Folder sample y e Directory Specifies the directory having the file to be stored e Sub directory also targeted When turned on the file in the subdirectory in the specified directory is stored A subdirectory is hierarchically created as a folder in the project e File type Only the file having a specified extension is stored in the project e Mem Type The file is stored as the type of the specified member in the project If Auto is selected the type of member is determined by the extension e Insertion Folder Specify the project in which a file is stored and the folder into which the file is inserted The character string enclosed between and is the project name E Procedure for Addition For the procedure for addition of a member se
133. such as I O to request lead of fixed size cannot be displayed 416 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION Radix tab Figure 4 7 15 Debug Environment Setup Radix Tab The items that can be set for radix related matters are as follows Table 4 7 7 Setup Item in Radix Tab Debugger EML Setup debug environment ES Emulation Chip Debugging area Monitoring Directory Tab Eroroutput Load Realtime memorarea Execution Step execution Event Watch Radix Radix Hexadecimal Decimal Octal C Binary Display source line Display No display MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 Radix MB2198 MB2100 01 Display source line Radix Hexadecimal Decimal Octal Binary Sets the base number for numerical value display and analysis Display source line Display Non display Sets source line display and non display July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 417 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual va Monitoring tab Figure 4 7 16 Debug Environment Setup Monitoring Tab ee Execution Step execution Watch Radix Emulation Chi Debugging area Monitoring Directory Tab Error output Load 418 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a The items th
134. ta_INRAMO1 0 000180 0 00037F a_INRAMO2 0 007200 0 007FFF Cancel Apply E Setting When the Default Library is not Used 1 Select the Control Library category The library control setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 41 opens 2 Set a check mark to the left of Don t retrieve the default library E Setting Method When Debug Information Existence Check for Library File Module is Inhibited 1 Select the Control Library category The library control setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 41 opens 2 Set a check mark to the left of Don t check debug information existence in library E Setting a Library Retrieval Path 1 Select the Control Library category The library control setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 41 opens 2 Set Search Path Clicking the Browse button to the right of the input file enables path reference 3 Click the Add button The set library retrieval path is added to the end of Search Path List July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 307 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a SPANSION Software Support Manual a Resetting a Library Retrieval Path 1 Select the Control Library category The library control setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 41 opens 2 Select the path you want to reset from Search Path List 3 Click the Delete button E Changing the Library Retrieval Path Retrieval Order Library retrieval paths are retrieved in turn from top of Search Path List The order in which libra
135. the Right Button of the Mouse m era pay aaa Function ssec Hs gt ustomize Build Function s e sameeren Oe og Dna chang ncaa MLCTLACE in vacicenvetnas ieestonecesevinesddesuses Error Jump Function 000 00cceeeeeee ee ee ees 158 File Editing Function 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeee eens 158 558 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual Functies ea aaa e 48 58 72 79 85 88 101 118 120 Function Call sisi cccsseccccvnnrneacdanveaestieevarneccsudees 392 Functions Related to Project and File AACCOSSIDG esisiini aineart eiaa 135 Jump FUNCHON seicssssssccssceccesessseetsneesesnarseesaranenes 158 MCU Reset Function cece errr eens 340 New Function call Interface ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 514 Other FUNCHONS assisas direino si esai 135 Procedure to Select Debug Function 438 Property FUNCHON cisisicscccssesescidserstecceesecnass danns 158 Setting In line Expansion of Specified PUN CUONS diris dentdentieriteneedseeaeriaterss 295 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Function Name ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 61 Function call Changing of Function call Interface 515 Details of Changing of Function call Interface fevevseicsccdevnwasitdevecrpeedsdeatnastinvers 516 New Function call Interface eee 514 G General Property General E 177 181 182 183 184 185 Setting General Options 000 291 298 303 Setting of General 0c
136. the following details dialog is displayed Figure 4 6 13 Code Break Details Dialog Hardware Break point details x Break address H o00000 Remain 6 Cancel Break kind C Software Hardware e Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified e Remain Displays the remaining number of breakpoints which can be set e Type In this field the type of the breakpoint is selected Select Hardware July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 351 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION ua Notes In either of the following cases this function can be also set while a user program is running Setting breakpoint while running is enabled in MB2147 01 Setting breakpoint while running is enabled in MB2198 Inthe case of MB2100 01 With MB2198 the break point hit count is not updated while a user program is running Therefore the hit count which is set before the program is executed is displayed while a user program is running CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 352 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual 4 6 4 4 Code Break Software This section explains software among code breaks in the emulator debugger E Software Break For details on the software break function refer to each relevant section in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual MB2198 2 5 4 1 Code Break MB2100 01 2 6 6 2 Code Break Software E Use C
137. used when the workspace is not opening When opening the workspace the previous settings are restored and the customize bar buttons are enabled 2 Customized bars for registration are stored for each tool This allows a common set of restored data to be provided even if projects workspaces or setup files are switched 3 When registering batch files in the customize bar input the relative path or the absolute path from the current directory project directory for the batch files 4 When registering batch files in the customize bar always use a comma to separate parameters when specifying multiple parameters This is the same for the Parameter Setting dialog box Figure 5 1 6 5 When you registered batch files or Workbench menu that becomes valid when activating the debugger in the customize bar they won t be executed by pressing the button while the debugger is inactive 500 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION APPENDIX The Appendixes describes the register name downloading monitor program setting LAN interface setting USB interface creating ROM on monitor debugger target display on emulator external I F DLL for simulator APPENDIX A List of Register Names APPENDIX B Downloading Monitor Program APPENDIX C Setting LAN Interface APPENDIX D Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Target APPENDIX E Display on Emulator APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface APPENDIX G Exte
138. 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a Warning Level w Level 0 to 3 Select Warning Level from the drop down list In Other Option all assembler options can be written like startup options from command lines Write the options that do not belong to any assembler option setup categories directly in Other Option E Setting a Macro Name Figure 4 5 34 Macro Name Setup Dialog Box Setup Project Ea Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari 4 gt ile z Category Define Macro X E Macro Name TEN Value fi 0 Macro Name List Set Delete MTEN 10 Option I Cancel Apply If there are two or more items to be set the symbol found in some item is grayed 1 Select the Define Macro category The macro name setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 34 opens 2 Specify a macro name 3 Specify a setting value as required 4 Click the Set button The specified macro name is set as a define D option 5 To set the specified macro name as an undefine U option reset the check mark of the macro name in Macro Name List Note When undefine is set both the define and undefine options are output for the same macro name This causes no problem because the undefine option precedes the define option July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 299 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a
139. 0312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 7 2 5 Setup Wizard This section explains how to operate the debugger s setup wizard E Setup Wizard The setup wizard makes initial settings of the debugger As setup information is saved in a setup file subsequent inputs can be omitted Also as more than one setup file can be created it is recommended to create them according to the debugger type Figure 4 7 36 Setup Wizard Setup Wizard E3 You can easily set for debugger when use the Setup Wizard Push Next to start making settings vit cen E Activating Setup Wizard The setup wizard is activated in either of the following ways e Select Debug Start Debug menu e Right click on the Debug folder of the project window and select Add Setup New menu July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 439 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a SPANSION Software Support Manual va Setup Wizard Operation Procedure First select Debugger Type Figure 4 7 37 Setup Wizard Debugger Type Setup Wizard x Please select debug type Debug Type Emulator Debugger Simulator Debugger Monitor Debugger lt Back inisi Cancel The following settings vary depending on debugger type Click Return to undo setting and return to the previous setting screen Procedure when the emulator debugger is selected 1 Select emulato
140. 11 26 m siCmn Product name SOFTUNE Workbench File Path C Softune BIN 5iC907 dll OIL92 Version SiiEd File Path O 8oftune BIN Si iEd3 ocx E Information Display When SOFTUNE Workbench is not in the Debug Session If the version information dialog is displayed in non debug session only the following information is displayed F2MC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench VxxLxx Copyright c 1997 2015 Spansion Cpu information file path Path to the CPU information file Cpu information file version Version of the CPU information file July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 479 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 9 Help a SPANSION Software Support Manual v E Information Display When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug Session If the version information dialog is displayed in the debug session the following information is displayed F2MC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench VxxLxx c Copyright Spansion LLC All Rights Reserved 1997 2014 Cpu information file path Path to the CPU information file Cpu information file version Version of the CPU information file SiCmn Product name SOFTUNE Workbench File Path Path to SiC907 dll Version Version of SiC907 dll SiiEd File Path Path to SiiEd3 ocx Version Version of SiiEd3 ocx SiM907 Product name SOFTUNE Workbench File Path Path to SiM907 dll Version Version of SiM907 dll Language Tools Version of F2MC 16 Family SOFTUNE C Compiler File Path
141. 12 9E 189 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual E Line Assemble Selecting Line Assemble from the shortcut menu opens the line assemble dialog shown in Figure 4 4 2 Figure 4 4 2 Inline Assemble Dialog Box Inline assemble Start address H FS01B2 Code data 628B02 Mnemonic MP F9028B Close Writing a mnemonic in the Mnemonic edit box and clicking the Update button assembles and sets the mnemonic starting from the start address The start address subsequently advances to the next address To change the address where the mnemonic is to be written change Start Address When mnemonic change is completed click the Close button 190 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 4 Register Register displays the Register Window E Register When the Register Window is opened the selected target MCU register name and each register retention value are displayed This function command can be used only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session Selecting Register when the Register Window has been already opened activates the Window E Changing Register Values The values saved by the registers displayed in the Register Window can be changed directly by the following procedures 1 Full change Double click a register name or display value The register name or disp
142. 15 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 10 Tool Bar Status Bar Tab Tool bar sets display items Status Bar or tab switches display to nondisplay or vice versa E Tool Bar Any of the following tool button sets displayed in the tool bar can be selected Common Find Build Debug Flag Project For the buttons included in the above sets see Section 3 2 Tool Bar E Status Bar Status Bar can only switch display to nondisplay or vice versa For status bar display items see Section 3 3 Status Bar E Tab This function enables to choose whether the tab is displayed or non displayed for switching By selecting tab function tab will be attached to the windows Thus this makes easy to switch windows July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 241 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 4 11 Object Object displays the Object Window E Object Window The Object Window displays the detailed object information used by REALOS This window can be also used to issue system calls To display detailed object information select an ID then select Property from the shortcut menu E Detailed Display of Task Figure 4 4 45 Detailed Task Display Dialog ID 0001 Address O005 2 Priority current 04 Priority activation 04 Status WAIT cwai_flg wobjid 0001 Wakeup count 00 Suspend count oo Time out control dat
143. 173 Sep Project sis ciissiecsiieciedecctentiescedsescgeseiaeiens 276 Setup T ALSO ccais cetne os ceeerenaccnanitnadsachusascsawaicuses 277 Setup WAZAL i scsi ies ivectetecsnde Wvsrendengooeecayesevavertees 34 Setup Workspace cccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 275 Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse on Setup Name sssrsrrrrrrereeeeeeesesssee 57 Tool Setup Procedure cece cece eee e anes 460 Setup Name Changing Setup Name 0000eeeeeeee 321 Shift Example of Sequence Shift in Sequence WINKOW avcrestncittennssnsiacesasauiscvesesvesscceerns 116 Shortcut Shortcut Men ssis cccesiececcbasnnceretnnasasinees es 129 SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 565 a RRR Software Support Manual Shortcut Menu Migrating SOFTUNE Workbench to Debug Shortcut Menu ccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 63 65 73 77 SESSION sss ezeaedide act sake edsasaaadesewas ane venta voce 33 80 82 86 87 89 91 99 101 111 114 Setting SOFTUNE Workbench Operating 119 122 CONAIE ONS iian ieai aE 4 Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse Setting the SOFTUNE Workbench Execution on a Subproject Name sseseereeeresee 52 Environment cccccsencsssccnecssccssasenisanecnens 398 Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse SOFTUNE Workbench Configuration 00 3 on Setup Name sesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 Starting and Terminating SOFTUNE Shortcut Menu Click the Right B
144. 394 0B Browse Listfile Directory MBIOFIIALSTS Browse Cancel Apply 518 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 When changing the setting of a new project In the Create dialog of the project stack argument passing is selected by default Change the function call interface to register argument passing Figure F 3 Create Dialog of Project Create Project Workspace Project Type Chip Classification FMC1 BLX 7 MCU change Target MCU MB90F394 v Project Name Target Filename Browse Function call interface Project Directory Register argument passin oftune sample 307 Project Browse Create new workspace I C Add to the current workspace sample pri Relocatable REL Library LIB Cancel Changing without using Workbench 1 Changing without using Workbench When not using Workbench specify the rp option for Compiler Assembler Linker and Librarian 2 Changing during compiling and assembling Declare the prototypes of all functions If a function whose prototype is not declared is called the program is not guaranteed to operate The area where argument registers are saved is not concatenated with the area where parameters area passed by the stack A program designed to expect such concatenation doe
145. 4 4 14 Display Setup Dialog Box Setup deplay nem Columns Automatic Cancel W ASCII 200 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 6 Local Local displays the Local Variable Window E Local Variable Window The Local Variable Window displays in tree format the local variables of the function where the current instruction pointer exists using the function name as the root The displayed variables cannot be added nor can the displayed variables be canceled The variable values modified as a result of program execution are updated automatically For this reason the user can observe how variable values change as a result of program execution Variable values can be also modified to continue debugging E Setting a Base Number The base number when a variable value is displayed can be set for each variable using the following procedure 1 Click the right mouse button in the line containing the variable of the base number to be modified The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Move the mouse cursor to Base Number The list showing selectable base numbers is displayed in the submenu 3 Select the base number to modify from the list E Modifying a Variable Value The variable value can be modified by the following procedure 1 Click the right mouse button in the line containing the variable to be modified The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Select Ed
146. 4 6 Debug SPANSION Software Support Manual va e Clear Clears the displayed measurement result e Comment Displays the error information of measurement results For details see E Comment below This is available with the emulator debugger MB2100 01 e Measurement unit Displays the dialog to set the measurement unit for time measurement For details see li Measurement Unit below This is available with the emulator debugger MB2100 01 E Result Display The time measurement dialog shows the contents shown below Display Example for Simulator Debugger Figure 4 6 39 Display Example for Simulator Debugger a Time measurement From Initialize O Cycle te E From Last Executed O Cycle Close From Initialize O Step From Last Executed O Step From Initialize shows the total of measurement results after the Clear button is clicked From Last Executed shows the measurement results of previous program execution Time shows the execution time Step shows the measurement results of execution instruction count Display Example for Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 or MB2198 Figure 4 6 40 Display Example for Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 or MB2198 a Time measurement xX From Initialize OhOOm00s000ms000us000ns T ime From Last Executed OhOOm00s000ms000us000ns T ime a ose From Initialize D Cycle From Last Executed O Cycle From Initialize shows the total of measuremen
147. 41 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Break Opens a break dialog box to set a break point at the selected function e Set coverage Opens the coverage setting dialog This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Display coverage rate Switches on off the display of the coverage rate When Display coverage rate is turned on the coverage rate of each item is displayed This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Refresh Updates the contents of the window When Display coverage rate is turned on the display is updated with the latest coverage rate This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Property Display the properties of the symbol information of the selected function July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 61 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window a SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse on Space in the Project Window Figure 3 4 23 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 23 Shortcut Menu on Space in the Project Window v Docking View Hide The project window is docked with the frame in the check status e Hide The project window enters the nondisplay status e Docking View 62 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows
148. 5 displayed when you click the reference button on the right 2 When Menu is selected in Kind Enter the Workbench menu to be registered in the customize bar Specify with the Menu List Dialog Box Figure 5 1 7 displayed when you click the reference button on the right 3 When Tool is selected in Kind Enter the external tool to be registered in the customize bar Specify with the Select Tool Dialog Box Figure 5 1 10 displayed when you click the reference button on the right e Parameter Enabled only when Batch File selected in Kind Input the parameter for executing a batch file e Parameter Setting Dialog Enabled only when Batch File selected in Kind Displays Parameter Setting Dialog Figure 5 1 6 that can set change parameters with the customize bar when executing a batch file e Iconic Enabled only when Batch File selected in Kind This makes Workbench an icon when executing a batch file with the customize bar e Function Explain Enabled only when Menu selected in Kind Displays a description of the Workbench menu to be registered in the customize bar e Up Changes the order of the registered contents displayed in the File List to one above Switches that order when there is already one registered to a number one above e Down Changes the order of the registered contents displayed in the File List to one below Switches that order when there is already one registered to a number one below e
149. 6 10 Data Break Details Dialog Data break point details H o00000 Pass count D1 Break address Control C Nobreak Break Command SHOW STATUS Attribute V Read Iv Write SHOW TRACE 200 0 DUMP 3400 34FF Cancel Control Specifies whether to re execute or stop execution after the command processing when the breakpoint is hit Command Specifies the command line to execute when the breakpoint is hit For details of this function see Section 2 1 7 STUB Function in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Note The hit count of breakpoints is not updated while a user program is running Therefore while a user program is running the hit count indicates the value before the user program is started 348 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual 4 6 4 3 Code Break Hardware This section explains hardware among code breaks in the emulator debugger E Hardware Break For details on the hardware break function refer to each relevant section in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 E Use Conditions This function can be used in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 2 3 4 1 Code Break 2 4 4 1 Code Break 2 5 4 1 Code Break 2 6 6 1 Code Break Hardware SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 349 CHAPTER 4
150. 7 C Debug Bar areaigsr aaaea ea aa 41 C Compiler Flag BAF drier ieceunicevsnessdennueascudewasaecteasavenseedeewaace 42 Setting C Compiler Options AOE aT eT EEEN E 291 Installing Customize Bar eee ees 485 Project Bar scsivecen suesvtfecrd date ccvevs eiaa a 41 a 1l Stack 386 Registering in Customize Bar s ss sesssessseeeeess 488 aa pie T a E TE i Status BaT esisiini entad iiaae 44 241 ae gai So ie ce eeeget sf eehence scot ce teeis Tool Baris ceesceetiecoecpnieccthcatecc te liwlaesedveacdienss 241 PU AOIN T aleia nae eae ee Seite ee Tool Bar Status Bar c cece e renee 186 R ol ToU iiei a e What is Customize Bar ssssssrnrererrrrrreereeees 485 Cancel ae Base Number Ha In line Expansion of Specified me UNCHONS riisiin ae aaga neig a Base N MBber siissnscsisissersrisansoa 201 202 Suport Cancel ofa Bokma aac 169 172 173 Binary File Caret Saving the Binary Fil x cccceccccecancscacacensnesbnenetcn 152 Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark 169 Bit Add ressing Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark in the Current Bit Addressing T ITLL ETA TTT LLAT TT TTT 14 WindOW oe ccccccccccccccccceecccceee 1 69 1 72 174 SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 553 a SPANSION Software Support Manual a Move the Caret to the Previous Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Bookmark ccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169 on Library File Object File and Relative Move the Car
151. 88 Defining the ROM RAM Area 312 ROM Deleting a ROM RAM Area cccceeeeeseeseeeeees 312 Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Tat Qetisccssecdccess inssi rnintin 508 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual Defining the ROM RAM Area ee 312 Deleting a ROM RAM Area sssssssrrrsrrrrrrreeeee 312 Method of Outputting Warning When ROM RAM Area is Specified Outside Range of Internal ROM RAM sictsccvesiesaletiiiegescoaterenitectns 312 Method of Outputting Warning When Section is Placed Outside Specified ROM RAM Area RADGE cscccssescnsticcnsccceseseseensiaseaveectaatecnn 312 Setting Options in Boot ROM Only MB2198 ooo eeeeeeeseeessenteeeeees 321 When a Section is Allocated to the Specified ROM RAM Af rsia 310 Run RUD sissies cccecedsnnesansins oe ci ceceenoncnaasnneaddehadeeenasapenee 335 S Sample Explanation of Sample Program ee 510 Sample File Secretin nanea rarna 510 Sample Project An Example Application Using the Sample P OJEG wicca ws serene speteasicceventnendeenwenactesvenss 548 Configuration of the Sample Project 0 547 Sample Project weiss cceeivesecvatnencvewsssecwcciueeaectedennas 546 Save Checking Source File Saving ees 333 Fil s to be Saved messene asnosi aa 154 DSaVe A Brae onia aa a e aaa 152 Save Dialog BOX wiavedsscscsataseed deaeearsccceheesneccanseses 151 Saving the Binary File sseseeneeeeeeenrreerennnn 152 Saving the Project File sssscnsusnne
152. ABS format target file has been created Use SOFTUNE Workbench to create a source program and execute compile assemble and link Creation of the ABS format target file is enabled when the program is free from compile assemble and link errors E Loading the Target File Before loading the target file select Start debug from the Debug Menu to place SOFTUNE Workbench in the debug session When SOFTUNE Workbench enters the debug session select Load target file from the Debug Menu to load the target file The target file load state displays dialog box shown in Figure 4 6 48 opens when the target file is being loaded Figure 4 6 48 Target File Load State Display Dialog Box Processing aa When loading the target file terminates an entry point is set in the PC the source line of the module including the entry point is displayed and the program stops Execute Step and Go etc subsequently to continue debugging 396 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 6 13 Start Debug End Debug This section explains how to start and end debug session E Starting Debugging Start debug places SOFTUNE Workbench in the debug session to enable the subsequent use of debugger commands In emulator debugger MB2100 01 to start debugging some items need to be initialized For details refer to Section 2 4 1 Starting Debugging in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manu
153. AMO1 04000100 0x003FFF A ro _INROMO1 0xFCOOO0 OxFFFFFF 1 Select the Absolute Assemble List category The absolute format assemble list setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 40 opens 2 Set a check mark to the left of Creates an absolute assemble list When the absolute format assemble list is not output no other item need to be set from the absolute format assemble list setup dialog box Execute Step 3 and after only when outputting the absolute format assemble list 3 Select the module to which the absolute format assemble list is to be output from Output File Name List then set a check mark to the left of the selected module 4 Select the module to which the ROM RAM ARRAY list is to be output from ROM RAM ARRAY List then set a check mark to the left of the selected module 5 Select Display Position of Symbol and Address from the drop down list In Order Address to Symbol In Order Symbol to Address 306 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Setting of Options for Library Control Figure 4 5 41 Library Control Setup Dialog Box Setup Project mm Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari al gt MBI6F6734A Categor Control Library z Don t retrieval the default library l Don t check debug information existence in library Search Path Search Path List Add Delete
154. ANSION When the Workspace project file tab is selected When the Project tab is selected the dialog shown in Figure 4 2 2 is displayed When the Workspace tab is selected the dialog shown in Figure 4 2 3 is displayed For details of dialog box see 4 5 2 1 Add Project Create Figure 4 2 2 When the Project Tab is Selected Project Workspace Template apite Chip Classification a Template FMC16 x MCU change 96670_template_966 3 aple Target MCU ku SemiHosting mB90704 7 Browse for template Project Name m gt Project Type Target Filename Loadmodule ABS 7 Browse Function call interface Project Directory Stack argument passing Y GASoftune Browse Create new workspace Dependencie Add to the current workspace cme Figure 4 2 3 When the Workspace Tab is Selected July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 137 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual v When Text file is selected The editor program is started with a new file E Creating a Workspace or Project File Creating new workspace file The following shows how to create a new workspace 1 Select the Workspace tab in the New dialog 2 Specify the workspace name and directory 3 Click the OK button The creation of the workspace is completed No project is registered in this workspace Register a project For details see
155. APTER 3 Windows 3 7 Source Window Software Support Manual SPANSION ua e Breakpoint Set Reset After moving cursor to the line where you want to set or to cancel a breakpoint click the right button to see shortcut menu Then please select Breakpoint Set Reset e Breakpoint Enable Disable After moving cursor to the line where breakpoint is set to be enable or disable click right button to see the shortcut menu Then please select Breakpoint Enable Disable This enables to switch the breakpoint which is pointed by cursor enable or disable e Watch Specifies the variable to watch and opens the watch window Perform this operation in the following procedure 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the source window to display the shortcut menu then select Watch from the menu See Section 4 4 7 Watch 2 Specify a variable name 3 Select a mode as required 4 Click the OK button e Property Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Property from the menu File information is displayed see Section 4 3 9 Property e Mixed Display 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the source window to display the shortcut menu 2 Check Mix Display When a check mark is displayed to the left of Mix Display mixed display is already set When a check mark is not displayed to the left of Mix Display mixed display is not set 3 Select Mix Display When it is alread
156. Bookmark tives snssccsveceactesanernaidcanmetaccvvevanccedeees 167 Analysis Order Change and Application Bookmark Function 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 158 ON OFF oo cccccccccccccccccccecccececcesesececececeee 467 Bookmark Men iicccisseeccccacsnasccesennectesveatvedscesaes 167 Area Clear All Bookmarks in the Current ALCAisccseciccdcccvvcieadensttecesievereisdisubtbeddcevernaad Austin 263 Window seesseeessteeteetesees 170 172 174 Atea SOUNDS iersinii ideni 264 Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark 169 Defining the ROM RAM Area w essessseesseeseeseees 312 Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark in the Current Deleting a ROM RAM Area cssseessseessseessseeen 312 WindoW ssesssessssesesrersssenens 169 172 174 Method of Outputting Warning When ROM RAM Move the Caret to the Previous Area is Specified Outside Range of Internal Bookmark jscscccccscssenssstivaeeecsessarenectecnse 169 ROM RAM viisiin inniinn iinei 312 Move the Caret to the Previous Bookmark in the Method of Outputting Warning When Section is Current Window 086 169 172 174 Placed Outside Specified ROM RAM Area Setup or Cancel of a Bookmark RANTE ncinet eain nanea ta ee ene 169 172 173 Setting of Memory Area 0000 cette 29 To Display a Dialog Bookmark When a Section is Allocated to the Specified ROM ss trrsttrnstrvnttenttenietrnteesnetseneen 168 171 173 RAM Aves ctactesecer sincere encanta 310 Bottom of Error Assembler Bottom Of Error
157. Boot ROM file at MCU reset Figure 4 5 52 Boot ROM Execution Confirmation Boot ROM x Is the Boot ROM file run after reset V Don t show this message again Yes No Not run Does not run the Boot ROM file at MCU reset Therefore the Boot ROM file must be run manually later Notes e Setting options in Boot ROM is enabled only when the product of F27MC 16FX family is selected by the simulator debugger or emulator debugger MB2198 e When the MCU is reset by the emulator debugger MB2198 the PC value is set to the starting address of the Boot ROM e Always run the Boot ROM file at MCU reset regardless of whether automatic or manual If the Boot ROM file is not run the debugger may not work correctly 322 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual 4 5 6 Setting Customize Build SPANSION a This section explains how to start a different tool before or after executing the language tool during Make or Build E Customize Build Function In SOFTUNE Workbench it is possible to make a different tool operate automatically before or after executing the language tool during Compile Assemble Make or Build Using this function makes it possible to make a customer tool operate before the Compiler is executed make the object module conversion tool operate after the Linker is executed This setting is st ored on a project by project basis
158. D LEVEL1 1 LEVEL2 2 Attribute __ irc p e z Fe Address gt F El l Detail Enable Disable Set List Condition Status Address Pass count Event list e Sequencer The transition condition for the sequencer is set Maximum 2 levels from LEVEL1 to LEVEL2 can be set Also RESTART to return control to the starting state of the sequencer can be set Setting must be performed in sequence starting with LEVEL1 When correct setting is not performed or when the setting is deleted the subsequent setting will be entirely deleted Attribute The attribute of the transition condition is specified The attribute is selected from between code and data Address The address or symbol for which the transition condition is to be set is specified Details The details of the transition condition are set The dialog given in Figure 4 6 36 is displayed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 383 SPANSION a v CHAPTER 4 Menus Software Support Manual 4 6 Debug e Status Enabling or disabling of the set sequencer is set e Set button The transition condition for the specified sequencer is set e List The transition condition currently being set for the sequencer is displayed e Event List button This button is used to display the event list dialog used to check the setting of all events e Delete button This button is used to delete the setting E Sequence Det
159. Debug Environment in the SOFTUNE Workbench Operation Manual E Setting of Hardware Data Watch Break Setting dialog Figure 4 6 18 Code Break Hardware Data Watch Setting Dialog Break x Code Data Break address H F 80000 Set Type Hardware data watch z Detail Remain 8 Event list Break list CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION va e Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified e Type In this field the type of the breakpoint is selected Select Hardware Data watch e Remain Displays the remaining number of breakpoints which can be set e Event list This button is used to display the event list dialog used to check the setting of all events Details dialog Detail button is pushed the following details dialog is displayed Figure 4 6 19 Hardware Data Watch Break Details Dialog Code break point details Break address H oooo00 Watch condition Attribute Address H o00000 M Read Address mask HFFFFFF V Write Size Byte v Comparison condition C Disable Data agreement Data not Data H oo00 Data mask HFFFF Cancel e Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified e Address Specifies the address or symbol to be watched e Address mask Specifies mask value for specified address In the case of MB2100 01 it cannot
160. Dialog Trace Tab To set the trace function select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window Available settings for each mode normal mode trace enhancement mode are listed below Table 4 4 2 Trace Setup Dialog Setting Items Normal mode Trace status Trace Enhancement mode Buffer Full Break Trace acquisition control during buffer full Trace acquisition control before trace trigger hit Filtering Trace trigger Code Data Data watch Sequencer Single trace Multi trace 1 Available only in single trace mode 2 Can be set while a user program is running except while trace is executed The signs in the table show the following meaning Enabled O Enabled except during the user program execution X Disabled SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 215 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual AS Trace setup dialog Figure 4 4 29 Trace Mode Trace Fitering Trace trigger Single trace Status Enable Disable Buffer full break C Break No break Trace stop caused due to trace buffer full C Stop No stop Trace state established before the trace trigger hit Acquire No acquire e Status Enable Disable Specifies control status of trace e Buffer Full Break Break No break Specifies whether to enable or disable the trace buffer full bre
161. Display Dialog ID 0002 Cose Address O006a6 Flag value clear Waiting task NONE e ID event flag ID number e Address Address of event flag control block e Flag value current event flag pattern e Flag address address of current event flag table e Waiting task ID number of task in queue E Detailed Display of Mailbox Figure 4 4 48 Detailed Mailbox Display Dialog ID 0001 Close Address 000722 Message address NONE Waiting task NONE e ID Mailbox ID number e Address Address of mailbox control block e Message address Message address e Waiting task ID number of task in queue Waiting Task or Message State is displayed according to the wait factor 244 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Detailed Display of Fixed length Memory Pool e ID e Address e Memory block size e Used block count Free block count Figure 4 4 49 Detected Memory Pool Display Dialog ariable size memory pool x ID 0003 Close Address O0078e Memory block size 0008 Used block count 0o00 Free block count 0002 Waiting task or block address 000148 000150 ID number of fixed length memory pool Address of fixed length memory pool control block Memory block size Count of used memory blocks Count of free memory blocks e Waiting task or block address Task ID in Memory pool waiting or the address of a memory block
162. EE TE A E E TEE EEA 154 4 2 9 Print sicaissetitinsieeecnetls diets attieieh Wiehe i ed ea S E a ede See 155 4 2 10 Recent Text File Recent Workspace File cccccceceeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeecaeeeteneeeseeeeeeeeeeene 156 AQMD SEX A T A Adi pane E E A EE nisin eee 157 4 3 Edit MOU sisareensa eedd ai ega tcenedvot a aade saaa ees 158 4 3 1 Undo Redo aer aa a a a E A 159 4 3 2 Cut Copy Paste Delete i issitecvssssstevesssatiecinhaceeiceeds ranar AAEN EAE A Pin R ERENS EEE EAEEREN E EA 160 4 3 3 S E EEE A EAA EET EA S EA S E A ES E I OE E TO AA 162 4 3 4 Find REplace piteni aa Ea S a RE AEEA 163 4 3 5 Find IM FIGS cisarina a aaae aeS EA a aa aaa AAEE o Eaa E aa KES 165 4 3 6 JUMP ae a E T OE E OE E dane 166 4 3 7 BookMark srren aan ea aaa iA aa a AAE EA Ea a ara NES 167 4 3 7 1 Bookmark Source WINdOW c ccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteaeeeseaeeeeeeeeseaeeeteaeeeseaeesesaeeeseeeesaas 168 4 3 7 2 Bookmark Memory WINdOW ooo cece eeece cere eennee eee tecaaeeeeeecaaeeeeeteaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeees 171 4 3 7 3 Bookmark Edit WiINGOW sssscsessecesecevennctudeeuaeeness deck decukncueedevigneetveaveawetvona ADAR ERE ANAHE 173 vi CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 8 Previous Error Next Error Top of Error Bottom of Error 2 ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 175 4 3 9 PROP OILY coc ay sas acta gs caustics cu vive chau acres es Gases ted atau ati
163. Enable and Disable When disabled the event is displayed in gray like the event H 300 shown in Figure 3 19 6 which is set to LEVEL 6 This menu is valid only when the menu is selected on an currently set event which is displayed in the Sequence Window Figure 3 19 6 When Event is Disabled Delete lt lt lt lt lt 2 ee LEVEL 4 LEVEL 5 gt artup asm gt nain gt gt gt LE AEs gt Deletes a currently set event This menu is valid only when the menu is selected on an currently set event which is displayed in the Sequence Window 114 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 19 Sequence Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a Jump Displays another window based on the address information of the currently set event The window to be displayed varies depending on the event type Code event Source window Data event Memory window This menu is valid only when the menu is selected on an currently set event which is displayed in the Sequence Window Restart Takes the current sequencer position back to the starting point Select this shortcut menu to execute the sequencer from the beginning Event list Displays all of the currently set events For MB2198 this is useful especially when you need to check the event setting status due to a lack of enough events to be set as 8 events are shared by the
164. F 10 _INROMO1 OxF COOOO OxFFFFFF 3 Cancel Apply July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 309 a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual v Figure 4 5 44 Setup Section Dialog Setup Section ROM RAM Area Name _INRAMO1 v Section Name Contents Type None v Alignment BYTE x Section Name List Cancel E When a Section is Allocated to the Specified ROM RAM Area 1 Define the ROM RAM area See Defining the ROM RAM area Select the ROM RAM area you want to set from ROM RAM Area List Click the Set Section button The section setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 45 opens Specify the name of the section to be allocated to the selected area A wild card character can be also used Select a content type from the drop down list as required None Code Data Stack Const IO Click the Set button The set section is added to the end of Section Name List When all settings are completed click the OK button The order in which sections are allocated to the specified ROM RAM area is the same as the order in Section Name List For how to change this order see I Changing the Section Allocation Order next by one E When a Section is Allocated to the Specified Starting Address 1 Click the Set Section button The section setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 45 opens Select Specify in Address from the dro
165. FFF Enable Disable Delete All delete Close e Event Number Specifies an event number 1 to 8 366 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a Address Specifies the address at which the event occurrence condition is to be set Address Mask Specifies address mask Only the addresses whose bits are 1 are to be compared Data Specifies the data to be set as the event occurrence condition Data Mask Specifies data mask Only the data items whose bits are 1 are to be compared Data Length Specifies the data length in bytes or words Access Attribute Specifies a data access attribute Code Read Write Read Code Read Write Modify External Probe Data Specifies the external probe data value to be set as the event occurrence condition External Probe Data Mask Specifies external probe data mask Only the data items whose bits are 1 are to be compared Not specified for data Specifies the condition when the data values do not match Event List Displays the current event setting state July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 367 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual MB2147 01 event mode performance MB2198 Figure 4 6 24 Event Dialog Box Event Event Interval Interval AREA AREAI gt Set START END Attribute Code Code bs Address i el Det
166. FFFF Data size C Ascii _Anpend Binary Size Bye E Output type Terminal File File name Browse Output port list address mask data sise output e Port Address Specifies a port address e Mask Data Specifies address mask Only the addresses whose bits are 1 are to be compared e Data Size Specifies a data output type When Binary is selected specify its size Byte Word Long e Output Type Specifies a port data output destination e Output Port List Displays the currently specified ports Output terminal When an output request is issued during program execution with Output Type set to Terminal the Terminal Window is displayed The output type also depends on Data Type 406 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION u Figure 4 7 7 Output Terminal Window Binary H 66666662H AAAAAAAZH AOAOAAOLH AAAAAOAASH 66606606 4 0OOAO012H 666666013H 66666614H 666606615H 66666016 66666622H 66666623H 66666624H 66660625H 66666626H 60000032H 66666633H 66660634H 66660635H 66666636H 666642H G66666643H 66666644 B6606645H G6666046H A 66652H 66666653H 666666054H 66660655H 66606656H 68 6662H 666066663H 66066664H 666066665H 66066666H 666 Dae AZOU AARAARARTFIU AAAAAAFLU RARAAARFOU ARARRARFAU anoa E Resetting an Output Port 1 Select the output ports you want to reset from Outp
167. Format 32 bit Intel HEX format 2h v Outputs start message Control of default option file IV Adjust I Start address record output Output file format HEX32 32 bit address v Adjust format Output range Auto Padding data H FF Change Other Option a Cancel Apply 318 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual 4 5 5 9 Setting Debug Options SPANSION a This section explains how to set debug options E Setting Debug Options 1 Click the Debug tab from the project setup dialog box The debug option setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 49 opens 2 Select category General Setup or Boot ROM can be selected as category E Setting Options in General 1 Set an alias file Clicking the button to the right of the input field enables file reference 2 When setting other options write them in Other Parameter Figure 4 5 49 Debug Option Setup Dialog Box Setup Project Target of setting MBSOF394 x Category General z Alias File Other Parameter Assembler Linker Librarian Converter Debug A E July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 319 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a Setting Options in Setup 1 Click the Debug tab from the project setup dialog box 2 Select Setup category 3
168. Guarded attribute Specifies an attribute for the space to be guarded Read Write Code e Remain Displays the remaining number of guarded areas that can be set Up to 8 areas can be set July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 455 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual Note When two areas set with different attributes overlap the following operation is performed Example If two areas are set as shown below a break occurs when the address 0x1800 is accessed regardless of read or write Address range Attribute 0x001000 0x001FFF READ 0x001500 0x002FFF WRITE 456 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 7 4 FLASH Memory Area Operation This section explains how to operate the FLASH Memory Area E FLASH Memory Area Operation Synchronization and erase are performed to the FLASH Memory Area as shown below e Synchronizing from an internal buffer in the debugger to FLASH memory e Synchronizing from FLASH memory to an internal buffer in the debugger e Erasing the FLASH Memory Area For details on synchronization of FLASH memory refer to 2 6 5 Synchronization of FLASH Memory in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Use Conditions This function can be used in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2100 01 E How to Use Select Setup Flash operation to display the flash dialog box Figure 4 7 61 Flash Dialo
169. ION a 4 6 1 Run This section explains the debugger program execution function E Run Run provides the following six functions Go When Go is clicked the debugger continuously executes the program from the current PC position When a breakpoint is reached or when Abort is selected from the Debug Menu the debugger stops program execution e Step In When Step In is clicked the debugger executes the step moves the PC to the address of the next instruction and stops When a function call instruction is executed the debugger stops at the beginning of the function e Step Over When Step Over is clicked the debugger executes the step moves the PC to the beginning of the next instruction and stops When a function call instruction is executed the debugger executes all the functions moves the PC to the next instruction address of the function call instruction and stops e Step Out When Step Out is clicked the debugger executes the current function to the end returns control to the function caller moves the PC to the next instruction address of the function call instruction and stops e Run Until Cursor When Run Until Cursor is clicked the debugger executes the program to the instruction immediately before the address indicated by the cursor in the Source or Assembly Window moves the PC to the address and stops e Power On Debug Refer to 4 6 1 1 Power On Debug Note When performing step execut
170. In the second line beginning ENTER the working to push Enter button is displayed E Display Error at Debugging The following error is displayed please terminate debugging and turn on the emulator again In case of RS 232C communication error please check the breaking of wire RS 232C Communication Error RS232C error Check Parameter Ilegal interrupt error System error Illegal INT REALOS founds abnormal state SYSTEM DOWN Please RESET 512 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX E Display on Emulator Software Support Manual SPANSION ua E Display Error at Loading Monitor Program to Emulator The following error is displayed please turn on the emulator and load monitor program again Erase Flash Memory Error Erase error Call to FUJITSU Write Flash Memory Error WRITE error Call to FUJITSU Error Occurs at Check RAM at start up RAM error Call to FUJITSU July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 513 APPENDIX APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface SPANSION Software Support Manual a APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface If a function call interface is changed how to use selected registers and how to pass arguments are also changed Thus the program will not operate properly if the existing function call interface called stack argument passing and a new function call interface called register argument passing are mixed Here are the methods and precautions f
171. LEVEL 3 Event is Hit Code event Code event Code event Code event Data event Data event Data event Data event 116 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 19 Sequence Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 When LEVEL 4 event is hit Figure 3 19 11 When LEVEL 4 Event is Hit Code event Code event Code event Code event Data event Data event Data event 4 When END event is hit Figure 3 19 12 When END Event is Hit Code event Code event Code event Code event Data event Data event Data event Note It is also possible to display in the Sequence Window the sequencer that has been set in the 3 level sequence setting dialog box Make sure however to use the 3 level sequence setting dialog box when changing its conditions Once the conditions are changed in the Sequence Window that sequencer can no longer be displayed in the sequence setting dialog box July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 117 a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 20 Real time Memory Window Software Support Manual v 3 20 Real time Memory Window This window is displayed only for the debug session It is used to display the contents of the mirror memory from the specified address in the real time area E Real time Memory Window An example of the real time memory window for MB2147 01 is shown in Figure 3 20 1 This window is used to disp
172. M41 00312 9E 281 a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a E Setting of MCU Change Dialog Box 1 Click MCU change button The MCU change dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 10 opens 2 From Current file choose the CPU information to be used If a CPU information file to be used is not found add it with the Add button for CPU information file list The MCU list for the selected CPU information file appears in Chip and Target MCU 3 Choose the MCU to be changed from the Chip and Target MCU and click OK button The change you specified takes effect Figure 4 5 10 MCU Change Dialog Box MCU change if Current file C Softune Lib 907 907 csv OK Chip Target MCU Ean FMC1BFX v MBSBF326454 v CPU information file list C Softunes Libs 9075907 csv Add i Current file Choose the CPU information file to be used The MCU list for the selected CPU information file appears in Chip and Target MCU Chip Choose a chip type Target MCU Choose a target MCU for the chip type that is chosen from the Chip area CPU information file list Lists the registered CPU information files Add Adds a CPU information file Delete Deletes a CPU information file that is chosen from the CPU information file list Note that the files that are retrieved by default cannot be deleted 282 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Pro
173. Menus 4 6 Debug a SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Setting of Hardware Break Setting dialog Figure 4 6 11 Code Break Hardware Setting Dialog e Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified e Type In this field the type of the breakpoint is selected Select Hardware Cannot select with MB2147 05 e Remain Displays the remaining number of breakpoints which can be set MB2147 01 or MB2198 displays at 10 points or less e Event list This button is used to display the event list dialog used to check the setting of all events This field is enabled for MB2198 or MB2100 01 e Debug area Sets the debug area required when breakpoints are set This is available with MB2147 05 350 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION va Details dialog MB2198 Detail button is pushed the following details dialog is displayed Figure 4 6 12 Code Break Details Dialog Hardware Code break point details Break address H 000000 o Address mask H FFFFFF Cancel Pass count D dir e Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified e Address mask Specifies mask value for specified address e Pass count Sets the number of times the data access passes through the specified address with specified attributes to break Details dialog MB2100 01 Detail button is pushed
174. N address setup program is started Select emulator name MB2141 Click Set Communication to set the RS 232C interface Click Read to read the current emulator setting status Set IP Address and Port Address The IP address and port address set values at the PC side are displayed Usually Universal is used as MAC Address However when using Local as MAC Address consult the LAN address administrator Select Exit from the Setup menu to exit the LAN address setup program 10 Press the emulator reset button button on rear to reset the emulator In case of MB2147 01 or MB2198 emulator this procedure is following 1 2 3 Connect the emulator to the PC with the RS 232C or USB interface Turn on the emulator Execute the LAN Address Menu from SOFTUNE V3 FFMC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench Tool of the Start Menu The LAN address setup program is started Select emulator name MB2147 01 MB2198 506 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX C Setting LAN Interface Software Support Manual SPANSION a 5 Click Set Communication to set the RS 232C interface 6 Click Read to read the current emulator setting status 7 Set IP Address SubNet Mask and Port Address The IP address SubNet mask and port address set at the PC side values are displayed 8 Usually Universal is used as MAC Address However when using Local as MAC Address consult the LAN address adminis
175. N eseina E a Ee ea AE a aaa E e eaaa aE Aa e EA 335 4 61 1 Power On Debug sics ieisvkn ini asra a A aa E Ea EER inns 336 4602 ADOM sisipe fancies aas ges a e else reaa ai a eaea dat eee eee 338 4 6 2 1 Abort Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 ssseesseesesessseesisessrserrsssirrsrrrssrrrsrrnnrnnsrrnnnrrnnrnnnernnne 339 4 6 3 Reset MGU sssrinin iede eaa daea ERA es ATE RESENSENT EEE ate 340 4 6 4 Break POME sarinaiur Riran ER REE EAE A EE EE AAEN EA 341 46 41 Code Break sssrinin oar ana oa aaa ea aa ia a Sae aN aN aa aai ARES 345 4642 Data Brea ise ci cast se ctecuetgct eased ks Arran an An EA AVENAR TESLA AAE NANDE ENERE AANA NAUSA EAA AE AASA ENNEA 347 4 6 4 3 Code Break Hardware ccccecsceeeeeeeeneeeceaeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeceaeeeseaeeesaaaeeseaaeessaaeeseeeeeesneeeenaaes 349 4 6 4 4 Code Break SoftWare sssini upadinen addaa anekani baidan aaae a aaea naad daei aa dias 353 4 6 4 5 Code Break Hardware Count cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeesecaeeeseaeeseeaeeseeaeeeseaeeesseeessaes 356 4 6 4 6 Code Break Hardware Data Watch cceccceecceeeteneeeeenee scenes eeeaeeeseaaeeseaaeeseaeeeteeeeesenaeeenaes 358 416 427 Dette Break E A E A etantine dieebecsbedacneae 361 4 6 5 VOI tvs ect stvansccvvesvessnocveds be ceenebse ceteris E ab ae cer eveadtcueieed E vnsel eteiyy 366 AGS Event LST secsec vines teens NAA ees SEEE EER cated RR eee 370 4 6 6 DEGUOICE rpe E a E a aa E a EENE 373 4 6 6 1 Sequence Setting MB2141
176. ON Software Support Manual a 2 11 1 Making or Building of Project SOFTUNE Workbench enables making or building for each project configuration E Making or Building of Project Make or Build in the menu applies to the active configuration of an active project If a subproject is defined priority is given to making or building of the subproject For details about how to change the active project and active configuration see Section 2 5 Setting Project and Section 2 8 Creation of Project Configuration E Making or Building Specified Project Select the project to be made or built in the SRC tab of Project window Select Make or Build in the shortcut menu The active configuration of the specified project is made or built If a subproject is defined priority is given to making or building of the subproject E Changing Subproject Configuration at Making or Building 1 Select Project Project Configuration Configuration at Build 2 Select the parent project and configuration When the Set Configuration at Build dialog is opened select the project to be set from the Project box The configuration of a subproject to be made or built is displayed 3 Select the configuration of a subproject Select the configuration to be made or built from Configuration of Subproject at Make Build 4 Click the OK button Stop is the function that forcibly suspends processing during make build compilation or assembling Exe
177. OONS scsi ans cecertamctcdancnsinsiditsrayoadiiens xuaedcunstvasecceeens 459 Top TOp OF ETO isisisi sinanasi Eroii 175 Trace Back trace wiscvcic sesticienctie ccosaitictacdesveieveessenrnvaeds 208 Data Watch Trace Trigger Details DialOg eee ceisie nc ceceesteneeeaetecaevisneterevien 222 Multi Trace Mode Setup Dialog 228 Other Trace Functions 00000 0cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 211 Sequence Trace Trigger Details Dialog 225 Sequence Trace Trigger Setup Dialog 224 Single Trace Mode Setup Dialog 227 WTPAC A EA AEE 42 205 Trace Acquisition Control While a User Program is RUNNIN fersinnen 214 239 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2141 sisssccteiinwieteeneein navies 213 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 O1 nsiisircsssini iniuriis 214 239 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 05 iriiri 230 SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 567 a SPANSION Software Support Manual v Trace Function for Emulator Debugger Vertical MB2198 4c isccctevndecctnsas essesi iacaa 233 Vert Call sognare neaei 470 Trace Function for Simulator Debugger 212 Viewer Trace Setup Dialog Filtering Tab a N E AEEA 126 aan itani deka seka Kentan aei 217 231 235 Trace Setup Dialog Trace Trigger Tab w dap N an ae Eaa Saanaa sadia 218 236 Trace Setup Dialog Trace Tab Warning E T 212 213 215 230 234 Method of Outputting Warning When ROM RAM Trace Trigger Details Settin
178. OW stv ccdecevivnsnsvin setts tecnnstsguieaveddcesisene ducts bne EE AA A ARES A SAA RASENE 82 3 1021 Setting Register Display sissioni isea aA EEKE EENE Eaa aE Ea ESEESE 83 BVT Momoty WINdOW tiesiskais anA ER NENEA OER E AKADE ESKER Aa 85 3 12 Local Variable WINdOW seesisrisrcanierosesrueunkainasans nerean tanaan Aae asane inei airaa iaaii eniin 87 BAS Watch WINdOW iiss cssicecdeasesitbarsieedseeiesaseier aa naaa aia iaaa a bese evi ee SEEEN AENEA T ania ees 88 3 14 Trace WiINdOW 00 0 cece ce cece anea center eet aaa a aaa ee eee sneer tea aaaaaeeee AIEA AENA E AEAEE NAAA AAEREN ONERA 90 315 Command WindOw cise sicaire aaa oa cdin cc tad E aa E aaa ag sal avec Aaa aaa A TERO 92 3 15 1 Setting Character String Replacement ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeesaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeees 94 3102 FOGOD oca E IRET EEE TEENA OO EEE OOT 97 316 Object WindOW isoissa tanien r aa Ea aaa EaR i Re dad dete 98 3 17 Coverage WINdOW ecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeetaee sense eeeaeeecaeeesaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeesenaeeseneeeneas 100 3 18 Performance WiINdOW ieces scscecices sede ceetecneseks eeeaeds oh eve haved sdeee pe nuns raan EEA PNEUEN N EEEE ETE iEn 102 319 SEQUENCE WiINCOW ceed seccctescevelesccdierss snneeestiecsdereriera enact slave aa da ieenueee ed tiered ra eda 109 3 19 1 Sequence Window MB2141 ccecceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeesgaeeseaeesecaeeeseaeeeseueeeseneeesaas 110 3 19 2 Sequence
179. PASS instruction 514 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface Software Support Manual SPANSION a F MC 16 Family SOFTUNE Linkage Kit Manual Mixing of objects with different function call interfaces in Linker Option rp to specify load module for register argument passing Option Xrp to specify load module for stack argument passing Mixing of objects with different function call interfaces in Librarian Option rp to specify output of library for register argument passing Option Xrp to specify output of library for stack argument passing F MC 16 FAMILY SOFTUNE Workbench Operation Manual Storing of Project Setup project General E Changing of Function call Interface To change the function call interface from stack argument passing to register argument passing use the following procedure Figure F 1 Changing of Function call Interface C Correct the Assembler source e g startup asm See Correcting assembler source D Y Is Workbench used for Build Yes No Specify the rp option for Compiler Assembler Linker and Librarian and rebuild See Changing without using Workbench Change the function call interface of the project to register argument passing and rebuild See Changing by Workbench July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 515 APPENDIX APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function
180. Path to fcc907s exe Version of F2MC 16 Family SOFTUNE Assembler File Path Path to fasm907s exe Version of F2MC 16 Family SOFTUNE Linker File Path Path to flnk907s exe Version of F2MC 16 Family SOFTUNE Librarian File Path Path to flib907s exe Version of SOFTUNE FJ OMEF to S FORMAT Converter File Path Path to f2ms exe Version of SOFTUNE FJ OMF to INTEL HEX Converter File Path Path to f2is exe Version of SOFTUNE FJ OME to INTEL EXT HEX Converter File Path Path to f2es exe Version of SOFTUNE FJ OMF to HEX Converter File Path Path to f2hs exe 480 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 9 Help Software Support Manual SPANSION a Product name Softune Workbench File Path Path to SiOsM907 dll Version Version of SiOsM907 dll F2MC 16 Family Debugger DLL Product name SOFTUNE Workbench File Path Path to SiD907 dll Version Version of SiD907 dll Debugger type Current debugger type MCU type Target MCU currently selected VCpu dll name Path and name of VCpu dll currently used VCpu dll version Version of the currently used VCpu dll SiDRVo dll version Version of the currently used MB2100 01 driver DLL MB2100 01 Common version Version of the common monitor MB2198 Monitor version Version of the monitor MB2141 MB2198 Configuration board ID ID of the configuration board MB2198 when configuration board is connected Configuration board version Vers
181. Project Software Support Manual Specify whether to suppress page change When a check mark is set to the left of Control of changing page page change is suppressed When page change is suppressed the line count cannot be set Select a Macro Development Department List from the drop down list No output SRC OBJ OBJ Set line count column count and tab count to the right of Line Column and Tab as required 302 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 5 5 Setting Linker Options This section explains how to set linker options E Setting Linker Options 1 Click the Linker tab from the project setup dialog box 2 Select category General Allocation Link Define Symbol List Output Absolute Assemble List Control Library or Register Bank can be selected as category Specified options can be checked using Option at the bottom of the dialog The macro description can be used to describe options For the macro description refer to Section 1 11 Macro Descriptions Usable in Manager of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Setting General Options Figure 4 5 37 General Option Setup Dialog Box Setup Project m General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari gt Category General x Outputs start message Target of setting MB90F394 v MV Outputs debug inf
182. Project Window 57 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Target Name srsseeeeeeeeesesensnns 49 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Workspace Name seseeeeeeeseseseeee 49 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on an Include File and Other User s Registration File sssseeeeeeeeesesesssnene 55 Building ischii rinise nsa 32 Configuration 65 is cesescnsniinooncensen jennsecbeeedense nas anes 523 Creating Project Configuration on Settings of Existing Project Configuration 0 cee 26 Creation of Project Configuration 0 008 26 Deleting Specific Active Project Configuration from Projet yvsstisteicetiecedecgnianeiess eerie 27 Menu Configuration 00 0000cceeeeee eee e ees 132 Project Configuration ssesssrerrrrrrrrrrrreeeeeee 328 Project Configuration Configuration at Bul cscicvvasasdapsias esnaera neiaa 331 Project Configuration Add and Delete 329 Setting Active Project Configuration 00 26 SOFTUNE Workbench Configuration 0000 3 Target System Configuration 508 Confirmation Confirmation of the Setting ste 38 Connection Section Disposition Connection Specifying 309 Setting Disposition Connection 0 000008 304 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual Constant Character Constant ccccsceceeseeesseeeeeese
183. R 2 Operation 2 10 Setting Linker Options SPANSION Software Support Manual v Reference Allocating sections to several areas can be continuously set by changing ROM RAM area name display in the uppermost part of the Setup Section dialog box The linker option setting dialog box need not be returned each time sections are allocated to an area 30 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 11 Make Build Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 11 Make Build SOFTUNE Workbench can create a program in two methods make and build E Make Compiles or assembles only the modified source file and then links all objects to the library to generate an object program SOFTUNE Workbench recognizes the dependency of the include files registered in the Dependencies category of the SRC tab of Project Window to compile or assemble the source file Use the Project Make Menu to execute make E Build Not only modified source file but compiles or assembles all the source files registered in the project and then links all objects to the library to generate a target file Use the Project Build Menu to execute build E Stop Stop is the function that forcibly suspends processing during make build compilation or assembling Execute stop with the Project Stop Menu during make build compilation or assembling July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 31 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 11 Make Build a SPANSI
184. R_EVENT info Argument typedef struct unsigned long unsigned long int unsigned long TIMER_EVENT Return value None Explanation total_cycle inst_cycle time_id cycle Posts the occurrence of a timer event set in the ISS Total cycle count Differential cycle count from previous event Set timer ID Count of cycles delayed Set the count of cycles generated during processing as the count of cycles delayed info cycle In the ISS this value is added to the cycle count If this event causes an error stop instruction execution by using SSDI_Request_Abort Remarks Set the timer event conditions in SSDI_Set_Timer 534 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual SPANSION va G 11 SSDI_Read_Memroy Read from Memory Format int SSDI_Read_Memory unsigned long addr int size int length void data Argument unsigned long addr Access address int size Access size 1 Byte 2 Word 4 LONG int length Read data count void data Data storage area Return value Count of data completely read If the return value is different from the read data count length an error occurs Explanation Reads data from memory The type of the data storage area data differs depending on the access size Byte 1 byte unsigned char Word 2 bytes unsigned short Long 4 bytes u
185. S Gvsesedscsnanncnsvereceosdwendss lt givwesthtauvanes se 396 Target System Configuration 508 Target System Creation Procedure 509 Task Detailed Display of Task ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 242 Template Template Function 0 0 c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 17 Terminal Window Terminal Window ccecccseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 128 Terminating Starting and Terminating SOPTUNE Workbench is csisceexeseveri tesa ceenscsiatecneivien 16 Terminating SOFTUNE Workbench 16 Text Processing a Newly Created Text 154 Recent Text File siistsscccsieescsverieenstonveessteravives 156 Time Measurement Function Time Measurement Function 0 ees 387 Timer Detailed Display of Timer Queue 246 Title WAGs sics caniticrennnesseainetsnthecesesenasaeavasaseseewoncrarenss 325 Tool Click the OK Button to Complete Tool NOUNS cicccevsanecxesvonsnacenme steed cceensesd deere 28 Example of Tool Setup eee eee ee eees 461 How to Register External Tool 496 Language TOS w ccissteccezsdneecnesaeeus ea aanas 2 Setting Other TOOlS wiivcccccsvsasscccnnnsccssccewaessdsvers 398 Starting an External Tool 00c ceeeeeeeees 468 TOOL Bar rasion eteccid avi ewes eee KAE 241 Tool Bar Status Bar cc eeeee cece eee e ees 186 TOOL Button List sccsnescseseccuensscencereadecevissaarccetenes 324 Tool Change Procedure rere ees 460 Tool Deletion Procedure eens 460 Tool Setup Procedure errr eens 460 T
186. Select Specify Batch File from the shortcut menu The Open File file dialog box opens 3 Select a batch file from the dialog box then click the Open button e Specify Alias File 1 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Specify Alias File from the shortcut menu The Open File file dialog box opens 3 Select an alias file from the dialog box then click the Open button e Set Character String Replacement 1 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Set Character String Replacement from the shortcut menu The Command Replacement dialog box opens For details see Section 3 15 1 Setting Character String Replacement Logging For logging see Section 3 15 2 Logging e Close 1 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Close from the shortcut menu July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 93 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 15 Command Window a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 3 15 1 Setting Character String Replacement This section explains how to set character string replacement in the Command Window E Setting Character String Replacement The aliases variables and macro names of the commands used in the Command Window can be defined E Alias The commands to be used often can be started simply by specifying their names Set and delete aliases in the following procedures e Adding an alias 1 Cl
187. Set Setup Name Set a different name from registered setup names 4 Click the Add Setup or Add Reference button Clicking the Add Setup button starts the Setup Wizard and adds the new setup See Section 4 7 2 5 Setup Wizard Clicking the Add Reference button reads information from the set file for setup When the file selection dialog opens select a file from the dialog then click the Open button Figure 4 5 50 Debug Option Setup Dialog Box Setup Project Target of setting Assembler Linker Librarian Converter Debug 4 MBSOF394 Category Sep xl Available Setup Name Simulator x Setup Name Add MB21 47 01 Browse Setup Name List Change Setup Name Simulator Change Delete i Cancel Apply E Deleting Debugger Setup 1 Click Debug tab from the project setup dialog box 2 Select Setup category 3 Select the setup name to be deleted from Setup Name List 4 Click the Delete button 320 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Changing Debugger Setup 1 Click Debug tab from the project setup dialog box 2 Select Setup category 3 Select the setup name to be changed from Setup Name List 4 Click the Change Setup button Setup Wizard is started See Section 4 7 2 5 Setup Wizard E Changing Setup Name 1 Click Debug tab from the project setup dialog box 2 Select Setup cat
188. Setting Debug Environment The Setting debug environment dialog box is used to perform various settings related to the debugger What is displayed in the dialog box varies as shown in the following table depending on the debugger and the state of its target Table 4 7 2 Tabs Displayed in Setting Debug Environment Dialog Box Debugger Execution EML MB2141 O MB2147 01 O MB2147 05 O MB2198 O MB2100 01 O Step execution Operating frequency Response speed x x x x XIXI O O x OJO O O xX xX xX O O O0 0 0 O O x xX xX O O O X O xiIX O X O O0 0 0 xX O xX xX O O 0 0 0 0 0 X x xX x x XI x O O xX OIX x O OOX ae anesnenmesm ean x x x x x Real time area The signs in the table show the following meaning O Displayed X Not displayed KO O O O 0 X O O0 0 0 0 O O O0 O0 0 0 X O O0 0 0 0 xX O 0 0 0 O xX O 0 0 0 0 X O 0 0 0 Xx SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 409 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual v E Setup Item in Each Tab Execution Tab Figure 4 7 9 Debug Environment Setup Execution Tab Tab Error output Load Frequency Break Response speed Execution Event Watch Radix Emulation Mo
189. Setup Project Menu 28 Shortcut Menu c c0ecceeeeee 63 65 73 77 80 82 86 87 89 91 99 101 111 114 119 122 129 Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Subproject Name 00cee 52 Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse on Setup Name cirrose enisinia 57 Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse on Space in the Project Window 62 Shortcut Menu Command Input Field 92 Shortcut Menu Other than the Command Input Field ssi dorana duutdl ban deed cdseaadesudenbndeceucey ides 93 Message Errot MeSsSages wesccsnsicsiccsnavescssens suas dccssteastceverne 498 Warning and Error Messages ccceeeeeeeees 520 Warning Message 0 0cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 498 Method Method of Outputting Warning When ROM RAM Area is Specified Outside Range of Internal ROMIRAM finsisciaccsescenssvvescesesatanceceeens 312 Method of Outputting Warning When Section is Placed Outside Specified ROM RAM Area RANGE cn cscpccinncdiscsnewsassscieesceassdzancttiares 312 Setting Method When Debug Information Existence Check for Library File Module is Inhibited E uanth eyebsnissetlevids 307 Migrating Migrating SOFTUNE Workbench to Debug SESSION E 33 Mode Multi Trace Mode Setup Dialog 228 Setting the Debugger Mode Environment lt 0 ds0cesiescssencvesceaneceeseenas 398 Single Trace Mode Setup Dialog 227 Modifying Modi
190. Software Support Manual a 4 5 5 8 Setting Converter Options This section explains how to set converter options E Setting Converter Options WwW N Click the Converter tab from the project setup dialog box To start the load module converter mark the Start load module converter checkbox Select a conversion format Motorola S format f2ms Converts the absolute format load module of linker output to an S format Data at addresses 0 to OXFFFFFFFF is converted 32 bit Intel HEX format f2hs Converts the absolute format load module of linker output to an HEX format Data at addresses 0 to OxFFFFFFFF is converted Intel HEX format f2is Converts the absolute format load module of linker output to an HEX8 format Data at addresses 0 to OxFFFF is converted This format is left to maintain compatibility with the previous version The 32 bit Intel HEX format f2hs should be used for conversion to an HEX8 format Intel Extend HEX format f2es Converts the absolute format load module of linker output to an HEX16 format Data at addresses 0 to OXFFFFF is converted This format is left to maintain compatibility with the previous version The 32 bit Intel HEX format f2hs should be used for conversion to an HEX16 format Set the following items as required Common Options Outputs start message V Control of default option file Xdof Options for Motorola S format f2ms Output file f
191. Specifies MCU operation speed Sampling timing Machine clock rising Sets sampling timing at machine clock rising External clock input rising Sets sampling timing at external clock rising External clock input falling Sets sampling timing at external clock falling Minimum measurement unit of timer 1us 100ns Specifies the minimum unit of execution time measurement TRIG Input Enable Disable Specifies whether to enable TRIG pin input Watchdog Enable Disable Specifies whether or not to enable watchdog timer while a program is running MCU Mode Real time mode Full trace mode Specifies an MCU operation mode When the debugging system does not have any MCU operation mode it does not appear on this dialog box Peripheral resources Stop at a break Continue operation at a break Specifies whether to operate or stop the peripheral resources at a break Peripheral resources continue operation while a user program is running regardless of this setting July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 427 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual v e Accepting DMA Permit Forbid Specify whether to transfer DMA at user program break Permit Enable DMA transfer at break When a user program has caused a break during the DMA transfer continue the DMA transfer Forbid Disable DMA transfer at break When a user program has caused a break during the DMA transfer suspend the DMA transfer Then start the DMA tr
192. There are cases communication between host system and target where the monitor debugger cannot be controlled The possible causes are e Execution is in progress the debugging state is Execute e The target program is running away In such cases restart the debugger as follows 1 Select Debug D Abort A or click the Stop button 2 Click Abort A in the Abort dialog In this case the MCU cannot be reset Ignore the error message even if it appears several times 3 When the warning Abort command error appears click OK 4 Stop the debugger and reset the target system Restart the debugger July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 511 APPENDIX APPENDIX E Display on Emulator a SPANSION Software Support Manual a APPENDIX E Display on Emulator MB2147 01 and MB2198 have the LCD to display emulator state E LCD Display at Normal State The following strings display at normal state Before Debugging NO CONNECT Enter Menu NO CONNET is shown by no connection with host At the location the spinning animation is displayed for waiting for command In the second line beginning ENTER the working to push Enter button is displayed After Debugging STATUS Vol Enter Menu In the first line beginning STATUS the target status is displayed at location The status is shown by EXEC or BREAK At the location the spinning animation is displayed for waiting for command
193. This section explains SOFTUNE Workbench logging E Logging To record a command execution log in the Command Window in a file is called logging To control logging click the right button of the mouse in the Command Window to display the shortcut menu then select Logging Selecting Logging from the shortcut menu displays the following submenus Start State Exit e Start 1 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Start from the shortcut menu The file dialog box for selecting a logging file opens 3 Specify a logging file name then click the Save button e State 1 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu 2 Select State from the shortcut menu The logging state display dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 5 opens 3 If necessary change the state and output message control 4 Click the OK button e Exit 1 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Exit from the shortcut menu Figure 3 15 5 Logging State Display Dialog Box Setup output H Logging name C S oftune sample sample log Status Enable Disable Cancel Control output message Display C Undisplay July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 97 SPANSION a gt CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 16 Object Window Software Support Manual a 3 16 Object Window The Object Window displays the object information used by REALOS
194. Trace End Multi trace End Address Resumes trace acquisition which was paused Pauses trace acquisition Stops trace execution Moves trace buffer to the next block Stops trace acquisition Specifies the address to be watched 222 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Address mask Specifies mask value for specified address e Size Byte Word Long Specifies access size at the time of data access e Attribute Read Write Write Read Specifies attribute at the time of data access e Comparison condition Specifies conditions of data comparison Disable Does not specify data for trigger condition Data agreement The case that the specified data matches is the trigger condition Data not The case that the specified data does not match is the trigger condition e Data Specifies the data for comparison e Data mask Specifies mask value for specified data Note Trace execution has to be forcibly stopped in order to make settings while a user program is running in trace enhancement mode And perform Start of trace after settings are made in order to validate the setting changes July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 223 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Sequence Trace Trigger Setup Dialog Perform the procedure below to set sequence trace trigger 1 Select Setup from the shor
195. Trace End Multi trace End Specifies operation of trace acquisition when hitting the specified address This is available only in trace enhancement mode Selectable items are shown below in each mode single trace mode multi trace mode Single trace mode Resume Resumes trace acquisition which was paused Pause Pauses trace acquisition End Stops trace execution Multi trace mode Trace End Moves trace buffer to the next block Multi trace End Stops trace acquisition e Remain Displays the remaining number of trace triggers which can be set The number varies depending on models e Event list Displays event list dialog window to check the event setting status Note Trace execution has to be forcibly stopped in order to make settings while a user program is running in trace enhancement mode And perform Start of trace after settings are made in order to validate the setting changes July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 219 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Trace Trigger Details Setting Dialog Perform the procedure below to set trace trigger for details 1 Select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window and then select Trace trigger tab 2 Select Code or Data for Type 3 Press Detail Details settings of trace trigger Figure 4 4 32 Trace Trigger Details Setting Dialog i oe Address H 000000 Trace control
196. U chip reset e Cancel Cancel abort request of MCU and return to the state prior to abort processing e Forcible stop Stop the MCU forcibly July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 339 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual VN 4 6 3 Reset MCU This section explains the MCU reset function of the debugger E MCU Reset Function The MCU reset function resets the MCU e Emulator debugger The MCU reset function issues the reset signal to the emulator For MB2100 01 select the operation to be carried out when resetting Chip reset Low level reset For details refer to Section 4 7 2 3 Setting Debug Environment e Simulator debugger As with the actual chip set the initial values of the registers to be initialized by reset and clear other registers to 0 In reset MCU breakpoints watch points map setting and program variables are not modified Notes e On emulator debuggers the PC value is normally set to a reset vector entry point in the target file after a reset On MB2198 however it is set to the starting address of the Boot ROM e The monitor debugger does not provide the MCU reset function 340 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 6 4 Break Point This section explains a breakpoint E Breakpoint The position where program execution by the debugger is to be stopped when the PC passes an add
197. UNE Workbench operation and the environment variables required by language tools e g compiler E Environment Variable Figure 4 7 1 shows the environment variable setup dialog box The environment variables listed in Table 4 7 1 are set in this section Table 4 7 1 Environment Variable Names Environment variable name Explanation FETOOL Standard directory in which language tools were installed INC907 Directory in which include file exists LIB907 Directory in which library file exists OPT907 Directory in which the language tool default option file exists FELANG Character code system switching in the messages output by language tools SJIS Japanese language shift JIS ASCII English PATH Directory in which language tools exist TMP Directory in which work files exist July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 399 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual va Figure 4 7 1 Development Environment Setup Environment Variable Dialog Box r tup Developme Environment Variable Workspace Value of Environment Variable Environm New Value C SoftuneSBIN C Wwindows spstem32 C windows C FETOOL C Softune INCSO C SoftuneSLIB SO INCLUDE F LIB907 C SoftuneSLIB S0 i FELANG ASCII OPTS07 C SoftuneSLiB S0 19 npPT CA Gafh matl IR 4 ui j Environment Variable PATH Change Value C Softune BIN C Windows sy Browse Explanation
198. W Source Window Memory Window Disassemble Window Realtime Memory Window Figure 4 3 5 Jump Dialog Box Debug Jump xs Type Address v Position H OOF30000 Cancel Window Source 166 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 7 Bookmark It is convenience in setting a bookmark for referring the location specified for source memory and edit windows often Once a bookmark is set there will be a mark on specified location This enables to jump to the specified location by using menu or key operation Bookmark will be validated until it is canceled E Bookmark Bookmark is a function to specify the location in window and enable to jump to the location by using menu or key operation E Compliant Window Bookmark is valid in following windows e Source window e Memory window e Edit window E Bookmark Menu Menu related to bookmark is located at Edit Bookmark in a menu Sub menu consists of 7 types as follows Menu becomes valid when it is in debug session or each window is activated e Bookmark e Setup cancel bookmark e Next bookmark e Previous bookmark e Next bookmark in the current window e Previous bookmark in the current window e Clear all bookmarks in the current window July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 167 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu ia Software Support Manual 4 3 7 1 Bookmark Source Window This se
199. ZE Loadmodulefile E xtension x Projecttile Path 8 Projecttile M ain Cancel July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 491 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 5 1 3 1 Registering Batch File This section describes registering a batch file in the customize bar E How to Register Batch File 1 Display dialog box Select View Customize Bar Setting to display the Customize Bar Setting dialog box Figure 5 1 10 2 Number Select the number to be registered in the customize bar 3 Kind Select Batch File 4 Entry Enter the batch file name to register in the customize bar You can specify using the Open File dialog box Figure 5 1 5 displayed when you click the reference button on the right 5 Parameter Input here when specifying a parameter for a specified batch file Use a comma to separate multiple parameters 6 Display the Parameter Setting dialog box Figure 5 1 6 To set a parameter when executing a batch file with the customize bar apply a check mark to this This is convenient when you want to specify change parameters each time you execute a batch file 7 Iconic To make Workbench an icon when executing a batch file with the customize bar apply a check mark to this 8 Add Check the input contents of 2 to 7 If they are correct click Add This completes the registration of a batch file The contents of the registratio
200. a 0000 Stack pointer 010410 Stack area 01021e 01041d e ID ID number e Address Task control block address e Priority current Current task priority e Priority activation Task priority at start up e Status Task state TTS_RDY Running or ready state TTS_DMT Dormant state TTS_WAI Wait state TSS_SUS Suspend state Wait factor The wait factor is displayed when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the object wait state TTW_SLP slp_tsk tslp_tsk wait state TTW_DLY dly_tsk wait state TTW_SEM wai_sem wait state TTW_FLG wai_flg wait state TTW_MBX rcv_msg wait state TTW_MPL get_blk wait state 242 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION va e Wakeup count Wakeup request count e Suspend count SUSPEND request count e Time out control data Timeout management data e Stack pointer Stack pointer e Stack area Stack area E Detailed Display of Semaphore Figure 4 4 46 Detailed Semaphore Display Dialog ID 0001 Close Address O006e2 Semaphore address o00844 Waiting task NONE e ID Semaphore ID number e Address Address of semaphore control block e Semaphore address Semaphore queue address e Count Current semaphore count e Waiting task number of task in queue July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 243 a SPANSION Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a E Detailed Display of Event Flag Figure 4 4 47 Detailed Event Flag
201. a watch break CODE Code break DATA Data break PERFORMANCE RESERVED Event not registered in sequence START Measurement start event END Measurement end event 372 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 6 6 Sequence This section explains each of the dialog boxes used to set a sequence E Sequence Open the window or dialog box that sets a sequence It allows you to set a sequence a latch or a delay count This function is available on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and MB2198 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 373 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 6 6 1 Sequence Setting MB2141 This section explains the Setup sequence dialog box for the emulator debugger MB2141 E Setting the Sequence The Setup sequence dialog box is used to set a jump level for each event The dialog box appears when you select the shortcut menu Area in the Sequence Window Figure 4 6 27 Setup Sequence Dialog Box lean sequence Level Moo Event i Cancel Jump level 2 x Trace control Enable Pass count D C Disable e Level Select a level 1 8 e Event Select an event 1 8 TIMER e Jump level Select a jump destination level 1 8 END e Pass count Set a pass count e Trace control Select Enable or Disable E Setting the Delay Count The Setup delay count dialog box is used to se
202. aced on the left side of Activate when stop source file which corresponds to break address while halting program execution should be activated On the other hand if the source file is not displayed open a source file that corresponds to break address regardless of specification 76 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 8 Symbol Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 8 Symbol Window The Symbol Window displays the target file name of the current project and the symbol names e g variable name and function name being used by the file in the tree view format E Symbol Window Figure 3 8 1 is an example of the Symbol Window Figure 3 8 1 Example of Symbol Window The load module name is displayed Global Symbol main The global symbol and the function name is m i displayed M value sort_val The local symbol name defined in the function Ui is displayed 0 j e local symbol and function name static 1n Qk The local symbol and fi i static i 0 max the module is displayed Op O thip Module name is displayed _ start target start sample __STD_LIB_divl E Shortcut Menu Jump Opens the Source Window of the specified function Watch Sets specified symbol as watch point Break See Section 4 6 4 Break Point Properties Displays symbol properties Mangled name
203. acquire Does not acquire trace data e Area number 1 2 Specifies the area number set for acquisition range setting of trace data e Address Specifies the start address of acquisition range of trace data e Address mask Specifies mask value to the start address of acquisition range of trace data July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 217 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual e Attribute Read Write Write Read Specifies the trace data attribute for acquiring Note Trace execution has to be forcibly stopped in order to make settings while a user program is running in trace enhancement mode And perform Start of trace after settings are made in order to validate the setting changes E Trace Setup Dialog Trace Trigger Tab To set the trace trigger select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window and then select Trace trigger tab Trace Trigger Figure 4 4 31 Trace Trigger Setup trace Trace Filtering Trace trigger Single trace Address e Address In this field the address or symbol that sets a trigger point is specified e Type Code Data Data Watch Sequencer In this field the type of the trace trigger is specified Data Watch and Sequencer are available only in trace enhancement mode 218 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Trace control Resume Pause End
204. aedsteec Anis ve aa eia 291 4 5 5 4 Setting Assembler Options ccccecececeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeceaeeeteaeeeeesaeeseaeesseaeeeseaeeeesaeeeseaeeetaas 298 4 5 5 5 Setting Linker Option sssini iaeia euebuesbeedeeveabt nesteeseevaneneess tecceeeea rene reanes 303 4 5 5 6 Section Disposition Connection Specifying ccccececceeecneeseneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeteeeeesenaeeeeaes 309 4 5 5 7 Setting Librarian Options scc0 csvis tiisin rnan aasia a aTa aa aa aS 314 4 5 5 8 Setting Converter Options ceceeeeeeeeeneeeeenee escent eeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaaeeseaaeeseaeeeseeeeesenaeeenaes 316 45 5 9 Setting Deb g Options sissie iaaeao aa Ea e A R aE EERE EERE 319 4 5 6 Setting Customize Build si sscdieeneser sees oidini rapi ay Eae aaa RAEN NSKA 323 4 5 7 Project DEPeNdenCles soerrenrionei anrea inon i ae R ER T ERE 327 4 5 8 Project Configuration siisii ninne aie Re Di nee ee ees 328 4 5 8 1 Project Configuration Add and Delete cccccccceeeeeeeeeneeeteneeeeeceeeseaeeseaaeeseaeeeseeeeesenaeeesiaes 329 4 5 8 2 Project Configuration Configuration at Build ce eceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeenaeeesaes 331 4 5 9 Include Dependencies gzciesescesdstieceueeveneeee yeas eee vedieveed vied eden vided ey 332 4 5 10 Compile Make Build ANd Stop cecccccccccenseceescnneeeeeeesnaeeeeesseaeeeeeecsaeeeesscneeeeeesssuseeeessesaaees 333 4 6 DODUG A E E ai hes E A E E E N ent aa eee ented 334 4 6 1 RU
205. aeeseeaeeeecaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeessaes 543 G 20 SSDI_Execute_MCU Execute Target Program c cccceseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseneeesenaeeseaes 544 G 21 SSDI_GetCurrentExecuteAddr Get the Address in Execution cc ccccceeeeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeaes 545 APPENDIX H Sample Project for the Semihosting Function ccccceeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeesenaeeeseaeees 546 APPENDIX I Major Changes is sicisc2svcectesiavecetsdeeesnicy oA eraadies eateeetete naar ede adios aia AE ona aaa ENTREE h 550 INDEX Ta a aa ts nn sae Saa a a eaea EE ee ea E a 551 z CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION CHAPTER 1 Outline of SOFTUNE Workbench SOFUTUNE Workbench integrates language tools and debuggers into one to provide the integrated development environment that totally supports processing from programming and debugging to creation of data to be written to ROM Language tools include a C compiler assembler and linkage tool etc Debuggers are a simulator debugger emulator debugger and monitor debugger 1 1 Outline 1 2 What is SOFTUNE Workbench 1 3 Procedure for Developing Programs with SOFTUNE Workbench July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E CHAPTER 1 Outline of SOFTUNE Workbench 1 1 Outline a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 1 1 Outline This section gives an outline of the development tools integrated by SOFTUNE Workbench E Language Tools I
206. aeesseeeeseneeessaees Version Information 2 sssiceciistcivnnsciies ty eeeieee hve ones AKETE tebe NEE PTEE eben ENAERE CHAPTERS Addin Module sisicieiccnsscenscrcenisnndadennstacnvisinadunsnisedvunesivansdininctwsnneasiwieienaan 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 CUSTOMIZE Ball spreen amne a e cs Pact cavecsnacdisascisves dex E Saga Eaa ea a aere TAa RAEE Whiatls Customize Bar siopesnonacsie eeen aaa ak aei Eaa aE AAEE EARKI NERE Customize Bar Menu ssuimonensanii ana n r nA ee eee he Registering in the Customize Bar ccccccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeseaeescaeeeseaeeeseeeeteiaeeseeeess 5 1 3 1 Registering Batch File sisi aives acestie wives ees este steed aeeeitiateeeeiveiine snide acetate E NEEE 5 1 3 2 Registering Workbench Menu ccccscccceeeesseceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesaneeeeeeeeeeeesesaeeeeeeeeneaaeeeeeees 5 13 3 Registering External Tool 2icicccnt anes ceetieedl aa NEEE AEAEE 5 1 4 5 1 5 Warming and Error Messages eicsiicssesstevesddecntenencevie neni eeabetnavavdeen deed AAEE Absbeta de ERENER PN OU AE E E E A A E E T E E eatacan tugs E ens APPENDIX wcsccicisiccsdecvtdstndscacatecetiesiunisdsiecsetennncwtesteishsoddacsgucscesheceksiwddertacusoshseaddsinesdecesesssests APPENDIX A List of Register Names ececcceeeesseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeaeaeessessaeeeeseeseeneeseeseeaeenseneaes APPENDIX B Downloading Monitor Program 0 ecceceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaaee
207. aeltestlbees cusviveaes 366 Event Mode Setting Event Mode 0 0 0 eee 205 Example Example wicccecssoctsecsseinecccassesswansvansveanseeeananertiaves 465 Example of Error Jump Setup ee 467 Example of Sequence Shift in Sequence WANK OW sicies tacisenectaesdevstateencecversanectentes 116 Example of Tool Setup eee eens 461 Executing Creating a Program Source and Executing Make Build sa sccsssscsscsdccnsssesteevesnvessdeavavanes 4 Designate Additional Option When EXO CUUNG vies inscctieccsasdeinartontedevarandeedeuns 325 SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 557 a aici Software Support Manual Executing Directory 0 0eeeeeeeee renee ees 325 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Execution on Library File Object File and Relative Execution File Name c ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 325 Format File scscsccscecesereseseesesesensenene 56 Make Build Execution cccccccccccccececcccccecccececcece 266 Target Filesi erien ear 396 Setting the SOFTUNE Workbench Execution Updating Include File Dependency 332 Environ Ment oecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccceceeee 398 When a File is Being Edited eects 157 Explanation When es o Open Project File is Being Pi MEG EE E e aad of Sample Program ssssssssrrrrrrrene 510 When Cinieutly Open Yori nare File 6 No Edited at All ics icse ccciisataasisagesesseceseriees 150 EX POUU ss 35 EE T 324 External I F Pilg Rame
208. ails Status Enable Disable List Area nu Status_ Type Address Type Adi START END Enter both the start condition and the end condition e Attribute Specify the attributes of the start end condition Select code or data as an attribute Code is the only available attribute for MB2198 e Address Specify the addresses or symbols to set the start end condition e Details Set the details of the start end condition Clicking the button the event details setting dialog box appears This item is only enabled for MB2147 01 368 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION Figure 4 6 25 Event Details Dialog fBrene decals x AREA START Address Attribute Address mask H FFFFFF 7 Read Size Byte M Write Comparison condition Disable C Data agreement Data not H 0000 H FFFF Cancel_ e Address Specify the addresses or symbols to set the start end condition e Address mask Specify the mask value for the specified address e Size byte word Specify the data size of data access time This item can be specified on MB2147 01 only e Attribute Specify the attribute of data access time This item can be specified on MB2147 01 only e Conditions for comparison Specify condition for data comparison This item can be specified on MB2147 01 only Invalid Data is not specified for the transition condition D
209. ails Setting Sets transition conditions of each level of sequencer for details Selecting the shortcut menu Setup on sequence window displays Sequence Details Dialog Figure 4 6 36 Figure 4 6 36 Sequence Detail Setting Dialog Sequence details x LEVEL LEVEL1 Address Pass count D Attribute H FFFFFF 7 Read Size Byte V Write C H 0000 H FFFF Conai e LEVEL LEVEL1 LEVEL2 RESTART LEVEL for which the transition condition is to be set is set e Address The address or symbol for which the transition condition is to be set is specified e Pass count The access count at the time of trigger hit is specified e Address mask Can not set Address mask in this debugger e Size byte word long The data size at the time of data access is specified 384 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Attribute read Write The attribute at the time of data access is specified e Comparison condition Can not set Comparison condition in this debugger e Data Can not set Data in this debugger e Data mask Can not set Data mask in this debugger Notes e This can be also set while a user program is running e In MB2100 01 this function is not available when the pass count mode is set to the pass count break mode For details refer to Section 2 4 3 2 Switching Debug Function in the SOFTUNE Workbench Use
210. ak which stops program execution when the trace buffer becomes full e Trace stop caused due to trace buffer full Stop No stop Specifies whether or not to stop the trace acquisition when the trace buffer becomes full e Trace state established before the trace trigger hit Acquire No acquire Specifies whether or not to acquire trace data before trace trigger hit after a user program is executed 216 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Trace Setup Dialog Filtering Tab To set the trace acquisition range select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window and then select Filtering tab Trace acquisition range setting Figure 4 4 30 Filtering Trace Filtering Trace trigger Single trace Code Verbose Acquire No acquire Acquire No acquire data trace Acquire allarea Acquisition area setting No acquire Area setting Area number 1 X Set Address H 000000 7 Read Address mask H 000000 M Write Ss e Code Acquire No acquire Specifies whether or not to acquire instruction trace e Verbose Acquire No acquire Specifies whether or not to acquire redundant data e Data trace Acquire all area Acquisition area setting No acquire Specifies trace data acquisition method Acquire all area Acquires trace data in all range Acquisition area setting Acquires trace data in specified range No
211. al E Connection Password In emulator debugger MB2100 01 when the security function is used with MCU equipped with the security function display a dialog that enters the connection password at starting debugging Enter the predefined password in hexadecimal If the password is not correct debugger cannot be started For details refer to Section 2 6 1 3 Security in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Figure 4 6 49 Debugger Connection Password Password Please enter the debugger connection password Password a Cancel E End Debugging End debug terminates the SOFTUNE Workbench debug session In emulator debugger MB2100 01 there are some precautions that are required to be carried out to end debugging For details refer to Section 2 4 2 Ending Debugging in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 397 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 7 Setup Setup sets SOFTUNE Workbench execution environment debugger mode environment and other tools E Setting the SOFTUNE Workbench Execution Environment e Development E Setting the Debugger Mode Environment e Debug Environment e Memory Map E Setting Other Tools e Tool e Keyboard e Editor e Error e Tool Startup 398 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 7 1 Development Development sets SOFT
212. al MCU W INF LIST D TEN 10 The following options can be set from the optimize option setup dialog Select the optimize option to set from the drop down list General purpose optimization level O None Level1 4 speed priority size priority 294 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Setting of Options Included in Detail Definition in Optimization Figure 4 5 30 Optimize Details Setup Dialog Optimization pre V Loop unrolling V In line expansion of standard library functions or replacement to equivalent function V Optimization of changing the evaluation method of arithmetic operation Optimization of argument area on stack IV Control optimization of pointer aliasing In line expansion of function below the specified number of lines 30 In line expansion of specified functions Function name PO List of function Delete Cancel The following options can be specified Loop unrolling K UNROLL In line expansion of standard library functions or replacement to equivalent function K LIB Optimization for changing type of evaluating method of arithmetic operations K EOPT Optimization of argument area on stack K ADDSP Control optimization of pointer aliasing K NOALIAS In line expansion of function below the specified number of lines x auto In line expansion of spe
213. al SPANSION a G 7 SSDI_Write_Event Post Write Format int SSDI_Write_Event WRITE_EVENT info Argument typedef struct unsigned long int unsigned long unsigned long unsigned long unsigned long WRITE_EVENT Return value 0 0 Explanation addr Access address size Access size 1 Byte 2 Word 4 LONG data Write data total_cycle Total cycle count inst_cycle Count of cycles from beginning of instruction cycle Count of cycles taken for access Write data enables Write data disabled Posts the occurrence of a write access event by instruction execution When write data is enabled the ISS does not write data to memory Therefore when write data is reflected in ISS memory data must be written by using SSDI_Write_Memory When write data is disabled data is written to ISS memory Set the count of cycles taken for write access as the count of cycles taken for access info cycle If this access cause an error use SSDI_Request_Abort to stop instruction execution Remarks The count of cycles from the beginning of the instruction inst_cycle is always posted as 0 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 531 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator a SPANSION Software Support Manual a G 8 SSDI_Execute_Event Post Execute Instruction Format void SSDI_Execute_Event EXECUTE_EVENT info Argument typedef struct unsigned long addr
214. ame sssssssssesssersses 61 Creating New Source Files ceeee rere 24 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Special Operation on a Load Module Name 59 Special Operati 196 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse paeta peratoris iea on a Source File Name 00 54 60 Specification ns Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Address Range Specification E 14 on a Space in the Project Window 57 File Name Specification sites teen teeneenetesntecane 6 15 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Simulator External I F Specification 00 524 on a Target Name c cccccssseeeeeeeees 49 Specifying Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Section Disposition Connection on a Workspace Name ecccseseeeeees 49 SPOCUYING adie viestbestaceetccsiczteenecedneeariece 309 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Split on an Include File and Other User s Split sae iach seeiis aiaa ianea NEEE Eai 471 Registration File ceeeesseeeeeeeeeaeeeees 55 SRC Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse SRG Tabiini 47 on Library File Object File and Relative SRC Tab Bitmap Image List cccccccseeseseseeeeee 48 Format Pile iis ccescacics ceteecceuseusvececsdenevdss 56 Stack SIM Gall Stac kepinanaienana en renee ter 386 Memory Map Setup SIM 449 Start Sequence Simulator Start Sequence Change Procedure
215. ame Figure 3 4 4 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 4 Shortcut Menu on a Target Name Set active project Create new folder Add Member to project gt Set Project Set Linkage order Make Build Executing linker or librarian Delete Project Property Open List File gt Open HEX File gt e Set Active Project The currently selected project is set in the active project in workspace July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 49 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window SPANSION Software Support Manual va e Create New Folder When selected the Create New Folder dialog Figure 3 4 5 is opened Enter the folder name and click the OK button When the folder name is entered the folder is inserted into the hierarchy immediately below the project The folders are listed in the order in which they are created Figure 3 4 5 Create New Folder Dialog Create New Folder x Name of a new folder Sa e Add Member to Project When selected the following two submenus are displayed File A member is added in files to the currently selected project See Section 4 5 3 Add Member At default a member is inserted into the hierarchy immediately below the project Directory A member is added in directories to the currently selected project See Section 4 5 3 Add Member At default a member is inserted into the hierarchy immediately below the project e Set Project A project is
216. and its configuration active July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 329 a SPANSION v Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Figure 4 5 57 Add Project Configuration Dialog Box Add project Configuration x Project name sample prj Cancel Configuration name _ oo 4 copy of setting MBSOF394 S The name of the project to which the configuration is added is displayed Configuration name Set the name of the project configuration to be added A copy of setting Select the configuration to which settings are copied E Setting Procedure For details of procedures for adding deleting and activating project configuration refer to Section 2 8 Creation of Project Configuration 330 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 8 2 Project Configuration Configuration at Build The configuration as a subproject is made or built is set E Project Configuration Configuration at Build Figure 4 5 58 Set Configuration When Building Dialog Box Set Configuration when building x Project sample prj Configuration MBSO0F394 z Configuration of sub project when make build E sample prj 3 A subpri prj Debug e Project Select the parent project of a subproject e Configuration Select the configuration of the parent project select in Project e Configuration of sub proje
217. ansfer when the user program is re executed Note MB2100 01 Do not access DMA to H 00010000 to H 000101FF while a user program causes a break e Even if Memory Verify Operation is Enable the flash memory is not verified Break tab Figure 4 7 25 Debug Environment Setup Break Tab Setup debug environment Execution Step execution Watch Radix Emulation Monitoring Directory Tab Emoroutput Load Frequency Break Default break point C Software Hardware 428 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION u Figure 4 7 26 Debug Environment Setup Break Tab f Setup debug environment l Execution Event Watch Radix Emulation Monitoring Directory Tab Error output Load Frequency Break Response speed Default break point Software break C Software Hardware Permit Forbid i Cancel The items that can be set for break related matters are as follows Table 4 7 14 Setup Item in Break Tab Debugger EML Default Breakpoint MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Software break e Default Breakpoint Software Hardware Specifies the default type of the code breakpoint Software Set breakpoint set by default to software break Hardware Set breakpoint set by default to hardware break e Software break Enable Disable Specify wheth
218. ask value for search address e Search data Specifies the starting address of the searched data e Data mask Specifies the mask value of the data address where the trace search e Searching start number Specifies number of frame where starts the search e Data size All Byte Word Long Specifies the searching start frame number e Access attribute Code Read Write Read Code Read Write Write Read Code Specifies a data access attribute for searching e Level change point search Specifies sequencer level transition This is not displayed during multi trace search SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 207 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual va Note The relationship among search address address mask and the actual address to be found is shown in Table 4 4 1 Table 4 4 1 Relationship Among Search Address Address Mask and Actual Address to be Found Search address Address mask Actual address to be found H FFFFFF H FOOOFOCA H FOFOCA H FF0000 Any address from H F00000 to H FOFFFF E Back Trace Can be displayed from the trace data displayed in the trace window for Specified frames Select Back Trace from the shortcut menu Figure 4 4 22 Back Trace Dialog Back trace x Frame number D13 lt lt Previous Next gt gt e Frame Number Specifies frame number corresponding to trace window 208 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4
219. at can be set for monitoring related matters are as follows Table 4 7 8 Setup Item in Monitoring Tab Debugger EML Control realtime MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Control Window Sampling time Control realtime Sets realtime control Monitoring Monitors the memory while suspending the CPU operation temporarily during execution Real time monitoring Monitors the memory without suspending the CPU operation during execution When real time monitoring is selected the memory window is not monitored only the real time area is monitored on the watch window Control Window Memory window Specifies whether to monitor the memory window Watch window Specifies whether to monitor the watch window Real time Memory Window Specifies whether to monitor the real time memory window This can be specified only when real time monitoring is enabled e Sampling time Sampling time Specifies sampling time The minimum values vary depending on debuggers as shown below MB2141 MB2198 1000ms MB2147 01 MB2147 05 100ms MB2100 01 100ms July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 419 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual va Note Emulator debugger In the IO which has side effects by Read Write or in the flash memory area during erasing or writing Read Write by the emulator operation generates same side effects It has the attributes
220. at compile assemble If placing a check mark for this item the options to be specified when the C compiler or assembler is started will be displayed in the output window This is disabled by default Inquiry for saves at close workspace If placing a check mark for this item the confirmation message will appear when you close the workspace to determine whether or not to overwrite the workspace file This is enabled by default July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 401 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual DS Inquiry for saves at compile assemble If placing a check mark for this item the confirmation message will appear before compiling or assembling to determine whether or not to overwrite the file currently edited This is enabled by default Termination message are highlighted at make build If placing a check mark for this item the display color of the termination message abort no error warning error fatal error or fail during start during compile assemble make build can be changed This is disabled by default To change the display color click the Detail optimize button to the right of this field Display color dialog Figure 4 7 3 for the termination message is displayed Change the display color Figure 4 7 3 Display Color for the Termination Message Display color of messages j Display color Abort _ No Error _ Waming Fatal Error m Fail During Start O
221. ata agreement The case where the data matches the specified data is the start end condition Data not The case where the data does not match the specified data is the start end condition e Data Specify the data access time data This item can be specified on MB2147 01 only e Data mask Specify the mask value for the specified data This item can be specified on MB2147 01 only July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 369 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 6 5 1 Event List This section explains how to display a list of specified events E Event List The event list displays a list of the currently specified events E Use Conditions This function can be used in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2147 01 MB2198 MB2100 01 E How to Display Perform one of the followings to display event list dialog e Displaying in the menu Select Debug Event e Displaying in the dialog box Click the Event list button in the following dialog boxes Trace trigger setting dialog box See Section 4 4 8 Trace Break dialog box Code and Data tabs See Section 4 6 4 Break Point Sequence setting dialog box See Section 4 6 6 Sequence E Displayed Contents How the event is set is displayed 370 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 4 6 26 Event List Dialog Box Event Event li
222. ata at the time of data access e Data mask Specifies mask value for specified data July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 363 SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual Details dialog MB2198 Detail button is pushed the following details dialog is displayed Figure 4 6 22 Data Break Details Dialog Data break point details a Address H DFOOOO Attribute H FFFFFF wits Address mask HFFFFFF 7 Write Pass count Dl Access detect Size iv CPU Byte V Don t care M DMA Comparison condition Disable C Data agreement Data not H o000 H FFFF Cancel _ Address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified Address mask Specifies mask value for specified address Pass count Sets the number of times the data access passes through the specified address with specified attributes to break Syze Byte Word Long The monitoring data size is specified Don t care A break condition is applied when the specified address is accessed regardless of the access data length Attribute Read Write ReadWrite Specifies the attributes when data accessing Access detect CPU DMA CPU DMA Specifies detection method of the bus master at the time of data access Comparison condition Disable Data agreement Data NOT The data comparison condition is specified Disable No data is specified for break condition Data agreement Data agreement data agrees with th
223. ation C Copy No copy Start Address Specifies the start address to be set End Address Specifies the end address to be set Area Operation Specifies an area operation type Copy or Not Copy July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual va e Map Setup EML Figure 4 7 55 Map Setup Dialog Box External area Internal ROM area Start address H o00000 Append End address H o00000 attribute V Read V Write l Code Type Emulation C User Setup possibility user 6 emulation 6 Figure 4 7 56 Map Setup Dialog Box External area Internal ROM area Area number 1 v Start address H FCo000 Append End address HFFFFFF attribute IV Read E Write vd Code Setup possibility user 6 emulation 6 Start Address Specifies the start address to be set End Address Specifies the end address to be set Attribute Specifies a memory space attribute Read Write or Code Type Specifies a setup area type 452 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual e Map Setup SIM Figure 4 7 57 Map Setup Dialog Box EPI PREETI a Start address H o00000 End address H o00000 Cancel m attribute M Read V Write l Code Setup possibility 21 Start Address Specifies the start address to be set End Address Specifies
224. automatically in the corresponding address The address where the memory dump is to be started can be changed by changing the address field display July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 193 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual v E Add Bookmark Please click on the right button on memory window to display shortcut menu Then select Add bookmark Add bookmark Dialog will be displayed Figure 4 4 5 Figure 4 4 6 Figure 4 4 5 Add Bookmark Dialog Address Add bookmai Color SS tances Area Address C Symbol Start address H 000200 End address a 000ZDF Figure 4 4 6 Add Bookmark Dialog Symbol Bookmark name H 000200 Color E Cancel Area C Address Symbol Variable name H oo0o0zDo e Bookmark name To specify the name of bookmark Default will be changed as follows depending on setup made in Area If the Area is Address Start address If the Area is Symbol Variable name e Color To specify the color of background in bookmark e Area To specify the method for determining the address range of bookmark Address Specify with start address or end address Symbol Specify the address range with the name of symbol 194 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Start address To specify the start address of bookmark e End address To specify the end address of b
225. ayed thereby selecting a session to be restored immediately after the activation enabled Monitor debugger setup has now been completed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Changing the Description of the Setup File A created setup file is displayed in the project window Figure 4 7 50 Setup File 7 2 R sample sample abs sample prj H E Source Files Include Files Dependencies 3 Debug EM MB2147 01 sup Simulator sup 1 Right click on the setup file to be changed and select the Change Setup menu A setup wizard where the current settings are reflected is displayed 448 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 7 3 Memory Map Memory Map sets the debugger s memory map E Memory Map Setup SIM e Map List Figure 4 7 51 Memory Map Setup Dialog Box a Setup map Ex Map list Map list address attribute A 000000 OOOL TF read write 000180 00027F code read write a 000360 OOOBFF read write ooocoo 00423F undefined 004240 OOTFFF code read write 4 uw b Map Area Displays the currently set map area Clicking the Setup button opens the setup dialog box Figure 4 7 51 corresponding to the debug session July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 449 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software S
226. break trace trigger and sequencer functions A sequenced event is displayed with its source level and destination level in the Detail column Figure 3 19 7 Event List fe Event f Event list Number _ Function Address_ Symbol 1 SEQUENCE DF0002 START gt Lv3 2 SEQUENCE DFO28F main Lyv3 gt Lv4 3 SEQUENCE DFO2C3 Ly4 gt END 4 SEQUENCE DFOOCE sort_val Lyv4 gt LvB 5 SEQUENCE 000040 Lv6 gt Lv3 GC 9 aes oa B sss All delete Cancel When an event on the event list is used in a function other than the sequence function i e break or trace trigger its entire row is displayed in gray in the Sequence Window as shown in Figure 3 19 8 This indicates that no event can be set in the row July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 115 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 19 Sequence Window SPANSION Software Support Manual Figure 3 19 8 When Event Setting is Disabled E Example of Sequence Shift in Sequence Window The following section shows an example of when the sequencer shifts in the Sequence Window The yellow part indicates the current sequence shift status which is updated at a break 1 Before sequence start Figure 3 19 9 Before Sequence Start LEVEL 4 Code event gt artup asm Code event gt main Code event gt huple cs7 Code event gt sort_va Data event Data event Data event Data event 2 When LEVEL 3 event is hit Figure 3 19 10 When
227. call Interface a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Details of Changing of Function call Interface Correcting assembler source To change the function call interface from stack argument passing to register argument passing use the following procedure to correct the assembler source 1 Description of REG_PASS pseudo instructions When the rp option is specified Assembler outputs the object for register argument passing However only with the rp option Assembler cannot distinguish between the input assembler source for register argument passing and the input assembler source for stack argument passing The REG_PASS pseudo instructions indicates the assembler source for register argument passing When the rp option is specified if Assembler assembles the assembler source where the REG_PASS pseudo instructions is not described Assembler will output an error When changing the assembler source for stack argument passing to the assembler source for register argument passing describe the REG_PASS pseudo instructions The REG_PASS pseudo instructions can be described anywhere preceding the END pseudo instructions Example of description of REG_PASS pseudo instructions PROGRAM _func TITLE _func register argument passing REG_PASS 2 Changing the how to pass arguments If a function with arguments is defined in the assembler source and is called change the how to pass arguments t
228. call interfaces Explanation arguments by the stack Passes function arguments by the stack This is a default setting arguments by registers Passes selected function arguments by registers These processings reduce the code size and stack usage to improve the program execution speed Note For details of the function call interface see APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface 280 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 5 2 MCU This section explains the items that can be set generally in the Setup Project dialog E Setting of MCU 1 Click the MCU tab in the Setup Project dialog 2 Set the following items as needed Chip Classification Target MCU Set CPU Execute Mode Set CPU information Figure 4 5 9 Setup Project Dialog MCU Setup Project x Target of setting General MCU c Compiler Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt MBSOF394 z Chip Classification sB FMC16Fx v ICU change Target MCU MBSBF326454 x Set CPU Information Cancel Apply Chip Classification Selects the type of chip Target MCU Select the target MCU of the chip type selected in Chip Classification MCU change Opens MCU change dialog box Set CPU Execute Mode The Set CPU Operation dialog is opened Set CPU Information The Set CPU Information dialog is opened July 31 2015 C
229. can be specified Memory Model model Const variable in RAM ramconst July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 297 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 5 5 4 Setting Assembler Options This section explains how to set assembler options E Setting Assembler Options 1 Click the Assembler tab from the project setup dialog box 2 Select category General Define Macro Include Path Target Depend or Output List can be selected as category Specified options can be checked using Option at the bottom of the dialog If the individual option is set the Common Option button can be clicked to return to the common option The macro description can be used to describe options For the macro description refer to Section 1 11 Macro Descriptions Usable in Manager of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Setting General Options Figure 4 5 33 General Option Setup Dialog Box Setup Project General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt Category General x F Outputs start message Target of setting MB90F394 v V Outputs debug information warming Level Level 2 v V Control of default option file Other Option The following options can be set from the general option setup dialog box Outputs start message V Outputs debug information g Control of default option file Xdof 298 CM41
230. cannot be restored 28 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 10 Setting Linker Options Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 10 Setting Linker Options When creating a program with SOFTUNE Workbench be sure to set a memory map with a linker option E Automatic Setting of Linker Options In SOFTUNE Workbench the following linker options are automatically set on the basis of information on the MCU selected when a new project is created e Specify the internal ROM RAM address of the MCU in the memory area option Internal ROM is output under an area name of _INROMxx and internal RAM under an area name of _INRAMxx where x is numbered consecutively starting with 01 e Set the automatic disposition mode to mode 2 optimum automatic disposition by linker When creating a program in a mode other than the single chip mode or when customizing the disposition of sections set the Disposition Connection option as the linker option E Setting of Linker Options In SOFTUNE Workbench specifying memory mapping is basic to the disposition of each section in the memory area Therefore set a memory area and set each section in the memory area E Setting of Memory Area Enter a ROM RAM area name start address and end address select an area attribute ROM or RAM then click the Setup button This setting is displayed in the ROM RAM area list In the ROM RAM area assign a unique ROM RAM name so that it doe
231. ccccceeeeeee 334 Debugger Control When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug Session ees 334 Display Error at Debugging 0 0 ees 512 End Debugging 0 0 seseseseseseseeseeeneneneeeees 397 Information Display When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug Session 480 Information Display When SOFTUNE Workbench is not in the Debug Session 479 Migrating SOFTUNE Workbench to Debug DOSSIOM eisir rednia ina aaaea 33 Power o Deb g siiriisnssiirsreinsinsnnatnnis 336 Procedure to Select Debug Function 438 Setting Debug Environment seseesesesesessernrene 409 Setting Debug Options ssssseereeersesesnsssnnrnne 319 Setting Method When Debug Information Existence Check for Library File Module is Inhibited E E A EA 307 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Debug Category ee 54 Starting Debugging ssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrereeee 34 397 When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug DOSSIOM E T 157 Window Display Debug Session 008 186 Debugger Changing Debugger Setup ee 321 Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Targetes eterin a Eara 508 Debugger Control When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug Session seeereeeeeeesese 334 Debuggets cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 555 a SPANSION Software Support Manual a Deleting Debugger Setup
232. ccccseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaaee 273 Add Project ciseicccicetncstcdretinsincntnasisctianntestecenssankk 268 Add Project Existing Project eeeeeee 271 Adding Registers vs ccicccscsnnsecicenentassdevtnnwescccessnanerts 83 Project Configuration Add and Delete 329 Addition Customization Procedure Keyword Addition 0 0 0 69 Procedure for Addition 006 271 273 274 Address Address Frm as sesine i ccantaidesacanctasidbvenen teases 6 Address Range Specification sssrsrrrrrrrereeses 14 Bank Addressing eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 Bit Addressing cccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 Full Addressing ccccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 Monitoring Address eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 Notes in Addressing 0 0cssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 311 Operators Usable in Data and Address Primula a cnc cis ccc ccecennaede gceseeecnesteceseeeneens 12 When a Section is Allocated to the Specified Starting PNOOECSS aie ac casteatactantensahustiatsiavintennies 310 Alarm Handler Detailed Display of Alarm Handler 246 Alarm Queue Detailed Display of Alarm Queue ee 247 Alias AMIS esiaine eaan e easi 94 552 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual Allocation Bookmark Changing the Section Allocation Order 311 Add Bookmark 000 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 Analysis
233. cence 33 Program Suspension ABORT Switch 509 Project ACU VG ProjeCtasisinsier snang 267 Add PLOJCCbicitseccs devernnpucnetedadeveihenesesstatenrecsanuces 268 Add Project Create ee ee eee 269 Add Project Existing Project cccecceeeee 271 Adding a Currently Opened Project to Workspace ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 22 Adding a New Project to Currently Opened Workspace ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 22 Adding Project sic i sseedeseeviiesnivviededeaeviveese 22 Adding the Created Files to the Project 24 Adding the Created Files to the Project with Their Entire Directory s 24 Creating a Project cc ccs 4 17 34 Creating Project Configuration on Settings of Existing Project Configuration eee 26 Creating Workspace Duing Project Creaton sists tecitizsenecssinais ccserseedessiaeieeies 20 Creating Workspace when Opening a PLOJOCUsseveslectecis rroen 20 Creation of Project Configuration cc 26 Defining Subproject Between Existing PHOJCCIS scccssessicdsnienoosnssastbanseaskansayeenednare 25 Deleting a Project Added to Workspace 23 Deleting Specific Active Project Configuration from PHOjeCt wvicieiiee recite escieids eee 27 Deleting Subproject from Project ee 25 SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 563 a SPANSION Software Support Manual a Deleting the Files Added to the Project 24 Met
234. ception Occurrence ICE Execution Speed Setup ICE execution speed Execute speed Normal Cancel Execute Speed Sets ICE operation speed High Speed Normal July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 285 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Setting of CPU Information e Setup CPU information IRQ and ICR Figure 4 5 17 CPU Information Setup Dialog IPQ and ICR K Setup CP n Delayed Interrupt Standby Control Register Intelligent 1 0 Service MCU Limit Check Internal Instruction RAM Area Internal 1 0 Area Internal RAM Area IRQ and ICR Specify external interrupt and correspond ICR i Cancel Relationship between Vector and ICR The correspondence between external interrupts Vector and the interrupt control register ICR varies with the target MCU This correspondence is specified by the simulator debugger Setting Correspondence between External Interrupts and ICRs Set the interrupt control registers ICRs corresponding to vector numbers When a vector number is selected and the Change button is clicked the dialog shown in Figure 4 5 18 opens Figure 4 5 18 Correspondence Between External Interrupts and ICRs T Interrupt an Vectorl1 lerO Cancel 286 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Setup CPU Information Delayed Interrupt
235. ch is not in the debug session the specified source file is displayed in the edit window e Property File information is displayed See Section 4 3 9 Property 56 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse on Setup Name Figure 3 4 17 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 17 Shortcut Menu on a Setup Name Start Debug Change Delete Property e Start End Debug During debugging session the confirmation dialog Is the current session ended to start debugging is displayed Select YES The current debugging is ended and then debugging is started based on the specified setup information During non debugging session debugging is started without displaying the confirmation dialog Debugging can be started only in the active project In debug session only the valid setup changes from Start Debug to End Debug When End Debug is selected debugging is ended e Change The setup wizard for changing the setup setting is started see Section 4 7 2 5 Setup Wizard e Delete Debugger setup information is deleted from the project Valid setup information cannot be deleted To delete change the valid setup temporarily e Property Setup information is displayed see Section 4 3 9 Property E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Space in the Project Window Figure 3 4 18 sh
236. cified functions x Setting In line Expansion of Specified Functions 1 Select the Optimization category The Set Optimization dialog See Figure 4 5 30 opened Set Optimization level to any values other than 0 and click Detail button Specify Function name Click the Set button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 295 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual E Ganceling In line Expansion of Specified Functions 1 Select the Optimization category The Set Optimization dialog See Figure 4 5 30 opened 2 Sets Optimization level to any values other than 0 and click Detail button 3 Select the function name to be deleted from Function list 4 Click the Delete button Note If an optimization level is changed options set in the Detail Definition Dialog are initialized according to the optimization level E Setting of Options Included in Language Specifications Figure 4 5 31 Language Specification Option Setup Dialog Target of setting MBSEF46R5E Z catego Z Common Option Language specification CTreat floating point numbers for which suffixes not specified In line expansion of the function which qualified by _ interu Treat as volatile the variable which qualified by io Treat most significant bit of char type as sign bit In line of ITRON system call development If int type specified in bit field treat most significa
237. ct directory created 10 Click the OK button When REALOS is selected as the project type Configurator Setup Wizard is displayed For details see SOFTUNE REALOS Configurator Manual The project directory is created in the directory set in step 9 18 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 3 Creating Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a Subdirectories are also created in the project directory Debug Debug ABS Debug OBJ Debug LST Debug OPT Stores information for each project configuration The default project configuration name is Debug when creating a new project For details of the project configuration see 2 8 Creation of Project Configuration Stores the target file Stores the object file Stores the list file Temporarily stores the option file to start the language tool Notes e If REALOS is not installed REALOS project template cannot be used e When using a REALOS project as a template project if the kernel header file name is same as the name of the template project exclude the file for copying Create a new kernel header file by performing make build after project creation e If the teplate project of REALOS projectis used the external reference symbol file name may be changed When a build error occurs change the external reference symbol file name referred in the user program External reference symbol file name e g R_project file name h
238. ct files Recent Project File stores up to five most recently opened workspace files E Recent Text File Of the source files opened in the Source Window Recent Text File stores up to five most recently opened source files It enables to open the desired text file immediately by selecting it The files in the Edit Window are not stored here E Recent Workspace File Of the used project files Recent Workspace File stores up to five most recently opened project files It enables you to open the desired project file immediately by selecting it Note If a text or project file has been already deleted or moved to another directory it cannot be opened even if it is listed here 156 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 2 11 Exit Exit terminates SOFTUNE Workbench E When a File is Being Edited The dialog box for asking the operator whether to save the file being edited opens Yes Saves the file being edited and terminates SOFTUNE Workbench No Terminates SOFTUNE Workbench without saving the file being edited Cancel Does not terminate SOFTUNE Workbench E When the Workspace is Open The dialog box for asking the operator whether to save the current workspace information opens Yes Saves the current workspace information in the file No Does not save the current workspace information in the file Cancel
239. ct template directory see 4 7 1 Development When the directory where the template project is stored is specified for new project the same source files are shared If you do not share the same source files specify another directory for new project E Creating a Project Perform steps below to create a project For details see 4 2 1 New 1 Select Workspace Project File for File type on the creation dialog box nan WwW N Select the File New menu Select the Project tab on the creation dialog box Select Create New Workspace Select an option for creating project When selecting Blank project A new project is created without using template project Every option is set to default and there is no project member When selecting Template A new project is created based on template project When selecting Browse for template Specify project template stored in other directories After specifying template project perform same steps shown in When selecting Template July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 17 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 3 Creating Project SPANSION Software Support Manual a 6 Select a project type Select Project type which is the type of target files managed by the project Table 2 3 1 shows the project types you can select Table 2 3 1 List of Project Type Project type Description Absolute format ABS Creates an executable load module which can be loaded into
240. ct when made built Select the configuration of the subproject as the configuration of the parent project selected in Configuration is made or built E Setting Procedure For the setting procedure see Section 2 11 1 Making or Building of Project July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 331 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 5 9 Include Dependencies Include Dependencies updates include file dependency E Updating Include File Dependency This command function checks all the source files in the project file and registers all the include files being used by the source files in the project The registered include files are displayed in the Dependencies category field of the SRC tab of Project Window 332 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 10 Compile Make Build and Stop This section explains the functions of Compile Make Build and Stop E Compile Compile compiles only the specified source file irrespective of whether other source files and include files are corrected However compile does not link the specified source file This command also assembles the specified file when the file is an assembler source file E Make Make checks all the source and include files in the project and compiles or assembles only files which have been modified since the last Make or Build If some library and object
241. ction explains the operation when source window is activated E To Display a Dialog Bookmark By selecting Edit Bookmark Bookmark dialog as shown in Figure 4 3 6 will be opened This dialog is to indicate the list of bookmark set in source window Figure 4 3 6 Bookmark Dialog Source Window i Bookmark mya Source Memory Bookmark position cs oftune sample 9074Project sample c 33 Add Bookmark list Delete Position All delete C Softune sample 9074Projectsample c _Abdelete_ C Softune sample S074Project sample c Jump Close e Bookmark position This is a field to specify the position to set a bookmark Entering relative path function name or label name into the field can specify position of bookmark e Bookmark list The list of bookmark which is currently set in a source window will be displayed Name Name of bookmark will be displayed Name of bookmark will be appeared as line number or symbol name Position File name of which bookmark is set will be displayed Line Line number where bookmark is set will be displayed Symbol Symbol which is allocated to bookmark name will be displayed If a symbol is allocated Bookmark position will be updated based on debug information although the line number of symbol changes along with the change in file Please refer to Note for allocatable symbol 168 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Softwa
242. cute stop with the Project Stop Menu during make build compilation or assembling 32 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 12 Debugging Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 12 Debugging The absolute file created as a result of normal termination of make build can be debugged immediately after SOFTUNE Workbench has migrated to the debug session E Migrating SOFTUNE Workbench to Debug Session To enable SOFTUNE Workbench to debug the absolute file migrate it to the debug session To migrate SOFTUNE Workbench to the debug session select Start Debug from the Debug Menu First debugging after project creation Setup Wizard for debuggers is started Set the type of the debugger and others 4 7 2 5 Setup Wizard Second or subsequent debugging after project creation Start SOFTUNE Workbench in the debugger mode that has been already set To change the type of the debugger select the Debug End Menu to terminate debugging once and then change Project Project Setup Menu E Automatic Downloading of Monitor Program In case the following emulator is used the debugging environment is determined from the emulator type and version etc of the downloaded monitor program when proceeding to the debug session to download the optimum monitor program automatically APPENDIX B Downloading Monitor Program MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 E Loading the Target Program When SOFTUNE Workbench enters the
243. cutes fixed length memory pool system calls e Ready Queue Executes ready queue system calls e Cyclic Handler Executes the system calls related to the cyclic handler e Monitoring Switches whether to enable or disable monitoring e Properties Displays object properties e Close Closes Object Window For details on the above items see Section 4 4 11 Object July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 99 a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 17 Coverage Window Software Support Manual AS 3 17 Coverage Window The Coverage Window displays the coverage measurement result This window is displayed only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session E Coverage Window Figure 3 17 1 is an example of the Coverage Window The Coverage Window displays the coverage measurement result at debugging This window is displayed on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger For details on the coverage function see Section 4 4 12 Coverage Figure 3 17 1 Coverage Window 16 address Unit FREAAEBIL Bee Ernim Display tab This line is not scrolled Measured address Count of access Unaccessed l to F Accessed count of in 16 addresses All 16 addresses were accessed Coverage rate Figure 3 17 2 Coverage Window 1 address Unit Measured address address 00 01 02 034 04 05 06 07 08 09 04 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F CO
244. d by executing disassembling at the specified address E Disassemble Window Example of the disassemble window displays at Figure 3 9 1 Figure 3 9 1 Disassemble Window Assembly boba RW3 02 e GE LSLW A RWO The position of the current instruction moo pointer is displayed RWO 4214 Mov A 14 7833FE MULUW A RW3 02 The position at which the breakpoint is set is displayed An address is displayed A machine code is A mnemonic is An operand is displayed displayed displayed E Function e Breakpoint setting releasing A breakpoint can be set or released by left clicking gt O of O at the left edge of the disassemble window e Instruction execution at specified line address An instruction can be executed at the specified line address by left clicking of gt O of O at the left edge of the disassemble window Step execution step into is also enabled by clicking the left mouse button at the PC location e Drag and Drop By dropping function name label or address from source window to disassemble window display will be jumped to a location where an address of dropped character string is shown e Display coverage Coverage can be displayed on a machine instruction basis from the shortcut menu Display coverage This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed s
245. d uses of the products Any semiconductor devices have an inherent chance of failure You must protect against injury damage or loss from such failures by incorporating safety design measures into your facility and equipment such as redundancy fire protection and prevention of over current levels and other abnormal operating conditions If any products described in this document represent goods or technologies subject to certain restrictions on export under the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law of Japan the US Export Administration Regulations or the applicable laws of any other country the prior authorization by the respective government entity will be required for export of those products Trademarks and Notice The contents of this document are subject to change without notice This document may contain information on a Spansion product under development by Spansion Spansion reserves the right to change or discontinue work on any product without notice The information in this document is provided as is without warranty or guarantee of any kind as to its accuracy completeness operability fitness for particular purpose merchantability non infringement of third party rights or any other warranty express implied or statutory Spansion assumes no liability for any damages of any kind arising out of the use of the information in this document Copyright 2004 2015 Cypress All rights reserved Spansion the Spansion logo MirrorBit Mir
246. d watch windows Please refer to description about drag and drop at each window for operation done after dropping character string e Display coverage Coverage can be displayed on a source line basis from the shortcut menu Display coverage In Mix Display coverage is displayed on a machine instruction basis Update of the source window is required to display the latest coverage This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger 72 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 7 Source Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Shortcut Menu There are twelve menus below Edit Update Inline Assemble Find Jump Go to Current Go to Defined Line Breakpoint Set Reset Breakpoint Enable Disable Break Watch Stack Set coverage Property Display coverage Mix Display Activate when stop Close e Edit Opens the edit window Updates the contents of the source window It is used when the source program is updated after the FLASH memory is changed by the user program for instance See Section 4 4 3 Assembly Opens the character string search dialog box Figure 3 7 2 Displays jump dialog box Displays current PC location Goes to the line defined by a function This function is to set or to cancel the breakpoint pointed by cursor To make breakpoint in the line pointed by cursor enable or disable See
247. d when the Apply or OK button is clicked The directory can be described in a relative path from the project If two or more target items are set the values are displayed as follows e Edit If the values are equal in all target items they are displayed as they are If the values are not equal in at least one target item they are blanked e Check button If the values are equal in all target items they are displayed as they are If the values are not equal in at least one target item they are dimmed Figure 4 5 6 Setup Project Dialog Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt MBS0F394 i B 43 Source Files Project E sample c C Softune sample S07 Project sample pri eneee R startup asm Project Type Funcion call interface Loadmodule ABS Stack argument passing 7 Targetfile Name sample abs Output Directory Targetfile Directory MBSOF394 ABS Browse Objecttile Directory MBS0F394 0 BJS Browse Listfile Directory MBSOF394 LST Browse Cancel Lp CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION va E Setup Target The items to be set in the combo box and tree view at the left side of the dialog are specified e Target of setting combo box All the configuration names of projects in workspace are displayed Configuration name The selected co
248. dard editor E Setting the Standard Editor Some standard editor functions can be customized items that can be customized e View Line feed mark Tag code mark EOF code mark Line number Ruler Automatic indent Colored display of C keyword Colored display of ASM keyword Colored display of user keyword Colored display of comment statement e Color Bookmark Error line C keyword Assembly keyword User keyword Comment statement Line Feed Tab e Font e Tab count e Keyword to be highlighted E Customization Procedure View 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the edit window to display the shortcut menu then select Customize from the menu The standard editor dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 2 opens 2 Select the view item you want to set or reset then click to the left of the item 3 When not setting other items click the OK button When selecting a color and so on set all the related items then click the OK button 68 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor Software Support Manual SPANSION va E Customization Procedure Color 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the edit window to display the shortcut menu then select Customize from the menu The standard editor dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 2 opens 2 Click the color button of Bookmark Error C Language or ASM Language On the View2 tab
249. data and address formulas E Symbol The symbols used in the source program can be referenced as addresses they have the type information generated by the C compiler and other accessory information The accessory information generated by the assembler is label information Each symbol consists of a module name a function name and a symbol name Specify these names as follows module name function name symbol name When the source program is written in the assembly language module name is the name written in the operand of the PROGRAM statement When it is written in the C language module name is the name of the source file to be compiled Function name is a function name written in the C language it is valid only when the source program is written in the C language To distinguish a global symbol from others write it as symbol name Table 2 1 1 shows symbol description No Japanese character strings can not be used for symbols Table 2 1 1 Symbol Cannot Description Description Contents Symbol Local symbol in function gt static symbol in module gt global symbol Global symbol Symbol Local symbol in the specified function in the current module function symbol Static symbol in the specified module or global symbol defined in the specified module Module symbol Local symbol in the specified function in the specified module Module function symbol Symbol in cla
250. defined macro __REG_PASS__ is assembled without the rp option set 0 Example of description of predefined macro __REG_PASS__ PROGRAM_ func TITLE_ func if _REG_PASS___ register argument passing REG_PASS endif Note With the function call interface for register argument passing return values from the functions of registers RWO and RW1 are not guaranteed Do not use these registers across function calls July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 517 APPENDIX APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface SPANSION Software Support Manual Changing by Workbench Change the function call interface of the project to stack argument passing When the function call interface for register argument passing is selected the rp option is specified automatically when Compiler Assembler Linker and Librarian start up 1 Changing the setting of the current project Change the function call interface of the project to register argument passing in the Setup Project dialog of the project Figure F 2 Setup Dialog of Project f p Proje Target of setting General MCU G Compiler Assembler Linker Librari 4 gt MBSOF394 bd anemose isi Project Project Type Function call interface Loadmodule 4BS 7 Register argument passindiiad Targettile Name sample abs m Output Directory Targetfile Directory MBSOF394 A4BS Browse Objecttile Directory MBSOF
251. displayed e Value The value of the selected expression is displayed e Radix The base in which the value is given is displayed e Type The type of the selected expression is displayed e Address The symbol address of the selected expression is displayed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 185 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a ia Software Support Manual 4 4 View Menu The View Menu displays each window It also sets the tool bar and status bar to view or nonview E Window View Non view The View Menu can set the following windows to view or non view Project Window Output Window E Window Display Debug Session The View Menu displays the following Debugger windows Symbol Assembly Register Memory Local Watch Trace Coverage Performance Command Object Realtime memory RAM Checker Sequence Terminal Tool Bar Status Bar The View Menu can set the tool bar and status bar to view or non view The set of tool buttons displayed in the tool bar can be also selected using the View Menu Tool Bar Status Bar E Display Non display the Window Switching Using the Tab This function enables to choose whether the tab is displayed or non displayed for switching By using the switching tabs it enables to switch edit source memory or watch windows easily Tab E Font related Items The fonts for each window can be changed Fonts 186 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menu
252. displayed in the tree view format E SRC Tab Figure 3 4 2 shows examples of displayed contents of the SRC tab Figure 3 4 2 SRC Tab Workspace sample a Workspace name E sample abs sample prj Debug H 3 Source Files _io_mbxxxxx_AVic _io_mbxxxxx_timer c Target file name of project It is followed by the project name and active configuration name The active project is given in bold type D _io_mbxxxxx_uart obj fig mondeb lib samplel c sample2 c Folder that can be deleted When opened the files and folders stored are displayed Source Files and Include Files are created at default sample3 c K start asm Library file name 3 Include Files E samplet h Source file name E sample2h E sample3 h Include file name Dependencies H _io_mbxxxxx h H _io_ mbxxxxx idh E Debug lt m Dependencies category the names of the files in which dependencies are detected are displayed The category cannot be deleted E eml sup sup lt sim sup File in the Dependencies category i subpr prj lt _ _ _ subprjrel subprjprj Debug Debug category When opened the setup name stored is displayed The category cannot be deleted Setup name Subproject name
253. dition Always enter both START and END e AREA AREA1 Specifies an area for measuring performance Only AREA1 is available for this debugger e START Code Data Specifies a performance measurement start event Enter an address after selecting an attribute and click the Set button Clicking the Reference button opens a Performance Trigger Details Setup Dialog Box e END Code Data Specifies a performance measurement end event Enter an address after selecting an attribute and click the Set button Clicking the Reference button opens a Performance Trigger Details Setup Dialog Box e Event list Displays a list of currently set events For details see 4 6 5 1 Event List July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 259 a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a Performance Trigger Details Setup Dialog Figure 4 4 67 Performance Trigger Details Setup Dialog Event details exa AREAT START Address Attribute H FFFFFF M Read Size Byte V Write O O L H 0000 H FFFF Cancel e Address Specifies an address to set performance trigger e Address mask Cannot be specified for this debugger e Size Specifies data size at the time of data access Byte Word Long e Attribute Specifies an attribute at the time of data access e Don t care size Cannot be specified for this debugger e Comparison condition Cannot be specified for this debugger e Data Cann
254. dow SPANSION Software Support Manual va E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Debug Category Figure 3 4 11 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 11 Shortcut Menu on a Debug Category Add Setup gt Property e Add Setup When selected the following two submenus are displayed New When selected the Create New Setup dialog Figure 3 4 5 is opened Enter the setup name and click the OK button When the setup name is entered the setup wizard is started For details about the setup wizard See Section 4 7 2 5 Setup Wizard Reference When selected the Create New Setup dialog Figure 3 4 12 is opened Enter the setup name and click the OK button When the setup name is entered the Select File dialog is opened Select the file and click Open button Information is read from the specified file e Property Information on folders is displayed see Section 4 3 9 Property Figure 3 4 12 Create New Setup Create New setup xa Setup Name poe E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Source File Name Figure 3 4 13 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 13 Shortcut Menu on a Source File Name Open Compile sample1 c Set gt Delete Property Open List File gt Open Assemble File 54 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Open When SOFTUNE
255. dress of external bus access area Address Range Specifies address range list of external bus access area e CPU Execution Operation Setup Exception Occurrence Figure 4 5 14 CPU Execution Operation Setup Dialog Exception Occurrence a External Databus Width _ External Bus Access Area Exception Occurrence ICE Execution Speed Exception occurrence outside of executable internal RAM Enable Disable Cancel i Exception Occurrence Outside of Executable Internal RAM Sets CPU execution operation when exception occurs during execution of internal RAM area Enable Disable 284 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a e CPU Execution Operation Setup Upper mask for Internal Instruction RAM Figure 4 5 15 CPU Execution Operation Setup Dialog High Order Mask Internal Instruction RAM Area Exception Occurence ICE Execution Speed External Databus Width External Bus Access Area Address Upper Mask for Internal Instruction RAM area Write address upper mask on internal instruction RAM area Write address upper mask H OOO0FF j Cancel Write Address Upper Mask Specifies high order write address mask in external instruction RAM area e CPU Execution Operation Setup ICE Execute Speed Figure 4 5 16 CPU Execution Operation Setup Dialog ICE Operation Speed External Databus Width External Bus Access Area Ex
256. e Displays the file size e Modified Displays the date and time of the last file update e Tab size The size of tab code is displayed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 181 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 3 9 3 Property Source Window This section explains the property in the Source window E Property General Figure 4 3 16 Property Source Window General Source file General File name sample c Directory C Softune sample S0 Project Browse Tab D S Size 1646Byte Modified 14 57 48 Tuesday June 17 2003 Cancel e File name The full path to the selected file is displayed e Directory Displays the directory in which the source file exists valid only when Source Window information is displayed When changed the directory is searched and the found source file is redisplayed e Tab Displays the tab size It is possible to change e Size Displays the file size e Modified Displays the date and time of the last file update 182 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual 4 3 9 4 Property Symbol Window SPANSION a This section explains the property in the Symbol window E Property General Figure 4 3 17 Property Symbol Window General a Symbol General Symbol void main Scope Storage class global Address H F 9028F
257. e 3 14 1 is an example of the Trace Window Figure 3 14 1 Example of Trace Window F Trace Single ko l Es step no address mnemonic q Column title This line 06078 FCOOSE MOVW RW1 047E 06077 000182 internal write access 047E A startup asm 190 BRA LABEL4 06076 FCOOAL BRA start LABEL4 is not scrolled startup asm 201 MOV A RWL FCOOBS MOV A RUL E Trace Data The trace window displays different contents depending on the type of debugger or display mode For details refer to the following sections in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Simulator debugger 2 1 11 3 Display Format of Trace Data MB2141 2 2 8 7 Display Format of Trace Data MB2147 01 2 3 6 6 Display Format of Trace Data MB2147 05 2 4 5 4 Display Format of Trace Data MB2198 2 5 6 4 Display Format of Trace Data MB2100 1 2 6 9 1 Displaying Trace Data E Trace Function For the trace function see Section 4 4 8 Trace 90 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 14 Trace Window Softwar E Shortcut Menu Event mode Refresh Start Abort Jump Back Trace Cycle RAW data Instruction Source Measurement point Event hit information Setup Find Save Clear Close e Support Manual SPANSION va See Section 4 4 8 Trace Refresh Trace Window See 4 4 8 Trace See 4 4 8 Trace See 4 3 6 Jump See 4 4 8 Trace Displays trac
258. e Mouse MB2141 on Library File Object File and Relative Memory Map Setup MB2141 EML sannananaanananna 450 Format File assener ninis prki ieaie 56 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger Li e MB2141 i osictincriescctssxeentveteit catddenraess 252 Line Assemble 190 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger Laine NumDET ossiani 10 OMARA A L inapitadesnaa eaae neater a Linker MB2147 01 Automatic Setting of Linker Options 29 Memory Map eeu Mee eee EN Semig LALfBehO PHONG ensien ioe enren 303 0000 eneen coeeeeeeeeneeceneessnternnieesnieeaaesaay 451 Setting of Linker Options 29 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 sssccszsccsssicuctasteseisiataceatnc 253 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 eee ctseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 214 239 MB2147 05 Memory Map Setup MB2147 01 MB2147 05 EML T E E EAT 451 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB214 7 05 iscsicsscvcccecevssascdvevenssicedieten 230 MB2198 Access Guarded Areas Setup MB2198 Emulation DeDUSSING wiciccccevensseseseescsssssveasesanctan 455 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2198 sisiccdesisenecccaeesteseavbeessecesateees 256 Setting Options in Boot ROM Only MB2198 oo eeeeeeeeeeeessenneeeeees 321 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2198 ssisscssssetccctaservessatnanvecceeierss 233 MCU MCU Reset Function ccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 340 set
259. e Section 2 5 Setting Project 274 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 4 Setup Workspace The basic setting regarding workspace is performed E Setup Workspace Figure 4 5 5 Setup Workspace Dialog Setup Workspace E Setting ETY Debug when workspace is open Not Start Debugger Start Debugger Start Wizard l Save debug setup file debug environment when debug ends No Save Save Inquiry Save l Auto load the targeted file after make build debug session NoLoad Load Inquiry Load Cancel e Debug when workspace is open Specifies the debug action just after the workspace opens Not Start Debugger Start Debugger Start Wizard e Save debug setup file debug environment when debug ends Specifies whether to save setup information upon completion of debug session No Save Save Inquiry Save e Auto load the targeted file after make build debug session Specifies whether to reload target file after make build executed in debug session No Load Load Inquiry Load July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 275 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 5 5 Setup Project Setting regarding the project is performed E Setup Project The Setup Project dialog has the part where the target item is set and the part where setting is performed The set values are enable
260. e Sequence Window When all of the jump levels are set including END the sequencer setting procedure is completed 110 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 19 Sequence Window Software Support Manual SPANSION va E Shortcut Menu The Sequence Window has the following seven shortcut menu e Area See Section 4 6 6 Sequence e Delete Deletes sequence setting e Delay Count See Section 4 6 6 Sequence e Set Latch See Section 4 6 6 Sequence e Display Latch See Section 4 6 6 Sequence e Event See Section 4 6 5 Event e Close Closes the Sequence Window July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 111 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 19 Sequence Window SPANSION Software Support Manual a 3 19 2 Sequence Window MB2198 This section explains the Sequence Window of the emulator debugger MB2198 E Sequence Window Figure 3 19 2 and Figure 3 19 3 show examples of the Sequence Window The window clearly indicates the set sequence conditions and the current shift status An event to which trace acquisition control is set is displayed in color as shown in Figure 3 19 2 Trace acquisition start Blue Trace acquisition stop Red Figure 3 19 2 Sequence Window LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 4 LEVEL 5 LEVEL 6 END gt gt gt gt gt rtup asun gt nain Code event Code event gt gt gt gt gt hump le c gt gt gt lt lt lt lt lt
261. e execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Clear all bookmarks in the current window Click on Clear all bookmarks in the current window at toolbar Find Click on All delete at tab Memory in the Bookmark dialog Note Symbol which can not be allocated to the name of bookmark will be member of automatic variables structure union and class If some symbols with the same name are defined other symbol than assumed one may be used To specify a symbol with the same name please determine the name of module and function name first then specify a symbol 172 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 7 3 Bookmark Edit Window This section explains the operation when edit window is activated E To Display a Dialog Bookmark By selecting one of following menus dialog as shown in Figure 4 3 8 will be opened This dialog is to display the list of bookmark that is set to an edit window 1 Edit Bookmark Bookmark 2 shortcut menu of Edit window Bookmark Figure 4 3 8 Bookmark Dialog Edit Window Bookmark C Softune sample 90 Proiect sample c 33 Close C Softune sample 907 Project sample c 70 Exa Add Be ae Jump Delete e Bookmark list The list of a bookmark file name line number which is set currently to an edit window will be displayed e Add button Setup of
262. e is displayed H 000001A0 Structure members are displayed val H 0000194D name 16 The value of a pointer variable is displayed D 0 struct An array variable is displayed A structure variable is displayed Each element of the array variable is displayed State of monitoring is displayed blue on red off Drag and Drop 1 Sort variables in the window If you register multiple variables in the window you can change the order of the variables by dragging a variable and dropping it into a desired place 2 Cooperation between the watch windows You can copy move the variables by dragging a registered variable and dropping it into another watch window If you drag a structure member only the member is copied to another window and the structure remains in the original window Multiple selection of variables You can select multiple variables at a time for the batch operation as follows Copy Move by drag and drop Setting of the radix Delete On Off of monitoring 88 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 13 Watch Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Shortcut Menu There are eleven menus below Radix Set Element Edit Delete All Delete Monitoring Individual setting Memory window Property Close Property See Section 4 4 7 Watch If multiple
263. e item to set the path e Append Path Sets the path to be added Clicking the Browse button to the right of the Append Path setup field enables path selection Click the Append button after enter e Directory Displays the currently set directory When deleting the directory click the Delete button after selecting it July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E SPANSION a a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual v Tab tab Figure 4 7 19 Debug Environment Setup Tab tab Setup debug environment x Execution Step execution Watch Radis Monitoring Directory Tab Eror output Load Tab D S P Cancel The item that can be set for tab related matters is as follows Table 4 7 10 Setup Item in Tab Tab Debugger MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 e Tab D 4 D 8 Uses the number of characters to specify an indent width for the source window 422 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Man ual Error output tab SPANSION a Figure 4 7 20 Debug Environment Setup Error Output Tab Setup debug environment In GUI operation Step execution Directoy Tab Execution Monitoring V Dialog Output window In command operation l Dialog V Output window In batch operation l Dialog V Output window The items that can be set for matters related t
264. e project currently used July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 481 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 9 Help SPANSION Software Support Manual Language Language currently used Help file path Path to the help file File Output Saves the data displayed in the version information dialog box into a file The default file name is SOFTUNE_SYS txt Reference When you contact us about SOFTUNE Workbench please provide us with the information displayed in the above dialog box 482 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION CHAPTER 5 Addin Module This chapter explains SOFTUNE Workbench Addin module 5 1 Customize Bar July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 483 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 5 1 Customize Bar This chapter describes the Customize Bar of the SOFTUNE Workbench 5 1 1 What is Customize Bar 5 1 2 Customize Bar Menu 5 1 3 Registering in the Customize Bar 5 1 3 1 Registering Batch File 5 1 3 2 Registering Workbench Menu 5 1 3 3 Registering External Tool 5 1 4 Warning and Error Messages 5 1 5 Note 484 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar Software Support Manual SPANSION a 5 1 1 What is Customize Bar This section describes the customize bar and how to install it E What is Customize Bar The customize bar registers batch files Workbench menus and e
265. e result in cycle mode Valid when the emulator MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 or simulator debugger is used Displays trace result in cycle mode Valid when the emulator debugger MB2198 is used Displays trace result in instruction mode Displays trace result in source mode Valid when the emulator or simulator debugger is used See 4 4 8 Trace See 4 4 8 Trace See 4 4 8 Trace See 4 4 8 Trace See 4 4 8 Trace Clears display mode trace buffer Closes Trace Window Cycle RAW data Instruction source 1 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu Select Cycle or RAW data Instruction or Source from the shortcut menu The trace result is displayed in the selected mode and a check mark is displayed to the left of the selected submenu Notes e Find Save of the shortcut menu is only enabled in the following cases When there is no data in the trace buffer MB2147 01 e Start Abort and Event hit information in the shortcut menu become valid only when the debug function is in Trace Enhancement mode For more information please refer to Section 2 3 1 6 Debug Function in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual MB2198 e Measurement point in the shortcut menu becomes invalid only when an expansion trace board is used MB2100 01 e Update Setup Find of the shortcut menu is only enabled in the following cases A user program has already sto
266. e selection field ww When a read only file is opened Protect is displayed When the Caps key is locked CAP is displayed When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the character overwrite editing mode Overwrite is displayed The cursor position is displayed in line column E Shortcut Menu e Source Window Opens the Source Window e Undo Undoes the last editing e Redo Redoes the canceled editing e Cut Moves the selected character string to the clipboard July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 65 a SPANSION ua CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor Software Support Manual Copy Copies the selected character string to the clipboard Paste Pastes the character string in the clipboard to the cursor position Delete Deletes the selected character string Select All Selects all characters in the buffer Print Prints the file Add to Project Adds the file being edited to the active project Find Opens the character string find dialog box Replace Opens the character string replacement dialog box Search File See Section 4 3 5 Find in Files Jump to Specified Line Opens the jump line number specification dialog box Bookmark See Section 4 3 7 Bookmark Set Standard Editor See Section 3 6 1 Setting Standard Editor Status Bar Switches status bar display for each window Property Display file information properties Source Window Clic
267. e specified data is specified for the break condition Data NOT Data mismatch data does not agree with the specified data is specified for the break condition 364 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual e Data Cannot set Data in this debugger e Data mask Cannot set Data mask in this debugger SPANSION a Note With the following conditions this function can be set while a user program is running e With MB2147 01 Setting breakpoint while running is enabled e With MB2198 Setting breakpoint while running is enabled e When MB2100 01 is used July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 365 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 6 5 Event This section explains how to set SOFTUNE Workbench events E Use Conditions This function can be used in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2141 E Setting Events Events can be set from the event dialog box shown in Figure 4 6 23 MB2141 event mode Normal Figure 4 6 23 Event Dialog Box Event Event Event Event number 1 v Set Address HOOUADE No symbol Address mask HFFFFFF Data Hooo Size lWod Data mask HFFFF Access attribute ReadWrite v External probe data Extemal probe data 7 Not specified for data Event list no en dis stat addr a_msk data d msk ep e p msk sy 1 enable R W 000D FFFFFF 0010 F
268. e step in operation by INTP instruction Event tab Figure 4 7 12 Debug Environment Setup Event Tab Ta Setup debug environment xA Radix Emulation Chip Debuggingarea Parallel port Monitoring Directoy Tab Enoroutput Load Execution Step execution Event watch Event mode Single trace Multi trace Performance Cancel July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 413 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual Figure 4 7 13 Debug Environment Setup Event Tab f Setup debug environment x Tab Error output Load Frequency Break Response speed Execution Event Watch Radix Emulation Monitoring Directory Function selection run time Time measurement Performance Function selection Pass count Sequence C Pass count break Cancel The items that can be set for event related matters are as follows Table 4 7 5 Setup Item in Event Tab Debugger Event mode EML MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Function selection execution time Function selection pass count e Event mode Single trace Multiple trace Performance Selects event mode Single trace Multiple trace Performance The event function is used for trace control Trace trigger and sequencer functions are enabled The event function is used for multiple trace control The event fu
269. e the trace buffer full break which stops program execution when the trace buffer becomes full e Trace stop caused due to trace buffer full Stop No stop Specifies whether or not to stop the trace acquisition when the trace buffer becomes full Trace Setup Dialog Filtering Tab Trace acquisition range setting Figure 4 4 40 Filtering Setup trace Trace Filtering Code Verbose ic Acquire e No acquire Acquire ic No acquire data trace Acquire allarea Acquisition area setting No acquire Area setting Area number fi 7 Set Address H 000000 aa MV Read Address mask H 000000 M Write e Code Acquire No acquire Specifies whether or not to acquire instruction trace e Verbose Acquire No acquire Specifies whether or not to acquire redundant data e Data trace Acquire all area Acquisition area setting No acquire Specifies trace data acquisition method Acquire all area Acquires trace data in all range Acquisition area setting Acquires trace data in specified range No acquire Does not acquire trace data e Area number 1 2 Specifies the area number set for acquisition range setting of trace data July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 231 a gt SPANSION aa CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual Address Specifies the start address of acquisition range of trace data Address mask Specifies mask value to the start address of acquisition range of trace data Attrib
270. each of the following items 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes 2 2 Starting and Terminating SOFTUNE Workbench 2 3 Creating Project 2 4 Creating Workspace 2 5 Setting Project 2 6 Creating Files and Setting to Project 2 7 Definition of Subproject 2 8 Creation of Project Configuration 2 9 Setting Tools 2 10 Setting Linker Options 2 11 Make Build 2 12 Debugging 2 13 Executing Debugging Only 2 14 Reading SOFTUNE Project Files of Old Versions 2 15 Moving Project Files 2 16 Useful Functions July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes SPANSION Software Support Manual v 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes When key entry is requested from a dialog box the following four elements can be written as parameters e Data formula e Address formula e Identifier e File name specification E Data Formula A data formula consists of a term and an operator Data formulas comply with C language formulas Almost C language formulas are recognized Some points e g line number and register specification are extended Operations involving floating point numbers and character strings are not supported The overflows that occur during the operation are ignored Zero division results in an error E Address Formula An address formula is an extension of the data formula it represents a memory location Like the data formula the address formula c
271. eak C Not break E T Cancel e Buffer full break Specifies whether to break or not when the performance buffer becomes full 256 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a Setup of performance measurement interval Figure 4 4 64 Performance Interval Setup Dialog START is the performance measurement start condition while END is the performance measurement end condition Always enter both START and END e AREA AREA1 AREA2 Specifies an area for measuring performance START Code Specifies a performance measurement start event Enter an address after selecting an attribute and click the Set button An attribute other than a code cannot be selected e END Code Specifies a performance measurement end event Enter an address after selecting an attribute and click the Set button An attribute other than a code cannot be selected e Status Enable Disable Specifies whether to disable a performance measurement event temporarily or not July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 257 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 4 13 4 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 This section explains the performance function for emulator debugger MB2100 01 E Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 For emulator debugger MB2100 01 the following items can be set e Performance mode Control of
272. ease execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Clear all bookmarks in the current window Click on Clear all bookmarks in the current window at toolbar Find CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 8 Previous Error Next Error Top of Error Bottom of Error Previous error Next error Top of Error and Bottom of Error moves the cursor in the edit window to the source line where a make build compilation or assembler error occurred Previous Error The cursor jumps to the error line immediately before the cursor position in the output window If there is no error line before the cursor position the cursor loops back and jumps to the bottom error line E Next Error The cursor jumps to the error line immediately after the cursor position in the output window If there is no error line after the cursor position the cursor loops back and jumps to the top error line E Top of Error The cursor jumps to the top error line displayed in the output window E Bottom of Error The cursor jumps to the bottom error line displayed in the output window July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 175 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 3 9 Property Property displays information for the specified file E Property Displays the file information module information and symbol inf
273. ease make sure that there is a cursor in a source window 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Next bookmark in the current window Click on Next bookmark in the current window at toolbar Find E Move the Caret to the Previous Bookmark in the Current Window 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a source window 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Previous bookmark in the current window Click on Previous bookmark in the current window at toolbar Find July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 169 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual E Clear All Bookmarks in the Current Window 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a source window 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Clear all bookmarks in the current window Click on Clear all bookmarks in the current window at toolbar Find Click on All delete at tab Source in a dialog Bookmark Note Symbol which can not be allocated to the name of bookmark will be member of automatic variables structure union and class If some symbols with the same name are defined other symbol than assumed one may be used To specify a symbol with the same name please determine the name of module and function name first then specify a symbol 170 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu S
274. easurement end condition Always enter both START and END AREA AREA1 AREA2 Specifies an area for measuring performance START Code Data Specifies a performance measurement start event Enter an address after selecting an attribute and click the Set button Clicking the Reference button opens a Performance Trigger Details Setup Dialog Box END Code Data Specifies a performance measurement end event Enter an address after selecting an attribute and click the Set button Clicking the Reference button opens a Performance Trigger Details Setup Dialog Box Status Enable Disable Specifies whether to disable a performance measurement event temporarily or not 254 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a Performance Trigger Details Setup Dialog Figure 4 4 62 Performance Trigger Details Setup Dialog Event details a AREAT START Address H 001000 Attribute Address mask HFFFFFF 7 Read Size Byte V write Comparison condition Disable C Data agreement Data not H 0000 H FFFF Cancel e Address Specifies an address to set performance trigger e Address mask Specifies a mask value for the specified address e Size Specifies data size at the time of data access Byte Word Long e Attribute Specifies an attribute at the time of data access e Size free A trigger condition is applied when the specified
275. ebugger and the monitor debugger E Code Break The breakpoint where program execution is to be stopped when the PC passes the set address when the address is executed is called a code break E Use Conditions This function can be used in the following environment Simulator debugger Monitor debugger E Setting of Code Break Setting dialog Figure 4 6 7 Code Break Setting Dialog rr Break x Code Data Break address H 000000 Set Pass count D Extend Break list Symbol e Break Address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified e Pass count In this field the count of times the PC passes the point a particular point before causing a break is set In the case of the monitor debugger it cannot be set July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 345 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug SPANSION Software Support Manual va Details dialog When Extend button of the code break dialog is pushed a details dialog is displayed This dialog is only enabled for the simulator debugger Figure 4 6 8 Code Break Details Dialog Code break point details mm Break address H o00000 Pass count D Control C No break Break Command SHOW STATUS SHOW TRACE A00 AFF DUMP 2300 23FF e Control Specifies whether to re execute or stop execution after the command processing when the breakpoint is hit e Command Specifies the command line to execute when the breakpoint is hit
276. ect Dependence For the procedure to define project dependence see Section 2 7 Definition of Subproject July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 327 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 5 8 Project Configuration The project configuration is set E Project Configuration There are the following menus to set the project configuration e Add and Delete The project configuration is added and deleted and the active configuration is changed e Configuration at build The configuration as a subproject is made or built is set 328 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 8 1 Project Configuration Add and Delete The configuration as a subproject is made or built is set E Project Configuration Add and Delete Figure 4 5 56 Add and Delete Project Configuration Dialog Box Add and delete project Configuration Project and Configuration sample prj MB90553B MBSOF394 Delete smp prj Debug Active dh E Cancel e Project and Configuration All projects in workspace and their configurations are displayed e Add Click this button to open the Add Project Configuration dialog shown in Figure 4 5 56 This dialog enables the addition of the project configuration e Delete Click to delete the selected project and its configuration e Active Click this button to make the selected project
277. ed from the edit window or the Symbol Window Assembly Window Register Window Memory Window Local Symbol Window Watch Window Trace Window Command Window or Coverage Window valid in debug session to the clipboard The character string copied here can be pasted later E Paste PASTE inserts the cut character string or the character string copied to the clipboard into the current cursor position If the selected character string is in the edit window this command also replaces it with the character string in the clipboard E Delete DELETE deletes the character string selected from the edit window This command can be executed only in the edit window The deleted character string cannot be pasted later 160 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a Table 4 3 1 Relationship Between Edit Functions and Windows Edit Window Project Window Output Window Symbol Window Assembly Window Register Window Memory Window Local Symbol Window Watch Window Trace Window Command Window Coverage Window Performance Window Sequence Window Object Window Lines other than the column title can be copied 2 Only the symbol name can be copied July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 161 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 3 3 Select All
278. ed in File List and are restored when the Workspace is opened 494 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 5 1 11 Setting Dialog Box Menu File List Ze Entry G Softune nitialize pre m RunBreak SetupDbgenv Wordpad aoan amp fn m Number 3 Kind Menu bd Down Entry Rung reak Browse Add Delete RRR Close m Function Explain Setup various break points July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 495 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual 5 1 3 3 Registering External Tool This section explains how to register the external tool in the customize bar E How to Register External Tool 1 Display the dialog box Select View Customize Bar Setting to display the Customize Bar Setting dialog box Figure 5 1 12 2 Number Select the number to be registered in the customize bar 3 Kind Select Tool 4 Entry Enter the external tool to be registered in the customize bar Specify with the Select Tool Dialog Box Figure 5 1 10 displayed when you click the reference button on the right Select tool dialog shows the contents tools that are set with the Set Tool Dialog Box Figure 5 1 11 displayed when you select Setup Tool menu Alternatively you can display Set Tool Dialog Box
279. eeeea 256 4 4 13 4 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 e ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeetenaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeee 258 AVA e o E E E E sashes tong ssteesadeag E eeebeaditentees 261 44 15 Real time Memory ciccsscccc sevice stent nane iair ninine anir ares N EEO ENNAN EEREN EEEE EE 263 44 16 RAM Checket siariad ai aguerra aeiee oiiaii ota aeae ekan eaaa ives AE T RNa 265 4 5 AEE E E E E A E E A E EE E A A E eegats dene 266 4 5 1 Acv PIOJO CE sosrsssenoi aE NARAR EE RAN TE S AEAN SEE S 267 4 5 2 AG kae EET A E E E E E A peas aneesaenes yhaaaee ehe nace 268 4 5 2 1 Add Project Create snus isiccsiineennivaieh dite ctiie nei nn a AT AREE 269 4 5 2 2 Add Project Existing Project 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeenee eee eeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseenaeeeees 271 4 5 3 Add Member si cintetciviects cittecs creat E ae beeen 272 4 5 3 1 Add Mombert File sssisrirss iiini kakan Anea ARENE TEER ENAR EREA RR 273 4 5 3 2 Add Member Directory seimeniesr areren kiernn iieri Ein Eain En EARE E OARE 274 4 5 4 Setup Workspace sendiaren a E aa EA PAA KE EN IAEE EEEE 275 4 5 5 Setup Projeti sssrinin nanas a aaa a a a aa E a a eaS Enna aat a aaa nia 276 4 5 5 1 General seircean aa aa aE Ea E Aaaa E ia Aan Gnd aie 279 455A MOU crasse aea aa EEEE ATSA ENN R ASEE e Ta eer 281 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E vii a SPANSION Software Support Manual hee Setting C Compiler Option evivccccctieseectsetebescede sui iectueghetieas destined s
280. eeeeaees 79 Dialog ae r T p eer eieren 222 Display Non display the Window Switching Using Sequence Trace Trigger Details Dialog 225 E I o E rtirecadetdtatanct earned 186 Sequence Trace Trigger Setup Dialog 224 Drag amp Drop Between Windows cceeee 38 Trace Trigger Details Setting Dialog 220 Edit WING OW vs cs ccivveascistsesausdeustirnccdteeriwcesss 65 166 Example of Sequence Shift in Sequence U WANGOW sewiienccnttenscecsisuieantdensbteedsddventens 116 Update Local Variable Wind OW visa cccieccssaecccasensacccess 87 201 Updating Include File Dependency eee eee 332 Main Window sein a mi emt im liv i ent mui 40 Use Memory Window 0 sees eeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 85 Display Non display the Window Switching Using Move ae i ne Next Boreas oe the Tab EE E T 186 Nove the Caret t th Previous Bo kmark inthe Use Output Window ssssrsrsrererrreeersesessssnnnnn 325 Usine th D buster 4 Current Window 068 169 172 174 S a ee Ne Object Window scsssesseessesssesseesseestesseeseee 98 242 User Program N f Output WindoW s ssssenssnneessessrenrrnnnrensnene 63 187 Trace Acquisition Control While a User Program is Performance Window sssseeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeees 102 RUMMING esses eet 214 239 Project Window ssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 46 187 RAM Checker Window sceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 V Real time Memory Window
281. eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaee tease eeeaeeeecaeeesaaeeeseaeeeeneaeeeeeaeeseeaeeenaas 212 4 4 8 2 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2141 cceeeseeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeesenaaeeeeenenaeeeeeee 213 4 4 8 3 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 o oo eeecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeetenaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeee 214 4 4 8 4 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2147 05 ecccceceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseaeeessaeeeseeeeneas 230 4 4 8 5 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2198 ccccccceecseceeeeeeeeneeeseneeeteeeeseaaeeseaaeeseeeeseeeeeeenaeeesaes 233 4 4 8 6 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 ecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaaeeseaaeeseeeeseeeeeeeiaeeeeaaes 239 4 4 9 Command sossen E sheds haghiie RE a ENEE a EEEE AE ONNA EEEE eer 240 44 10 Tool Bar Status Bar Tabi viscivcssevsicvscisvcecdeteasisany iaaa aeaa aae addres tao REEE AAEE Eass 241 AANA E D 0 e E E E E E AE T 242 AAN2 Covere isoine nnn a Reis Ree eel dase lia 248 BANS POMONMANCEs S0 ictscecenedesuees ba atdeedicsngastuas becatsutecnapetetatansesutetenjetstte jucathateas EEIT EEE ERREAREN ENEA 250 4 4 13 1 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2141 cceecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeesenaeeesaaes 252 4 4 13 2 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 eceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeetaeeeeeteeaeeeeeetenaeeeeeee 253 4 4 13 3 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2198 0 0 0 eceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeteeaeeeeeeeenaee
282. eeeeeeees 68 Deletion Procedure cccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneees 326 Editor Change Procedure ccceeeeeeeees 465 Editor Deletion Procedure cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 465 Editor Registration Procedure ceeees 464 Error Jump Setup Procedure c ees 466 Keyboard Setup Procedure 0 eeee 462 PrOGCCQUI CS aceassictiancatindacvesietcashentetianevexsenecaies 35 37 Procedure for Addition 00068 271 273 274 Procedure for Defining Project Dependence wciscisscccesassistvesctaeseccnerns 327 Procedure to Select Debug Function 438 Search Procedure vissciscciccsvstessccaensacsacenwavesiesecnss 165 Setting Procedure 325 330 331 Syntax Deletion Procedure 0 00 eeeeee 466 Syntax Modification Procedure 000cee 467 Target System Creation Procedure 004 509 Tool Change Procedure eee eens 460 Tool Deletion Procedure eens 460 Tool Setup Procedure eeeeeee eee eeees 460 Processing Processing a Newly Created Text 154 Program Automatic Downloading of Monitor PLO STAM visi iisiddcanvesincnss niinno 33 Creating a Program Source and Executing Make Build sscccscccsesssncess sive ieesesvesdccnaiavcees 4 Display Error at Loading Monitor Program to BMAF ssn snsiccvssiessedessssisceeaeeasstecenres 513 Downloading Monitor Program cee 504 Explanation of Sample Program 510 Loading the Target Program c
283. eeees 10 Contents Contents eenen aE LE 477 Contents of the Temporary File n se 325 Control Control Related to Window Display 000 469 Debugger Control When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug Session n se 334 Setting of Options for Library Control 307 Converter Setting Converter Options eeeceeteeeeeeeeeeeee 316 Copy COPY A nee E 160 Copying Copying Local Files sssseeseessseeeserrrneennenrnnens 142 Count Break Hardware Count Break ccccscccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 356 Setting of Hardware Count Break 008 356 Coverage Coverage Rate ccscssscssnscsnesicccccsasanaeacaessaeeanccatazan 249 Coverage Setup sscceicsinsccsnsnetsccvsnastesscdsesevardcenaran 248 Coverage WindoOW ssssssesssnrrrrrrrrrrrrrnee 100 248 CPU CPU Stop During Logging eects 125 Setting of CPU Information 286 Create Creating a Program Source and Executing Make Bulld ccccccceeccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 Creating a ProjeCtsiccisatcisisredeccivccsiiesievessesssieess 4 34 Creating Project Configuration on Settings of Existing Project Configuration c ee 26 Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Target cccicrities iki tees nivel 508 Creating Source File and Document Files PUG se E E E T 144 Creation of Project Configuration cee 26 Processing a Newly Created Text cece 154 Target System Creation Procedure s es 509 Creation Dialog Box Creation Dialog BoX
284. eeneeeeeeeeeeaees 327 Ready Queue Project Wid OW ose eneen a 46 187 Detailed Display of Ready Queue CEON E 246 Project related Item Setup 0 eee 266 f Real time Memory Window Saving the Project File nnnnnnernrernrrrrerreeeeses 152 Real time Memory Window 118 263 Select the Project Setup Project Menu Benne ge Peete ers Se tials edict acide Pansat 28 mar Setting Active Project Configuration ERORE 26 Recent Text File sisiy inin eo rekna iastadeaeeeses 156 Setup Project wecccccessccscsccntesesdensesnesdenswaaosssvereany 276 Recent Workspace File ssssssseseesersrrssseeeeeeeeee 156 Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse Refresh on Space in the Project Window Refresh All Windows ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 474 PE NE EEE 62 Refresh Window sssseccccccrrerecnrennnnnn AZO Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Register on a Space in the Project Window Adding RegistefSsssisssisriio iiinis eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 83 E 57 Changing Register Values eeens 191 When the Currently Open Project File is Being Deleting Registers ccccccsssncssscsecssscesssassseesccesserancins 84 Edited scccscanasicednoracadanmenrectedess adun 150 How to Register Batch File snsssnnrerrrrrreeeeee 492 Project File How to Register External Tool eeeeeeeeeee 496 Creating a Workspace or Project File 5 138 How to Register Workbench Menu 05 494 Project related Item Reg
285. eesenaaeeeeetenaaeeeennaa APPENDIX C Setting LAN Interface 0 c ccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeecaee esas eeseaeeeneaeeescaaeeseaeeescaeeseeeess APPENDIX D Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Target ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseneeeseaeeeesaeeeseaeeeneaeees APPENDIX E Display on Emulator 0 000 ccceeeeceeeee teen eee eee tnee eee tecnaeee ee eeaaeeeeeeeaeeeee tennessee eenaeeeeenenaaeeeennaa APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaeees APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator 0 cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeeseaaeeseaeeeeseaeesseaeeeseaeees G 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 G 5 SSDI Entry Start seissen aeaniee adaa EEOAE Ea EEEa Eea aiT ESEESE SSDI Init Initialize es asi eG a ee EA eee ns eile ees SSDI_Ready Ready cccccececeeeeceeeecneeeeeneeeeeaeeeseaeeeecaeeeseaeeeecaeeeeceeeseeeeegcaeeeecaeesseeeeseeeeseaeeeneaes SSDI End ENA o ccsssciitinean wane antieivncidiaith aeaa aa aiaa E a a ees SSDl Rese t Event Post Reset sssrissrssssiissionii ainsuse anes esis dinero E iea ESE 484 485 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E a SPANSION Software Support Manual as SSDI_Read_Event Post Read cccceccscceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeaeeeneaeeesaeeesaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeteeeensaees 530 G 7 SSDI_Write_Event Post Write 2 0 ccceecseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeeaeeesaaeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeaeesseneeee
286. egory 3 Select the setup name to be changed from Setup Name List 4 Click the Change Setup Name button E Setting Options in Boot ROM Only MB2198 Figure 4 5 51 Debug Option Setup Dialog Box Boot ROM Setup Project Target of setting Assembler Linker Librarian Converter Debug 4 gt MBSOF394 Category Boot ROM X Search Path G Softune Lib 907 BootROM E Search Path List G SoftuneSLib 907 B oot ROM Run Boot ROM file automatically This function is a setup to run Boot ROM file when reset automatically Run Boot ROM file Ask v OK Cancel Apply 1 Specify a Boot ROM search path Select a path to search the Boot ROM file from the Boot ROM Search Path List The default setting is Lib 907 BootROM under the SOFTUNE installation directory To add a search path use the input field of Boot ROM Search Path When you click the Browse button which is located on the right of the input field you can browse files July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 321 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual v 2 Select whether or not to run the Boot ROM file automatically Select one of the following options for automatic execution of the Boot ROM file at MCU reset If the Boot ROM file is not run the debugger may not work correctly Run invariably Runs the Boot ROM file automatically at MCU reset Ask Asks the user whether or not to run the
287. el Apply If there are two or more items to be set the symbol found in some item is grayed 1 Select the Define Symbol category The symbol definition setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 38 opens 2 Specify a symbol name 3 Specify a setting value 4 Click the Set button 304 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Resetting Symbol Definition 1 Select the Define Symbol category The symbol definition setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 38 opens 2 Select the symbol name you want to reset from Symbol Name List 3 Click the Delete button E Selecting Output File Figure 4 5 39 Output List Setup Dialog Box Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari gt MB90F394 E Category Output Lit x V Creates a link map list file Output memory usage information list V Creates a external symbol mutual reference information list V Creates a local symbol list V Creates a section details map list V Along name is not omitted I Control of changing page Column g AL 2 ta_INRAMO1 0 000100 0 003F FF t0 _INROMO1 0xFCOO00 0xFFFFFF Cancel Apply 1 Select the Output List category The list output setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 39 opens 2 Set check marks to the left of the list s to be created Creates a link map list file Creates a external symbol mutual ref
288. elect the ROM RAM area you want to delete from ROM RAM Area List 2 Click the Delete button E Method of Outputting Warning When ROM RAM Area is Specified Outside Range of Internal ROM RAM 1 Put a check mark in the checkbox When sections are arranged beyond the range of specified ROM RAM area the warning is issued When an area outside the internal ROM RAM area is specified in the dialog a warning dialog is displayed When an area outside the internal ROM RAM area is set a warning is output at linking E Method of Outputting Warning When Section is Placed Outside Specified ROM RAM Area Range 1 Put a check mark in the checkbox When a ROM RAM area is specified beyond the internal ROM RAM range the warning is issued When a section is placed outside the specified ROM RAM area ro and ra options or outside the internal ROM RAM area in the MCU a warning is output at linking 312 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION va E When Initializing Placement Link Option Based on MCU Information 1 Click the Reset placement link option button The placement link option is reset When this reset is performed the placement link option is set as follows Automatic placement AL 2 Mode 2 optimum automatic placement by linker is set ROM RAM area ro ra The ROM RAM area is all cleared and the currently selected MCU internal ROM RAM address is set
289. ent Project list 4 Click the OK button Select the Project Add Member menu The File dialog is opened to select the file to be added to the member Select the created source file and click the Open button The file is stored in the project and its name is displayed in the source file category in the Project window E Deleting Subproject from Project 1 Select Project Project Dependence 2 Select the parent project from which a subproject is deleted When the Project Dependence dialog is opened select the name of the parent project from which a subproject is deleted form the Project Name box 3 Select the subproject to be deleted Deselect the subproject that is deleted from the Dependent Project list 4 Click the OK button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 25 a SPANSION CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 8 Creation of Project Configuration Software Support Manual a 2 8 Creation of Project Configuration This section explains how to create a project configuration E Creation of Project Configuration The project configuration is a series of settings for specifying the characteristics of the target file By creating a new project configuration two or more tool settings can be stored in the project When a new project is created the project configuration is created under a default name of Debug In SOFTUNE Workbench the project configuration is created as follow Creating project configurat
290. enu 2 Select Set Character String Replacement from the shortcut menu The character string replacement setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 2 opens 3 Click the Variable tag The variable setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 3 opens 4 Set a variable Specify the variable name that does not conflict with the variable names that have been already registered 5 Write the character string to be assigned to the specified variable name 6 Click the Append button e Deleting a variable 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the Command Window to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Set Character String Replacement from the shortcut menu The character string replacement setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 2 opens 3 Click the Variable tag The variable setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 3 opens 4 Select the variable name to be deleted from the debug variable list 5 Click the Delete button Figure 3 15 3 Variable Setting Dialog Box e Replace command Alias Variable Macro Variable top20 String FOOO00 FO001F Variable list Variable name command Delete Close July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 95 a SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 15 Command Window Software Support Manual a E Macro A combination of the special commands to be used often can be named and used as a macro Add and delete a macro in the following procedures e Adding a macro
291. er Name Flag Name Register and flag names can be specified in data formulas they represent the register values at that point of time Specify the register name and flag name following Usable register names differ for each MCU see APPENDIX A List of Register Names July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 11 a SPANSION CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes Software Support Manual a 2 1 4 Operators Usable in Data and Address Formulas Table 2 1 2 lists the operators that can be used in data and address formulas and their priorities E Operators Usable in Data and Address Formulas Table 2 1 2 List of Operators Usable in Data and Address Formulas Priority Explanation Priority change Subscript representation Structure Structure pointer Type of operator Linear expression Minus sign Address Logical NOT Bit NOT Memory indirect reference Size byte Type cast Binary operator Multiplication Division Remainder Addition Subtraction Left shift Right shift Binary operator Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Equal to Not equal to Binary operator Relational operator Bit AND Bit EOR Bit OR Logical AND Logical OR Binary operator CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes Software
292. er and a numerical value E Floating point Number The following two floating point numbers are supported e Single precision floating point number S float e Double precision floating point number D double long double The internal format and size comply with the floating point type handled by the C compiler F J did d SID d d specifies an unsigned decimal number Nearest value rounding applies to input values If the represented value is not a normalized number a warning message is displayed and the following value is input e When an underflow occurs The values that can be represented as unnormalized numbers are changed to unnormalized numbers The values less than unnormalized numbers are changed to 0 e When an overflow occurs Values are changed to infinity July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes SPANSION Software Support Manual va A floating point number can also be specified in a hexadecimal number as follows H hexadecimal number SID Note If S and D are omitted D is assumed 8 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 1 2 Data and Address Formulas Symbols Line Numbers Character Constants The SOFTUNE Workbench provides symbols line numbers and character constants as the terms of
293. er than NORMAL O causes a failure to start debugger starting to fail Explanation A call is made when the debugger is started Perform necessary initialization Remarks Now an external I F module can be called 526 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual G 3 SSDI_Ready Ready Format void SSDI_Ready void Argument None Return value Return NORMAL O Returning any value other than NORMAL O causes a failure to start debugger starting to fail Explanation When debugger activation was completed it is called Remarks It is called after having done batch file execution and an automatic load in debugger start SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 527 a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator a G 4 SSDI_End End Format void SSDI_End void Argument None Return value None Explanation A call is made when the debugger is ended Perform necessary end processing Remarks 528 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual SPANSION va G 5 SSDI_Reset_Event Post Reset Format void SSDI_Reset_Event void Argument None Return value None Explanation Posts a reset of the debugger by a command or the issue of a reset Initializes resourc
294. er to use software break Note MB2100 01 When software break is disabled all of the currently set software breaks are deleted July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 429 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual va Chip tab Figure 4 7 27 Debug Preferences Chip Tab Monitoring Directory Tab Error output Load Execution Step execution Event Watch Radix Emulation Chip Debugging area Parallel port m Watchdog C Enable Disable m MCU mode Debug C Native 430 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual Settings of chip are shown below Table 4 7 15 Setting Items on Chip Tab Debugger EML SPANSION a MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 Watchdog MB2100 01 MCU mode Coverage functions e Watchdog Enable Disable Specifies watchdog timer operation while a program is running e MCU mode Debug Native Selects an MCU operation mode Debug Specifies debug session Native Specifies native mode e Coverage functions Enable Disable Specifies whether or not to use coverage functions Note MB2147 01 When the coverage functions are disabled memory of 0 bank area can be referred while a user program is running July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 431 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a gt SPANSION
295. erence information list Creates a local symbol list Creates a section details map list When none of the above lists is output no other item need to be set from the list output setup dialog box Execute Step 3 and after only when outputting any of the lists 3 Check Output memory usage information list as needed 4 Set a check mark to the left of A long name is not omitted as required Even names exceeding one list file line are fully output July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 305 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual aa 5 Specify whether to suppress page change When a check mark is set to the left of Control of changing page page change is suppressed When page change is suppressed the line count cannot be set 6 Set line count and column count to the right of Line and Column as required E Setting Absolute Format Assemble List Options Figure 4 5 40 Absolute Format Assemble List Dialog Box Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari 4 gt MBSOF 394 zi Category Absolute Assembly List v V Creates an absolute assembly list Output module control Output File Name List ROM RAM ARRAY List sample sample startup startup All Check All Clear All Check all Clear Display Position of Symbol and Address In Order Symbol Address v Option g AL2 a_INR
296. ers and Wireless BLE Bluetooth Low Energy and USB connectivity solutions Cypress is committed to providing its customers worldwide with consistent innovation best in class support and exceptional system value F2MC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench Operation Manual SPANSION va Software Support Manual Publication Number CM41 00312 Revision 9 0 Issue Date July 31 2015 F2MC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench Operation Manual SPANSION aS Software Support Manual Software Support Manual SPANSION a PREFACE E What is the SOFTUNE Workbench SOFTUNE Workbench is support software for developing programs for the F MC 16 families of microprocessors microcontrollers It is a combination of a development manager simulator debugger emulator debugger monitor debugger and an integrated development environment for efficient development E Purpose of this Manual and Target Readers This manual explains how to operate the SOFTUNE Workbench and design the product This manual is intended for engineers designing several kinds of products using SOFTUNE Workbench E Trademarks REALOS SOFTUNE are trademark of Spansion LLC Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks in the United States and other countries of United States Microsoft Corporation Other company names and products names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies E Organization of Manual This manual consists o
297. es Remarks Sets all the interrupt states OFF July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 529 a SPANSION APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual a G 6 SSDI_Read_Event Post Read Format int SSDI_Read_Event READ_EVENT info Argument typedef struct unsigned long int unsigned long unsigned long unsigned long unsigned long READ_EVENT Return value 0 1 0 Explanation addr size total_cycle inst_cycle data cycle Read data enabled Read data disabled Access address Access size 1 Byte 2 Word 4 LONG Total cycle count Count of cycles from beginning of instruction Read data Count of cycles taken for access Posts the occurrence of a read access event by instruction execution When read data is enabled the ISS operates assuming read data info data as read data When read data reflected in ISS memory data must be written by using SSDI_Write_Memory When read data is disabled data is read from ISS memory Set the count of cycles taken for read access as the count of cycles taken for access info cycle If this access cause an error use SSDI_Request_Abort to stop instruction execution Remarks The count of cycles from the beginning of the instruction inst_cycle is always posted as 0 530 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manu
298. es to be copied Copy nothing Selects the copy method of local files of the template project When copied this is added to member of new project Copy everything Copies all local files of the template project Specify files to be copied Specifies the files to be copied among local files of the template project Copy nothing Select this to create new local files without copying the local files in the template project Although the files not selected are not added to member of new project the member of the template project is not deleted July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 143 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual a Figure 4 2 9 Dialog of Information for Creating Projects Project name GASoftune testtest prj i Project type Loadmodule ABS Project configuration Debug Target file name Debug ABS test abs Chip classification Target MCU MB96F673RB Function call int Stack argument passing debug setup files MB2100 01 G Softune test Debug MB2100 01 E_4MHz sup MB2100 01 G Softune test Debug MB2100 01 E_8MHz sup Simulator sup G Softune test Debug Simulator sup E Member i sre _ffme16 c G Softune test src _ffmc 16 c i sre main c G Softune test src main c i src start asm G Softune test src start asm src vectors c G Softune test src vectors c lt Back Next Cancel E Creating Source File and Document Files Etc To create a source f
299. et the address in execution There are the following functions for operating the ISS from the microcontroller resource simulator 524 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual G 1 SSDI_Entry Start Format int SSDI_Entry int id HINSTANCE hInstance Argument int id DLL ID HINSTANCE hInstance External I F module handle Return value Return NORMAL O Returning any value other than NORMAL 0 causes a failure to start debugger Explanation A call is made when the debugger is started Perform necessary initialization Remarks DLL ID id always indicates 0 The external I F module handle hInstance is used to obtain an ISS entry At this point no external I F module can be called Example typedef int WINAPI LPFNREADMEMORY LPFNREADMEMORY Read_Memory extern C int WINAPI SSDI_Entry int id HINSTANCE if int my_dll_id id FARPROC pF_Read_Memory GetProcAddress if SSDI_Read_Memory Read_Memory LPFNREADMEMORY pF_Read_Memory int func if ReadMemory addr size len data len error SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 525 a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator a G 2 SSDI_Init Initialize Format int SSDI_Init void Argument None Return value Return NORMAL O Returning any value oth
300. et to the Previous Bookmark in the Format Pile sciccnsscsstievesteucevesavzacteedoeuars 56 Current Window 005 169 172 174 Close Cascade E E E E E 148 CasCade iis citsencisncnvacercssvensncnnceaseccsabsoesesciayeseees 470 Close All Windows 0 ccseteee teeters 475 Category Code Break Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Code Break cinicesicnesanecodsvetnasanecetbadcassiinasptuksuanes 345 on a Debug Category ee 54 Setting of Code Break 345 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Command on a Dependencies Category 53 Commaid eee pe ene rene acre ee tener error 240 Character Command Window c cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeteeeees 92 Character Constant ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaes 10 Shortcut Menu Command Input Field 92 Character String Search Function 158 Shortcut Menu Other than the Command Input Field Setting Character String Replacement 00000 94 arabika bag beaed OUT Mada vaudebeaecebvsyenduvegadecvict geben 93 Check Comment Checking Source File Saving cee 333 COMMON rrisnin ni iiia 389 Clear Common Bar Clear All Bookmarks in the Current Common Bar ssis niniin iG 41 Window ccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeees 170 172 174 Communication Cleat Call iicssnscavevivicatesveectesrercitnctindeayedseaeieren 394 Communication with Host System ccccee0 508 Click Comparing Click the OK Button to Complete T
301. etails setting dialog box as shown in Figure 4 6 34 appears when you select the shortcut menu Area in the Sequence Window Figure 4 6 34 Sequence Details Setting Dialog Sequence ma START v Ta LEvEL2 gt Operation after shift Trace stat V Trace control Address H oo0000 Attribute V Read Address mask H FFFFFF FF wite Pass count D1 Access detect Size V CPU Byte l Don t care M DMA Comparison condition Disable Data agreemer Data not Data mask HFF FF Cancel e From START LEVEL1 6 Specifies a level from which the specified event shifts e To START LEVEL1 6 END Specifies a level to which the specified event shifts e Operation after shift Specifies the operation for when the specified condition is hit and the sequencer makes a shift Specify one of the following options according to the setting status 1 When trace control is disabled and the destination level is END Break A break occurs upon an event hit 2 When trace control is disabled and the destination level is START or LEVEL1 6 No operation 3 When trace control is enabled Trace start Trace acquisition starts upon an event hit Trace stop Trace acquisition stops upon an event hit July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 381 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug SPANSION Software Support Manual a e Trace control Specifies whether or not to control trace acquisition upon an event hit When enabled i
302. f five chapters CHAPTER 1 Outline of SOFTUNE Workbench SOFUTUNE Workbench integrates language tools and debuggers into one to provide the integrated development environment that totally supports processing from programming and debugging to creation of data to be written to ROM Language tools include a C compiler assembler and linkage tool etc Debuggers are a simulator debugger emulator debugger and monitor debugger CHAPTER 2 Operation This chapter explains the basic operation of SOFTUNE Workbench for each of the following items CHAPTER 3 Windows This chapter explains SOFTUNE Workbench windows CHAPTER 4 Menus This chapter explains the SOFTUNE Workbench menu configuration and the dialog boxes to be started from each menu CHAPTER 5 Addin Module This chapter explains SOFTUNE Workbench Addin module July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E a gt SPANSION ua Software Support Manual APPENDIX The Appendixes describes the register name downloading monitor program setting LAN interface setting USB interface creating ROM on monitor debugger target display on emulator external I F DLL for simulator CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION a Reading This Manual E Configuration of Page In each section of this manual the summary about the section is described certainly so you can grasp an outline of this manual if only you read these summaries And the title of upper section is desc
303. fies the data for comparison e Data mask Specifies mask value for specified data Note Trace execution has to be forcibly stopped in order to make settings while a user program is running in trace enhancement mode And perform Start of trace after settings are made in order to validate the setting changes 226 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Single Trace Mode Setup Dialog To set the trace delay in single trace mode select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window and then select Single trace tab Trace delay setting Figure 4 4 36 Single Trace Setup trace Trace Filtering Trace trigger Single trace eoc Trace buffer 65536frames sesseerseeerseeeseeeseenees i i The point which the trace trigger hit EAEE EEE H Fussentssenanansas 1 pecans Delay Setting Delay Area 1 When trace trigger hit D O frames lt 0 65534 gt e Delay setting When trace trigger hit Set the period in frames from the point where trace end trigger hits to the end of trace frame acquisition It can be set up to 65534 frames July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 227 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Multi Trace Mode Setup Dialog To set the block size or trace delay in multi trace mode select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window and then select Multi trace tab T
304. folder m 8 wame Files of type Load module abs Cancel Only debug information V Auto mapping e Debug information only Loads only the debug information e Synchronization just after loading Synchronizes with flash memory automatically just after loading This item can be specified only in MB2100 01 e Automatic map setting Automatically configures map setting according to the area of the file to be loaded This item can be specified only for the simulator debugger 146 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION For binary file Figure 4 2 12 Open Dialog Box Binary File Look in Ji Project e a Ee Name z Type JJ MB90F394 File folder J MB96F346RSB File folder _ MB96F673AA File folder lt Pe Files of type Binary bin z E Start address H 000000 e Start address Specify the address to start reading binary data e Synchronization just after loading Synchronizes with flash memory automatically just after loading This item can be specified only in MB2100 01 For batch file Figure 4 2 13 Open Dialog Box Procedure File _ Type File folder File folder J MB96F673AA File folder lh i wm Files of type Batch pre Cancel I Iconic e Execute in icon Iconizes SOFTUNE Workbench when executing a batch file July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 147 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4
305. fying a Variable Value 201 203 Module Setting Method When Debug Information Existence Check for Library File Module is Inhibited Porr cease nxesuabanitsa a 307 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Load Module Name 0 0008 59 Monitor Automatic Downloading of Monitor Program sccvesssccisinesnesd snes teaaideevaves cseserees 33 Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Tat Qet weseccversnsccsvnnntioncenseansaceeesadaneccerees 508 Display Error at Loading Monitor Program to Emil QtOP vive ceaeecdseinerdedtantacteevernnecesienets 513 Downloading Monitor Program rersreresee 504 Monitoring Address eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 Move Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark 169 Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark in the Current Window eeeeeeeeeeesenneeeeees 169 172 174 Move the Caret to the Previous BookMate sciceiitiistcaattrecanns 169 SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 561 a RRS Software Support Manual Move the Caret to the Previous Bookmark in the Optimization Current Window 005 169 172 174 Setting of Options Included in Detail Definition in Multi Optimization ees 295 Multi Trace Mode Setup Dialog ee 228 Optimize Setting Optimize Options cee 294 N Option New Automatic Setting of Linker Options 29 New Function call Interface 514 Deriggai Aon Ppa Wien ExecUtiNg osasin esarri 325 Next Deino
306. g 000 224 Sequence Window eeeeeeeeeeees 109 110 112 Setting a Sequence in Sequence WANK OW sieves snsictesnecnsnadess sais iveseteesecdenrns 110 Setting a Sequence in the Sequence WANKOW rcsestncciesiecsssddens vawectesesdesunceares 113 Setting the 3 Level Sequence eee 379 Setting the 8 Level Sequence 0eee 381 Setting the Sequence eee 374 376 Session Debug Session iccssscsvccisccstsenssassaneessetssevenenancnne 166 Debugger Control When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug Session ees 334 Migrating SOFTUNE Workbench to Debug SOSSION E T T 33 When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug SOSSION E 157 Window Display Debug Session 0 05 186 Setting Procedure Setting Procedure csersnciccsvessccecanssnesrcasessessaeeerss 391 Setup Coverage Setup siiisciccsesticntacersienceassseesbedsvaveens 248 Deleting Debugger Setup ees 320 Display Set Prsei iriiringa 200 Error Jump Setup Procedure 1 0 00 ees 466 Example of Error Jump Setup ee 467 Example of Tool Setup eres 461 Keyboard Setup Procedure 0 00ceee 462 Project related Item Setup 0 0 0 eee 266 Select the Project Setup Project Menu 28 Setting Options in Setup 0 eee 320 DOMUpP 4 eisbividitecbacsijecadinvsaeecctacens T 122 Setup File v is scanecseinesnececceseshenetenuttecstashaee geaawtnnees 123 Setup or Cancel of a Bookmark E A E 169 172
307. g Flash l Target area F All area Only built in Flash ROM area Start address H DEOOOO x End address H DE1FFF v Behavior Synchronize Debugger gt Flash hd Close When synchronizing from an internal buffer in the debugger to FLASH memory 1 Specify the target area For all areas Select the All Area check box For each sector Specify the start and end addresses to identify the target area 2 In Operation select Synchronize Debugger gt Flash 3 Click the Execute button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 457 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual va When synchronizing from FLASH memory to an internal buffer in the debugger 1 Specify the target area For all areas Select the All Area check box For each sector Specify the start and end addresses to identify the target area 2 In Operation select Synchronize Flash gt Debugger 3 Click the Execute button When erasing the FLASH Memory Area 1 Specify the target area For all areas Select the All Area check box For each sector Specify the start and end addresses to identify the target area 2 In Operation select Erase 3 Click the Execute button Note If the buffer on SOFTUNE Workbench is slightly changed writing is performed for the entire sector of the target when the data is reflected to the flash 458 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup
308. g Dialog 220 Area is Specified Outside Range of Internal Trace WINdOW ss ssesisasinsesunsosiisissuadsdnosanai diaisna 90 ROM RAM sssassssesesrerrsrsrssnsrsnesnenenesee 312 Trace Buffer Method of Outputting Warning When Section is Trace Bummer sisii ccsvivertecvesiescidbersvsssssantvostacenvanes 205 Placed Outside Specified ROM RAM Area Ra DE isissctesciccceaeieceaaiencncitnccssesssaasssents 312 Trace Data Warning and Error Messages ccceeeeeees 520 Measuring Time Between Trace Data Warning Message 0 cscssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 498 Frame Sanese ec n aaa 210 Search Trace Datassisisiuiei itneg 206 Watch Trace WD ata teristic ciepeaa vacates inacicciaesassactebactaveseapecsiaads 90 Watch Window essesesseseeeseesntsees 88 202 Update of Trace Data icccsssccidesssneccceensiesdcieeveene 205 Window Trace Function Clear All Bookmarks in the Current Trace FUNCtHOM sitesecccssseseanisceevecesi codeasa eed ssiciveassss 90 Window AE E yaaa 170 172 174 Trace Trigger Close All Windows ss ssssssssssseessreressssrrnrensernnnnes 475 Trace Setup Dialog Trace Trigger Tab Command Window Gadd tu esnai dia unau ia aae EEEE 92 218 236 Compliant Window sssssseeeesesssessssssnrnrnrnrrnrnnne 167 ee i Control Related to Window Display 00 469 Trigger Coverage Window sssseeeeereesesssrennnnrnns 100 248 Data Watch Trace Trigger Details Disassemble Window eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee
309. g given in Figure 4 6 32 is displayed e Status Enabling or disabling of the set sequencer is set e Set button The transition condition for the specified sequencer is set e List The transition condition currently being set for the sequencer is displayed e Event List button This button is used to display the event list dialog used to check the setting of all events e Delete button This button is used to delete the setting E Sequence Details Setting The Sequence details setting dialog box is used to set transition conditions for each level of the sequencer The dialog box appears when you click the Detail button in the 3 level sequence setting dialog box Figure 4 6 32 Sequence Details Setting Dialog Sequence details xm LEVEL LEVEL1 Sd Address Pass count D Attribute Address mask HFFFFFF 7 Read Size Byte M Write Comparison condition Disable C Data agreement Data not RE Cancel July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 377 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug SPANSION Software Support Manual AS e LEVEL LEVEL for which the transition condition is to be set is set e Address The address or symbol for which the transition condition is to be set is specified e Pass count The access count at the time of trigger hit is specified e Address mask The mask value for the specified address is specified e Size byte word The data size at the time of data access is specified e Attrib
310. g in regular expression Enables use of a Regular Expression vjildcard ete Specifies a search direction Up or Down Up Direction searches the file upward Down searches the file downward Position Specifies a search start position cursor top bottom 164 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 5 Find in Files This section explains how to search the specified file for the specified character string E File Search SOFTUNE Workbench searches the specified file for the specified character string and displays the search result in the output window SOFTUNE Workbench can search several files at a time A line can be immediately edited by double clicking the mouse on the line in the output window E Search Procedure 1 Select the Edit Find in Files menu Dialog box Figure 4 3 3 opens 2 Specify a character string The dialog box showing the character strings in the clipboard opens 3 Specify the file to be searched A wild card can also be used to specify the file to be searched 4 Specify the directory to be searched Click the button to the right of the specified field to open the directory search dialog box 5 Specify Match whole word only and Match case as required 6 Click the Find button The search result appears in the output window in real time 7 To abort a search click Abort button The file search is aborted
311. ge Dialog BOX 000000 282 Setting Symbol Definition ee 304 Single Trace Mode Setup Dialog cccccec0e 227 Delay Count To Display a Dialog Bookmark Setting the Delay Count cee SIA ava pagatbendientandabvsanaelacen nenesiay 168 171 173 Delete Trace Multi Trace Mode Setup Dialog 228 Customization Procedure Trace Setup Dialog Filtering Tab Deletion of Keyword sses 2O Aa 217 231 235 EE ttaccht ecb penet tocar te 160 Trace Setup Dialog Trace Trigger Tab Deleting a ROM RAM Area sosesc Bq E E E 218 236 Deleting Debugger Setup 0 cee 320 Trace Setup Dialog Trace Tab Deleting ReGisters ciscccccssssnsscccinnsacsccnensesssdeernveree B40 rate eee t eee e ee tettnees 212 213 215 230 234 Deleting Specific Active Project Configuration from Trace Trigger Details Setting Dialog 220 Prope diese ese NT 27 Version Information Dialog s s s s 11 1 1 479 Deleting Subproject from Project eeeeeeeee 25 Directory Deletion Procedure sssiiisissssrsissiississussinsssdineanns 326 Add Member Directory c ees 274 Editor Deletion Procedure 0 0 cee 465 Adding the Created Files to the Project with Their Project Configuration Add and Delete 329 Entire Directory sccescccnnriescnsrsncsesesssenvenene 24 Syntax Deletion Procedure 000 ceee 466 Executing Directory 0000ccceeeeeeeeeeee eran ees 325 T
312. hether to enable or disable the trace buffer full break which stops program execution when the trace buffer becomes full 212 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 8 2 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2141 This section explains the trace function for emulator debugger MB2141 E Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2141 For emulator debugger MB2141 the following trace functions can be used For details of each function see 2 2 6 Trace of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual e Setup of trace mode Control of trace status Buffer full break E Trace Setup Dialog Trace Tab To set the trace function select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window Setup of trace mode Figure 4 4 28 Trace Mode a trace Trace Status Enable Disable Buffer full break Break Not break Cancel e Status Enable Disable Specifies control status of trace e Buffer Full Break Break No break Specifies whether to enable or disable the trace buffer full break which stops program execution when the trace buffer becomes full July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 213 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 4 8 3 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 This section explains the trace function for emulator debugger MB2147 01 E Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 01
313. hod of Outputting Warning When ROM RAM Functions Related to Project and File Area is Specified Outside Range of Internal ACCESSING i itecccsvnsacecdiessnesdebananasuddeeniie 135 ROMIRA Moviccrscteesdccnatsncenensntessassnanvass 312 Making or Building of Project eee 32 Method of Outputting Warning When Section is Making or Building Specified Project 32 Placed Outside Specified ROM RAM Area Procedure for Adding a Project to Currently Opened RANGCs cs sisterncicisescesccancasmscidsoyscestsssnasess 312 WOLKSPACe wccicecissnciscnnsntecccnesaaesieernase 270 RAM Che CkKet is iwcvssssinicsinesnesdscnvaseitiecsveeneccerarnnce 265 Procedure for Defining Project RAM Checker Window ceeeeeeeeeeee eens 120 Dependente sicccccieciictarnnecsssneteostseeerenes 327 When a Section is Allocated to the Specified ROM PLO Otis cveveseasutiasetiaccessteeesceraueres dtd seressities 17 RAM Ate a iicciscccescscsnssnccctesnscsssesiaaeess 310 Project Bar siapin iiiaae Ae a 41 Range Project Configuration ara dileia atain aiei nora la tiaibinta ainveya aininlaw s afaia at giwia 328 Address Range Specification CEN EOS EEEREN E 14 Project Configuration Configuration at Method of Outputting Warning When ROM RAM BU ciissvssacadasinvsacceiesivaccaahiedswccaweeneons 331 Area is Specified Outside Range of Internal Project Configuration Add and Delete 329 ROMA sca drcacancieusrticrcsinlsanentincaas 312 Project Dependencies ccceeeeeeee
314. hortcut menu The specified file is deleted from the project member however the file itself is not deleted Users cannot delete any file in the categories Dependencies and Debug 24 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 7 Definition of Subproject Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 7 Definition of Subproject This section explains how to define a subproject E Definition of Subproject The subproject is a project on which other projects depend SOFTUNE Workbench uses the following methods to define a subproject e Defining project as subproject in storing it When created a new project is defined as a subproject in another project For the setting method see Section 2 5 Setting Project e Defining subproject between existing projects A subproject is defined between projects in workspace Another project is defined as a subproject in the subproject in the parent project Such a recurrent definition that the parent project itself serves as a subproject is impossible E Defining Subproject Between Existing Projects 1 Select Project Project Dependence 2 Select the parent project in which a subproject is defined When the Project Dependence dialog is opened select the name of the parent project in which a subproject is defined from the Project Name box 3 Select the project that is defined as a subproject Check the project that is defined as a subproject from those in the Depend
315. hortcut menu then select Customize from the menu The standard editor dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 2 opens Click View2 tab to choose the keyword type to be changed from the combo box Click Detail button The keyword dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 4 opens Click Reset button Click the OK button The keyword files is changed When not setting other items click the OK button When selecting view items and so on set all the related items then click the OK button Figure 3 6 2 Standard Editor Dialog Box Standard Editor Ex View View2 oe i View Re Tab Bookmark Cc JEOF Line Number Error cj i Ruler Saa a Emphasis Characters VIC Keywor VJASM Keyword Pe C __ mam 1 Assembly __ Tab Size Font i Cancel 70 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor Software Support Manual SPANSION au Figure 3 6 3 Standard Editor Dialog Box View2 View View2 View Keyword Comment Ic Keyword v File C Softune BIN CKW File twt Detail User Keyword Figure 3 6 4 Keyword Dialog Box Keyword List else long a enum registe estem return float short for signec goto sizeof if static include struct int switch T July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 71 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 7 Source Window a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual
316. ick the right button of the mouse in the Command Window to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Set Character String Replacement from the shortcut menu The character string replacement setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 2 opens 3 Set an alias Specify the alias that does not conflict with command names and the aliases that has been already registered 4 Write the command to be assigned to the specified alias The command can be written including its parameters 5 Click the Append button e Deleting an alias 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the Command Window to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Set Character String Replacement from the shortcut menu The character string replacement setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 15 2 opens 3 Select the alias to be deleted from the alias list 4 Click the Delete button Figure 3 15 2 Character String Replacement Setting Dialog Box Replace command Es Alias Variable Macro Alias df0 Command dump Alias list Alias name command Delete Close 94 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 15 Command Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Variable The name assigned to the address range to be referenced often can be used for command input Add and delete a variable in the following procedures e Adding a variable 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the Command Window to display the shortcut m
317. ifies end address of comparison source area Memory block comparison is continued up to this address e Target address Specifies start address of comparison destination area Figure 4 4 12 Comparison Dialog Compare Start address H F90000 End address H F9004D Close Target address H 000000 M Split window horizontally E Edit To edit memory data click the right mouse button in the Memory Window to display the menu then select Edit from the menu The edit dialog shown in Figure 4 4 13 opens Address Specifies address to edit Data Specifies memory data to rewrite Type Specifies size of data to rewrite Byte Word Long Figure 4 4 13 Memory Edit Dialog Edit memory data Ea Data H oa Close Type Byte v July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 199 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Display Setup To set the display format of the Memory Window click the right mouse button in the Memory Window then select Display Setup from the menu The Setup display dialog shown in Figure 4 4 14 opens Type Specifies display format of Memory Window Bit byte word or long can be selected ASCII Selects whether to display ASCII characters at right of Memory Window Columns To specify the number of bytes display in a line The number of bytes can be chosen from Automatic 4byte 8byte 16byte 32byte or 64byte Figure
318. igger Details Dialog Perform the procedure below to set sequence trace trigger for details 1 Select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window and then select Trace trigger tab 2 Select Sequencer for Type 3 Press Detail Details settings of sequence trace trigger Figure 4 4 35 Sequence Trace Trigger Details Setup Dialog Sequence details xa LEVEL LEVEL1 K Address Pass count D Attribute Address mask H FFFFFF Mi Reed Size Byte v IV write Comparison condition Disable C Data agreement Data not H 0000 H FFFF Canoe e LEVEL LEVEL1 LEVEL2 RESTART Selects LEVEL set for transition condition e Address Specifies the address set for each LEVEL of sequence trace trigger e Pass count Specifies the number of access at the time of trigger hit July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 225 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual AS e Address mask Specifies mask value for specified address e Size Byte Word Long Specifies access size at the time of data access e Attribute Read Write Write Read Specifies attribute at the time of data access e Comparison condition Specifies conditions of data comparison Disable Does not specify data for trigger condition Data agreement The case that the specified data matches is the trigger condition Data not The case that the specified data does not match is the trigger condition e Data Speci
319. iguration e Target system creation procedure e Explanation of sample program E Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Target To use the monitor debugger besides the debugger body mod935 rel mod911 rel and mod907 rel the following program must be added to create a target system Target system initialization routine T O driver used to communicate with host system Vector table Note The function call interface for the REALOS debug module r_d_dbg obj attached to Workbench is created using stack argument passing The target system using register argument passing cannot be incorporated For details of the function call interface see APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface E Target System Configuration The monitor debugger configuration is shown in the figure below Target system initialization RS232C T O driver for communication Debugger body Target system E Communication with Host System The target system uses the RS 232C interface to communicate with the host system For this reason the target system must be provided with communication hardware 508 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX D Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Target Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Program Suspension ABORT Switch The target system should be designed so that a user NMI is issued by pressing the ABORT swi
320. ile and document file etc select Text File from the new creation dialog box The editor is started in the status in which a new file is created 144 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 2 2 Open Open opens existing files Selecting Open from the File Menu opens the open dialog box asking the file you want to open Figure 4 2 10 E Open Dialog Box Selecting Open from the File Menu opens the open dialog box The following file types can be selected in File type Workspace file Project file Load module file Source file Binary file the debug session only Alias file the debug session only Coverage file the debug session only Batch file the debug session only Text file Figure 4 2 10 Open Dialog Box mn Open File type Workspace Project file Load module file Text file Cancel iL July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 145 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu a gt lt SPANSION Software Support Manual a E File Name Selection Dialog Box If a load module file binary file or batch file is selected in the file type selection dialog box Figure 4 2 11 the following items can be specified For load module file Figure 4 2 11 Open Dialog Box Load Module File Lookin Ji Project aa Name i Type J MB90F394 File folder _ MB96F346RSB File folder _ MB96F673AA File
321. illing data to fill specified memory area Several filling data can be specified delimited by a comma 196 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Copy Available only on the emulator debugger Figure 4 4 9 Memory Operation Copy Copy to emulation memory Match with emulation memory Fill Copy Start address H F90000 End address H F9004D Target address H oo0000 i Cancel To copy data to memory open the Copy tag then set the copy source start address copy source end address and copy destination start address Start address Specifies start address of copy source area Data copy is started at this address End address Specifies end address of copy source area Data copy is continued to this address Target address Specifies start address of copy destination area e Copy to emulation memory Available only on the emulator debugger Figure 4 4 10 Memory Operation Dialog Copy Emulation Memory Fil Copy Copy to emulation memory Match with emulation memory Start Address H F90000 End Address H F9004D Cancel July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 197 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual v To copy data from user memory to emulation memory open the Copy to emulation memory tag then set the transfer start address and transfer end address Start Address
322. imulator debugger July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 79 a SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 9 Disassemble Window Software Support Manual E Shortcut Menu There are ten menus below Inline Assemble See Section 4 4 3 Assembly Jump Displays jump dialog box Go to Current Displays current PC location Breakpoint Set Reset This function is to set or to cancel the breakpoint pointed by cursor Breakpoint Enable Disable To make breakpoint in the instruction pointed by cursor enable or disable Break See Section 4 6 4 Break Point Watch See Section 4 4 7 Watch Stack See Section 4 6 7 Stack Set coverage Please refer to Section 4 4 12 Coverage This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger Display coverage Switches on off the display of the coverage When Display coverage is turned on the executed lines are displayed in green and the unexecuted lines are in brown This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger Activate when stop Specifies whether to activate the window or not when the execution is stopped Close Closes disassemble window Jump Specifies the position to display in the disassemble window Perform this operation in the following procedure 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the disassemble window to display the shortcut menu then 2
323. inary alias setup or coverage file that was edited even once is to be saved E Processing a Newly Created Text If there is a newly created text that has not been saved yet the file dialog box for asking the operator to enter the name of the file to be saved opens Specify a file name from this dialog box 154 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 2 9 Print Print prints file data E Data to be Printed Print prints data in the file currently open in the edit window it cannot print other window file data Print output window data in any of the following two procedures e Copy output window data to the edit window in the following procedure then select Print from the File menu 1 Select all output window data 2 Click the right button of the mouse to display the menu then select Copy 3 Open the edit window then select Paste from the Edit menu e Save output window data once then print it For how to save output window data see Section 4 2 7 Save As Open the saved file with the edit window then select Print from the File menu July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 155 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 2 10 Recent Text File Recent Workspace File Of the source files opened in the Source Window Recent Text File stores up to five most recently opened source files Of the used proje
324. information and closes the workspace file No button Closes the project file without saving the current workspace information Cancel button Cancels workspace file close processing In the following cases however the above dialog box does not open The workspace file is not modified When the workspace file is closed inquiry for save is not set E When the Currently Open Project File is Being Edited The dialog box for asking the operator whether to save the current workspace information opens When the Yes or No button is clicked to continue processing the dialog box for asking the operator whether to save the file being edited subsequently opens Yes button Saves the file being edited and then closes the workspace file No button Closes the file being edited without saving the file being edited Cancel button Workspace is closed with the file being edited opened 150 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 2 6 Save Save saves the currently open file using the existing file name E Save Dialog Box The save dialog box is used to save the file using the existing file name The text file Workspace Project file binary file alias file setup file or coverage file can be selected from this dialog box as the type of file If SOFTUNE Workbench is not in the debug session the binary file alias file setup file
325. ing an External Tool The tools set by Section 4 7 5 Tool are registered in the submenu A tool can be started by selecting it from this submenu Setting a check mark to the left of Designate Additional Option when Executing in tool setup opens the additional option setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 66 before the tool is started Set an additional option from this dialog box then click the OK button The option specified from this dialog box is added after the option specified in tool setup and the tool is started Figure 4 7 66 Additional Option Setup Dialog Box Specify Other Parameter z Execute String fc Program Files Windows NT Accessories wordp Add Parameter Cancel 468 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 8 Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 8 Window Window controls window display E Control Related to Window Display e Cascade e Vertical e Horizon e Split e Arrange Icons e Refresh Window e Refresh All Windows e Close All Windows E Window Name Display Up to 9 currently open window names are displayed including icon windows If ten windows or more are open the tenth and subwindows are displayed in Other Windows July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 469 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 8 Window a SPANSION Software Support Manual v 4 8 1 Cascade Vertical Horizon Cascade Vertical and Horizon specify the display formats of subwindows e g
326. ing files as samples for the initialization routine I O driver and vector table train inc Definition of I O addresses of CPU sprt670 inc Definition of I O addresses of CPU u_init asm Initialization Communication timer Setting of stack area u_io asm Driver Communication timer intv asm Interrupt vector table link opt Input file to linker flag inc Setting of resource select flag etc mod907 rel_ monitor unit E Sample Files Refer the following files provided as samples the user builds into the target system The files to be built into the target system should be rewritten as required Some symbol names are fixed because they are externally referenced from the debugger body Such symbol names are suffixed by an asterisk Use these names as they are sprt670 inc File for defining labels used by u_io asm This file defines F MC 16 I O addresses etc u_init asm u_init Initializes communication and timer etc used by debugger When using abort and timer processing set the 1 byte _abtflg and _timflg flags to 1 When not using them set the flags to 0 Set internal ROM or external ROM u_io asm inithrd Note Initializes target system and sets CPU e g memory interface setup Do not set them in the user program to be debugged Depending on the user program to be reset the debugger may not operate normally initbd Initializes the evaluation board initrs Initializes comm
327. ing in the Customize Bar This section describes registering in the customize bar E Registering in Customize Bar You can registers batch files and Workbench menus and external tools in the customize bar Register using the Customize Bar Setting Dialog Figure 5 1 4 displayed in View Customize Bar Setting For details on how to register see Section 5 1 3 1 Registering Batch File 5 1 3 2 Registering Workbench Menu and 5 1 3 3 Registering External Tool Figure 5 1 4 Customize Bar Setting Dialog Customize bar Setting Dialog mym File List Entry G Softune Initialize pre 2 3 RunBreak 4 SetupDbgeny 5 6 Wordpad m Number 1 Kind Batch File Down Entry G Softune nitialize pre Browse Batch File Parameter PO Delete Parameter Setting Dialog Close EREE a Iconic 488 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar Software Support Manual SPANSION a E items in Dialog Box e File List The settings registered in the customize bar are displayed e Number Specify the number to register in the customize bar Numbers from 1 to 10 can be specified e Kind Select either Batch File or Menu to register in the customize bar e Entry 1 When Batch File is selected in Kind Enter the batch file name to be registered in the customize bar To select from a list specify with the Open File Dialog Box Figure 5 1
328. ing state E Sequence Window This window is used to set a sequencer that functions as a break or trace trigger when multiple events are hit in a specified order This window is displayed only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2198 For the sequence function see Section 4 6 6 1 Sequence Setting MB2141 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 109 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 19 Sequence Window SPANSION Software Support Manual a 3 19 1 Sequence Window MB2141 This section explains the Sequence Window of the emulator debugger MB2141 E Sequence Window An example of the sequence window is shown in Figure 3 19 1 The sequence window is used to display the sequence setting state at debugging Figure 3 19 1 Sequence Window E Sequence Seog Ex Levell Eventl gt Level2 Event2 gt Levels Levelz Event2 gt Level3 Levels Event3 gt END Level4 Level5 Level6 Level Level E Setting a Sequence in Sequence Window The following procedure should be followed to set a sequencer in the Sequence Window 1 Set events Set the events to be used in the sequence using the event dialog box which is displayed by Debug Event menu 2 Set jump levels Set a jump level for each event that has been set in Step 1 using the sequence setting dialog box which is displayed from the shortcut menu Setting in th
329. ing the Browse button to the right of this field opens the file selection dialog box The execution file name of the tool can be selected from this dialog box Set an option Macro description can be used in this field For macro description refer to Section 1 11 Macro Descriptions Usable in Manager in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Write an executing directory This description may be omitted if control need not be moved to any specific executing directory Clicking the Browse button to the right of this field opens the file selection dialog box A run time directory can be selected from this dialog box Set a check mark to the left of Designate Additional Option when Executing and Use Output Window as required When a check mark is set to the left of Designate Additional Option when Executing SOFTUNE Workbench asks you to enter additional options when a tool is started When a check mark is set to the left of Use Output Window SOFTUNE Workbench displays tool output output to the standard output device or standard error output device in the Output Window Click the Setup button E Tool Deletion Procedure 1 2 3 Select Tool from the Setup Menu The tool setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 62 opens Select the tool title you want to delete from the tool list Click the Delete button E Tool Change Procedure 1 Select Tool from the Setup Menu The tool setup dialog box sho
330. ing timing Enable C Disable Machine clock rise Chip speed External clock input rise Highspeed Normalspeed External clock input fall Timer minimum measuring unit 1us July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 425 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual Figure 4 7 23 Debug Environment Setup Emulation Tab Directory Tab Emoroutput Load Frequency Break Execution Step execution Watch Radix Emulation Monitoring m Watchdog C Enable Disable Tab Error output Load Frequency Break Response speed Execution Event Watch Radix Emulation Monitoring Directory Memory verify operation Enable Disable Permit C Forbid Accepting DMA oa Cancel 426 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a The items that can be set for matters related to chip operation are as follows Table 4 7 13 Setup Item in Emulation Tab Memory Verify Operation Debugger EML MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 MCU operation speed Sampling timing Minimum measurement unit of Peripheral resources Accepting DMA Memory Verify Operation Enable Disable Specifies whether to verify memory when data is written to memory MCU operation speed Normal High speed
331. ion into toolbar module Space Required on G 82980 K Space Available on G 13433456 K InstallShield lt Back Cancel When the customize bar is installed the Customize Bar is added to the SOFTUNE Workbench View menu Figure 5 1 3 and a tool bar Figure 5 1 1 for the customize bar is displayed 486 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar Software Support Manual 5 1 2 Customize Bar Menu SPANSION a This section describes the customize bar menu E Customize Bar Menu There are two submenus in the Customize Bar Setting View Registers batch files and Workbench menus in the customize bar This menu is enabled when opening a workspace Switches to view hide the tool bar for the customize bar This menu is always enabled when SOFTUNE Workbench is running Figure 5 1 3 Customize Bar Menu r File Edit View Project Debug Setup Window Help _ Project Fa 50 gt Output E E BBF346RSB it Symbol Assembly Register Memory Local Trace Coverage Performance Command Object Realtime memory RAM Checker Sequence Terminal Tool bar gt Status Bar Tab Font Customize bar v Alt Ms Onr ON Dz nene SS July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 487 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar SPANSION Software Support Manual a 5 1 3 Register
332. ion Connection category The disposition connection setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 43 opens 3 Select Auto Disposition from the drop down list None Mode1 Mode2 NONE The linker does not allocate the sections automatically Model If any absolute sections exist when allocating sections in a ROM RAM area specified in the ROM RAM Area List the linker allocates relocatable sections to avoid an overlap to each of the addresses to be allocated It will properly allocate the sections in a descending order of their alignment values and sizes so that empty area is minimized Mode2 The linker determines whether to allocate sections unspecified for allocation in a ROM area or in a RAM area based on the types of the sections and automatically allocates them in empty area in each area Setup Project ee Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari KIG Category Disposition Connection v Auto Disposition Mode2 vl ROM RAM Area List Set Delete Ur Down MBS0F394 v ROM RAM Ar Start End Add rea _INRAMOL ooo100 OO3FFF Ran _INROMOL Fcoooo FFFFFF ROM The Disposition Connection option is reset Set Section iv When a ROM RAM area is specified beyond the internal ROM RAM range the warning is issued v When sections are arranged beyond the range that the ROM RAM area is specified the warning is issued Option g AL2 fa_INRAMO1 0 0001 00 0x003FF
333. ion for Emulator Debugger MB214 1 cisccsdsvssiteeceassantactentesaeccdatives 252 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaes 253 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2198 csisssssdivescctieashiessesieesiececiacwes 256 Performance Function Setup Dialog 258 Performance Setup Dialog 252 253 256 Performance Window 0 cecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 102 Update of Performance Data n 250 Placement When Initializing Placement Link Option Based on MCU Information cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 313 Port Resetting an Input Port eee eerie 405 Resetting an Output Port eee eee 407 Setting an Input Port ccs 404 Setting an Output Port eee 406 Previous Move the Caret to the Previous Bookmark cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaees 169 Move the Caret to the Previous Bookmark in the Current Window 0066 169 172 174 Previous Error ccccceeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaes 175 Procedure Customization Procedure Color ccseseeeeeees 69 Customization Procedure Deletion of Keyword cceeeeeeeeeeee 70 Customization Procedure Font sseeeeeeeees 69 Customization Procedure Initialization of Keyword 70 Customization Procedure Keyword Addition 0 0 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 69 Customization Procedure Tab Count 0006 69 Customization Procedure View ceecee
334. ion of delay branching instruction with the menu below the instruction on the delay slot the instruction just after delay branching instruction is executed and a break occurs just after executing delay branching instruction Debug Run Step in menu Debug Run Step over menu MB2100 01 e If the following functions are used while a user program is running time shown below for each function is required for program recovery Power on debug approx 100 ms from power recovery to program recovery External reset issue 50 ms from reset issue to program recovery July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 335 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 6 1 1 Power On Debug This section explains how to use the power on debug function E Power on Debug For details on power on debug refer to Section 2 4 9 Power on Debug in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Use Conditions This function can be used in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2198 MB2147 01 MB2100 01 E How to Use For MB2147 01 or MB2198 1 Enable the power on debug mode Select Debug Run Power On Debug The power supply voltage dialog box is displayed 2 Specify the lower limit voltage Input with volt as a unit Following the above steps enables the power on debug function Figure 4 6 1 Power Supply Voltage Dialog Power supply voltage Lower volt 25 Cancel
335. ion of the configuration board MB2198 when configuration board is connected Adapter version Version of the adapter MB2100 01 FPGA version Version of FPGA MB2100 01 Maker ID ID to indicate a device manufacturer MB2100 01 CPU family ID ID to indicate CPU family to be installed on a device MB2100 01 DSU type ID ID to indicate implementation type of OCD DSU MB2100 01 DSU version ID ID to indicate version information of DSU to be installed on a device MB2100 01 Device ID ID to indicate device information MB2100 01 Device version ID ID to indicate version information of a device MB2100 01 MCU frequency Operating frequency MB2198 OSC clock Actual setting value user setting value of the OSC clock MB2100 01 PLL clock Actual setting value user setting value of the PLL clock MB2100 01 Clock mode Clock mode Main Sub PLL RC MB2100 01 Communication mode Communication mode during debugging MB2100 01 Communication type Communication type 0 NRZ modulation 1 Phase modulation MB2100 01 Communication device Device type MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2198 MB2100 01 Baud rate Communication baud rate MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 when RS is connected Host name LAN host name MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 when LAN is connected REALOS version Version of REALOS SilODef Product name Softune Workbench File Path Path to SilODef dll Version Version of SilODef dll Current path Path to th
336. ion on settings of existing project configuration A new project configuration is created on the settings of the selected existing project configuration In the new project configuration the same files as those in the original project configuration are always used E Creating Project Configuration on Settings of Existing Project Configuration 1 2 Select Project Project Configuration Add and Delete Select the project to which a project configuration is added When the Add and Delete Project dialog is opened select the project to which a project configuration is added Click the Add button Click the Add button The Add Project Configuration dialog is opened Enter the project configuration name Enter the unique name of a new project configuration The characters that can be used to form a name are ato z A to Z 0 to 9 and _ Select the project configuration to which settings are copied Select the initial settings of a project configuration to be added The selected settings of the project configuration such as tool options file configurations and configurations of subprojects to be build are copied as they are Click the OK button Click the OK button in the Add Project Configuration dialog and the OK button in the Add and Delete Project Configuration dialog E Setting Active Project Configuration The active project configuration is at default a project configuration that u
337. is function cannot be used when the event mode is the trace mode For details refer to Section 2 2 9 Measuring Performance or 2 3 7 Measuring Performance in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual MB2100 01 This function cannot be used when the execution time mode is the time measurement mode For details refer to Section 2 4 3 2 Switching Debug Function in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 251 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 4 13 1 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2141 This section explains the performance function for emulator debugger MB2141 E Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2141 For emulator debugger MB2141 the following items can be set when the event mode is the performance mode e Performance mode Buffer full break e Display mode For details of each item see 2 3 8 Measuring Performance of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Performance Setup Dialog To set the performance function select Setup from the shortcut menu of the Performance Window Setup of performance mode Figure 4 4 59 Performance Mode Setup Dialog Performance ctrl x Buffer full break Break C Not break e Buffer full break Specifies whether to break or not when the performance buffer becomes full 252 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a
338. is the same name as the project name e Directory Specifies the directory for creating a project The default setting is the directory where SOFTUNE is installed Click the Browse button to select a directory e Dependency If placing a check mark the list box to specify the project name is activated If the project name is specified this is defined as a subproject of the project specified for registration E Procedure for Adding a Project to Currently Opened Workspace To add a project to the currently opened workspace see 2 5 Setting Project 270 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual 4 5 2 2 Add Project Existing Project An existing project is stored in workspace E Add Project Existing Project Figure 4 5 2 Add Project Dialog Look in p Project ef Br Name Type J MB90F394 File folder J MB96F346RSB File folder _ MB96F673AA File folder Checker prj _ sample prj anl m r perme Files of type Project File pr 7 Cancel Dependencies sample pr e Dependencies When the project name is specified in the combo box the project to be stored is defined as a subproject in the specified project E Procedure for Addition For the procedure for addition of a project see Section 2 4 Creating Workspace SPANSION ua July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 271 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a SPANSION Sof
339. ister sia asinbnadaaiakvadananeunesantaadnieraiaecuaseccsnassaeess 191 Project related Item Setup ee 266 Register N amie Flag Name sssescssessserssresssesesen 11 Register WindOW sese eee eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 82 a 176 REZISTETS vccsndsnctccvetanncrdiscsnosstatwavenedseysteaneddvaruas 502 perty Pees reeesneeseeesnteeatesateeaeeeaeeannien Restoring Repistet to the Initial Sitis seori 84 Property FUNCION wiccicceseseteeetansineconsnsedeaaivanns anes 158 So Setting Register Bank eects 308 Property Conditions sssssseeeeeereesesessssnnnnnnn 179 Setting Register Display sssssesesssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrnne 83 Property General PON 177 181 182 183 184 185 Registering l Property IMpUt cvincsiccecceeseneecvadtunccsasctesscsauaeesen se 179 Registering o Editor ie eg ee eager ici 464 Property QUEPUL sicssecssciie se ccdies opesscedacieseaeesiees 180 Registering in Customize Bar ssssesssserssserees 488 Replace Q Replace i iiwistaativcisteidis cena cdivetsecngestdanietarnianeens 163 Reset Queue RESE eesin aeaa a aaa n a aasan 324 Detailed Display of Alarm Queue 247 Restorin Detailed Display of Ready Queue c 246 oe Besisters tothe Initial Beas 84 Detailed Display of Timer Queue 246 og a E ey rere eee Result R Displaying the Latch Measurement Result 375 Result Display RAM Result Display scccccieecccussisarscsisapsosssasssnencseaservenss 3
340. istered position from the tree view and then press the NEW button When a category is selected and the NEW button is pressed a tool entitled NEWTOOL is created at the end of the category When a tool is selected and the NEW button is pressed a tool entitled NEWTOOL is created immediately after the selected tool Tools in the Before After category are executed sequentially from the top 3 Set the title of the tool to be registered July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 325 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual v 4 Set the execution file to be registered When the Browse button at the right of this field is clicked the file selection dialog is displayed and the tool execution file name can be selected from this dialog 5 Set the option if necessary 6 Set the execution time directory if necessary When the Browse button at the right of this field is clicked the directory selection dialog is displayed and the execution time directory can be selected from this dialog 7 Set Enable Designate additional option when executing and Use Output window if necessary Select a category or two or more tools from the tree view to batch change Enable Designate additional option when executing and Use Output window 8 Set the temporary file data as necessary 9 Click the OK button to complete setting E Deletion Procedure 1 Select Project Customize Build The Cu
341. it from the shortcut menu The variable edit dialog shown in Figure 4 4 15 opens 3 Set a variable value then click the OK button Figure 4 4 15 Variable Edit Dialog Pree ae H 00000010 Cancel a _ Cancel July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 201 a gt SPANSION AN 4 4 7 Watch CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual Watch displays the Watch Window E Watch Window The Watch Window displays the values of the specified variables in tree format The variable values modified as a result of program execution are updated automatically For this reason the user can observe how variable values change as a result of program execution The shortcut menu can be used to modify the displayed variable values Set the variables to be displayed with the following procedures 1 Click the right mouse button in the Watch Window The shortcut menu is displayed Select a Setup The watch setup dialog shown in Figure 4 4 16 opens Input a variable name from the dialog Also select a mode as required Select a Watch window number Click the OK button Figure 4 4 16 Watch Setup Dialog Setup watch Variable name Max Mode Automatic v Cancel Watch 1 v Variable name Specify the name of a variable to be displayed Mode Automatic C language Assembler Specify the mode C or assembler language in which a variable is displayed For automatic
342. itoring point data in bit format and in byte word format The RAM Checker window displays the logging status and monitoring If the log status is disabled monitoring also is disabled Updates monitoring display data every 100 ms Displays data in bit format and byte word format Displays data that is different from the memory in the previous update in red Cannot edit memory Notes e Monitoring When the logging status of the RAM Checker window is enabled the monitoring display of other windows memory watch etc become disabled regardless of their settings e Debug function The RAM Checker window is enabled only when the debug function on MB2147 01 is set to RAM Checker mode For details refer to Section 2 3 1 6 Debug Function in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual e Event Mode When using the RAM Checker window set an event mode to single trace mode If an event mode is set to performance the RAM Checker window cannot be opened When an event mode is changed to performance mode the logging state of the RAM Checker window becomes disabled When an event mode is set to performance while the RAM Checker window is opened the RAM Checker window automatically closes To set an event mode open the Setup debug environment dialog box by selecting the menu Setup Debug Environment Debug Environment and then select the event tab e Event Functions Refer to Sections 2 3 6 Real time Trace in SOFTUNE
343. ject Software Support Manual SPANSION a e CPU Execution Operation Setup External Data Bus Width Figure 4 5 11 CPU Execution Operation Setup Dialog External Data BUS Width Exception Occurence ICE Execution Speed External Databus Width External Bus Access Area m External data bus width Data bus width 1 0 Bus width HIGH Bus width LOW Bus width External data bus Type i Cancel Data Bus Width Specifies external data bus width T O Bus Width Specifies I O bus width HIGH Bus Width Specifies HIGH bus width LOW Bus Width Specifies LOW bus width e External Data Bus Type Figure 4 5 12 CPU Execution Operation Setup Dialog External Data Bus Type la 5 m Setup external data bus type Multiplex C Non multiplex External Data Bus Type Setup Sets external data bus type July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 283 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual va e CPU Execution Operation Setup External Bus Access Area Figure 4 5 13 CPU Execution Operation Setup Dialog External Bus Access Area fe Exception Occurrence ICE Execution Speed External Databus Width External Bus Access Area Setup external bus access area Start address H 000000 Append End address jH 000000 Address range om Cancel Start Address Specifies start address of external bus access area End Address Specifies end ad
344. ject directory Select a target MCU name and chip type E Setting of Workspace Perform setting common to projects to be stored in workspace 1 2 Select Set Workspace from the Project menu When the Set Workspace dialog is opened perform the following settings Debug when workspace opened Start debugging Save setup information Save E Settings Related to the Debugger 1 2 3s Select Project Setup from the Project Menu When the setup dialog box opens open the Debug tag and select Setup category Set a setup name A project name is set both in Setup Name List and Valid Setup Name as the default setup name Usually setup names are identified by the type of the debugger to be used However if only one debugger is used the default name may be used as it is When the default name is used select the default name already set in Setup Name List then click the Change Setup button When another name is used specify Setup Name then click the Add Setup button E Setup Wizard Clicking the Add Setup or Change Setup button starts the Setup Wizard for debuggers Once Setup Wizard has been started set items according to instructions from Setup Wizard For how to set items with Setup Wizard see Section 4 7 2 5 Setup Wizard When all settings with Setup Wizard are completed click the Complete button When the Project Setup dialog box is redisplayed click the OK button Whe
345. k the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Source Window from the menu When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session the Source Window is displayed See Section 3 7 Source Window When SOFTUNE Workbench is not in the debug session this menu cannot be selected Undo Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Undo from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench cancels the last editing and undoes the status before the editing See Section 4 3 1 Undo Redo Redo Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Redo from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench cancels the cancel of the last editing Cut 1 Select the character string you want to cut Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Move from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench deletes the selected character string from the edit window and moves it to the clipboard See Section 4 3 2 Cut Copy Paste Delete Copy 1 Select the character string you want to copy Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Copy from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench copies the selected character string to the clipboard See Section 4 3 2 Cut Copy Paste Delete Paste 1 Move the cursor to the position into which the character string is to be inserted Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select
346. lay the contents of the mirror memory specified using Real time Area tab of Debug Environment on Setup menu at debugging The memory contents cannot be rewritten directly To change the display area use Area on the shortcut menu E Function e Drag and Drop By dropping variable name function mode label or address from source window to disassemble window display will be jumped to a location where an address of dropped character Figure 3 20 1 Real time Memory Window real 0 1 2 FSOO4E 00 00 00 FOOOBA Fl E 42 F900D2 D2 1D 71 F900DE B3 Fa Dl 1 00 00 OO Realtime memory F900C6 OA 47 648 4 5 oo 00 00 89 6F 10 02 6 A4 71 93 70 73 6 7 00 00 39 7E 42 00 gt CB OO 6 00 04 6F 08 GY 03 6 00 4F F9 AB h B Ascii co on C B 0o B o d e a Ui _ oo Data display area You cannot change the data displayed Non ASCII characters Chinese characters control codes etc are all displayed with Column title This line does not scroll 118 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 20 Real time Memory Window Software Support Manual SPANSION E Shortcut Menu e Area Displays data from the beginning of area specified using Debug Environment tab of Real time Area on Setup menu e Area specification Calls Real time Area tab of Debug Environment on Setup menu e Monitori
347. lay value is reverse displayed Specify the values to set in turn using a hexadecimal number starting from the highest order digit leftmost digit The register value is set automatically when the digit in the lowest order bit rightmost digit is changed Partial digital bit field change Click the digit to be changed in the register value display The cursor appears at the left of the clicked digit Set the new value as a 1 digit hexadecimal number The cursor automatically moves to the right digit If the changed digit is the lowest order digit the register value is updated automatically When changing of the required number of digits is completed click another register name or register value display If the Register Window is closed without clicking another register name or register value display the changed value is not set in the register This operation is not necessary when the change to the lowest order bit is completed Selected register name change Click the right mouse button in the Register Window to display the shortcut menu then select Edit The register edit dialog shown in Figure 4 4 3 opens Select a register name Input the value to set Click the OK button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 191 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual va Figure 4 4 3 Register Edit Dialog Box Edit register Register name PC v
348. lays the execution cycle count by converting it to real time Disable No conversion e Cycle Conversion frequency MHz kHz Hz Sets the execution cycle conversion frequency SOFTUNE Workbench calculates the real time based on the cycle of execution cycle conversion frequency as 1 cycle and display it The default unit is MHz July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 391 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 6 9 Call This section explains the SOFTUNE Workbench function call function E Function Call The specified function can be started during debugging without reference to the flow of the program This function is known as function call Figure 4 6 45 Function Call Dialog Box cv Function call x Function sort_val 100 16 V Display return value Cancel When the function call dialog box shown in Figure 4 6 45 opens specify the function you want to call with a correct argument Compiles with C arguments however next argument does not specify If you specify it debugger outputs error message structure union class Figure 4 6 46 Function Call Result Dialog Box i Result of call function Function sort_val Result lt void gt When processing of the called function is terminated and control is returned the function call result dialog box shown in Figure 4 6 46 opens Example When function definition is int sub int param specify
349. le Editor Standard Editor Title Execute Filename Browse Option Executing Directory Browse __se__ Standard Editor Editor List Macro define f Filename Z z 4 x Project Path EA Line Number Cancel E Editor Registration Procedure 1 Select Editor from the Setup Menu The editor setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 64 opens 2 Set a unique title that differs from the registered names 3 Specify the execution file name of the editor to be registered 4 Clicking the Browse button to the right of this field opens the file selection dialog box The execution file name of the editor can be selected from this dialog box 464 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a 5 Set an option Macro description can be used in this field For macro description refer to Section 1 9 Storing External Editors_ in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual 6 Write a run time directory This description may be omitted if control need not to be moved to any specific run time directory Clicking the Browse button to the right of this field opens the file selection dialog box A run time directory can be selected from this dialog box 7 Click the Set button E Editor Deletion Procedure 1 Select Editor from the Setup Menu The editor setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 64 opens 2 Select the title of the editor to be
350. les Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Find in Files from the menu SOFTUNE Workbench sets the clipboard character string in Find what and opens the Find in Files dialog box See Section 4 3 5 Find in Files e Jump to Specified Line 1 Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Jump to Specified Line from the menu The dialog box for specifying the jump destination line opens See Section 4 3 6 Jump 2 Set the jump destination line number 3 Click the OK button e Status Bar Status Bar switches status bar display and non display for each Edit Window Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Status Bar from the menu When the status bar has been already displayed SOFTUNE Workbench switches status bar display to nondisplay and deletes the check mark from the menu When the status bar is not displayed SOFTUNE Workbench displays the status bar and adds a check mark to the left end of the menu e Property Click the right button of the mouse to display the shortcut menu then select Property from the list SOFTUNE Workbench displays file information See Section 4 3 9 Property July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 67 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 3 6 1 Setting Standard Editor This section explains how to customize the stan
351. lls in the outside of the coverage measurement rage an asterisk is attached to the end of the coverage rate This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger E ABS Tab Bitmap Image List Load module name C source file E Assembler source file Function name 58 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window Software Support Manual SPANSION va E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Load Module Name Figure 3 4 20 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 20 Shortcut Menu on a Load Module Name Open Order by name Order by address Order by coverage rate Coverage v Coverage rate display Refresh Property e Open Cannot be selected e Order by name Sort items in the tree in alphabetical order e Order by address Sort functions in the tree in address order and sort other items in the tree in alphabetical order e Order by coverage rate Sort items in the tree in ascending order This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Set coverage Opens the coverage setting dialog This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Display coverage rate Switches on off the display of the coverage rate When Display coverage rate is turned on
352. m Specify internal 1 0 area Start address H o00000 End address H OOOOCF Cancel Start Address Sets start address of internal I O area End Address Sets end address of internal I O area 288 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Setup CPU Information Intelligent I O Service Figure 4 5 23 CPU Information Setup Dialog Intelligent I O Service Delayed Interrupt Internal 1 0 Area Internal RAM Area IRQ and ICR Standby Control Register Intelligent 1 0 Service m Setup intelligent 1 0 service Normal Extended i Cancel Intelligent I O Service Setup Sets intelligent I O service Normal Extension e Setup CPU Information MCU Limit check Figure 4 5 24 CPU Information Setup Dialog MCU Limit Check Delayed Interrupt Standby Control Register Intelligent 1 0 Service Intemall O Area Intemal RAM Area IRQ and ICR MCU Limit Check Internal Instruction RAM Area m MCU limit check C Enable Disable MCU limit check Specifies whether to enable or disable native check Enable Disable July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 289 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual e Setup CPU Information MCU Internal Instruction RAM Area 16H Figure 4 5 25 CPU Information Setup Dialog Internal Instruction RAM Area ra Setup CPU Information Delayed Interrupt Standby Cont
353. mance This section explains the performance function E Performance Function The performance function is used to measure the time and cycle count required for a program to execute a specified interval Measurement data is displayed in the Performance Window The performance function which can be used depends on each debugger How to set the performance function for each debugger is explained in the subsequent pages E Update of Performance Data Performance data displayed in the Performance Window is not updated in realtime according as debugging progresses Consequently to display the latest performance measurement data click the right button of the mouse in the Performance Window to display the shortcut menu then select Refresh from the menu E Performance Buffer Performance measurement data is buffered in the performance buffer The performance buffer becomes full some time during debugging progresses because its size is finite If performance data exceeding the size or the maximum measurement count of the performance buffer is obtained older data is overwritten When the performance buffer becomes full the program being executed can be stopped This is called buffer full break E Performance Event Setup To set the event of performance measurement interval select Event from the shortcut menu of the performance window The following dialog appears for each debugger Emulator debugger MB2141 Event dialog For details see
354. mat is as follows bank specification offset specification bank specification Expression used to specify a bank address offset specification Expression used to specify a 16 bit address 14 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes Software Support Manual SPANSION ua 2 1 6 File Name Specification File name specification complies with Windows for host environment E File Name Specification drive name directory path name file name extension When drive name is omitted the current drive is selected July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 15 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 2 Starting and Terminating SOFTUNE Workbench SPANSION Software Support Manual a 2 2 Starting and Terminating SOFTUNE Workbench This section explains how to start and terminate SOFTUNE Workbench E Starting and Terminating SOFTUNE Workbench With SOFTUNE V3 to start SOFTUNE Workbench double click the FFMC 16 Family Softune Workbench icon in the Softune V3 group When this program is started for the first time with SOFTUNE Manager VO1 or V02 installed the dialog box is displayed which asks whether or not to take over information for Setting editor Setting tools and Setting error jump set in the previous version To take over the information click the Yes button Not to take over it click the No button E Terminating SOFTUNE Workbench To terminate SOFTUNE Workbench
355. measurement mode e Measurement interval For details of each item see 2 4 8 Measuring Executing Cycle Count between Two Points of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Note that for this debugger the above settings are allowed even while a user program is running E Performance Function Setup Dialog To set the performance function select Setup from the shortcut menu of the Performance Window Setup of performance mode Figure 4 4 65 Performance Mode Setup Dialog Interval x Measurement mode Accumulate C One shot Cancel e Buffer full break This debugger does not support the buffer full break function e Measurement mode Specifies a measurement content of performance as one of the followings Accumulate Measures an accumulated cycle count which passes a specified interval One shot Measures a one time cycle count which first passed the specified interval A previous measurement content is cleared each time the measurement is started 258 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a Setup of performance measurement interval Figure 4 4 66 Performance Interval Setup Dialog SS Ma Event xa Interval Interval AREA AREA gt Set START END Code Y aN Code v Yel e List Adi Event list Close START is the performance measurement start condition while END is the performance measurement end con
356. member is added in directories to the currently selected project See Section 4 5 3 Add Member At default a member is inserted into the selected folder 52 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Set When selected the following two submenus are displayed Individual Setting A project is set See Section 4 5 5 Setup Project Return to Common Setting All individual options in the specified folder are returned to common options e Make Build Making or building is performed in the active configuration of the currently selected project to create a target file e Delete The selected folder and all files in the folder are deleted from the project The files themselves are not deleted If the files RCF files that cannot be deleted are included the folder is not deleted e Property Information on folders is displayed see Section 4 3 9 Property E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Dependencies Category Figure 3 4 10 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 10 Shortcut Menu on a Dependencies Category Make Build Property e Make Build Making or building is performed in the active configuration of the currently selected project to create a target file e Property Information on folders is displayed see Section 4 3 9 Property July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 53 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Win
357. ment Link Option Based on MCU Information ees 313 In line Expansion Canceling In line Expansion of Specified FUN CHONS wieecccccsecciscsscensnciagiececeasarveneens 296 Setting In line Expansion of Specified FUNCUHONS wieressisnectticcetntans de cekecabsneveninas 295 Input Property IO PUt cc ccsevenssidesnasescsdens cas svenwsnesd diesa 179 Resetting an Input Port eee eee rere eens 405 Setting an Input Port cee 404 Shortcut Menu Command Input Field 92 Shortcut Menu Other than the Command Input Field E A T A A 93 Installing Installing Customize Bar eens 485 Integer INO A E 7 Interface Changing of Function call Interface 000 515 Details of Changing of Function call WNC haCesivicre noes ctteccnsbutans sg cetetendnexsnenes 516 New Function call Interface 514 Setting LAN Interface at Emulator Side 506 Setting LAN Interface at PC Side 506 Interrupt Resetting an Interrupt c eee ee cree ee eees 408 Setting an Interrupt eee 408 Items Font related Items sinsin 186 Items in Dialog BOX sseseeessesssssssrnrnrnrrrrrrrrrene 489 Items to be Seticciscsnrssvsscewnsvsscisess sacs sccnsevess ena 403 Setting tems erensia 278 J Jump Error Jump Function ssssesseseessssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrene 158 SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 559 a SPANSION Software Support Manual v Error Jump Setup Procedure ssec 466 List Example
358. n a workspace file name is specified SOFTUNE Workbench closes the currently open workspace file and then opens the specified file If the open registered file is not saved although it is being edited the dialog box for asking the operator whether to save the file opens Yes button Saves the file using the existing file name and continues processing No button Continues processing without saving the file Cancel button Cancels workspace open processing e When the existing workspace file is not open the file dialog box for selecting a project file opens When a workspace file name is specified SOFTUNE Workbench opens the specified file When a workspace file is opened the used window when the file was saved is redisplayed Cancel button Processing is continued with the file being edited opened The project file can be opened instead of the workspace file For details see Section 2 3 Creating Project July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 149 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 2 5 Close Workspace Close Workspace closes the currently open workspace file E When the Currently Open Workspace File is Not Edited at All SOFTUNE Workbench tries to close the file immediately When the workspace file is closed the dialog box for asking the operator whether to save the current workspace information opens Yes button Saves the current workspace
359. n all the above steps are completed save the project then close it once E Starting Debugging When steps from Creating a project to Setup Wizard are complete open the project SOFTUNE Workbench automatically migrates to the debug session enabling the immediate start of debugging Select Open from the File menu and specify the load module file to load the target program 34 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 14 Reading SOFTUNE Project Files of Old Versions Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 14 Reading SOFTUNE Project Files of Old Versions The SOFTUNE project files of old versions can be read E Procedure The project files created in SOFTUNE Workbench V3 version need the following setting 1 Select Open Workspace File from the File menu 2 Select Project file from File Type and specify the project file made by the early version of SOFTUNE Workbench If the specified file is one made by the early version of Softune Workbench a dialog asking whether to convert the file to a workspace project format is opened Yes button The project file is converted and opened in the workspace project format No button The project file is not converted and is opened in the old project format In this case some functions cannot be used For details of functions that can be used in the old project format refer to Section 1 2 Management Function for Project of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Ma
360. n are displayed in Settings and are restored when the Workspace is opened 492 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar Software Support Manual SPANSION Figure 5 1 10 Setting Dialog Box Batch File File List Entry G Softune Mnitialize pre p 2 3 RunBreak 4 SetupDbgeny 5 6 Wordpad 1i r Number fi x Up Kind Batch File 7 Down Entry E SoftuneMnitialize pre Browse m Batch File Parameter o Delete Parameter Setting Dialog d Close al I Iconic July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 493 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar a SPANSION Software Support Manual 5 1 3 2 Registering Workbench Menu This section describes how to register the Workbench menu in the customize bar E How to Register Workbench Menu 1 Display the dialog box Select View Customize Bar Setting to display the Customize Bar Setting dialog box Figure 5 1 11 2 Number Select the number to be registered in the customize bar 3 Kind Select Menu 4 Entry Enter the Workbench menu to register in the customize bar Specify with the Menu List dialog box Figure 5 1 7 displayed when you click the reference button on the right 5 Add Check the input contents of 2 to 4 If they are correct click Add This completes the registration of Workbench menus The registered contents are display
361. n the past language tools e g C compiler assembler and linkage kit were started and used from command lines However SOFTUNE Workbench can use these tools as they area An option setting dialog box for each tool opens thereby enabling the easy use of the tools E Debuggers SOFTUNE Workbench has integrated the simulator debugger emulator debugger and monitor debugger into one The optimum debugger can be selected and used as required E Others Installing an REALOS configurator option enables cooperative operation without complicated setting 2 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 1 Outline of SOFTUNE Workbench 1 2 What is SOFTUNE Workbench Software Support Manual 1 2 What is SOFTUNE Workbench This section explains the basic configuration of SOFTUNE Workbench lm SOFTUNE Workbench Configuration Figure 1 2 1 shows the basic configuration of SOFTUNE Workbench Figure 1 2 1 Basic Configuration of SOFTUNE Workbench SOFTUNE Workbench body Debugger part Manager part Language tool As shown in Figure 1 2 1 SOFTUNE Workbench consists of three parts body debugger and manager The debugger part contains the simulator debugger emulator debugger and monitor debugger These debuggers can be switched and used as required The manager part enables users to code and make programs without full knowledge of language tool e g C compiler a
362. nclude paths are registered in the list can be changed in the following procedure 1 Select the Include Path category The include path setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 35 opens 2 Select the include path whose order is to be changed from Include Path List 3 Click the Up or Down button to move the cursor to a relevant position E Setting List Output Figure 4 5 36 List Output Setup Dialog Box Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt MB90F394 E Categor Output List Comm MV Creates a list file MV Outputs information list MV Outputs source list mn V Outputs section list V Outputs cross reference list Colum 100 V Outputs include list V Control of changing page Tab Macro Development Department List OBJ ki Option 1 Select the Output List category The list output setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 35 opens 2 To output a list file set a check mark to the left of Creates a list file When the list file is not output no other item need to be set Execute Step 3 and after only when outputting the list file 3 Select the list file s you want to output Items with check marks are selected Outputs information list Outputs source list Outputs section list Outputs cross reference list Outputs include list July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 301 a SPANSION ua CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5
363. nction is used for measuring performance The function related to performance is enabled 414 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a e Function selection execution time time measurement performance Time measurement The time measurement function is used The performance function cannot be used Performance The performance function is used The time measurement function cannot be used e Function selection pass count sequence pass count break Sequence The event function is used for sequence function The pass count break cannot be used Pass count break The event function is used for pass count break The sequence function cannot be used Note MB2147 01 Multiple trace can be specified only when debug function is in Trace Enhancement mode For details refer to Section 2 3 1 6 Debug Functions in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Watch tab Figure 4 7 14 Debug Environment Setup Watch Tab E Emulation Chp Debugging area Monitoring Directory Tab Eror output Load Realtime memory area Execution Step execution Event Watch Radx Watch mode Automatic Clanguage Assembler Data size Byte Memory buffering Enable Disable Specified number of array element V Enable Bement D256 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 415 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Se
364. nd Note The CALL function may change the resources such as the registers memory or I O from the state prior to the function call To restore registers hold contents prior to the function call and execute the functions or use CLEAR CALL function Other resources are not restored July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 393 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual XN 4 6 10 Clear Call This section explains the SOFTUNE Workbench call clear function E Clear Call Clear Call is used to restore the original state without executing the function call see Section 4 6 9 Call to the end This function is used after program execution has been stopped by Breakpoints etc When Clear Call is executed control returns from the immediately called function In this case the function call result is not displayed because the called function is not executed to the end 394 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual 4 6 11 Vector This section explains how to display and modify SOFTUNE Workbench vectors E Vector When the MCU is reset or when an interrupt processing request is issued for a variety of factors the MCU sets the data set in the address determined in advance according to the type of the interrupt in the PC as the address of the interrupt processing routine The address at which this interrupt processing routine is set i
365. nd assembler start and option specification The configurator is not built into SOFTUNE Workbench because it is an option Installing this option however enables cooperative operation on SOFTUNE Workbench SOFTUNE Workbench manages all processing from programming to debugging in units of projects Projects contain all program files options of tools e g C compiler and debugger environment setup etc July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E SPANSION a CHAPTER 1 Outline of SOFTUNE Workbench i 1 3 Procedure for Developing Programs with SOFTUNE Workbench SPANSION Software Support Manual a 1 3 Procedure for Developing Programs with SOFTUNE Workbench The procedure for developing programs with SOFTUNE Workbench consists of the followings 1 Setting SOFTUNE Workbench operating conditions 2 Creating a project 3 Creating a program source and executing make build 4 Using the debugger E Setting SOFTUNE Workbench Operating Conditions When developing a program with SOFTUNE Workbench first open the development environment setup dialog box from the Setup Development Menu and set environment variables and projects For details about how to set environment variables and projects see Section 4 7 1 Development The environment variables set from this dialog box are referenced by language tools such as the C compiler E Creating a Project Set information for the program to be developed in a project When developi
366. ndard editor dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 2 opens 2 Click View2 tab to choose the keyword type to be changed from the combo box Click Detail button The keyword dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 4 opens 3 Enter the keyword to be highlighted in New Item field Click Add button 4 Click the OK button The keyword files is changed 5 When not setting other items click the OK button When selecting view items and so on set all the related items then click the OK button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 69 a SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor Software Support Manual a E Customization Procedure Deletion of Keyword 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the edit window to display the shortcut menu then select Customize from the menu The keyword dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 2 opens Click View2 tab to choose the keyword type to be changed from the combo box Click Detail button The keyword dialog box shown in Figure 3 6 4 opens Choose the keyword to be deleted from the Keyword List Click Delete button Click the OK button The keyword files is changed When not setting other items click the OK button When selecting view items and so on set all the related items then click the OK button E Customization Procedure Initialization of Keyword 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the edit window to display the s
367. ndergoes Make Build Compile Assemble Start Debug and Include Dependence 1 2 Select Project Project Configuration Add and Delete Select the project configuration that is made active When the Add and Delete Project dialog is opened select the name of the project configuration that is made active Click the Active button Click the Active button The specified configuration and its project become active Click the OK button 26 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 8 Creation of Project Configuration Software Support Manual SPANSION va E Deleting Specific Active Project Configuration from Project 1 Select Project Project Configuration Add and Delete 2 Select the project configuration that is deleted from the project When the Add and Delete Project dialog is opened select the project configuration name to be deleted 3 Click the Delete button Click the Delete button The specified project configuration is deleted When all project configurations in a project are deleted the project itself is also deleted 4 Click the OK button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 27 SPANSION a 2 9 a gt CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 9 Setting Tools Software Support Manual Setting Tools When make or build is executed by SOFTUNE Workbench appropriate options must be set in such tools as a compiler assembler and linker Set these options as follo
368. ndow should set to active or not when the program is stopped However if a disassemble window is displayed as new it should always be activated Please operate with following procedure 1 Click a right button of disassemble window to display shortcut menu 2 Please make sure Activate when stop July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 81 SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 10 Register Window a Software Support Manual v 3 10 Register Window The Register Window is used to display and modify MCU register values during debugging This window is displayed only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session E Register Window Figure 3 10 1 is an example of the Register Window When debugging the Register Window displayed the register values Register values can be rewritten directly To rewrite values using expressions and symbols etc select Edit from the shortcut menu for the Register Window Arrange registers according to the size of the Register Window To select the registers to be displayed select Display Setup from the shortcut menu for the Register Window Figure 3 10 1 Example of Register Window O00000000 SP 0004B4 FP 000ADS Each condition flag status is F902Al ILM 7 RP 00 CCR 2Z 00 ADB F9 DPR 01 USB 00 USP 0AB4 00 SSP 03DE PCB F9 PC 02Al 0000 RW1L 047E RW2 0000 RW3 0aDs displayed it can be also changed Register names and values are 0000 RW5 0000 RW6 0000
369. nfiguration is set All Configuration All configurations are set Multiple Configuration The Multiple Configuration dialog Figure 4 5 7 is opened The two or more configurations specified in the dialog are set e Target of setting tree view All projects having the configuration names specified in the combo box are displayed The items that can be set vary depending on the selected items When two or more items are selected they can be changed at a time If the items of different types are selected only overlapped items can be set Project The General items MCU items common options C Compiler Assembler Linker Librarian and Debug items can be set C source file The General items and individual options C Compiler can be set Assembler source file The General items and individual options Assembler can be set Library file The General items can be set Object file The General items can be set Relative file The General items can be set Folder All files in the folder are set Figure 4 5 7 Multiple Configuration Dialog Multiple Configuration x Project Configuration OK MB90553B MB90553B Cancel MBSOF394 C MBS0 390 Al select itt July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 277 a SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual a E Setting Items The following items can be set or changed in tab form General The project type target name output di
370. ng Directory Tab Enoroutput Load Execution Step execution Event Watch Radix Emulation Chip Debuggingarea Parallel port Port name LPT1 Status C Enable Disable E Cancel MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 e Port name NONE LPT1 LPT2 Selects parallel port name to be connected Select NONE when not connected e Status Enable Disable Specifies whether or not to enable parallel port July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E SPANSION a CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup gt lt ET oe Software Support Manual 4 7 2 4 Selection Debug Function This section explains the procedure to select the debug function E Procedure to Select Debug Function 1 Choose functions you want to use from List of functions 2 Click OK button or double click the function name Debug function is switched to the one you selected Figure 4 7 35 Select Debug Function Select debug function Ss List of functions RAM Checker Trace Enhancement Cancel Note The available debug functions vary depending on the emulator or its connecting form If there is no function available Select debug function menu is disabled For each debug function see Section 2 3 1 6 Debug Function in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual When you change the debug function the data in trace and performance will be cleared RAM Checker mode is set when activated 438 CM41 0
371. ng Switches between monitoring enabling and monitoring disabling e Close Closes Real time memory window Note To perform 0 bank monitoring the coverage function must be disabled For details refer to Section 2 3 9 Real time Memory in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 119 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 21 RAM Checker Window SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 3 21 RAM Checker Window This window opens only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session This window displays logging state and monitoring E RAM Checker Window Select the main menu View RAM Checker to open the RAM Checker window Figure 3 21 1 RAM Checker Menu Selection File Edit View Project Debug Setup Window Help v Project Output Symbol Assembly Register Memory Local Watch gt Trace overage Performance Command Gest Realtime memory RAM Che Tool bar gt v Status Bar Font E Function e Drag and Drop Register the character string dropped on the window in the RAM Checker window as the monitoring address 120 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 21 RAM Checker Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 3 21 2 RAM Checker Window Display logging status E Ram check RAM Logging enable value symbol D2CA dat Displays updated qr values in red ANOO 446 00010A i Displays mon
372. ng a new project open the new creation dialog box from the File New Menu and select Workspace Project File from the dialog box The new project creation dialog box opens When the project has already existed the existing project file can be opened from the File Open Workspace Menu When using the SOFTUNE VOI or V02 project file see Section 2 14 Reading SOFTUNE Project Files of Old Versions E Creating a Program Source and Executing Make Build Open the new creation dialog box from the File New Menu and select Text File When the editor is started write the source program and save it to the file with the File Save As Menu When a necessary source file is created register it in the project with the Project Add Member Menu When registering the source file in the project is completed execute make with the Project Make Menu or execute build with the Project Build Menu If a syntax error occurs during compilation or assembling double click the error display location in the Output Window with the left button of the mouse The program jumps to the line where the error occurred Correct the source file and then reexecute the Project Make Menu E Using the Debugger When a load module file is created debugging can be begin 3 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION CHAPTER 2 Operation This chapter explains the basic operation of SOFTUNE Workbench for
373. ng a template project 140 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 4 2 6 When Selecting Browse for Template Project Workspace Template ra Chip Classification Blank project Jv Template M MCU change 96670_template_966 Target MCU sample SemiHosting v Project Name m jc Project Type Target Filename Function call interface Project Directory e sane S Create new workspace T C Addwtecuetvekne 3 1 Select the Project tab on the creation dialog box 2 Select Browse for template Figure 4 2 6 3 Specify the following items for new project Project name Target file name Directory Click the OK button The dialog box Figure 4 2 7 to specify the template project is displayed Specify the template project name Click the Next button The dialog box Figure 4 2 8 to select members is displayed For details see IJ Copying Local Files as shown below oN ANB Creating a new project by specifying a template project is completed Workspace is also created at the same time July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 141 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual ia Figure 4 2 7 Find Template Dialog Preparation of new project msm Template project name E Browse lt Back Next gt Cancel e Template project name S
374. ng sneneea OOE E T VO OE eee 176 4391 Property Project WINKOW siedecesiecsedseveneeceniinceeccues ye ceteeeinee aE NAN va neeteeniaaieeeen eevee aE 177 4 3 9 2 Property Edit Window 00 cece cece ee eeenee eee eeeaeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeseaaeeeesenaaeeeeesenaeeeeete 181 4 3 9 3 Property Source WindOwW cccecccceeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeecaaeeetaaeeesaaaeeeeaaeeseaeeeseeeeseaeeesaaes 182 4 3 9 4 Property Symbol Window 00 cccceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeesaeeeseaeeeceaaeeseaaeeseeeeseeeeesenaeeenaes 183 43 9 5 Property Local WINKOW sess cece secece ces ccdenediacededeeececceceaslicest EEEREN SEAE TAREE E 184 43 96 Property Wateh WIndOw sccicive ssesecuieeecn suvetectccveseeceeeeesiauededvuasted sles SEE ARAARA 185 4 4 VIEW MONU earnan EEEE O E O A aaa vec anne 186 4 4 1 Project Outout ci0c iiiaae ae ee Se a E E ds eee 187 4 4 2 OV MMO ON ca sus cues ea a eng fete a E te tg weg ta he Pete ch scat eet E 188 4 4 3 ASSOIMDIY E edie ee ctaneteds eviaeds of neva haved nies ph ene dene iaaesere destin teed ered tees 189 4 4 4 FROQISUG E I A E E edi nite uae E nas eee ee E A E adie aiden a 191 4 4 5 MOMO reopen nena Secayel cod eidsite O A E tc asian bela deere 193 4 4 6 OCA ET AE AEA E E E E EAN E desu ited ey A E scene 201 AAT Wate ea E A ae aE aa aa a can E e EA Ea AE REA 202 4 4 8 Trace teissdesdaveteeniidine eae E RTA A Ea O E ETE ERO eerie e E 205 4 4 8 1 Trace Simulator Debugger e ce ceece
375. ng the coverage measurement result is opened for setting the coverage and displaying the total coverage rate This function is available on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger E Coverage Setup Select Setup from the shortcut menu of the Coverage Window Figure 4 4 56 Coverage Setup Dialog Setup coverage mx Status C Enable Disable Area list Attribute MV Code Read Write Set Area Delete Start Address H 000000 EndAddress H 000000 aaa E efault Address range Setup possibility 32 e State Select Enable or Disable For the high speed simulator debugger it is always enabled e Area list Set Attribute and Area To delete an area click the Delete button To set an area automatically after the load module file has been read click Default Attribute can be specified only on the emulator debugger MB2141 248 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Coverage Rate Select Total Coverage from the shortcut menu of the Coverage Window The total coverage rate and the coverage rate for each address range are displayed Figure 4 4 57 Coverage Rate Dialog Box total coverage 20 6 FE0120 FE07BE 18 5 FE0BDO FEOC22 62 7 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 249 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 4 13 Perfor
376. ng the flash memory For details refer to 2 4 5 To access the Flash Memory in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual e Do not access the general purpose register GPR area 0x000180 to 0x00037F while a user program is running 86 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 12 Local Variable Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 12 Local Variable Window This window is displayed only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session The local variable window is used to display and modify local variable values Local variables are displayed in the tree format function name root E Local Variable Window Figure 3 12 1 is an example of the local variable window Figure 3 12 1 Example of Local Variable Window A Local Colle x A function name is displayed i H 0000 value 16 The local symbol names defined in 5 D 0 H o00 oo t the function and the current values val H 0000000 are displayed H name 16 D 1 H 00000000 An array variable name is displayed D 2 H o0000000 4 D 3 H 00000000 Array data is displayed H LD4 a Renee Variables of floating point type are D 5 H o0000000 displayed D 6 H 0000000 D 7 H 00000000 E Shortcut Menu There are five menus below Radix See Section 4 4 6 Local
377. nitoring Directory m Step mode Automatic Source line Machine language m Watchdog C Enable Disable m Interrupt mask in step m Reset level C Enable Disable Chipreset Low level reset m Interrupt level of abort request Force abort Interrupt level 1 Highest SA 410 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual The items that can be set for execution related matters are as follows O Item that can be set X Item that cannot be set Table 4 7 3 Setup Item in Execution Tab SPANSION a Debugger EML MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Interrupt mask O O O O x x x Trace control x O x x x Setting breakpoint while running x x O x O X x Reset level x x x x x O x Interrupt level of abort request x x x x x O x Step mode x x x x x O x Interrupt mask at step x x x x x O xX Watchdog x x x x x O x Cannot be specified but always enabled The signs in the table show the following meaning O Item that can be set X Item that cannot be set Interrupt mask Enable Disable Specifies whether or not to hold to receive interrupt while a user program is running Trace control Enable Disable Specifies whether or not to acquire trace data while a user program is running Setting breakpoint while running Enable Disable Specify whether to enable o
378. nsigned long Remarks In this access the reading of data is not posted July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 535 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator a gt leila Software Support Manual G 12 SSDI_Write_Memroy Write to Memory Format int SSDI_Write_Memory unsigned long addr int size int length void data Argument unsigned long addr Access address int size Access size 1 Byte 2 Word 4 LONG int length Write data count void data Data storage area Return value Count of data completely written If the return value is different from the write data count length an error occurs Explanation Writes data to memory The type of the data storage area data differs depending on the access size Byte 1 byte unsigned char Word 2 bytes unsigned short Long 4 bytes unsigned long Remarks In this access the writing of data is not posted 536 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual SPANSION a G 13 SSDI_Read_Register Read from Register Format int SSDI_Read_Register int reg_no unsigned long data Argument int reg_no Register number unsigned long data Data storage area Return value 0 Normal end 0 Error Explanation Reads data from registers Remarks The register number is defined in the include file SSDI_LREGISTER H SSDI_REGISTER H
379. nt Display only parentheses are displayed after each function name 386 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug 4 6 8 Software Support Manual SPANSION a Time Measurement Measures the execution time from start of user program execution to end E Time Measurement Function Measures the execution time from start of user program execution to end The measurement unit varies depending on the debugger as shown below Table 4 6 1 Measurement Unit for Each Debugger Type Number of cycles Number of steps Simulator Emulator MB2141 Emulator MB2147 01 Emulator MB2147 05 Emulator MB2198 Emulator MB2100 01 Monitor The symbols in the table indicate the meaning below O Displayed X Not displayed The time converted from execution cycle count is displayed For details see 2 4 7 Measuring Program Executing Cycle Count in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Displaying Measurement Result The execution time is automatically measured when user program is executed The measurement results are displayed on the time measurement dialog To display the time measurement dialog select Debug Time Measurement Figure 4 6 38 Time Measurement Dialog r Time measurement Cycle sH From Initialize O Cycle Clear From Last Executed O Cycle Close Comment July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 387 CHAPTER 4 Menus
380. nt bit as sigi C Change order in which static variables stored in memory to o Treat items following as comments in C source mm Language specification level ANSI extensions v Option Cancel Apply The following options can be specified Treat floating point numbers for which suffixes are not specified as float type K FCONST DCONST In line expansion of the function which is qualified by _interrupt K NOINTLIB Treat the variable which is qualified by _io as volatile K NOVOLATILE Treat most significant bit of char type as sign bit K SCHAR In line of ITRON system call development K REALOS 296 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a If int type specified in bit field treat most significant bit as sign bit K SBIT Change order in which amp static variables are stored in memory to order in which sources are described verorder Treat items following as comments in C source B Language specification level Jalcle ANSI ANSI extensions E Target Depend Options Figure 4 5 32 Target Dependency Setup Dialog Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt MB90F394 z Category Target Depend v Common Option Memory Model Small v I Const variable in RAM INF LIST D TEN 10 i Cancel Apply The following options
381. nt to be enabled from the list and push Enable button If more than one breakpoint is selected at the same time all the selected ones are enabled Deleting a breakpoint currently being set Select a breakpoint to be deleted from the list and push Delete button If more than one breakpoint is selected at the same time all the selected ones are deleted Deleting all the breakpoints currently being set Push All delete button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 343 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug SPANSION Software Support Manual va Changing some conditions of a breakpoint currently being set In the case of the emulator debugger select a breakpoint to be changed from the list and push Change button As a details dialog is displayed with set information change the conditions In the case of the simulator debugger or the monitor debugger after selecting a breakpoint to be changed from the list modify the conditions and push Set button It is overwritten over the same address Confirming the code position of a breakpoint currently being set Select a breakpoint to be confirmed from the list and push Jump button A starting position for displaying the source window is moved to the code position at the breakpoint selected from the break list 344 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION va 4 6 4 1 Code Break This section explains a code break in the simulator d
382. nterface 10229W When changing the function call interface the function call interfaces of the assembler source object and library to be used must be standardized If the function call interfaces are not standardized the program is not guaranteed to operate This change is applied to all project configurations in the project Change YES Change the function call interface NO Do not change the function call interface Assembler error message E4718A Different calling interface of a function This error message is output under the conditions shown in Appendix Table F 1 520 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface Software Support Manual SPANSION a Table F 1 Relationship Between Description of REG_PASS Pseudo instructions and rp Option Description of REG_PASS pseudo instructions Provided Unprovided Provided Normal combination for The error E4718A is output register argument passing Specifying of No error is output rp option Unprovided The error E4718A is output Normal combination for stack argument passing No error is output If these errors occur correct the specifying of the rp option or the description of the RE_PASS pseudo instructions for the assembler source referring to Appendix Table F 1 Linker error message E4313L The module is different calling interface of a function file name This e
383. nual Cancel button Opening of the project file is cancelled The project files created in SOFTUNE Manager V01 V02 version needs the following setting 1 Select Open Workspace File from the File Menu 2 Select Project file from File Type and specify the project file made by SOFTUNE Manager If the specified file is one made by SOFTUNE Manager a dialog asking whether to convert the file to a workspace project format is opened Click the Cancel button to cancel opening of the project file 3 Click the OK button to start conversion When you click the Cancel button it cancels the opening of the project file 4 When the New Project Creation Window opens set the chip type and target MCU then click the OK button 5 When conversion is completed the dialog box showing the end of conversion opens Click the OK button to close the dialog box E Backup File In SOFTUNE Workbench when a project file is converted to a workspace project format a backup file is made automatically The extension of backup file varies with the type of project file The method for opening the backup project file is also different depending on the extension SOFTUNE Workbench V3 Old project file prj gt p03 Old option data file dat gt d03 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 35 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 14 Reading SOFTUNE Project Files of Old Versions SPANSION Software Support Manual va SOFTUNE Workbench V01 V02
384. o Common Optio Macro Name TEN Value f 0 Macro Name List Set Delete MQ TEN 10 INF LIST E D TEN 10 Cancel Apply If there are two or more items to be set the macro name found in some item is grayed 1 Select the Define Macro category The macro name setup dialog shown in Figure 4 5 27 opens 2 Specify the macro name 3 Specify the setting value as required 4 Click the Set button The specified macro name is set as a define D option 5 To set the specified macro name as an undefine U option reset the check mark of the macro name from Macro Name List 292 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a Note When undefine is set both the define and undefine options are output for the same macro name This causes no problem because the undefine option precedes the define option E Resetting a Macro Name 1 Select the Define Macro category The macro name setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 22 opens 2 Select the macro name to reset from Macro Name List 3 Click the Delete button E Setting an Include Path Figure 4 5 28 Include Path Setup Dialog Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt MB90F394 x Category Include Path zj Common Opt Include Path PapRipatey SSC Include Path List Add Delete l ee w 1
385. o register argument passing The same correction is also required when defining and calling the function with arguments by the assembler description function asm statement of C Compiler When changing the how to pass arguments to register argument passing follow the tables in F MC 16 FAMILY SOFTUNE C COMPILER Manual Arguments register argument passing Correction example of definitions of functions with arguments stack argument passing register argument passing _ func _ func LINK 0 LINK 0 MOVW A RW3 4 MOVW RW4 RW3 4 ADDW A RW3 6 MOVW A RWO ADDW A RW3 8 ADDW A RWI MOVW _var A ADDW A RW4 MOVW var A Correction example of calling functions with arguments stack argument passing register argument passing MOVW A 3 MOVW A 3 PUSHW_ A PUSHW_ A 516 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface Software Support Manual SPANSION MOVW A 2 MOVW A 2 PUSHW_ A MOVW RWI A MOVW A 1 MOVW A 1 PUSHW_ A MOVW RWO A CALL _ func CALL _ func ADDSP 6 POPW AH Supplementary explanation Using the assembler source both for stack argument passing and for assembler source for register argument passing Using the predefined macro __REG_PASS__ create an assembler source both for stack argument passing and for register argument passing When the predefined macro __REG_PASS__ is assembled with the rp option set 1 When the pre
386. o error Table 4 7 11 Setup Item in Error Output Tab Debugger aX Watch Radix Error output Load Error output level All Only error C Last occurred error Cancel output are as follows EML MB2141 MB2147 0 In GUI Operation 1 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 In Command Operation In Batch Operation Error Output Level In GUI Operation Dialog Output window Specifies an error output type at GUI operation Specifies an error output type at command opera In Batch Operation Dialog Output window Specifies an error output type at batch operation In Command Operation Dialog Output window tion Error Output Level All Only error Last occurred error Selects the output method for when multiple errors occur When All is selected a warning message will also be displayed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 423 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual v Load tab Figure 4 7 21 Debug Environment Setup Load Tab Setup debug environment Execution Step execution Watch Radix Monitoring Directoy Tab Error output Load Specification batch file before after load Before Browse After Browse F Only debug information V Auto mapping Cancel The items that can be set for load related matters are as follows Table 4 7 12 Setup Item in Load Tab Debugger EML
387. of Error Jump Setup ee 467 ABS Tab Bitmap Image List ee 58 JUMP es scccccsteasencdaessnscdsnehstintevsniaeediseseeenddenar ans 395 Setting Absolute Format Assemble List JUMP FUNCHOD cs cecserccicsssectesesareensaiaeseeenscataranes 158 OPUIONS ss cccssvesseeanccssercnnitnceieneesaessa ance 306 Setting List Output eee 301 K SRC Tab Bitmap Image List ee 48 K Tool Button LASt icesivcsccesssaacce deesadecectenreddsaventness 324 caer for Changing an Assigned reds Key gins 8 462 Display Error at Loading Monitor Program to are i ie hee Emulator eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeee DID Bee EE tn a Rey eter og Loading the Target File 396 Keyboard Loading the Target Program s e 33 Keyboard Setup Procedure ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 462 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Keyword on a Load Module Name 000000 59 Customization Procedure Local Deletion of Keyword reac a asia 70 Local Variable Window nsss 87 201 Customization Procedure Initialization of Keyword T E 70 Local ries Customization Procedure Copying LocalsPiles sesicceckictexnaececscsestecestecdse cease 142 Keyword Addition cc scessssseesesseeeeseees 69 Logging l l GG N 477 CPU Stop During Logging 1 1 1 1 1 125 TiO 8 SING sees aeons Sette wwesiec aca mcoceengasties 97 124 130 L M LAN Setting LAN Interface at Emulator Side 506 Macro Setting LAN Interface at PC Side
388. of Timer Queue 246 MB214 7 05 wisccsscccevsessnedcnsnctecccaveraess 230 f Details Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2198 nsaisan 233 Delile or Chane mE Oi Panoion eal i nterface iivnacssvcvvec convetsten cesta 516 Trace Function for Simulator Sequence Details Settin 377 DebU S868 issaraen aana a 212 q ee eee ees Using the Debugger ccccccesccscssnesstssssevenchiesserasenas 4 Dialog Break Dialog ccccccseseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 342 Default Library Setting What the Derat Library is nat Creation Dialog BOX eeseesteees sini ide devsgutsieavenes 136 USE EE E 307 i Trace tateee Dea n Dialog sirsiiscirarniross eanan 222 Defining Po File Name Selection Dialog Box 146 Defining Subproject Between Existing Items in Dialog BOX eeeseessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 489 PLOJCCES sssssesssserssserestorseresseresnescneneasen 25 Open Dialog BOX ccccccccesssesesnsceseesscecsesnenennes 145 Defining the ROM RAM Area PERRSRSLSRNERSAOLSEENAHS 312 Performance Function Setup Dialog 258 Procedure for Defining Project Performance Setup Dialog 0 252 253 256 Dependence sseesssesseesneeneeeesieees 327 Save Dialog BOX srivsssrisisiiinini tiiri 151 Definition Sequence Trace Trigger Details Dialog 225 Definition of Subproject cee 25 Sequence Trace Trigger Setup Dialog 224 Resetting Symbol Definition 0 0 e 305 Setting of MCU Chan
389. of the Environment Variable Specify PATH Execute the installed language tool file B Ndirectory Cancel Apply Set the development environment in the following procedure 1 Select the name of the environment variable whose setting is to be changed from the Value of Environment Variable list The current setting value is displayed in the Value field Simple explanation of the environment variable is displayed in Explanation of the Environment Variable 2 Change the description of the Value field 3 Click the Change button 400 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Workspace Figure 4 7 2 shows the workspace setup dialog Figure 4 7 2 Development Environment Setup Workspace Dialog Setup Development Environment Variable Workspace Open the last workspace at starting Output tool option at compile assemble V Inquiry for saves at close workspace V Inquiry for saves at compile assemble Termination messages are highlighted at make build Detail optimize Close the edit window when debugging Place for user template project i Sets the operation of workspace for SOFTUNE Workbench Open the last workspace at starting If placing a check mark for this item the workspace file which was opened in the last session will be automatically opened when SOFTUNE Workbench is started This is disabled by default Output tool option
390. often are assigned to the tool bar for each group The groups that can be selected and the command buttons in the groups are shown below E Common Bar New Open Save Cut Copy Paste Undo Redo Jump to Next error Jump to Previous error Jump to Top error Jump to Bottom error Project window Docking Output window Docking Open Project window A EEEE E S E ie e e E alU Open Output window E Project Bar The active project and its active configuration name are set and displayed Sample Detug E Build Bar Compile Assembly Make Build Stop Make Build E Debug Bar El Go H Step In P Step Over July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 41 a SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 2 Tool Bar Software Support Manual v E Flag Bar E Trace Step Out Run Until Cursor Reset MCU Abort Breakpoint Set Reset Register window Watch window Memory window Kepin EAE Disassembly window Display and setting of MCU condition flag status a 8 8 8 8 BB E Display of the trace acquisition state and trace control while the user program is running gt je Tracing data exist Update of the trace window Updates the trace window When the trace data is being acquired the window is updated after a forced stop b Forced start of the trace acquisition Forces to resume the acquisition of the trace data It becomes valid only when the trace acquisition has been forced to stop
391. oftware Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 7 2 Bookmark Memory Window This section explains the operation when memory window is activated E To Display a Dialog Bookmark By selecting Edit Bookmark Bookmark dialog as shown in Figure 4 3 7 will be opened This dialog is to indicate the list of bookmark set in memory window Figure 4 3 7 Bookmark Dialog Memory Window Bookmark mx Source Memory Bookmark list amp ddress range H 001140 00001140 00001142 00007520 O0007BZ1 OOFg0ZAS QOFJOZ AT Change Delete All delete Jump ere pee EJ tune __ Close Bookmark list The list of a bookmark which is currently set in memory window will be displayed Name Name of a bookmark and color of marking will be displayed Address or symbol name will be name of bookmark Address range Range of an address where bookmark is set is displayed Symbol Symbol allocated to a bookmark will be displayed If a symbol is allocated location of bookmark will be updated based on debug information although the line number of symbol changes along with the change in file e Add button Display dialog Add a bookmark to add a bookmark For details refer to 4 4 5 Memory e Change button Display Add a bookmark dialog and change the setup of selected bookmark in a bookmark list e Delete button Delete a bookmark selected from the list of a bookmark July 31 2015
392. og box into the RAM Checker window Notes e Only internal HDD is supported for the log file storage destination Network external HDD and external disk CD DVD and MO are not supported for the log file storage destination e Storing the log file of the RAM Checker requires free disk space of 500MB or greater When free disk space is less than 500MB logging stops E Logging This controls the logging status of the RAM Checker Check off the shortcut menu to enable this When the logging is started in this state the RAM Checker obtains log data and the RAM Checker window displays monitoring Figure 3 21 6 Logging Enable Status Setup File Viewer v Logging Close 124 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 21 RAM Checker Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a E CPU Stop During Logging Power on debug can be performed during execution of RAM Checker Notes e Set the operating lower limit voltage of your microcomputer as the lower voltage e The emulator outputs undefined values during the period from return from power on debug to data access During this period the Viewer does not display data July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 125 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 21 RAM Checker Window a SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 3 21 2 Start the RAM Checker Viewer This section explains about starting of the RAM Checker viewer E Viewer Use the shortcut menu Viewer
393. ols used in the target file are displayed in the tree format This function command can only be used when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session Selecting Symbol when the Symbol Window has been already opened activates the Window 188 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 3 Assembly Assembly displays the Disassemble Window E Assembly When the Assembly window is opened the assembly is displayed starting at the specified address Line assembly from the shortcut menu is also possible This function command can be used only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session e When the Assembly Window has been already opened The Assembly Window is activated e When the Assembly Window is not opened The dialog for specifying the display start address Figure 4 4 1 opens Specify the address where display is to be started then click the OK button Figure 4 4 1 Dialog Box for Specifying Display Start Address Jump Type Address v Position H 00F 90148 Cancel Window Assembly v e Type Line number Address Frame Specify the type of display position e Position Display disassembling from the position specified in the above type e Window To specify the window where jump is implemented For details see Section 4 3 6 Jump If it is a disassemble window default will be shown as Assembly July 31 2015 CM41 003
394. on is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Display coverage rate Switches on off the display of the coverage rate When Display coverage rate is turned on the coverage rate of each item is displayed This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Refresh Updates the contents of the window When Display coverage rate is turned on the display is updated with the latest coverage rate This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB2141 MB2147 01 and the high speed simulator debugger e Property Display the properties of the source file 60 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Function Name Figure 3 4 22 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 22 Shortcut Menu on a Function Name Jump Order by name Order by address Order by coverage rate Break Coverage v Coverage rate display Refresh Property e Jump Opens the selected function in the source window e Order by name Sort items in the tree in alphabetical order e Order by address Sort functions in the tree in address order e Order by coverage rate Sort items in the tree in ascending order This function is available only on the emulator debuggers MB21
395. onditions This function can be used in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2198 MB2100 01 For MB2100 01 enable software break For details refer to Section 2 6 6 2 Code Break Software Manual in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 353 a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a E Setting of Software Break Setting dialog Figure 4 6 14 Code Break Software Setting Dialog Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified Type In this field the type of the breakpoint is selected Select Software Remain Displays the remaining number of breakpoints which can be set 354 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a Details dialog Detail button is pushed the following details dialog is displayed This is not displayed with MB2198 Figure 4 6 15 Code Break Details Dialog Software Break point details a Break address H o00000 Remain 4096 Cancel Break kind Software Hardware e Break address In this field the type of the breakpoint is selected e Remain Displays the remaining number of breakpoints which can be set e Type In this field the type of the breakpoint is selected Select Software July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 355 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a
396. onsists of a term and an operator The terms and operators usable in address formulas are the same as those in data formulas E Identifier Alphabetic characters numbers and _ can be used as identifiers Each identifier must begin with a character other than numbers Uppercase characters are distinguished from lowercase characters or vice versa E File Name Specification File name specification complies with Windows rules 6 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes Software Support Manual SPANSION a 2 1 1 Data and Address Formulas Numerical Constant The SOFTUNE Workbench provides numeric constants as the terms of data and address formulas An integer or floating point number can be written as a numerical constant E Integer When writing an integer specify a specifier B Q D H Ox representing the base number of the numerical value If the specifier is omitted follow setting of the Radix tab in the Setting debug environment dialog box For details see 4 7 2 3 Setting Debug Environment The numerical value representation range is from 0 to H FFFFFFFF However this range is further restricted depending on the values to be entered The minus values are represented such as D 1 Example Binary constant B 1010 Octal constant Q 1267 Decimal constant D 1800 Hexadecimal constant H 12AF or 0x12AF Note No blank is allowed between a specifi
397. ookmark e Variable name To specify the name of symbol for setting a bookmark E Searching Memory Data Click the right mouse button in the Memory Window to display the shortcut menu then select Search from the menu The search dialog shown in Figure 4 4 7 opens Figure 4 4 7 Search Dialog fa Search Start address H 000260 End address H 0002F0 Close Type Byte aed Find data H 00 Skip data count D I e Start address Specifies start address of search range e End address Specifies end address of search range e Type Selects data type Byte Word Long Ascii e Find data Specifies matching data type When ASCII is selected as the data type specify a character string To search for several data items continuously when the data type is not ASCII write each item delimited by a comma e Skip data count To search the search range continuously set 1 When a value greater than or equal to 2 is set as the skip byte count addresses are skipped for each set count and the search range is searched For example when 4 is specified as the skip byte count addresses are skipped for each 4 bytes like address 4 and address 8 and the search range is searched Example Suppose the data in memory is 00000000 01 02 03 01 02 01 02 03 04 01 01 02 03 When Data Type is Byte Search Data is 01 and Skip Byte Count is 1 all search data is found However when Skip Byte Count is 2 only 01 search data
398. ool Comparing Memory Blocks cceeeeeeeees 199 Setting sees aa E 28 Compile Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse COMPS sosie sae asai 333 on a Subproject Name sseeeseeeeeeeses 52 Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse Compliant Compliant Window eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 167 on Set p NaMe vicciicetcicctscnsteecenseanrned an 57 a Shortcut Menu Click the Right Button of the Mouse Conditions on Space in the Project Window 62 Property Conditions esseesniessass 179 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Setting SOFTUNE Workbench Operating on a Debug Category cceeeeeees 54 Conditions eiser ini arenie eiaa 4 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Configuration on a Dependencies Category 53 Changing Subproject Configuration at Making or Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a File in the Dependencies Category E EA ssaasdaohees sa tccapseewediauesereets 56 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse mA POIMGD aaaea 52 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Function Name c escesseeeeeeeeee 61 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Load Module Name 0 c 0008 59 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Source File Name 0066 54 60 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Space in the
399. ool Deletion Procedure 0 cceeeeee 460 Disassemble Description Disassemble Window ceecceeeeeeeeeeesenneeeeees 79 Description asians idccinsacccctncnaccrsnenvassadnea nidie 393 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual Display Control Related to Window Display 0 469 Detailed Display of Alarm Handler 246 Detailed Display of Alarm Queue ee 247 Detailed Display of Cyclic Handler 245 Detailed Display of Event Flag ccceeeeee 244 Detailed Display of Fixed length Memory POO irssi nni 245 Detailed Display of Mailbox ceeeeeeeeeees 244 Detailed Display of Ready Queue 246 Detailed Display of Semaphore 0 ee 243 Detailed Display of Task ccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 242 Detailed Display of Timer Queue 246 Display Error at Debugging ees 512 Display Error at Loading Monitor Program to Em lator ssjisinsccsesssesssanesiersczenastanereacees 513 Display Setting csiccisscsessccrctesiseevssnescevensvestternnia 263 Display Setup cs iccsssssccsieecsevesesavssneasceassversczanscs 200 Display Non display the Window Switching Using the Tabset 186 Displaying Memory Data eens 193 Displaying the Latch Measurement Result cvcccsns civacieninnessdesss iis scventeestvernies 375 LCD Display at Normal State 512 Object State Display c c ccs 98 Tab Display of the Windows cc eee 38 To Display a Dialog Bookmark EE sdaue
400. operation the variable is displayed in the predetermined language mode Watch Specify the Watch Window Number name E Setting a Base Number The base number when a variable value is displayed can be set for each variable using the following procedure 1 Click the right mouse button in the line containing the variable of the base number to modify The shortcut menu is displayed Move the mouse cursor to Base Number The list showing selectable base numbers is displayed in the submenu Select the base number to modify from the list 202 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Modifying a Variable Value The variable value can be modified using the following procedure 1 Click the right mouse button in the line containing the variable to modify The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Select Edit from the shortcut menu The variable edit dialog shown in Figure 4 4 17 opens 3 Set a variable value then click the OK button Figure 4 4 17 Variable Edit Dialog Edit variable mtm ate H 00000010 Cancel E Canceling Display of Unnecessary Variable Display of a set variable that is no longer needed can be canceled from the Watch Window using the following procedure 1 Click the right mouse button in the line displaying the variable to cancel The shortcut menu is displayed 2 Select Delete from the shortcut menu Note Display
401. option Xdof 314 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION ua E Setting the Output listing Figure 4 5 47 Librarian Option Setup Dialog Box Output List up Project Target of setting MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librarian Conv 4 gt MBSOF 334 z Category Output List z V Creates a list file MV Outputs section name and size for the module MV Outputs external define symbol for the module MV Outputs external browse symbol for the module Vv Outputs all external define symbol and unsolved external define symbol Control of changing page Line 60 a Column f 32 Option M A dt s d r a p pl 60 B pw 132 Cancel Apply 1 Select any of the following output types Outputs section name and size for module Outputs external define symbol for module Outputs external browse symbol for module Outputs all external define symbol and unsolved external define symbol 2 To suppress page change set a check mark to the left of Control of changing page When page change is suppressed the line count cannot be set 3 Set Line Count and Column Count to the right of Line and Column as required E Starting Librarian If the project type is a library file the librarian is started To change the project type see 4 5 5 1 General July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 315 a SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project
402. or changing the program to a new function call interface E New Function call Interface The F7MC 16 FAMILY SOFTUNE supports the new function call interface register argument passing to pass the arguments of the function by registers RWO and RW1 as well as the existing function call interface stack argument passing to pass the arguments by the stack Using the function call interface for register argument passing selected arguments are passed by registers reducing code size and stack usage to improve the program execution speed However the how to pass arguments and to use registers differ between the register argument passing and the stack argument passing If objects with different function call interfaces are mixed the program will not operate properly Workbench Assembler Linker and Librarian are designed to output warning messages or error messages when detecting a contradiction concerning the function call interface For details about the new function call interface refer to the following manuals F MC 16 FAMILY SOFTUNE C COMPILER MANUAL FUNCTION CALL INTERFACE register argument passing Stack Frame register argument passing Argument register argument passing Argument Extension Format register argument passing Calling Procedure register argument passing Register register argument passing Return Value register argument passing F MC 16 FAMILY SOFTUNE ASSEMBLER MANUAL rp Xrp REG_
403. or cycle handler Cyclic handler ID placed in the timer queue or timeout waiting task ID 246 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Detailed Display of Alarm Queue Figure 4 4 54 Detailed Alarm Queue Display Dialog Alarm handler queue x Address 001488 Close Queueing task or alarm handler A0001 e Address Alarm queue address e Queueing task or alarm handler ID placed in the alarm queue E System Call Issuance Figure 4 4 55 System Call Insurance Dialog Box System call name sTA_TSK 7 Task ID H 00000005 Cancel When the system call to be issued is selected from the drop down list as shown in the above figure parameter input for the selected system call dynamically changes Unnecessary parameters are displayed in gray Clicking the OK button issues the system call The function call result dialog box opens when the issued system call terminates E System Calls That can be Issued e Task STA_TSK TER_TSK CHG_PRI SUS_TSK RSM_TSK FRSM_TSK WUP_TSK CAN_WUP e Semaphore SIG_SEM PREQ_SEM e Event flag SET_FLG CLR_FLG e Mailbox SND_MSG PRCV_MSG e Memory pool PGET_BLK REL_BLK e Cyclic handler ACT_CYC July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 247 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 4 12 Coverage Coverage displays the Coverage Window E Coverage Window The window displayi
404. or semihosting fnction refer to Section 2 6 10 How to Display the Output Message from User Program to the Debugger of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Project name Semihosting Directory SOFTUNE Installation Directory sample 907 Semihosting When this project is used a string Hello world n is output to the debugger using the Message Buffer Register MBR and the general purpose standard library which comes with the C compiler Figure H 1 Execution Result of Sample Project E Terminal m Hello world in For details on the general purpose standard library see CHAPTER 7 OVERVIEW OF A LIBRARY of SOFTUNE C Compiler Manual Also the sample project includes an interface program for low level functions specified by SOFTUNE C Compiler Manual 546 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX H Sample Project for the Semihosting Function Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure H 2 Execution Result of Sample Project User target SOFTUNE Workbench User program DEBUG I F For details on OCD On Chip Debugger and the MBR see the hardware manual of the model to be used E Configuration of the Sample Project The file configuration of the sample project is as follows A string enclosed in indicates a folder name SemiHosting sample c Main program sample SemiHosting wsp Workspace file SemiHosting prj Project file SemiHosting dat DAT file sta
405. ormat None Outputs data in mixed S1 S2 and S3 records according to the data address Output file format S1 record 16 bit address S1 Outputs data in an S1 record in an allowable output range of 0x0000 to OxFFFF Output file format S2 record 24 bit address S2 Outputs data in an S2 record in an allowable output range of 0x000000 to OXFFFFFF Output file format S3 record 32 bit address S3 Outputs data in an S3 record in an allowable output range of 0x00000000 to OxFFFFFFFF Adjust adjust Automatically calls the Format Adjuster to adjust a data output format 316 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a Output range ran Specifies the range to be adjusted by an address when selecting the option adjust for adjusting an output file Selecting Auto will obtain the starting ending address for adjustment from the absolute format load module to set automatically padding data p When selecting the option adjust for adjusting an output file the area of the file where no data exists is packed with data having a specified value e Options for 32 bit Intel HEX format f2hs Output file format None Outputs data in mixed HEX8 HEX16 and HEX32 according to the data address Output file format HEX8 16 bit address I16 Outputs data in HEX8 format in an allowable output range of 0x0000 to OxFFFF Output file format HEX16 20
406. ormation Entry Point Warning Level Level 1 v V Control of default option file Other Option ta_INRAMO1 0 000100 0 003F FF to_INROMO1 0xFCOO00 0xFFFFFF Cancel Apply The following options can be set from the general option setup dialog box Outputs start message V Outputs debug information g Control of Default Option File Xdof July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 303 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual v Entry Point e Warning Level w Level 0 to 2 Other Option Entry Point is the address to be set in the PC when data is loaded by the debugger Be sure to specify this option with a global symbol Select Warning Level from the drop down list In Other Option all assembler options can be written like startup options from command lines Write the options that do not belong to any assembler option setup categories directly in Other Option E Setting Disposition Connection See Section 4 5 5 6 Section Disposition Connection Specifying E Setting Symbol Definition Figure 4 5 38 Symbol Definition Setup Dialog Box Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari al gt Mara z Category Define Symbol v Symbol Name SYMBOL Value 100 Symbol Name List Set Delete Option g AL 2 E ra _INRAMO1 0x000100 0x003FFF t0 _INROMO01 0xFC0000 0xFFFFFF i Canc
407. ormation The information to be displayed depends on the currently active window There are six windows below Project window Edit window Source window Symbol window Local window Watch Window 176 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 9 1 Property Project Window This section explains the property in the Project Window E Property General Figure 4 3 9 Property Project Window Dialog Box General 1 File Property mx General Conditions Output Filename fC Softune sample 90 Project sample c Directory A Browse Filetype C Source File Size 1646 bytes Modified 14 57 48 Tuesday June 17 2003 I Cancel Display the file information module information and symbol information The information to be displayed depends on the currently active window There are six windows below e File name The full path to the selected file is displayed e Directory The directory of the selected file is displayed If editing is enabled the file to be referred can be changed If given in a relative path the directory is described in a relative path in the project file e File type The type of file managed in the project is displayed e Size Displays the file size e Modified Displays the date and time of the last file update July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 177 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu SPANSION Soft
408. ot be specified for this debugger e Data mask Cannot be specified for this debugger Note If performance is set while a user program is running the performance measurement result is cleared 260 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual 4 4 14 Fonts The Fonts for each window are changed Setting Fonts The font information font name and size currently set for each window can be displayed and the setting can be changed Also all font settings can be set to the defaults During debugging the fonts for debug related windows such as Source window can be changed E Changing Fonts Change fonts as follows 1 Select the Display Font menu The font setting dialog is displayed Figure 4 4 68 2 Select the window with the font to be changed and click the Font button To change the font for all windows click the AI font button The font setting dialog is displayed Figure 4 4 69 3 Specify the font name and size and click the OK button The font type that can be selected depends on the window 4 When the OK button in the font setting dialog Figure 4 4 68 is clicked the window fonts are changed E Resetting Fonts Reset fonts as follows 1 Select the Display Font menu The font setting dialog is displayed Figure 4 4 68 2 Click the All Reset button 3 The fonts for the window displayed in Window are all reset to the default
409. ows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 18 Shortcut Menu on Space in the Project Window v Docking View Hide The project window is docked with the frame in the check status e Hide The project window enters the nondisplay status e Docking View July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 57 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window SPANSION Software Support Manual a 3 4 2 ABS Tab The name of the current project and the file names registered in the project are displayed in the tree view format E ABS Tab Figure 3 4 19 shows examples of displayed contents of the ABS tab Figure 3 4 19 ABS Tab E Sample abs lt Load module name E 0 samplec e main Source file name sort val q A startup asm Function name The source file name and function name acquired from the debug information SRE J ABS J are listed E Function Display the following information form the debug information e Load module name e Source filename Double click the source file name to open the source window e Function name Double click the function name to jump to the source window of the function definition position e Coverage rate Indicates the coverage rates of load module source file and function Update of the ABS tab is required to display the latest coverage rate The coverage rate is displayed as when all areas are out of range of the coverage measurement If a part of the area fa
410. p down list for ROM RAM Area Name Specify the name of the section to be allocated to the ROM RAM area A wild card can be also used Specify the starting address to which the section is to be allocated Select and set a content type from the drop down list as required 310 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 6 Click the Set button The specified section is added to the end of Section Name List 7 When all settings are completed click the OK button To continuously allocate several sections to the specified address execute step 6 set Section Name and Content Type only then click the Set button Repeat this operation Sections are allocated in the specified order For how to change this order see Il Changing the Section Allocation Order E Changing the Section Allocation Order 1 Click the Set Section button The section setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 45 opens 2 Specify the area you want to change in ROM RAM Area Name When an address is directly specified select Addressing The sections to be allocated to the area or address are displayed in Section Name List 3 Select the section name whose order is to be changed then click the Up or Down button to move the cursor to a relevant position For addressing also see I Notes in Addressing in the next item E Notes in Addressing Examples of relationship bet
411. p of Error Bottom of Error E Property Function To display the information of activated window Property 158 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 3 1 Undo Redo Undo cancels the immediately preceding editing and undoes the status before the editing E Target This function is available only for edits for the edit window It can also continuously cancel or undo a series of actions for successive addition or deletion of characters and lines Note This function is valid only for the edit window Note that the value changed in the Memory or Register Window cannot be undone when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session Undo Redo function may not always work for a large amount of edits July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 159 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 3 2 Cut Copy Paste Delete Cut cuts the selected character string and Copy copies it to the clipboard Delete deletes the selected character string Paste inserts the copied character string into the cursor position or replaces it with the selected character string E Cut CUT cuts the character string selected from the edit window and moves it to the clipboard This command can be executed only in the edit window The character string cut here can be pasted later E Copy COPY copies the character string select
412. p the setup wizard Select MB2147 01 or MB2147 05 or MB2198 by emulator type click Next button Check displayed Monitoring Program Automatic Loading check box 5 a Execute the debug menu in the Start debug The emulator debugger will startup Monitoring program automatically load in Installation Directory LIB 907 This will automatically load the monitor program to the emulator at the beginning of debugging When download quit message dialog box Load quit correctly is displayed If the OK button is clicked then start debug 3 b Execute the Monitor Loader menu from the SOFTUNE V3 FFMC16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench Tools of the Windows Start Menu The monitor loader program will be started 4 b Select the monitor program to be loaded Select the monitor program corresponding to the chip to be used 5 b Specify a communication type To use the RS 232C interface specify a port name and a baud rate To use the LAN interface specify the host name of the emulator 6 b Click on Start Load This will load the binary file to the emulator 7 b Select Exit from the File menu to quit the monitor program Note Monitor program increase in the MB2147 01 MB2147 05 and MB2198 emulator For further details see release note in CD root directory July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 505 a SPANSION APPENDIX APPENDIX C Setting LAN Interface Software Support Manual a APPENDIX C Setting LAN In
413. pecify the full path of the template project file Click the Browse button to display the Open dialog and specify the item Up to 20 items for project name history can be referred E Copying Local Files When creating a new project based on template project specify the copy method of local files Perform the following steps 1 Specify the method for copying Figure 4 2 8 2 Click the Next button 3 The dialog box Figure 4 2 9 of the project creation information is displayed Check the contents File not found is displayed for the following cases Files which are not copied Files which does not exist 4 Click one of the following buttons Click the Finish button when the contents are correct Click the Back button when resetting the contents Click the Cancel button to cancel the project creation Copying local files is completed 142 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a Figure 4 2 8 Copying Local Files Specify the method of copying the local file The files that were not copied are deleted from the project file G Softune sample 907 96670_template_96673r v13 Copy everything Specify files to be copied v v v vi _ io_regbt 07 20 12 11 45 22 A v _ readme bt 09 13 12 14 08 47 A Copy nothing cack Woes fon Cone The method of copying Copy everything Specify fil
414. peed communication Place a check mark for Enable to set the frequency For the actual timing of switching from normal communication to high speed communication refer to the Hardware Manual for the product type you are using When disabling the high speed communication Remove the check mark of Enable The frequency cannot be set The value is saved if the frequency has been already set and the frequency will be enabled when high speed communication is enabled Notes Emulator debugger MB2100 01 e For details of the high speed communication refer to the Hardware Manual for the product type you are using e Always set to the frequency value in accordance of the actual operating frequency This is different from the emulator debugger MB2198 which can set the possible maximum value If any illegal value is input the debugger communication speed may become extremely slow e Current communication mode can be checked with one of the following methods SHOW SYSTEM command See SOFTUNE Workbench Command Reference Manual Version information dialog box See SOFTUNE Workbench Operation Manual 436 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual Parallel port tab Figure 4 7 34 Debug Preferences Parallel Port Tab Settings of parallel port are shown below Table 4 7 20 Setting Items on Parallel Port Tab Debugger EML Setup debug environment x Monitori
415. petexeenianvesds 168 171 173 Window Display Debug Session 186 Window Name Display ceeee eee eens 469 Disposition Setting Disposition Connection 0 0ce 304 DLL Outline of External I F DLL 0 ee 523 Downloading Automatic Downloading of Monitor PLOPTAIN sriisussincerssii aprann 33 Downloading Monitor Program ees 504 Drag amp Drop Drag amp Drop Between Windows ssseeseeeeeseese 38 E Edit Ei bc tis Sepa poas Facboeneawendstevia casas siwes ocdeetecietarivaveees 199 Edit Window cccccccceeeeseeeseeeseeeeceeeseeeees 65 166 Editor Editor Change Procedure eeeee eres 465 Editor Deletion Procedure ees 465 Editor Registration Procedure ees 464 Registering an Editor cece e cere eee ees 464 Setting the Editor to be Used 465 Setting the Standard Editor 0000 ee 68 Emulator Display Error at Loading Monitor Program to MUN ALOE eseina aranse 513 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2100201 a cccisessncecesssvescuetertcecsennens 258 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB214 1 iisscccccsscteneteidvveescvovett ccsetners 252 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB214 7201 a ccscnctencitessavescusiets ececsstens 253 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger MB2198 peireiras 256 Setting LAN Interface at Emulator Side 506 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB214 1 iissositensecnecdecensuerdetnntsaeveteers 213 T
416. pile Assemble Make or Build for the opened project E Export The Export button is clicked to open the Export dialog shown in Figure 4 5 54 By specifying the project in this dialog tool information can be copied to other projects in workspace Figure 4 5 54 Export Dialog Box Export Target OK smp pr Cancel All select E Reset To clear the currently set state and return to the default setting click Reset The Reset button can be used when the setting target is Project 324 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Title Input the tool name duplicated tool names do not cause a problem E Execution File Name Input the file name of the executed tool E Option Specify the option for the executed tool A macro can be specified in this field For the macros refer to Section 1 1 1 in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual When the button at the right of this field is clicked the list of usable macros is displayed For example when Build File Directory is clicked FILE PATH is inserted for the option at the cursor position E Executing Directory To execute the tool for a particular directory specify the Executing Directory If the Executing Directory is not specified the tool is executed for the project directory E Enable This specifies whether or not to execute the tool at Compile Assemble Make or Build The tool is not
417. port Manual SPANSION a 4 9 1 Help Topics Help Topics retrieves help items according to keywords E Contents Contents hierarchically displays online help contents It is used to search the contents for the item to be searched E Keyword SOFTUNE Workbench searches the help file for the directly specified item July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 477 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 9 Help a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 9 2 Support Information Support Information opens the attached support information file in the Edit Window E Support Information Support information provides the information not written in the attached manual Please read through support information once before using SOPFTUNE Workbench 478 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 9 Help Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 9 3 Version Information Displays SOFTUNE s version information E Version Information Dialog When Help Version Information menu is selected the version information dialog with the SOFTUNE Workbench logo is displayed This dialog displays each file version of SOFTUNE Workbench currently being activated Figure 4 9 1 Version Information rm Version information Ss SPANSION SOFTUNE F2HC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench 30L39 Copyright c 1997 2015 Spansion Cpu information file path C 8oftune lib 907 907 csv Cpu information file version 13 33 01_2013
418. pped A user program is running and trace acquisition is stopped e If Start of the shortcut menu is selected the trace buffer is cleared July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 91 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 15 Command Window a gt ARER Software Support Manual 3 15 Command Window The Command Window displays the execution result of the directly entered debugger command This window is displayed only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session E Command Window Figure 3 15 1 is an example of the Command Window Figure 3 15 1 Example of Command Window By Command tojta xs E The execution result of address 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 9 4 B E 4D 000000 00 00 80 BO 20 00 00 00 00 OO FC FF FF FF 000010 00 00 00 00 00 00 OO 00 OO OO FC FF OO 00 the entered command is displayed The entered command is executed Enter a debugger command from here E Shortcut Menu Command Input Field Undo Cancels the immediately preceding editing Cut Moves the selected character string to the clipboard Copy Copies the selected character string to the clipboard Paste Pastes the character string in the clipboard Delete Deletes the selected character string All select Selects all the entered character strings e Undo 1 Click the right button of the mouse on the command input field to display the shortcut menu 2 Select Undo from the shortcut menu e Cut 1
419. pt state is set ON an interrupt request always occurs Set the interrupt state OFF in the timing in which the interrupt source flag is cleared July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 539 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator a SPANSION Software Support Manual a G 16 SSDI_Set_Timer Set Timer Format int SSDI_Set_Timer int no unsigned long cycle int sw int id Argument int no Timer setting number unsigned long cycle Cycle count int SW Condition 0 Repeat 1 Only once int id Always set 0 Return value Timer setting numbers 0 to 31 1 Error Explanation Generate a timer event after an elapse of the set cycle count after the timer is set There are two timer setting conditions repeat and only once To clear the timer setting set the cycle count cycle to 1 If the timer setting number is set to 1 it is set to an unassigned number Remarks 540 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual SPANSION va G 17 SSDI_Request_Abort Request Abort Format void SSDI_Request_Abort char message Argument char message Abort message Return value None Explanation Requests the ISS to abort When an abort is requested the ISS aborts processing when the current instruction execution is terminated The abort message message is displayed as the abort message for the debugger
420. py from the shortcut menu with the measurement result display state in the performance window Example When display type is Measuring time in MB2198 When display type is Measuring count in MB2198 event 1 gt 2 min time 7 050 max time 26 225 avr time 13 763 RW N e count 8 8 15 26 10 999 11 999 12 999 13 999 14 999 15 999 16 999 17 999 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 107 a CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 18 Performance Window SPANSION Software Support Manual va Notes MB2100 01 e When the chip set is issued the previous measurement result is cleared e When simultaneously hitting to the start event and the end event set as the measurement interval Abort is displayed for the measurement result because the measurement cannot be performed e When the program is stopped because of a breakpoint during performance measurement the measurement result cannot be acquired properly Including invalid data is displayed for the measurement result e lf the program is executed again after the program is stopped during performance measurement error of approximate 10 cycles will occur on every execution 108 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 19 Sequence Window Software Support Manual SPANSION va 3 19 Sequence Window This window is displayed only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session The Sequence Window displays the sequence sett
421. r rm Softune907 Ea Approximately 10 cycles of error occurs for the measured cycle counts A normally however the error may be greater due to the state of bus E Measurement Unit Click the Unit button on the time measurement dialog to display the measurement unit setup dialog On the measurement unit setup dialog set the items displayed on the time measurement dialog This is valid only when using the emulator debugger MB2100 01 For details see 4 6 8 1 Measurement Unit During the Execution Time Measurement July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 389 a CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug SPANSION Software Support Manual va Figure 4 6 43 Measurement Unit Setup Dialog Measurement unit ree Measurement unit Cycle Cycle conversion Cancel Enable Disable __ Cancel Please set the CPU clock frequency for the execution cycle conversion Cycle conversion frequency D 32 MHz Notes There may be some errors for the measurement results For details see 2 2 5 Measuring Execution Cycle Count 2 3 6 Execution Time Measurement and 2 4 3 Execution Time Measurement in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Emulator debugger MB2100 01 This function cannot be used when the execution time mode is performance mode For details see 2 4 3 2 Switching Debug Function in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual The time measurement dialog does not show the range of errors When the chip set is issued the previou
422. r ICE type Figure 4 7 38 Setup Wizard ICE Type Setup Wizard x Please select ICE type ICE type MB2147 05 lt Back inist Cancel 440 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION 2 If the type of ICE is one of the followings specify whether or not to automatically load the monitor program when debug starts If it is enabled check the version of the firmware or FPGA currently loaded and when a file of a different version is loaded overwrite it MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Figure 4 7 39 Setup Wizard Automatic Load Setup Wizard x Please check the following box if you should automatically load monitor programs into ICE F Monitor program auto loading inist Cancel 3 Select the device type RS LAN USB If RS is selected set a port name and baud rate RS refers to RS232C Figure 4 7 40 Setup Wizard Device Type Setup Wizard x Please select device type Type Device Name RS v USB Detail Port co MI Baud Rate 9600 v July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 441 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a gt lt SPANSION Software Support Manual a If LAN is selected set a host name Figure 4 7 41 Setup Wizard Device Type Setup Wizard x Please select device type Type Device Name LAN id LAN Detail Host 4 When using MB2100 01 se
423. r disable the breakpoint setting at program execution Reset level Chip reset Low level reset Specify reset level from Debug Reset of MCU menu Chip reset Issue a chip reset corresponding to INIT Low level reset Issue a low level reset corresponding to RST For details refer to the hardware manual for your model Interrupt level of abort request 1 to 30 Specify interrupt level from Debug Run Abort menu Forcible stop Stop program execution forcibly at issuing abort No effect on the interrupt level mask ILM Mask the abort request by ILM Select from 1 to 30 1 is the highest level and 30 is lowest level A break occurs when ILM is less than the value of the specified Interrupt level interrupt level July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 411 a gt SPANSION ua CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual Step mode Automatic Source line Machine language Specifies a step unit for step execution Automatic Automatically sets the step unit according to the window display state Source Line Sets a step unit to the unit of a source line Machine Language Sets a step unit to the unit of a machine language Watchdog Enable Disable Specifies whether or not to enable watchdog timer while a program is running Interrupt mask at step Enable Disable Specify whether to pause acceptance of interrupt immediately after one instruction is executed at step execution Step execution
424. r s Manual July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 385 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a SPANSION Software Support Manual v 4 6 7 Stack This section explains a SOFTUNE Workbench call stack E Call Stack Usually a program is a set of several subroutines For this reason as debugging advances function calls of several stages occur For example one routine calls another and the called routine calls further another The call stack retains the relationship among function calls Clicking a function name from the function name list immediately displays information for the function in the Source Window Next to a function name is displayed a triangular symbol Figure 4 6 37 Call Stack Dialog Box Call stack x Function name Pd sort_val 000A86 00000010 lose main V Parameter The function written in the lowermost line of the function name list is the main function This main function calls the function above it The called function calls further a function above it In this way the function written in the uppermost line is the function in which the current PC exists When return is executed functions are deleted in turn from the function name list starting from the uppermost line Argument Display When a check mark is set to the left of Argument Display an argument value is displayed after each function name as shown in Figure 4 6 37 When no check mark is set to the left of Argume
425. r type Normal Fast Details concerning the type of the simulator debugger refer to 2 1 Simulator Debugger of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Figure 4 7 49 Setup Wizard Simulator Type Setup Wizard x Please select simulator type simulator type Fast ee eR 2 If there is a batch file to be executed immediately after the debugger is started set the batch file See Figure 4 7 44 3 Set whether to load the target file automatically during debugging Also specify the batch files used before and after load as required See Figure 4 7 45 4 Select the item to be set in the setup file When Specify is selected and Specification button is clicked the session setup dialog box is displayed thereby selecting a session to be restored immediately after the activation enabled See Figure 4 7 46 Simulator debugger setup has now been completed Procedure when the monitor debugger is selected 1 Select RS232C as the device type and set a port name and baud rate See Figure 4 7 41 2 If there is a batch file to be executed immediately after the debugger is started set the batch file See Figure 4 7 44 3 Set whether to load the target file automatically during debugging Also specify the batch files used before and after load as required 4 Select the item to be set in the setup file When Specify is selected and Specification button is clicked the session setup dialog box is displ
426. race Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 01 scccisccaecccseessececinneees 214 239 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2147 05 iiscssesneticcevvvenserreececsdevens 230 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2198 wctscsccetieramectevevventucieetcctecvans 233 Enable Enable wvscciccsavinasccervanosicsventanstasavavsacedesveasecdexves 325 Environment Environment Variable e eee sees 399 Setting the Debugger Mode EDVICODMEN ccicsscceesdevscaveeteceseraccccerens 398 Setting the SOFTUNE Workbench Execution EDVILODMECNiwcicsssccsescessnnvesieeesarancidevens 398 Error Bottom Of EOT iiss scsscsces i cnctatecepessveeeavenstiveess 175 Display Error at Debugging ees 512 Display Error at Loading Monitor Program to FMA en vecicecvaeete ss ssatsaniaveevenceevencnts 513 Error Jump Function 0 0 0 eeeee cece arene eee 158 Error Jump Setup Procedure 2 0 0 466 Error Messages 0 0sessssseeseeseeseseseneeeeeeeeenes 498 Example of Error Jump Setup 0 0 0 467 Next Brrotsissicsescitvie cosieisssativeien ee ETRS 175 Previous Erro a tcccecincccesnetsasssevesegnendyctaneceteretes 175 TOp OF EmmOtescsccsssviscskt vsretbeadesvesteessercetvacevivines 175 Warning and Error Messages cccceeeeeeeeees 520 Event Detailed Display of Event Flag ceeeeee 244 Event Hit Information 0 0 0 eee eeeees 229 Eyent WISE cesicsteiccnavcnniedesedetcvasevessoniss ecdtenecanends 370 Setting Events cscs cititeensci
427. race delay setting Figure 4 4 37 Multi Trace i Setup trace fees Trace Trace trigger Multi trace gpeccosesoeceeoosecar Trace buffer 65536 frames aosssoessossssoun00s505 The point which the trace end trigger hit The point which the multi trace iz end trigger hit 1 Block size Blocks Trace buffer 1024 frames x 64 blocks 65536 frames Delay setting etting range 2 The trace end trigger D frames lt 1 1023 gt 3 The multi trace end trigger D o blocks lt 0 63 gt Cancel e Block size 128 256 5 12 1024 Selects the block size of multiple trace e Delay setting The trace end trigger Set the period in frames from the point where trace end trigger hits to the end of trace frame acquisition Setting range varies depending on the block size The multi trace end trigger Set the period in frames from the point where multi trace end trigger hits to the end of trace frame acquisition Setting range varies depending on the block size 228 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Event Hit Information Dialog shows if data passes the event while a user program is running This debugger monitors the following events e Trace trigger e Sequencer e Data watch break Figure 4 4 38 Event Hit Information e e paai nro TIO _ Function Addess_ DATAWATCH F802C2 SEQUENCE LEVELI
428. ral Option Setup Dialog fe Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt Catesoy ECE Outputs start message V Outputs debug information Warning Level Level 1 v V Outputs used stack information file MBSOF394 v V Creates an assembly list file V Control of default option file Other Option The following options can be set from the normal option setup dialog Outputs start message V Outputs debug information g July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 291 SPANSION a gt v CHAPTER 4 Menus Software Support Manual 4 5 Project Outputs warning message or warning level w Outputs stack usage information list INF STACK Creates assembly list file INF LIST Control of default option file Xdoff Depending on CPU classification Output warning level levels 0 to 3 may be selected instead of Output warning message At Specification in Other Option all C compiler options can be written like start up options from command lines Write the options that do not belong to any C compiler option setup categories directly at Specification in Other Option E Setting a Macro Name Figure 4 5 27 Macro Name Setup Dialog Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari_4 gt MBSOF 394 E Category Define Macr
429. rce file not subject to making or building Assembler source file in which individual options specified Assembler source file in which individual options specified not subject to making or building Include file Include file with dependence Library file Library file not subject to making or building Object file Object file not subject to making or building Relative format file Relative format file not subject to making or building 48 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window Software Support Manual SPANSION REALOS configuration file Other user s registration files Simulator Debugger setup name Valid setup name for Simulator Debugger Emulator Debugger setup name Valid setup name for Emulator Debugger Monitor Debugger setup name Be AE Be Valid setup name for Monitor Debugger E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Workspace Name Figure 3 4 3 shows a shortcut menu Figure 3 4 3 Shortcut Menu on a Workspace Name Add Project gt Property e Add Project When selected the following two submenus are displayed New A new project is added to workspace See Section 4 5 2 Add Project Existing Project An existing project is added to workspace See Section 4 5 2 Add Project e Property Information on the workspace file is displayed See Section 4 3 9 Property E Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Target N
430. re Support Manual SPANSION e Add button Set a bookmark to a location specified by Bookmark position e Delete button Delete selected bookmark from a list e All delete button Delete all bookmarks from a bookmark list e Jump button Move a start position for displaying a source window to location of bookmark selected in bookmark list E Setup or Cancel of a Bookmark 1 Please put a cursor to line where you want to set or cancel a bookmark 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Setup cancel bookmark Click on Setup cancel bookmark at toolbar Find Add or delete bookmark to from Source tab in dialog bookmark E Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a source window 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Subsequent bookmark Click on Subsequent bookmark at toolbar Find 3 If no subsequent bookmark is exist on a window proceed to the subsequent bookmark located on the next file E Move the Caret to the Previous Bookmark 1 Please make sure that there is a cursor in a source window 2 Please execute any of following operations Select Edit Bookmark Previous bookmark Click on Previous bookmark at toolbar Find 3 If no previous bookmark is existed on a window proceed to previous bookmark located on the last file E Move the Caret to the Next Bookmark in the Current Window 1 Pl
431. rectory and file building are set MCU The items regarding the MCU such as the chip type and target MCU are set C Compiler The C compiler options are set Assembler The assembler options are set Linker The linker options are set Librarian The librarian options are set Converter The converter start and converter options are set Debug The debug options and debug setup information are set 278 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION 4 5 5 1 General This section explains the items that can generally be set in the Setup Project dialog Setting of General 1 Click the General tab in the Setup Project dialog 2 Set the following items as needed Remove this file from target of Build Project type Output Directory Target file Name Figure 4 5 8 Setup Project Dialog general Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari 4 gt MB90F394 n Project Project Type Function call interface Loadmodule ABS Stack argument passing 7 Targetfile Name sample abs Output Directory Targetfile Directory MBSOF394 ABS Browse Objecttile Directory MBSOF394 0 BJS Browse Listfile Directory MBSOF394 LST Browse Cancel e Remove this file from target of build The file selected in the tree view is removed from the Make Build
432. reerrrrrrrrrere 320 Designate Operating the Debugger tte 33 Designate Additional Option When Performance Function for Emulator Debugger EXCCUUNG sisccicctsteanansinesnossccssaaestdiaeetnes 325 MB2100 01 issiria 258 Detail Definition Performance Function for Emulator Debugger Setting of Options Included in Detail Definition in MB2141 oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetee tere eeeeeees 252 Optimization 0 ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 295 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger Detailed Display MB2147 O1 ws estestesstee ites 253 Detailed Display of Alarm Handler 246 Performance Function for Emulator Debugger Detailed Display of Alarm Queue e 247 A MB2198 ETETE eee eer CCPC Perr rrrrc reece errr errr 256 Detailed Display of Cyclic Handler bated tetas 245 Setting the Debugger Mode Detailed Display of Event Flag 244 Environment cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 398 Detailed Display of Fixed length Memory Settings Related to the Debugger 34 Pb tice A E tases 245 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger Detailed Display of Mailbox c scsssessesseeeseesees 244 MB2141 Pee eee eee Pe Per CeCe Cer r rrr creer reer errr 21 3 Detailed Display of Ready Queue PENN EREOEEA PE NEEE 246 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger Detailed Display of Semaphore s rsrsrereeeee 243 MB2147 O1 ose 214 239 Detailed Display of Task 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 242 Trace Function for Emulator Debugger Detailed Display
433. ress or the program accesses data at an address is called a breakpoint E Types of Breakpoints The conditions which can be set for breakpoints depend on the types of debuggers and emulators For details of each breakpoint see Section Break in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual Simulator debugger e Code break See Section 4 6 4 1 Code Break e Data break See Section 4 6 4 2 Data Break Emulator debugger e Code break Hardware See Section 4 6 4 3 Code Break Hardware Software See Section 4 6 4 4 Code Break Software Hardware count See Section 4 6 4 5 Code Break Hardware Count Hardware data watch See Section 4 6 4 6 Code Break Hardware Data Watch e Data break See Section 4 6 4 7 Data Break Monitor debugger e Code break See Section 4 6 4 1 Code Break July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 341 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Break Dialog When Debug Breakpoint menu is selected a break dialog is displayed In the case of the simulator debugger the following dialog is displayed Figure 4 6 5 Break Dialog Simulator Debugger Break Code Data Break address H F9028F Pass count D 1 Extend Break list F9028F main enable F902B5 if oO sample c 7 enable F902C3 if 0 sample c 78 it 0 w 4 ij b Enable Disable Delete All delete Jump Close Setting a breakpoint After en
434. ribed in lower section so you can grasp the position where you are reading now July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E iii a SPANSION ua Software Support Manual CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION a CONTENTS CHAPTER1 Outline of SOFTUNE Workbench c seecccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneees 1 1 1 OUTING neinei nien en e ne neds ad ee eee atic aed 2 1 2 What is SOFTUNE Workbench o0 ccececcceeeceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeaeeseaeeeseeeeseaaeeseaeeseeaeesenaeeessaes 3 1 3 Procedure for Developing Programs with SOFTUNE Workbench ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseaeees 4 CHAPTER 2 Operation ssiceccnarsccscceccccecsusnsessnnenedcncecasainicneneuencbuekeseusbehenadeesadinanatonaneneuenense 5 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog BOXES 0 eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesnaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaaes 6 2 1 1 Data and Address Formulas Numerical Constant 0 cccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeseaeeeesaeeeteaes 7 2 1 2 Data and Address Formulas Symbols Line Numbers Character Constants eceseeeeee 9 2 1 3 Data and Address Formulas Register Name Flag Name ccccceeseseeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeeeeaes 11 2 1 4 Operators Usable in Data and Address Formulas cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaeees 12 2 1 5 Address Formula SpecitiCation wvsscssicecevececaveetezenenerdecaverevts sees i
435. rnal I F DLL for Simulator APPENDIX H Sample Project for the Semihosting Function APPENDIX Major Changes July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 501 APPENDIX APPENDIX A List of Register Names SPANSION Software Support Manual a APPENDIX A List of Register Names Register names are displayed E Registers Available operations by SOFTUNE Workbench are as follows However some registers are not available depending on the model For details refer to the hardware manual for your model Registers available for all F MC 16 models General purpose registers RWO to RW7 Program counter PC Accumulator A Frame pointer FP Instruction pointer IP Current stack pointer SP System stack pointer SSP User stack pointer USP Bank register DTB Bank register ADB Bank register USB Bank register SSB Bank register PCB Processor status PS Interrupt level mask ILM Register bank pointer RP Flag CCR I flag I S flag S T flag T N flag N Z flag Z V flag V C flag C Other DPR 502 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX A List of Register Names Software Support Manual SPANSION va E How to Use Use the following procedures to reference and access a register Register window Select Display Register For details refer to Section 3 10 Register Window Commands Setting Execute the SET REGISTER command Reference Execute the SHOW REGISTER command For details
436. rnessseeencnanentece 20 401 SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 569 a SPANSION ua Software Support Manual 570 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual CM41 00312 9E Spansion e SOFTWARE SUPPORT MANUAL F MC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench Operation Manual July 2015 the Rev 9 0 Published Spansion Inc Edited Communications SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 571 a SPANSION Software Support Manual v Colophon The products described in this document are designed developed and manufactured as contemplated for general use including without limitation ordinary industrial use general office use personal use and household use but are not designed developed and manufactured as contemplated 1 for any use that includes fatal risks or dangers that unless extremely high safety is secured could have a serious effect to the public and could lead directly to death personal injury severe physical damage or other loss i e nuclear reaction control in nuclear facility aircraft flight control air traffic control mass transport control medical life support system missile launch control in weapon system or 2 for any use where chance of failure is intolerable i e submersible repeater and artificial satellite Please note that Spansion will not be liable to you and or any third party for any claims or damages arising in connection with above mentione
437. rol Register Intelligent 1 0 Service Internal 1 0 Area Internal RAM Area IRO andICR MCU Limit Check Internal Instruction RAM Area Setup internal instruction RAM area Read start address H 000000 Write start address H oo0000 Size H 100 i Cancel Read start address Specifies the start address of the internal instruction RAM read area Write start address Specifies the start address of the internal instruction RAM write area Size Specifies the size of the internal instruction RAM area Note There is no function with some CPU 290 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 5 3 Setting C Compiler Options This section explains how to set C compiler options E Setting C Compiler Options 1 Click the C Compiler tab from the project setup dialog 2 Select category General Define Macro Include Path Optimize Language specifications or Target Dependency can be selected as category Specified options can be checked using Option at the bottom of the dialog If the individual option is set the Common Option button can be clicked to return to the common option The macro description can be used to describe options For the macro description refer to Section 1 11 Macro Descriptions Usable in Manager of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual E Setting General Options Figure 4 5 26 Gene
438. rorBit Eclipse ORNAND and combinations thereof are trademarks and registered trademarks of Spansion LLC in the United States and other countries Other names used are for informational purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners 572 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015
439. rror message is output under the conditions shown in Table F 2 Table F 2 Relationship Between Input Object and rp Option Function call interface for input object register argument passing stack argument passing Provided Normal combination for The error E4313L is output register argument passing No error is output Specifying of rp option Unprovided The error E4313L is output Normal combination for stack argument passing No error is output If these errors occur correct the specifying of the rp option or the function call interface for the input object referring to Appendix Table F 2 Librarian error message E4410U The module is different calling interface of a function file name This error message is output under the conditions shown in Table F 3 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 521 APPENDIX APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface SPANSION Software Support Manual v Table F 3 Relationship Between Input Object and rp Option Function call interface for input object and library to be edited register argument passing stack argument passing Provided Normal combination for The error E4410U is output register argument passing Specifying of No error is output rp option Unprovided The error E4410U is output Normal combination for stack argument passing No error is output If these errors occur correct the specif
440. rt name and a baud rate To use the LAN interface specify the host name of the emulator 6 Click Start Load The selected monitor program is downloaded to the emulator 7 Select Exit from the File menu to exit the monitor program Table B 1 Monitor Program Chip type Corresponding chip Monitor program F2MC 16 16H MB907XX EML907A HEX F2MC 16F MB902XX EML902 HEX 1 EML902N HEX 2 F MC 16L MB906XX EML906 HEX 1 EML906N HEX 2 F MC 16LX MB905XX EML905 HEX 1 EML905N HEX 2 1 For MB2145 506 emulation pod 2 For MB2145 507 emulation pod CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX B Downloading Monitor Program Software Support Manual SPANSION a e When the emulator is for the MB2147 01 MB2147 05 and MB2198 series The Downloading Monitor Program procedure is described below Setting the Monitoring Program Automatic Loading is described 3 a 5 a setting the Downloading Monitor Program procedure is described 3 b 7 b l a Connect the emulator and personal computer using RS 232C LAN interface or USB When connecting the emulator to the PC see APPENDIX C Setting LAN Interface 2 a Press the reset switch then turn on the emulator Check that the READY LED of the emulator body turn on 3 a Execute the FFMC16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench menu from SOFTUNE V3 of the Windows Start Menu The SOFUTNE Workbench will start 4 a Create Workspace and Project start u
441. rtup asm Startup routine samplelib Sample low level function library write c Output Write to the MBR sbrk c Dynamic allocation of a memory area sbrk stub c Dummy function group open close read lseek isatty Debug MB2100 01 sup Setup file July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 547 APPENDIX APPENDIX H Sample Project for the Semihosting Function SPANSION Software Support Manual a An Eana Application Using the Sample Project To build the semihosting function into a user project based on the sample project perform the following procedure Purpose Use printf for a user project Condition Memory model Small model Function call interface Pass arguments on a stack Ramconst Not used Steps 1 Link assignment of a default link library In the Control Library of the Linker tab on the setup dialog of the project uncheck Don t retrieval the default library Figure H 3 Retrieval of Default Link Library Setup Project Target of setting General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari 4 gt MBS05538 z Category Control Library oA Don t retrieval the default library Don t check debug infomation existence in library Search Path pF Search Path List Add Delete Up Down ta_INRAMO1 0 0001 00 0x003F FF to_INROMO1 0xFCOO00 0xFFFFFF Cancel 2 Initialization of the stream area In the startup routine add processing for calling a
442. rtuy C Softune sample 907 Project MBSOF394 0BJ sampl Modified e Tool Displays the language tool to be executed e File The file used in creating a target file is displayed in order e Modified Displays the date and time of the last file update July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 179 a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu va Property Output Figure 4 3 14 Property Project Window Output General Conditions Output Output name sampe Tool File C Softune sample 9074 Project MB SOF 394 0BJ sampl C Softune sample 907 Project MBSOF394 L5 T sampl C Softune sample S907 Project SMB SOF 3944L5S T sampl 4 m Update time e Output name Base name of output file e Tool Displays the language tool to be executed e File Output file list created by the language tool e Update time Displays the date and time of the last file update 180 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual 4 3 9 2 Property Edit Window SPANSION a This section explains the property in the Edit window E Property General Figure 4 3 15 Property Edit Window General File Properties mym General Filename C Softune sample 907 Project sample c Size 1646 bytes Modified 14 57 48 Tuesday June 17 2003 Tab Size 4 e File name The full path to the selected file is displayed e Siz
443. ry retrieval paths are registered in the list can be changed in the following procedure 1 Select the Control Library category The library control setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 5 41 opens 2 Select the library retrieval path whose order is to be changed from Search Path List 3 Click the Up or Down button to move the cursor to a relevant position E Setting Register Bank Figure 4 5 42 Register Bank Setup Dialog Box Setup Project mn General MCU C Compiler Assembler Linker Librari gt Category Register Bank x Register Bank List Bank Bank1 Target of setting MBSOF394 v 4 Bank2 Bank3 Bank4 Bank5 Bank6 Bank Banks Bank3 Bank10 Option g AL 2 a _INRAMO1 0 0001 00 0 003FFF Le to_INROMO1 0xFCOO00 0xFFFFFF Cancel Apply 1 Select the Register Bank category The register bank setting dialog is displayed Figure 4 5 42 2 Set the check mark for the register bank list to be used 308 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION 4 5 5 6 Section Disposition Connection Specifying This section explains how to set the section allocation link option linker option E Section Disposition Connection Specifying 1 Click the Linker tab from the project setup dialog box 2 Select the Disposit
444. s 4 When the OK button is clicked the window fonts are returned to the defaults SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 261 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual va Figure 4 4 68 Set Font Dialog m Font information Output Name FixedSys Size 14 Sample AaBbYy2z Font All font ALL Reset lt a Figure 4 4 69 Set Font Dialog Font Fixedsys 14 Lucida Console erminal Sample AaBbY y2z 262 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 15 Real time Memory The real time memory window is displayed E Real time Memory Window The window to display the mirror memory is opened The memory contents are dumped displayed from the specified address This window can be only used for the debug session for the emulator debugger MB2147 01 The location accessed by the user program is color coded The value which is not accessed may be different from that of real memory The value of memory accessed by the user program is only valid but that of memory accessed by operating debugger is not valid e Invalid memory contents The contents of the displayed mirror memory are undefined displayed in grey e Valid memory contents The contents of the displayed mirror memory are same as those of the real memory displayed in black or red Only memor
445. s 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 1 Project Output Project switches the Project Window to view or non view or vice versa Output switches the Output Window to view or non view or vice versa E Project Window When the Project Window is displayed a check mark is set to the left of Project in the View Menu Even if the Project window is switched to non view the project is not closed When it is switched to display again the Project Window is displayed at the previously displayed position E Output Window When the Output Window is viewed a check mark is set to the left of Output Window in the View Menu Even if the Output Window is switched to non view data in the Output Window is not cleared When it is switched to displayed again the Output Window is displayed at the previously displayed position If make build compile assemble update of dependencies or stop is executed when the Output Window is set to non view the Output Window automatically enters the view status Even if the Output Window is set to non view when make build compile or assemble is being executed error messages are never lost These messages are all displayed when the Output Window is redisplayed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 187 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 4 2 Symbol Symbol views the Symbol Window E Symbol When the Symbol Window is opened all the symb
446. s called a vector Vectors are determined in advance according to the kind of the MCU E Display and Setting Vectors e Display Figure 4 6 47 Vector Display Dialog Box r Vector Vector table 000000 000000 000000 00000A ooooo0 000000 00000A ooooo0 000000 000000 ooooo0 000000 000000 oooo00 000000 000000 00000A 000000 000000 ooooo00 000000 000000 00000A 000000 System System System System System System System System reset INT exception timebase aw The start address of a program is usually set in the reset vector E Jump Display the source of the stored program at the address set in the vector table in the following procedure 1 Select a vector number 2 Click the Jump button If the starting address of the program set in the vector table is incorrect the source cannot be displayed disassemble display Note The jump function merely displays the jump destination program it does not update the program counter to move control to the address set in the vector table SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 395 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 6 12 Load Target File This section explains how to load the target file to be debugged by SOFTUNE Workbench E Target File An ABS format target file is to be debugged This file is registered as a project target file Debugging can be started after the
447. s called the semihosting function For details on the semihosting function see Section 2 6 10 How to Display the Output Message from User Program to the Debugger in the SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual On the other hand for details on the MBR see the hardware manual for your model E Use Conditions Emulator debugger MB2100 01 It is necessary to use a sample program For how to use a sample program see APPENDIX H Sample Project for the Semihosting Function E How to Display Use the following procedure to display the Terminal Window e Displaying in the menu Select Display Terminal menu E Display Example Figure 3 22 1 shows a display example of the Terminal Window Figure 3 22 1 Terminal Window rn E Terminal Loe e Hello world 128 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 22 Terminal Window Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Shortcut Menu e Setting Sets the data transfer method This cannot be selected with this debugger e Clear Clears a displayed result e Logging See Section 3 22 1 Logging Notes e If the Terminal Window is in an icon state or inactive its state remains the same even if an output is requested e f outputs are requested continuously from a program the Terminal Window is displayed again immediately after it is closed July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 129 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 22 Terminal Window a gt SPANSION Software S
448. s measurement result is cleared The setting of the measurement unit dialog is shared with the performance measurement functions For details see 4 4 13 4 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 390 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual EERE 4 6 8 1 Measurement Unit During the Execution Time Measurement This section explains the measurement unit of time measurement functions E Measurement Unit This is the time unit used to measure the execution time The setting of measurement unit is valid only when using the emulator debugger MB2100 01 E Setting Procedure Click the Unit button on the time measurement dialog to display the measurement unit setup dialog On the measurement unit setup dialog set the items displayed on the time measurement dialog Figure 4 6 44 Measurement Unit Setup Dialog Measurement unit Measurement unit Cycle Cycle conversion een Enable C Disable Cancel Please set the CPU clock frequency for the execution cycle conversion Cycle conversion frequency D 32 MHz e Measurement unit Cycle Selects the unit for the execution time required for the program execution Available item is Cycle only Cycle Displays the measurement results in cycle count e Cycle Conversion Enable Disable Sets whether to display the execution cycle count by converting it to real time The default value is Disable Enable Disp
449. s not match other area names An easy program consists of a ROM area and a RAM area but in a complicated program several area may be specified The number of areas that can be set is not limited set all the areas necessary to configure the memory map of the program to be developed In Auto Disposition Mode 2 the linker automatically allocates sections unspecified for allocation in a ROM RAM area The linker searches an available ROM RAM area beginning at the top of the ROM RAM Area List Click the Up button or the Down button to change the desired number Setting of the Sections Selecting the area from the ROM RAM area list and clicking the Setup Section button opens the Setup Section dialog box enabling the sections to be allocated to the selected area When selecting an area click the start address of the area When the Setup Section dialog box opens specify section names in the order the sections are allocated to the area Specify section names one by one When section name specification is completed click the Setup button to register the section names in the section name list When execute make built the sections are allocated to the area in the order the section names were registered in the section name list When setting the sections to be allocated to one area is completed click the OK button to return the linker option setting dialog box Also set other areas in the same way July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 29 CHAPTE
450. s not operate properly If a program of this type exits it must be corrected Similar to the conventional function call interface all arguments of the variable arguments are passed by the stack and need not to be corrected 3 Changing during linking and making library The following C library is added for register argument passing When using register argument passing link the following library with _rp lib 907 lib9 _rp lib 48 files July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 519 APPENDIX APPENDIX F Guide to Changing Function call Interface SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Warning and Error Messages When a contradiction concerning the function call interface is detected Workbench Assembler Linker and Librarian output the following warning or error messages Workbench warning messages e When adding of project 10227W Projects with different function call interfaces exist in the workspace Objects created by the project with different function call interfaces cannot be used together Continue processing YES Add a project NO Do not add a project e When setting dependencies between projects sub projects 10228W Function call interfaces between projects are different Objects created by the project with different function call interfaces cannot be used together Continue processing YES Set the dependencies between projects NO Do not set the dependencies between projects e When changing function call i
451. s the measurement count E Shortcut Menus Update Updates the performance measurement result When using the emulator debugger MB2100 01 the measurement count is only updated during measurement Restart Clears the current performance measurement data and measures again When using the emulator debugger MB2100 01 this can be specified only when the user program is executed Setting Displays the performance mode setting dialog See 4 4 13 Performance Indication range Sets the display method for the performace window See 4 4 13 Performance Measurement unit Displays the dialog for performance measurement unit setting This can be selected only when using the emulator debugger MB2100 01 For details see 4 4 13 4 Performance Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 Event Sets events for the performance measurement See 4 4 13 Performance Clear Clears the performance buffer When using the emulator debugger MB2100 01 this can be specified only when the measurement is completed while the user program is executed Copy Sets events for the performance measurement See ll Copy of Performance Measurement Result Close Closes the window 106 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 18 Performance Window Software Support Manual E Copy of Performance Measurement Result SPANSION a The measurement result displayed in the performance window can be output to the clipboard Select Co
452. saees 531 G 8 SSDI_Execute_Event Post Execute Instruction cc cccccceeseeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeessenaeeeeaes 532 G 9 SSDI_Interrupt_Event Post Interrupt 2 0 cececee cece ecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseaeesscaeeeseaeeeeeeeeseaes 533 G 10 SSDI_Timer_Event Post Timer ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeeesaaeeeeeaeeeceaaeeseaeeeseaeesseeeesenaeeenaaes 534 G 11 SSDI_Read_Memroy Read from Memory ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeecneeeeeceeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeesseeeseeeeesenaeeeeaaes 535 G 12 SSDI_Write_Memroy Write to Memory eccceceeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseaaeeseaeeesseeeseeaeeeeaes 536 G 13 SSDI_Read_Register Read from Register c ccccescceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeesenaeeeeaes 537 G 14 SSDI_Write_Register Write to Register cccceeeceseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseseeeseaeeeseeeeeeeeeesenaeeesaes 538 G 15 SSDI_Set_Interrupt Set Interrupt Source oo eee eee c een eeeeneeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeenceeeeseeeeeeeeeteaaes 539 G 16 SSDI_Set_Timer Set Timer cccccecceeceeeeeeenee cence eeeneeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeecaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseseeesenaeeenaes 540 G 17 SSDI_Request_Abort Request Abort cceceececeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeesseaeeeseaeeeneaeeeneaes 541 G18 SSDI Set Ar d S6t Alea sssrinds deurdie adan T dadaa d oia deann idaan 542 G 19 SSDI_Clear_Cycle Clear Cycle Count ccecccecceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeee
453. se the specifications of the template project are used Project type Function call interfaces Chip type Target MCU Place the cursor on the template name to display the template project information as shown in Figure 4 2 5 3 Specify the following items Project name Target file name Directory 4 Click the OK button 5 The dialog box Figure 4 2 8 to select members is displayed For details see I Copying Local Files as shown below 6 The dialog box Figure 4 2 9 to display the project information is displayed Check the setting of the project 7 Click the Finish button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 139 CHAPTER 4 Menus 2 4 2 File Menu SPANSION Software Support Manual Creating a new project based on template project is completed Workspace is also created at the same time Figure 4 2 5 Template Information This is a project template for the MB966 Series It includes some basic settings for e g Linker C Compiler which must be checked and modified in detail corresponding to the user application and device type start asm includes revision and history of Template files VO register files _ffmc16 c _ffmcl6 h mb966x0 h jo_reg txt revision and history of I O register files The compilation option Xinittbl is individually set to _ ffmcl6 C When creating a new project by specifying a template project The following shows how to create a new project by specifyi
454. sed in the following environment Emulator debugger MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 361 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Setting of Data Break Setting dialog Figure 4 6 20 Data Break Setting Dialog e Break address Specify the address to locate a break point at e Remain Displays the remaining number of breakpoints which can be set e Event list This button is used to display the event list dialog used to check the setting of all events This is available with MB2100 01 362 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a Details dialog MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2100 01 Detail button is pushed the following details dialog is displayed Figure 4 6 21 Data Break Details Dialog Data break point details x Attribute Break address H 000000 7 Read Size Byte v V Write V Data agreement Data mask HFFFF caresi e Break address In this field the address that sets a breakpoint is specified e Syze Byte Word Long The monitoring data size is specified Long can be set only with the emulator debugger MB2100 01 e Attribute Read Write ReadWrite Specifies the attributes when data accessing e Data agreement When specifying the data and the data mask enter the check mark in the box for Data agreement e Data Sets d
455. semble Start of debugging Dependency update The subproject of the active project is also influenced Set the active project as shown below 1 2 Select the Project Active Project menu Select the project for the active project 22 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 5 Setting Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a The active project is set The project added to the workspace at last is automatically set to the active project E Deleting a Project Added to Workspace Perform steps below to delete a project 1 Specify the project to be deleted on the SRC tab of the project window For details see 3 4 1 SRC Tab 2 Select Delete Project from the shortcut menu The specified project is removed from the workspace however the project files are not deleted If the deleted project is a subproject of another project in the workspace the dependencies between projects are also deleted July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 23 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 6 Creating Files and Setting to Project SPANSION Software Support Manual v 2 6 Creating Files and Setting to Project This section explains how to create new source files and how to set them to a project E Creating New Source Files 1 Select the File New menu Select Text file for File type on the New dialog box and then click the OK button 2 Select the File Save as menu Select Text file for
456. sisiidie inia eE scene ESAN E vtec dees nce anes 403 ALON WO POM isisisi g dadis A aE TAa ENN meat AEREE EEEa el 404 viii CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION a a AA E o NE E EEE E E N AE E EE E E A A A needeeaiesedtieeys 4 7 2 3 Setting Debug Environment c ccecceceseeeeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeesaeeseeaeeeseaaeeseaaeeeeaeeeeseeeeeeaeeenaes 4 7 2 4 Selection Debug Function oo ececceecsceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeseeaeeseaeesseaeeeeseeeeeneeenaas 4 7 2 5 Setup Wi ard scssi iiaeaa adoun iaaea eeae eee ceeeteaeeesaaeeeseaeeeeeaeeeegeaeeseaeeeseaeesseaeeensaeeeseaeeesaas 4 7 3 4 7 4 4 7 5 4 7 6 4 7 7 4 7 8 4 7 9 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 4 8 3 4 8 4 4 8 5 4 8 6 4 9 4 9 1 4 9 2 4 9 3 Memon Map s cccceueiveccieceeiadedsavedyccnettes ietieveseseciereie vec PAE aa EEA NEE EE ESA ENE E ETETE FLASH Memory Area Operation ccccccccceceseeeeeneeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeseneeeseneeees MOON EE E A E estat fa eres ed eae hed bed ent eat ects ete ee ee es tec KG VD OIG EE E E EE N E N EA E EA A E E TE ECON serasi r A E AE O OE O EE OO EO Tool StartUp cienias anaien aiana eiaa a a aaa Ea blend ANa an A ne iNES WINDOW E T A E E E nieve e eee tenet reas L E E E O S ETE ET AE E E E AE N T A ais aes gee TOPICS E A P E cath AN A A NEA A E E A eaten aveey Support Information o oo eee cece ee cce ee eeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeceaeesgeaeeeseaeeeseaeeese
457. source simulator is called in the following timing When the Debugger is started When the Debugger is terminated When the target is reset Immediately before data is read from memory I O Immediately after data is written to memory I O Immediately before fetching is performed When an interrupt occurs When a timer event occurs July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 523 a SPANSION v APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual Reads writes data from to memory Reads writes data from to registers Sets interrupt sources Requests abort of instruction execution E Simulator External I F Specification Function List ISS gt DLL 1 SSDI_Entry Startup 2 SSDI_Init Initialize 3 SSDI_Ready Ready 4 SSDI_End End 5 SSDI_Reset_Event Post Reset 6 SSDI_Read_Event Post Read 7 SSDI_Write_Event Post Write 8 SSDI_Execute_Event Post Execute Instruction 9 SSDI_Interrupt_Event Post Interrupt 10 SSDI_Timer_Event Post Timer DLL ISS 11 SSDI_Read_Memory Read from Memory 12 SSDI_Write_Memory Write to Memory 13 SSDI_Read_Register Read from Register 14 SSDI_Write_Register Write to Register 15 SSDI_Set_Interrupt Set Interrupt Source 16 SSDI_Set_Timer Set Timer 17 SSDI_Request_Abort Request Abort 18 SSDI_Set_Area Set Area 19 SSDI_Clear_Cycle Clear cycle count 20 SSDI_Execute_MCU Execute target program 21 SSDI_GetCurrentExecuteAddr G
458. splayed in the submenu click the name of the project that is made active A checkmark is placed at the left side of the active project name in the menu July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 267 a SPANSION Software Support Manual CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project a 4 5 2 Add Project A project is added to workspace E Add Project There are the following two menus to add a project e New A new project is created and stored in workspace e Project An existing project is stored in workspace Note If any project having the same name as that of the project to be stored is in workspace it cannot be stored in workspace 268 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 2 1 Add Project Create Creates a new project and registers it to a workspace E Add Project Create Figure 4 5 1 Dialog for Creating Projects ie Create a Project Chip Classification Fmc v MC charge 96670_template_966 Target MCU sample Semiosting mesos gt Browse for template O 4 w b Project Type Target Filename LoadmodulefABS f OO owe Function call interface Project Directory Sockoumet ponina GAS O 2 Dependencies Add to the current workspace SemiHostingpi v e Template Blank project Template Browse for template Selects whether to specify template project when a project is created
459. ss Valid for static Symbol in class function July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes SPANSION Software Support Manual h N E Line Number The line numbers to be generated by the C compiler or assembler can be used to reference addresses For the C language a line number indicates the starting address when one line is compiled source file name line number When referencing an address with a line number prefix to the line number A line number can be specified only in a decimal number Specify the line number in the following format If the extension of the source file name is c line number specification can be omitted If the source file name is not alphanumeric characters enclose the line number in double quotes E Character Constant A character constant is the character value enclosed in a single quote it cannot include a single quote and Instead of these characters single quote and back slash escape characters can be used as character constants Characters that can constitute character strings can be used as escape characters CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 1 Parameters to be Entered from Dialog Boxes Software Support Manual SPANSION 2 1 3 Data and Address Formulas Register Name Flag Name The SOFTUNE Workbench provides register and flag names as the terms of data and address formulas E Regist
460. ssnsusursesunannne 152 Saving Trace Data ieiccnsaieses crecccecaarcencekvassoedecdeevs 209 Search Character String Search Function 00 e 158 Fil Search sccics oisesiendesesnetsas oeaanhenetiieied cccoedeass 165 Search Procedure vcs sisssiessnesssiesissesesivecseeeaaeviees 165 Searching Memory Data c0 sseeeeeeeeeeeee 195 Section Changing the Section Allocation Order 311 Method of Outputting Warning When Section is Placed Outside Specified ROM RAM Area RAN SC scieesianectths AT 312 Section Disposition Connection Specifying rini oi i 309 Setting of the Sections ssssssssnsersersnnnenrercnrnnnnnnss 29 When a Section is Allocated to the Specified ROM RAM Ate aiescocvsinusts tisonsssacias cebbacddontinas 310 When a Section is Allocated to the Specified Starting Addres S sceccenes ie ancthesiastanagadads karaan 310 Select Procedure to Select Debug Function 00 438 Select the Project Setup Project Menu 28 Selecting Output File eee 305 Semaphore Detailed Display of Semaphore ee 243 Sequence Example of Sequence Shift in Sequence WINDOW sssnnsstensccisnessadesssniistvcsesensx caverns 116 NOQUENCE scsi cssencianssreesienaecssinedanasnecensaswssesaiaweas 373 Sequence Details Setting 0 ee 377 384 Sequence Setting ccccccccceseseeeeeseessssessesessseeeees 383 Sequence Trace Trigger Details Dialog 225 Sequence Trace Trigger Setup Dialo
461. st Number Function Address_ Symbol 1 HARD BREAK DFO2C3 CODE 2 HARD BREAK DFOOCB start end CODE 3 SEQUENCE DFO28F main START gt Lv1 4 SEQUENCE 005416 Lv1 gt END 5 SEQUENCE 005436 Lv1 gt START 6 o 7 2 i 0 wae Delete All delete Cancel e Delete button Deletes the selected events in the event list e All delete button Deletes all events in the event list e Event list No Displays event numbers To delete a set event select its number Function Displays the currently specified events HARD BREAK Hardware break MB2100 01 TRACE TRIGGER Trace trigger SEQUENCE Sequence WATCH BREAK Datawatch break PASSCOUNT BREAK Passcount break MB2100 01 PERFORMANCE Performance MB2100 01 Address Displays the address to which each event has been set Symbol Displays symbol information about a specified address Detailed Information Displays which function each event is used in If events run out delete unnecessary functions based on this information HARD BREAK CODE Code break DATA Data break July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 371 a CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug SPANSION Software Support Manual a TRACE TRIGGER CODE Trace trigger code DATA Trace trigger data SEQUENCE RESERVED Event not registered in sequence RESTART Event for restart LEVEL1 Events set in levell LEVEL2 Events set in level2 WATCH BREAK The following two break is used as a set of dat
462. sters error message patterns of various tools to enable error jump E Error Jump Setup Procedure 1 Select Error from the Setup Menu The error jump setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 65 opens 2 Enter a syntax For details on syntaxes refer to Section 1 7 Error Jump Function in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual 3 Enter a comment as required A comment can be added to each syntax 4 Click the Set button Figure 4 7 65 Error Jump Setup Dialog Box Setup Error Jump mx Syntax a ZIZ Zh Set Comment Syntax List SYSTEM 1 h SYSTEM h fi SYSTEM 1 fi Down BEE Macro define 4 File Name l Line Number h Help Keyword Any String Char Some Characters Char t or 5 Cancel E Syntax Deletion Procedure 1 Select Error from the Set Menu The error jump setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 65 opens 2 Select the syntax to be deleted from the syntax list 3 Click the Delete button 466 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Syntax Modification Procedure Modify a set syntax in the following procedure 1 Select Error from the Setup Menu The error jump setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 65 opens 2 Select the syntax to modified from the syntax list The syntax and comment are displayed in the associated fields 3 Modify the syntax and comment then
463. stomize Build setting dialog is displayed Figure 4 5 53 2 Use the tree view to select the title of the tool to delete When a category is selected all the tools in the category are deleted Two or more tools can be also selected 3 Click the DELETE button E Start Sequence Change Procedure 1 Select Project Customize Build The Customize Build setting dialog is displayed Figure 4 5 53 2 Use the tree view to select the tools for which the start sequence is to be changed Tools in the Before After category are sequentially executed from the top 3 Click the UP and DOWN buttons to arrange in the start sequence Tools can be moved only within the category which the tools belong 326 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 7 Project Dependencies A subproject is defined in the project E Project Dependencies Figure 4 5 55 Dependency of Project Dialog Box Dependency of project Project name smp pri ba Cancel Project to be depended upon sample prj e Project name The name of the project which a subproject is defined in or deleted from is displayed e Project to be depended The name of the project on which the selected project can depend in Project name is displayed The project name indicated by checkmark is the name of the subproject in the project selected in Project name E Procedure for Defining Proj
464. t a delay count for the sequence The dialog box appears when you select the shortcut menu Delay Count in the Sequence Window Figure 4 6 28 Setup Delay Count Dialog Box Setup delay count Delay count D O End delay count Cancel Break C No break e Delay count Set the delay count e End delay count Select Break or Not Break 374 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual E Setting Latch The Setup latch dialog box is used to set a latch for the sequence The dialog box appears when you select the shortcut menu Set Latch in the Sequence Window Figure 4 6 29 Setup Latch Dialog Box beers ery ria LatchNo f Divergeftom 1 Delete Diveget 2 x Chose e Latch No Select a latch number 1 2 e Diverge from Select a branching source level 1 8 e Diverge to Select a branching destination level 1 8 END e Delete Deletes the set items E Displaying the Latch Measurement Result The Display latch dialog box is used to display the latch set to the sequence The dialog box appears when you select the shortcut menu Display Latch in the Sequence Window Figure 4 6 30 Display Latch Dialog Box Display latch Ed Latch 1 1 gt 2 OhOOm00s000ms000 0u Latch 2 3 gt 0 OhO0m00s000ms000 0u Latch 1 Latch 2 Oh00m00s000ms000 M SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 375 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug a
465. t adds Trace start and Trace stop to Operation after shift e Address Specifies an address or symbol to which the transition condition is set e Address mask This field is used to specify a mask value for the specified address e Pass count Specifies an access count for a trigger hit e Size Byte Word Specifies a data size for data access Checking Don t care nullifies the specified access size e Attribute Read Write Specifies an attribute for data access e Access detect CPU DMA Specifies how to detect the bus master for data access e Comparison condition Specifies a data comparison condition Disable Does not specify data as the transition condition Data agreement Sets a data agreement with specified data as the transition condition Data not Sets a data disagreement with specified data as the transition condition e Data This field is used to set data for data access e Data mask This field is used to specify a mask value for the specified data 382 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 6 6 4 Sequence Setting MB2100 01 This section explains the sequence setting dialog box for the emulator debugger MB2100 01 E Sequence Setting Selecting Debug Sequence menu displays Sequence Setup State Dialog Figure 4 6 35 Sequence Setting Dialog MB2100 01 Sequence x Sequence Sequencer RESTART A Code Mw START Se EN
466. t at the debugging For the performance measurement and use conditions see the relevant sections of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual MB2141 2 2 9 Measuring Performance MB2147 01 2 3 7 Measuring Performance MB2198 2 5 7 Measuring Performance MB2100 01 2 6 8 2 Measuring Executing Cycle Count between Two Points MB2141 Examples of the performance window are given in Figure 3 18 1 and Figure 3 18 2 Figure 3 18 1 When Measurement Count is Selected as Display Type E Performance tojta k Display type Measuring count v Measuring results D Event No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ooococeo e Display type Measurement time or Measurement count can be selected to display it in the window e Measurement results Displays how many hits each set event got 102 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 18 Performance Window Software Support Manual SPANSION va Figure 3 18 2 When Measurement Time is Selected as Display Type Display type Measuring time Display event Interval 1 Measuring results Minimum Maximum Average 0 0 0 0 0 0 Time us 0 0 e Display type Select Measuring time or Measuring count as the display type e Display event Select a measurement interval 1 to 2 e Measuring results The measurement result is totalized and displayed The minimum measurement result maximum measurement result and average
467. t results after the Clear button is clicked From Last Executed shows the measurement results of previous program execution Time shows the execution time Cycle shows the measurement results of execution cycle count 388 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a Display Example for Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 Figure 4 6 41 Display Example for Emulator Debugger MB2100 01 Time measurement Cycle From Initialize O Cycle Clear From Last Executed O Cycle Close 4 Convert from CPU Cycle From Initialize OhOOmO00s000ms000us000ns T ime 32MHz From Last Executed OhOOm00s000ms000us000ns T ime 32MH2z e Comment From Initialize shows the total of measurement results after the Clear button is clicked From Last Executed shows the measurement results of previous program execution Cycle shows the execution cycle count Time 60MHz shows the value which is the execution cycle count converted to execution time with CPU clock 60MHz For details of this CPU clock setting see E Measurement Unit below E Comment Click the Comment button on the time measurement dialog to display the comment dialog This is available with the emulator debugger MB2100 01 This section explains the measurement result error displayed on the time measurement dialog during the execution cycle measurement Figure 4 6 42 Comment Dialog for Time Measurement Erro
468. t the information required for communication with the target Figure 4 7 42 Setup Wizard Target Operating Environment Setup Wizard it sets up about communication Please input your frequency setting Standard clock for communication Normal communication 4 MHz gt Please select the length of the cable that corresponds to the length of DEBUG I F cable used ex 3m gt 5m or less Set up length of DEBUG I F cable Set up Length 2m or less cm There are two settings related to target operating environment For details see 2 4 1 2 Operating Environments of the Target in SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual e Reference frequency of communication speed Set the value for the reference frequency of communication speed used for normal communication Hz kHz or MHz can be selected for unit e DEBUG I F cable length cable length Select the length of the required debug interface cable 2 meters or less 5 meters or less 10 meters or less 2 meters or less is default 442 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a Software Support Manual SPANSION a 5 For MB2100 01 specify settings related to software break Figure 4 7 43 Setup Wizard Software Break Setup Wizard The setting of the software break is permitted or is forbade is set The software break is a function to rewrite an instruction the specified address in the break instruction and to do the break Software break
469. target This item can be set when C source file Assembler source file Library file Object file or Relative file is selected e Project The full path to the project file is displayed e Project Type Set the type of project file selected in the tree view absolute ABS relative REL library LIB If the REALOS ABS type is selected the project type cannot be changed This item can be set when the project file is selected singly The project type cannot be set for each configuration July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 279 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual a e Function call Interface Select the function call interface to be used in C Compiler Table 4 5 1 shows selectable function call interfaces and their descriptions The function call interface cannot be set for each configuration Target File Name Set the target file name e Target File Directory Set the directory of the target file This item can be set when only Project two or more items may be set is selected e Object File Directory Set the output directory of the object file output in compiling or assembling This item can be set when only Project two or more items may be set is selected e List File Directory Set the output directory of the list file output in compiling or assembling This item can be set when only Project two or more items may be set is selected Table 4 5 1 List of Function call Interfaces Function
470. target file Start Debug End Debug Setup Menu Development Debug environment Memory Map Tool Keyboard Editor Error Tool execution Window Menu Cascade Vertical Horizon Split Arrange icons Refresh window Refresh all windows Close all windows Help Menu Help Topics Support Information About Fs907s 134 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 2 File Menu File Menu SOFTUNE Workbench has the following functions e Workspace and file accessing e Printing e End of SOFTUE Workbench E Functions Related to Project and File Accessing The project and file accessing New Open Close Open Workspace Close Workspace Save Save As Save All Recent Text File Recent Workspace E Other Functions Other functions are as follows Print Exit July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 135 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 2 1 New Creates a workspace file a project file or a text file E Creation Dialog Box Select the File New menu to display the dialog box shown in Figure 4 2 1 Select a file in the file type list e Workspace project file e Text file Figure 4 2 1 Creation Dialog Box K File type Workspace Project file Cancel a LX 136 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 2 File Menu Software Support Manual SP
471. tch on the user hardware This design enables the running program to be aborted externally Prepare this hardware E Target System Creation Procedure The target system creation procedure is given below Figure D 1 shows the flow for creating the target system procedure 1 Create and assemble the initialization routine I O drivers and vector table according to the specifications of the hardware to be used 2 Link the object file created in 1 to the debugger body mod907 rel 3 Convert the absolute format debugger file created in 1 in the Motorola S format or Intel HEX format 4 Transfer the Motorola S or Intel HEX file created in 3 to the ROM writer When it receives the file the ROM writer writes it to ROM The monitor debug mod907 rel is in the following directory MInstallation Directory LIB 907 Figure D 1 Flow for Target System Creation Procedure Initialization routine source u_init asm I O driver source u_io asm Vector table source intv asm Version information source u_inf asm Assemble Debugger body Object file mod907 rel Absolute format debugger file abs Motorola S format or Intel HEX format ROM programmer Mounting on target system July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 509 a gt SPANSION APPENDIX APPENDIX D Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Target Software Support Manual AN E Explanation of Sample Program The SOFTUNE Workbench provides the follow
472. tcut menu Select Copy from the shortcut menu See Section 4 3 2 Cut Copy Paste Delete Clear Click the right button of the mouse in the output window to displays the shortcut menu Select Clear from the shortcut menu July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 63 a SPANSION v CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 5 Output Window Software Support Manual Docking View 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the output window to display the shortcut menu Select Docking View from the shortcut menu The output window is docked with the frame in the check status Display 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the output window to display the shortcut menu Select Nondisplay from the shortcut menu The output window enters the nondisplay status Set Font Click the right button of the mouse in the output window to display the shortcut menu Select Set Font from the shortcut menu The font selection dialog box Figure 3 5 2 opens Select Font and Size then click the OK button Figure 3 5 2 Font Setting Dialog Box Size u 10 Cancel rebuchet MS si Sample AaBbYyZz Highlight Keyword 1 Display the shortcut menu by clicking the right button on the Output window Select Keyword Coloring In the check state the keyword error number of the error message is displayed in red Logging 1 Display the shortcut menu by clicking the right button on
473. tcut menu of the trace window and then select Trace trigger tab 2 Select Sequencer for Type 3 Press Sequence Set Sequence trace trigger setting Figure 4 4 34 Sequence Trace Trigger Setup Dialog Sequence Sequence Sequencer RESTARTIA END Functi hi an enn E E iasa lje l Trace End 7 LEVEL1 1 LEVEL2 2 LEVEL3 3 Code Code 7 Code x Status Enable Disable Set Please push Set button when Sequencer Status set List Syml Event list Close e Status Enable Disable Specifies whether to enable or disable the sequencer which is set e Function when sequence end Specifies operation of trace acquisition when sequencer reaches END Selectable items are shown below in each mode single trace mode multi trace mode Single trace Break Trace End Break Ends the program execution Trace End Ends the trace acquisition 224 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION u Multi trace Break Multi trace End Trace End Break Ends the program execution Multi trace End Ends the trace acquisition Trace End Transfers the trace buffer to next block Note Trace execution has to be forcibly stopped in order to make settings while a user program is running in trace enhancement mode And perform Start of trace after settings are made in order to validate the setting changes E Sequence Trace Tr
474. terface To enable LAN communication the LAN interface must be set at the PC and emulator sides Consult the LAN administrator when setting the IP address and a port address etc E Setting LAN Interface at PC Side 1 Install the TCP IP protocol in network setting dialog on WindowsXP or Windows2000 Install the TCP IP protocol Click Control Panel Network and Dial up Connections Local Area Connection Property to set a in WindowsXP and Windows2000 Add the IP address assigned to the emulator to the HOSTS file Add the following items IP address Host name For WindowsXP and Windows2000 the IP address and host name are in SYSTEM32 DRIVERS ETC Users with administration authority must set the address and name Register the emulator port address and service name in the SERVICES file At the default 5001 is the support address and fjicesv is the service name Register the following items fjicesv 5001 tcp For WindowsXP and Windows2000 the port address and service name exist in SYSTEM32 DRIVERS ETC Users who possess an administrator authority must set these address and name E Setting LAN Interface at Emulator Side In case of MB2141 emulator this procedure is following 1 2 3 y DAUA 9 Connect the emulator to the PC with the RS 232C interface Turn on the emulator Execute the LAN Address Menu from SOFTUNE V3 FFMC 16 Family SOFTUNE Workbench Tool of the Start Menu The LA
475. tering conditions such as a break address push Set button Set information is reflected in a break list When an address already set in the break list is specified at this time it is overwritten and set 342 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION va Setting detailed break conditions other than an address Push Extend button A breakpoint details setting dialog is displayed The details of the dialog are explained in the section of each breakpoint Figure 4 6 6 Details Dialog Simulator Debugger Code break point details Sx Break address H 0004DE Pass count D Control C No break Break SHOW STATUS SHOW TRACE A00 AFF DUMP 2300 23FF Command Cancel Confirming conditions of a breakpoint currently being set When a breakpoint to be confirmed is selected from the list the information currently being set is reflected in a dialog If break conditions are set in a details setting dialog push Extend button while they are selected from the list A dialog is displayed with set conditions reflected In the case of the emulator debugger push Change button Temporarily disabling a breakpoint currently being set Select a breakpoint to be disabled from the list and push Disable button If more than one breakpoint is selected at the same time all the selected ones are disabled Enabling a breakpoint temporarily disabled Select a breakpoi
476. the Output window Select Logging Start and then specify the file name of the record target file The result of output to the Output window is recorded in the specified file To suspend logging select Logging Record and uncheck the checkbox Logging is restarted again when the checkbox is checked To stop logging select Logging Termination 64 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor Software Support Manual SPANSION a 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor The edit window is used to display and edit a source file and document file etc E Edit Window An example of the edit window docked with the Main Window is given in Figure 3 6 1 As shown in this example the edit window docked with the Main Window can be displayed only when the standard editor built into SOFTUNE Workbench is in use SOFTUNE Workbench can register and use any external editor In this case however the edit window is not treated as a SOFTUNE Workbench screen Figure 3 6 1 Example of Edit Window a a startup asm PROGRAM start x a Ruler 32 TITLE start 33 4e 34 5 nr SS SSS SSS a Line number display 35 external declaration of symbols 36 x 4 EXPORT start Text editing area IMPORT _main STACK STACK ALIGN 1 25y RES B Lin
477. the end address to be set Attribute Specifies a memory space attribute Read Write or Code e Undefined Area EML Figure 4 7 58 Undefined Area Setup Dialog Box Map list Undefined area intemal ROM attribute Undefined Area Access Approval Permits access to the undefined area Access Forbidden Inhibits access to the undefined area SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 453 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual e Internal ROM Attribute EML Figure 4 7 59 Internal ROM Attribute Setup Dialog Box EML Map list Undefined area Intemal ROM attribute Can write to intemal ROM area m Intemal ROM image Enable Write to Internal ROM area Sets an internal ROM area write attribute 454 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual i E Access Guarded Areas Setup MB2198 Emulation Debugging Guarded Areas Figure 4 7 60 Access Guarded Areas Setup Dialog Setup map mx Access guarded areas Start address H o00000 cal End address H FFFFFF Guarded attribute V Read V Write V Code co Remain Map list Address range guarded attribute Close e Map list Displays the currently set guarded areas e Start address Specifies the start address of the guarded area to be set e End address Specifies the end address of the guarded area to be set e
478. the function call as follows sub 10 When a constant value is directly specified sub ii When variable ii is directly specified 392 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Description Execute the specified functions to display the return values The return value is set to the built in variable CALL Evaluate the argument of the specified function in dummy argument format and execute it If the count of specified actual arguments is more than the count of dummy arguments evaluate as many counts of actual arguments as that exceeds the dummy arguments in an int type When the program hits a break point while the CALL command is executing a function a break occurs at that position To execute the call command continuously use the GO command To terminate the execution of the CALL command use the CLEAR CALL command Note that it is not possible to nest this command The CALL command sets the break point for the current PC and sets the return address so as to return to that point calling a function Therefore if the function called by the CALL command passes through the current PC a break occurs in the middle of executing the function In such cases the following message is displayed Break at address by Invalid call termination Break at address by Invalid call termination Re starts execution using the GO command to continue the execution of the CALL comma
479. the relative path check File Property in the SRC tab of Project window For the file property see Section 4 3 9 Property Set the path to the target file directory object file directory and list file directory to the relative path from the project file In SOFTUNE Workbench when a new project is created the output directory is set to the relative path from the project file To make a change and check open the Set Project dialog For details see Section 4 5 5 Setup Project Set the directories such as the include path and library path specified in the tool option to the relative path or macro description For the macro description see Section 1 11 Macro Descriptions Usable in Manager of SOPFTUNE Workbench User s Manual For the tool option see Section 4 5 5 Setup Project After the completion of the setting in steps 1 to 3 save the project Move the project file without changing the directory structure in steps 1 to 3 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 37 a SPANS ay 2 16 Useful Functions CHAPTER 2 Operation 2 16 Useful Functions Software Support Manual This section explains some useful functions to use in the SOFTUNE Workbench E Tab Display of the Windows In the SOFTUNE Workbench the displayed windows are tabbed This makes it easier to find the desired window quickly when multiple windows are displayed E Drag amp Drop Between Windows SOFTUNE Workbench supports the drag amp
480. ting Of MCU tii iiecscscsiascgctatetecestereadeeiaeess 281 Setting of MCU Change Dialog Box 282 When Initializing Placement Link Option Based on MCU Information 0 0 0 ees 313 Measurement Displaying the Latch Measurement Result 375 Measurement Result Displaying Measurement Result cee 387 Measurement Unit Measurement UnNit cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeees 389 391 Member Add Memet siicetscinecandecctevinechueseestsceeveeenedveonees 272 Add Member Directory ceeeeeeeeeeeees 274 Add Member Filey iscsiccicascnedvcesvinentsicecsaccsenlccens 273 Memory Changing Memory Data eee 193 Comparing Memory Blocks ssssssersrererreeene 199 Detailed Display of Fixed length Memory POO sarsetetoedtesnathvcataunstaaceueansapcemunteess 245 Displaying Memory Data eee 193 Memory Map Setup MB2141 EML 0 450 Memory Map Setup MB2147 01 MB2147 05 EML E A eetatecececepecan 451 Memory Map Setup SIM 449 Memory WindoW sssssssssssesssnsnrrrrrrrrrerrrrrreereeeee 85 Real time Memory Window 00008 118 263 Searching Memory Data 00tttteeeeeeeeeees 195 Setting of Memory Area 000 tees 29 Menu Bookmark Menu cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 167 Customize Bar Menu cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 487 How to Register Workbench Menu 0 494 Menu Configuration 0000 eee cree eens 132 Select the Project
481. ting a sequence in the sequence details setting dialog box When you click the right button of the mouse on the window cell to be set shortcut menus appear Select the Area menu to display the sequence details setting dialog box Set a sequence in this dialog box For the dialog box see Section 4 6 6 Sequence July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 113 a gt SPANSION CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 19 Sequence Window Software Support Manual E Shortcut Menu The Sequence Window has the following nine types of shortcut menus e Setup e Event state e Delete e All delete e Jump e Restart e 3 level sequence Event list e Close Event state Displays the sequence details setting dialog box which sets sequencer events For details see Section 4 6 6 Sequence Temporarily switches a currently set event between Enable and Disable Deletes a currently set event Deletes all of the currently set events Displays another window based on the address information of the currently set event Takes the current sequencer position back to the starting point Displays the 3 level sequence setting dialog box which sets a sequencer limited up to 3 levels For details see Section 4 6 6 Sequence Displays the event list dialog box which checks the setting status of events that affects the number of events to be set Closes the Sequence Window Temporarily switches a currently set event between
482. tnies die een aa iaaea akaandika a a E 34 2 14 Reading SOFTUNE Project Files of Old Versions 0 c cccccceseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseaeeeteaeeeseaeesseaeeeneneeenas 35 ZAD Moving Project FIOS searen o O A 37 ZAG Use FUNCHONS scossi E ARA EAE ENEE TANEET 38 CHAPTER 3 Windows ssssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnne 39 3 1 Window Configuration seesesseessiessieesiisetttttttnstt tutt tnnttn unt EAANEANAEEAANEANAEEANEENNEEEANEENEEEEAEEEAS EEAS E Enne Ennen 40 3 2 TOOLBAR asarna a E E T E E EE OEA OT ONE O 41 3 3 StAtUS Baf wavves ules venstecsvas cused erisia ae a aeaea ei piu raa eoa aaa Ee a A EE UNEA 44 3 4 Prope WINCOW carsaraa rn rE T O E E EO OE EEO aes 46 3 4 1 SRC TaD wsstctic tics edie eS eee ieee Rede a et 47 342 ABS TaD saena eia iaeiaiai rece aE aa aa daaa aea aaa Se xe fnau lal aia andanan aaant 58 3 5 Output WINdOW sirasidan naisiin heii aaua T ia E Eaa E iaa edie ee ena ane 63 3 6 Edit Window Standard Editor iivseisscsscessesacessvectescetavicae chet be sencesdend sueetivesseeeresarensndusees ta ceddenevavesteeevers 65 3 6 1 Setting Standard EdItOr siisii naa a a a aa EN aa ena cei ieee 68 3 7 DOUNCE WINGOW sssraien reiprennandi a aa a ENa atd vaa Aai 72 3 8 SYMbOI MTA ALAO 0AT AEE 77 3 9 Disassemble WindOW i iiiveti sistieceee ine ete dene doit eed ioe AE eins A ANAE EE ON aia 79 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E a SPANSION Software Support Manual 3 1 FROGISISl WIND
483. to save the sampling data 1 File name Specify a log filename to be saved If extensions are omitted they are automatically applied according type of file format to be selected When the SOFTUNE format is selected SRL is applied When the CSV format is selected CSV is applied 2 File Format Select either SOFTUNE format or CSV format for a file format to be saved SOFTUNE format To display in the RAM Checker viewer recommended CSV format To display in other applications than the RAM Checker viewer July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 123 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 21 RAM Checker Window SPANSION Software Support Manual v Note The CSV format requires size of data approximately 4 times that of the SOFTUNE format 3 Overwrite Control This function obtains data without overwriting the created log files When this function is enabled log files are automatically saved with a different name Check off the check box to enable this function Example If the specified log file filename srl exists the filename is saved as shown below filename srl gt filename_001 srl If filename_ool srl also exists the filename is saved as shown below filename srl gt filename_002 srl If filename_002 srl filename_003 srl also exist in the same way the filenames are saved as shown below filename srl gt filename_003 srl filename srl gt filename_xxx srl Press the OK button to call the contents of the setup dial
484. tput Load Frequency Break m CPU Frequency Frequency D56 MHz Please set maximum CPU frequency to use The transmission speed of a debugger is made the optimal You do not have to change it usually SPANSION a July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 435 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup SPANSION Software Support Manual va Settings of operating frequency are shown below O indicates the items which can be set X indicates the items which cannot be set Table 4 7 19 Setting Items on Frequency Tab Emulator Setting item Simulator Monitor MB2141 a as era MB2198 are Enable for High speed communication base clock frequency Frequency Reset Emulator debugger MB2198 Sets the maximum operating frequency of CPU This is the setting of the maximum frequency and this does not change the actual operating frequency The default value is the maximum value of the operating frequency described in the data sheet for the product type you are using In emulator debugger MB2198 the reset button is displayed The frequency returns to the default value when the reset button is clicked Emulator debugger MB2100 01 Sets the standard frequency for high speed communication Hz KHz or MHz can be selected for unit The default unit is MHz For details of the setting value refer to the Hardware Manual for the product type you are using When enabling the high s
485. trator 9 Select Exit from the Setup menu to exit the LAN address setup program 10 Press the emulator reset button button on rear to reset the emulator Note MB2147 01 and MB2198 have following interface to set IP address subnet mask and port address e LCD of status display on emulator and three setting switch button This procedure is following 1 Push ENTER button on emulator to change parameter input mode 2 Select LAN menu with up or down button and push ENTER button 3 Select IP Address menu with up or down button and push ENTER button Select the digit to change with up or down button and push ENTER button Change number with up or down button and push ENTER button To finish input IP address select OK with up button and push ENTER button after input least significant address 4 Select Subnet Mask menu with up or down button and push ENTER button The procedure to input data is as the same as IP Address 5 Select Port Address menu with up or down button and push ENTER button The procedure to input data is as the same as IP Address 6 Select Exit menu with up or down button and push ENTER button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 507 APPENDIX APPENDIX D Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Target SPANSION Software Support Manual a APPENDIX D Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Target This appendix explains creation of the monitor debugger target ROM e Target system conf
486. tup gt lt SPANSION Software Support Manual v The items that can be set for watch related matters are as follows Table 4 7 6 Setup Item in Watch Tab Debugger EML MB2141 MB2147 01 MB2147 05 MB2198 MB2100 01 Memory Buffering Specified number of array element e Watch Mode Automatic C language Assembler Specify how to interpret the registered watch variable Automatic Sets the C language or assembler automatically according to the analysis result C Language Sets the C C language mode interpretation as C C language expressions Assembler Sets the assembler mode interpretation as assembler expressions e Data Size Byte Word Long Single Double Sets the display size in the assembler mode e Memory Buffering Enable Disable Specify how to read memory of variables such as arrays and structures Enable Memory of whole variables is read They are accessed by size of the top variable Disable Memory of each element and member unit is read e Specified number of array element Specify number of element when array is registered or expanded as watch variable Enable Enables the specification of the number of elements for an array Displays a warning dialog if there is an array larger than a specified number of elements Element Specify number a default is D 256 of array element Note If memory buffering is set as valid correct value
487. tup asm 180 SUBW A DTRANS_S 00053 F80092 SUBW A 4047E startup asm 181 CMPW A SIZEOF DTRANS 00050 F80095 CMPW 2 40000 startup asm 182 RMI AB startup asm 187 MOV A BNKSYM DCLEAR 5 00043 F8009A MOV B F8 startup asm 188 MOV DTB A 00041 F8009C MOV DIB A startup asm 189 MOVW RW1 DCLEAR_S 00039 F8009E MOVW RW1 047E Sstartup asm 201 MOVW A RW1 E Other Trace Functions The trace function which can be used depends on each debugger How to set the trace function for each debugger is explained in the subsequent pages July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 211 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a gt SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 4 8 1 Trace Simulator Debugger This section explains the trace function for simulator debugger E Trace Function for Simulator Debugger For simulator debugger the following trace functions can be used For details of each function see 2 1 10 Trace of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual e Setup of trace mode Control of trace status Buffer full break E Trace Setup Dialog Trace Tab To set the trace function select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window Setup of trace mode Figure 4 4 27 Trace Mode f Setup trace so Trace Status Enebi Disable Buffer full break C Break Not break Cancel e Status Enable Disable Specifies control status of trace e Buffer Full Break Break No break Specifies w
488. tus Bar Software Support Manual SPANSION a 6 Displays the power on debug status Power on debug mode Displays PON Not power on debug mode Nothing is displayed 7 Displays the current IP instruction address This item is displayed when the debug session is being executed This item indicates the last branch PC value at the specified intervals when the program is running in the MB2100 01 emulator debugger July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 45 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window SPANSION Software Support Manual v 3 4 Project Window The Project Window displays information about the project and load module E Project Window Figure 3 4 1 shows an example of the project window Figure 3 4 1 Project Window Workspace Sample E Sample abs Sample prj Debug E Source Files J Include Files Dependencies Debug To select the window display contents use the tab on the bottom of the project window The project window has the following tabs e SRC tab Displays information on the project Refer to Section 3 4 1 SRC Tab tab for details e ABS tab Displays information on the source file acquired from the debug information Refer to Section 3 4 2 ABS Tab for details 46 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 4 Project Window Software Support Manual 3 4 1 SRC Tab The name of the current project and the file names registered in the project are
489. tware Support Manual AN 4 5 3 Add Member Add Member adds a file to the project E Add Member There are the following menus to add a member e File A file is specified and stored in the project e Directory A directory is specified to store its file and folder in the project The file dialog box for file selection is displayed Two or more files can be selected at a time The selected files are added to the project and displayed in the Project Window 272 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 5 3 1 Add Member File A file is specified and stored in the project E Add Member File The file dialog box for file selection is displayed Two or more files can be selected at a time Figure 4 5 3 Add Member Dialog File Look in Ji Project ck Type J MB90F394 File folder J MB96F346RSB File folder _ MB96F673AA File folder C sample c C ALEX ftf FCfe _ startup asm ASM File startun670 asm ASM File 4 m r startup asm sample c Files oftype Source Fietcasm S Canca Mem Type Automatic sti is i s SY Insertion Folder sample SouceFiles gt Mem Type Name The file to be stored is stored as the type of specified member in the project If Auto is selected the type of member is determined by the extension Insertion Folder The project in which a file is
490. ug Environment Emulation Tab Added note about Memory Verify Operation 4 7 2 3 Setting Debug Environment Response speed Tab Changed the description of During Debugging response speed optimization function 550 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual INDEX SPANSION a The index follows on the next page This is listed in alphabetic order July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 551 a SPANSION Software Support Manual a Index Numerics A 3 Level Abort Setting the 3 Level Sequence ssssrsrsrrreereree 379 DOLL A E Seachett jacannaebeasdas tsnaspedenusnn cee 338 8 Level Abort Didloe wicsicic isccediscoctecantestesdoncisbsereeerees 339 Setting the 8 Level Sequence ee 381 Program Suspension ABORT Switch 509 ABS ABS AD eaa Aa e tines 58 ABS Tab Bitmap Image List assen 58 Access Functions Related to Project and File ACCESSIDD ys sicidcvetiectccasenciiecaitaneostebnessdens 135 Active Project Active ProjeCt wievesverccedssnedescesnnnsededesnetaacdesvanevess 267 Deleting Specific Active Project Configuration from Projet esiti eeen i 27 Setting Active Project Configuration s 26 Setting the Active Project cccceeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeaeee 22 Add Add Bookmark nieras essesiectcciehencectanetbacteceaeetens 194 Add M6MbGr airis nnsa eE 272 Add Member Directory eeeeeeeeeees 274 Add Member File c
491. unication ports Polling control applies to reception and transmission __clr_abrt When an Abort switch is available write the processing here when factor clear by software is required _inittime Initializes measurement timer valid when execution time measurement function SHOW TIMER command used If this function is not used write RET only 510 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX D Creating ROM on Monitor Debugger Target Software Support Manual SPANSION a __clrtim Clears measurement timer and starts measurement If the timer function is not used write RET only __readtim Reads measurement timer When not using the timer function write RET only _getchr Passes 1 byte receive data to debugger _putchr Transmits 1 byte data passed from debugger e intv asm Interrupt vector table used by debugger e u_inf asm _user_version_information Defines the user individual character string to display in the SOFTUNE Workbench version information V30L25 or more can be used Up to 31 characters can be defined Input O null at the end of the character string If display is unnecessary input only 0 null link opt Sample file to be input to linker This file is used the sample program object is linked to the debugger body mod907 rel Note Always link the STACK section area and DATA section area in this order The debugger clears these areas to zero
492. upper part of display register setting dialog box then click the Add button The selected register is set in Current Display Register lower part 3 Set all the registers you want to display by repeating the above operation 4 Click the OK button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 83 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 10 Register Window a SPANSION Software Support Manual a Deleting Registers Select the register you want to delete in the following procedure 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the Register Window to display the shortcut menu then select Display Setup from the menu The display setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 10 2 opens 2 Select the register you want to delete from Register List lower part of display register setting dialog box then click the Delete button The selected register is deleted from Current Display Register lower part 3 Set all the registers you want to delete by repeating the above operation 4 Click the OK button E Restoring Registers to the Initial Status Restore the registers in Current Display Registers to the initial status status when SOFTUNE Workbench was installed in the following procedure 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the Register Window to display the shortcut menu then select Display Setup from the menu The display setting dialog box shown in Figure 3 10 2 opens 2 Click the Reset button The registers in Current Display Registers
493. upport Manual v 3 22 1 Logging This section explains logging in the Terminal Window E Logging To record a command execution log in the Terminal Window in a file is called logging E How to Control To control logging click the right button of the mouse in the Command Window to display the shortcut menu then select Logging Logging menu includes the following three submenus Start Starts logging The file dialog box for selecting a logging file opens Specify a logging file name then click the Save button State Opens the dialog box to display set the logging output state shown in Figure 3 22 2 If necessary change the state Exit Exits logging Figure 3 22 2 Logging State Display Dialog Box Setup output Sa Logging name G Softune sample 90 Proiect samole loa Status Enable C Disable e Status Enable Enables logging Disable Disables logging 130 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 Software Support Manual SPANSION CHAPTER 4 Menus This chapter explains the SOFTUNE Workbench menu configuration and the dialog boxes to be started from each menu 4 1 Menu Configuration Tree 4 2 File Menu 4 3 Edit Menu 4 4 View Menu 4 5 Project 4 6 Debug 4 7 Setup 4 8 Window 4 9 Help July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 131 a gt SPANSION Software Support CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 1 Menu Configuration Tree Manual a 4 1 Menu Configuration Tree This
494. upport Manual v E Memory Map Setup MB2141 EML e Map List Figure 4 7 52 Memory Map Setup Dialog Box up map Map list Undefined area Internal ROM attribute Map list address attribute type 000000 OO00CF read write user 000100 OO3FFF code read write user S 004000 OOFFFF code read internal ROM i FC0000 FFFFFF code read internal ROM Add mirror Setup Delete e Map Area Displays the currently set map area e Clicking the Add Mirror button opens the mirror area setup dialog box Figure 4 7 54 e Clicking the Setup button opens the setup dialog box Figure 4 7 55 corresponding to the debug session 450 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Memory Map Setup MB2147 01 MB2147 05 EML e Map List Figure 4 7 53 Memory Map Setup Dialog Box Map list Undefined area intemal ROM attribute Map list address ___ attribute Let 000000 OOOOBF read write IO 000100 OO18FF code read write internal RAM 001F00 OOIFFF read write user bex 004000 OOFFFF code read internal ROM i FE0000 FFFFFF code read internal ROM Map Area Displays the currently setup map area Clicking the Setup button opens the setup dialog box Figure 4 7 55 e Mirror Area Setup MB2141 Figure 4 7 54 Memory Map Setup Dialog Box a hme Start address H 000000 End address 000000 Cancel m Area oper
495. usanpeudeesieesvesereesneceens eased AEAEE AE 14 2 1 6 File Name Specification ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeceaeeeseaeeeeeaeesecaeeseeieeseeeeeseiaeeees 15 2 2 Starting and Terminating SOFTUNE Workbench ccccceeccceeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeesaeeesaes 16 2 3 Creating Project siraconins isiad deai kanaa apanan aaraa Re aa E E Ea EEEE ENA e SAAE EEEa aa 17 2 4 Creating WorkSpace siccciccattessvceccucsstadacecesnsi sbakegsidecesated E E a cents aa a ERRENA 20 2 5 Setting Project ceeviecccersad cag dceevstetyeuscev Secs cha vanensdenetast dvuhnetauaeisbaacdetuat ated Deeeeacdys Aanbasedael EESE 22 2 6 Creating Files and Setting to Project ceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeeesaeeesaeeseeaeeeseaeeeneeeetsaes 24 2 7 Definition of Subproject s s s ie niet icv dag n deeded ee aden eed 25 2 8 Creation of Project Configuration ccccceceeeeeeeeee eset eeeneeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeaeeseaaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeseueeeseaes 26 2 9 Setting TOONS sie esse ieee iso a r ea ra a aar aie eaten Wier ae nate iene ave 28 240 Setting LINKER OPtONS esses cecesesececsene sit ices seeneeeesbteesbecees sacar edetecsdecensaees i aE aAa a aasad aeai 29 211 MaK BUI ssrt a aaa oaa Ea a Eaa E a E oaan 31 2 11 1 Making or Building Of Project ssasssniscersiiiscrrasiriciirinieiariviane nE iien Eana S aE aaa 32 DAD I aa S E E E A T ec banned oa ete 33 2 13 Executing Debugging Only 0c lcci iis e
496. ut Port List 2 Click the Delete button 3 When resetting all the selected ports is completed click the Close button July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 407 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 4 7 2 2 Interrupt This section explains the interrupt setup procedure E Setting an Interrupt 1 When the interrupt setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 8 opens set an interrupt number 2 Select an issuance timing One Time or Interval can be selected 3 Set the interrupt cycle count 4 Click the Add button The set interrupt number issuance timing and interrupt cycle count are displayed in Interrupt List 5 When setting all the items is completed click the Close button E Resetting an Interrupt 1 When the interrupt setup dialog box shown in Figure 4 7 8 opens set an interrupt number 2 Select the interrupt to be reset from Interrupt List 3 Click the Delete button 4 When resetting all the selected interrupts is completed click the Close button Figure 4 7 8 Interrupt Setup Dialog Box Interrupt Interrupt number D11 Request timing One time Append Cycle count D1 Close Interrupt list Number Request timing cycle o ose Delete 408 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual 4 7 2 3 Setting Debug Environment This section explains how to set the debug environment E
497. ute Read Write Write Read Specifies the trace data attribute for acquiring 232 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 4 8 5 Trace Emulator Debugger MB2198 This section explains the trace function for emulator debugger MB2198 E Trace Function for Emulator Debugger MB2198 For emulator debugger MB2198 the following trace functions can be used For details of each function see 2 4 7 Trace of SOFTUNE Workbench User s Manual e Setup of trace mode Control of trace status Buffer full break e Setup of trace area e Setup of trace trigger e Trace delay setting July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 233 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual va E Trace Setup Dialog Trace Tab To set the trace function select Setup from the shortcut menu of the trace window Setup of trace mode Figure 4 4 41 Trace Mode Setup trace Trace Fitering Trace trigger Status Enable Disable Buffer full break Break No break Trace stop caused due to trace buffer full Stop No stop Trace state established before the trace trigger hit Acquire No acquire e Status Enable Disable Specifies control status of trace e Buffer Full Break Break No break Specifies whether to enable or disable the trace buffer full break which stops program execution when the trace buffer
498. ute The attribute at the time of data access is specified e Comparison condition The data comparison condition is specified Disable No data is specified for the transition condition Data agreement Data agreement data matches the specified data is specified for the transition condition Data not Data mismatch data does not match the specified data is specified for the transition condition e Data In this field data at the time of data access is specified e Data mask In this field the mask value for the specified data is specified 378 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 6 Debug Software Support Manual SPANSION a 4 6 6 3 Sequence Setting MB2198 This section explains the sequence setting dialog box for the emulator debugger MB2198 E Setting the 3 Level Sequence The Sequence dialog box is used to set a sequence up to 3 levels The dialog box appears when you select Debug 3 level sequence menu or select the shortcut menu 3 level sequence in the Sequence Window Figure 4 6 33 3 Level Sequence Setting Dialog MB2198 fs Sequencer RESTART LV1 RESTART LV2 Code bel Code v TART END Attribute L E EI Tt LEVEL1 T LEVEL2 T LEVEL3 Code v Code v y Code v Address El El Function when trigger hit Enable Disable Break v Set Please push Set button when Sequencer Status Function when trigger hit set List
499. utton of the Mouse Workbench wis incnnsanscsannnsnesncdseasesisevecransde 16 on Space in the Project Window 62 Terminating SOFTUNE Workbench 16 Shortcut Menu Command Input Field 0 0 92 When SOFTUNE Workbench is in the Debug Shortcut Menu Other than the Command Input Field SOSSION E eens 157 Nasa acesidue en samacnmereaadatanma case cdeeneaioademmrauiaes 93 Software Break Shortcut Menus Setting of Software Break s es 354 Shortcut MCNUS ihe sacs ccenessiecesvacnrescceneraaecsevaeeness 106 Software Break vccicccesdcccesesscedvectneceddeseeacecseetenes 353 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Source on a Debug Category sseceeee 54 Checking Source File Saving 0 seee 333 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Creating a Program Source and Executing on a Dependencies Category 53 Make Buil sicccsccnecdsesverceccdsessasecaiiasevecccess 4 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Creating Source File and Document Files on a File in the Dependencies Category Daca iced lected nha 144 E deensedsweskansyeuetas 56 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse on a Source File Name 00000 54 60 on a Folder teens eneeenees 52 Source WINDOW oes csccccepccssenctaesttesdaseeceeecenaneriectens 72 Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse Source Files On a Function N
500. variables are selected they are deleted all together See Section 4 4 7 Watch Specify range of displayed array element See Section 4 4 7 Watch See Section 4 4 7 Watch If multiple variables are selected they are deleted all together Deletes all variables being stored from the window Switches whether to enable or disable monitoring The each variable which is registered user sets ON or OFF of monitoring User distinguishes between ON and OFF by a color of square ICON A blue means on a red means off If multiple variables are selected they are deleted all together Display the memory window and setup bookmark Displays watch properties Closes watch window 1 Click the right button of the mouse on a displayed variable name to display the shortcut menu then select Property from the menu Information for the variable is displayed For details see Section 4 3 9 Property 2 Click the Close button Note With the emulator debugger MB2100 01 do not access to the general purpose register GPR area 0x000180 to 0x00037F while a user program is running July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 89 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 14 Trace Window SPANSION Software Support Manual AN 3 14 Trace Window This section explains the Trace Window This window is displayed only when SOFTUNE Workbench is in the debug session E Trace Window The Trace Window displays the trace result Figur
501. ventenes 261 How to Register Batch File ee 492 Resetting Fonts si cicccccsnvencicssnnsnsccadssctssnpiecevsnesns 261 Loading the Target File ee 396 Setting Fonts s csivisniiciin nsn ninna p 261 Opening the Existing Workspace File 149 Format Recent Text File wisieascc asses cers cosaiia bs coc nmseeanceivetise 156 Setting Absolute Format Assemble List Recent Workspace File 156 OOPELORS scsinadnincassosnenarkdnshdnktraenctusasauseina 306 Sample Biles ss sskssisiavsissaneesinceedscontucsgedaeeeteees 510 Formula Saving the Binary File eee eee 152 Address Formulas cic ccseccsteccsnessecscesscceseecenevaneceeones 6 Saving the Project File 2 eee 152 Data Formula ciivesccncceeccnnedctetesconssindivleseteecencseees 6 Selecting Output File eee 305 Operators Usable in Data and Address Setting Method When Debug Information Existence FOr AS ssinisceseeeecesnscscncevaseapedccstersesaees 12 Check for Library File Module is Inhibited Full Addressing Babe Oe ri Pull AdGressing sisi sdocsidessanvedestveccserectveciaapevtedcans 14 SOUP ael eE a E T 123 f Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse ence mica 158 ai acl Ookmark Function ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenneeeeees ea eens Or nie Shortcut Menus Click the Right Button of the Mouse l Functions E ETE A T 296 on a Source File Name s sssssessesee 54 60 Changing of Function call Interface saasaa essan 515 Shortcut Menus Click
502. ware Support Manual va Figure 4 3 10 Property Project General 2 General Folder name Source Files Position sample e Folder name The name of the selected folder is displayed If editing is enabled folder name can be changed e Place The place of the selected folder is displayed Figure 4 3 11 Property Project Window General 3 General Setup Name MB2147 01 Debugger Type Emulator Debugger Information Device tpe USB Batch file before performing load Batch file after performing load e Setup name The selected setup name is displayed e Debugger type The Debugger type set in Debugger setup is displayed Information The device type host port baud rate batch file before performing load batch file after performing load etc are displayed The displayed information depends on the device type etc 178 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 3 Edit Menu Software Support Manual SPANSION a E Property Conditions Figure 4 3 12 Property Project Window Dependence e Tool Displays the language tool to be executed e File Displays a dependency file list Selecting a file name from the list displayed the update date and time of the file e Modified Displays the date and time of the last file update E Property Input Figure 4 3 13 Property Project Window Input General Input Tool C Softune sample 907 Project MB SOF 394 0BJ sta
503. ween descriptions in Section Name List and the linker options to be generated are given below Pay special attention when changing the section allocation order Example 1 When descriptions in Section Name List are as follows sec 1 H 00001000 sec2 sec3 H 0000F000 sec4 The following sections are generated sc sec1 sec2 H 00001000 sc sec3 sec4 H 0000F000 Example 2 When the sec4 allocation order is changed as follows sec 1 H 00001000 sec2 sec4 sec3 H 0000F000 The following sections are generated sc secl sec2 sec4 H 00001000 sc sec3 H 0000F000 July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 311 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 5 Project SPANSION Software Support Manual a E Defining the ROM RAM Area 1 Click the Add button The Setup ROM RAM Area Name dialog Figure 4 5 45 is opened Figure 4 5 45 Setup Disposition Connection Dialog E Setup ROM RAM Area Name x ROM RAM Area Name _INFAMOI Area Attribute RAM v Start ddress H 000100 End ddress H O03FFF Cancel 2 Specify a ROM RAM area name Specify the ROM RAM name that differs from the set names 3 Select ROM or RAM as Area Attribute 4 Specify a start address and end address starting address and end address of ROM RAM area In Auto Disposition Mode 2 the linker searches an available ROM RAM area beginning at the top of the ROM RAM Area List Click the Up button or the Down button to move to a proper position E Deleting a ROM RAM Area 1 S
504. wn in Figure 4 7 62 opens Select the tool title you want to change from the tool list The values set in Title Execute Filename Option Executing Directory Designate Additional Option when Executing and Use Output Window are displayed Change Execute Filename Option Executing Directory Designate Additional Option when Executing and Use Output Window When Title is changed the set tool is registered as another tool Click the Setup button The dialog box asking you whether to change the tool opens Click the Yes button 460 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup Software Support Manual anaE E Example of Tool Setup e When notepad is used Title Memo pad Execute Filename note pad exe Option f Executing Directory ox Designate Additional Option when Executing A check mark is not set Use Output Window A check mark is not set e When the dir command is registered Title Dir Execute Filename command com Option c dir Executing Directory Designate Additional Option when Executing A check mark is not set Use Output Window A check mark is set July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 461 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 7 Setup a SPANSION Software Support Manual a 4 7 6 Keyboard Keyboard enables definition of shortcut keys E Keyboard Setup Procedure 1 Select a type Functions are displayed in Function List 2 Select the function to be
505. workspace Adding an existing project to currently opened workspace E Adding a New Project to Currently Opened Workspace Perform steps below to add a project 1 2 3 Select the Project Add Project New menu Place a check mark on Add to the current workspace on the creation dialog box Set the dependencies between projects To set a project as a subproject of another project place a check mark on Dependencies and then select the project name in the list on the Dependencies dialog box For details of the subproject see 2 7 Definition of Subproject After performing this step see I Creating a Project in 2 3 Creating Project E Adding a Currently Opened Project to Workspace Perform steps below to add a project 1 2 3 Select the Project Add Project Project menu Select the project to be added on the add project dialog box Set the dependencies between projects To set a project as a subproject of another project place a check mark on Dependencies and then select the project name in the list on the Dependencies dialog box For details of the subproject see 2 7 Definition of Subproject Click the Open button The existing project is added to workspace Setting the Active Project When multiple projects are added to workspace the target projects for the following operations must be selected The target project is called the active project Make Build Compile as
506. ws E Select the Project Setup Project Menu The Set Project dialog is opened The option selected in the Set Project dialog box is applicable to two or more projects The applicable project configuration can be limited For example the settings of project configurations A and B can be changed The same setting can be also specified for all project configurations Specify the project configuration in the Setting Target box the project set in tree view and select the tool tab When the compiler assembler and linker librarian are selected the category can be selected in the top tab of the setting dialog box for each tool After the drop down list is opened select a category When a category was selected the contents in the display are changed and the options included in each category can be set In most cases compiler and assembler options need not be set except when output of list file and make or build is executed under specific conditions Set only linker options For how to set linker options see Section 2 10 Setting Linker Options E Click the OK Button to Complete Tool Setting When setting all necessary tool options is completed click the OK button All the set options are registered in the project they become valid when make or build is executed Clicking the Cancel button cancels all the set options Note When the Update button is clicked during tool option setting the previously set options
507. xternal tools used while running the Debugger in a tool bar This function enables you to call them up easily by clicking and external tool one of the buttons You can register up to ten objects Items that have been set once are restored when the Workspace is opened Figure 5 1 1 Customize Bar Customize bar E3 ALAL AAL AIA AA All G Softune Initialize pre By registering batch files or Workbench menus or external tools in the customize bar the button of the registered number is enabled when the Workspace is opened Also currently registered items are displayed by moving the mouse cursor over any button in the tool bar Installing Customize Bar Apply a check mark to the Customize Bar in the dialog box Figure 5 1 2 that is displayed when installing SOFTUNE Workbench to install the customize bar Note that you can also install only the customize bar if it was not installed when you installed SOFTUNE Workbench July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 485 CHAPTER 5 Addin Module 5 1 Customize Bar SPANSION Software Support Manual va Figure 5 1 2 Dialog Box Displayed When Installing Select Components Choose the components Setup will install Select the components you want to install and clear the components you do not want to install El SOFTUNE Workbench gg SOFTUNE Workbench Custom Bar gm Customize Bar Communication module for EasyCODE m Description Registrare debugging funct
508. y contents at locations accessed at execution are valid and they are displayed in black Locations where memory contents are changed are displayed in red e When memory window has been already opened This window is activated e When memory window has not been yet The area specified using Setup Debug Environment Realtime memory Area is displayed E Area To move the display area for the real time memory window click the right mouse button on the real time memory window to display the menu and then specify Area and select Area 1 or Area 2 Then the area specified using Setup Debug Environment Realtime memory Area is displayed E Display Setting To set the display format for the real time memory window click the right mouse button on the real time memory window to display the menu and then select Setup to display the setting dialog Figure 4 4 70 e Display format The display format for the window is specified Select from Bit Byte Word and Long Whether or not to display ASCII characters on the right side of the window is selected Figure 4 4 70 Display Setting Dialog Setup display Type Byte v lv ASCII Cancel July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 263 CHAPTER 4 Menus 4 4 View Menu a SPANSION Software Support Manual va E Area Setting To set the display area for the real time memory window click the right mouse button on the real time memory window to display the menu and then select
509. y set mixed display is reset and the check mark is deleted When it is not set mixed display is set and a check mark is displayed e Display coverage 1 Click the right button of the mouse in the source window to display the shortcut menu 2 Check Display coverage A check mark attached to the left side of Display coverage indicates that Display coverage has already been turned on If a check mark isn t attached to the left side of Display coverage Display coverage is turned off 3 Select Display coverage Display coverage is turned off and the check mark is disappeared when it has already been turned on Display coverage is turned on and a check mark is attached when it has been turned off Note The coverage display in the source window isn t automatically updated You need to update the display with the latest information using the shortcut menu Update or by selecting Update window or Update all windows from the main menu July 31 2015 CM41 00312 9E 75 CHAPTER 3 Windows 3 7 Source Window SPANSION Software Support Manual v e Activate when stop Specify whether the source window should set to active or not when the program is stopped However if a source window is displayed as new it should always be activated Please operate with following procedure 1 Click a right button of source window to display shortcut menu 2 Please make sure Activate when stop If a check mark is pl
510. ying of the rp option or the function call interface for the input object and library to be edited referring to Table F 3 Note Objects with different function call interfaces cannot be linked Spansion provides only the following object function call interfaces for stack argument passing e Monitor Debugger 522 CM41 00312 9E July 31 2015 APPENDIX APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Software Support Manual SPANSION a APPENDIX G External I F DLL for Simulator Fast version of simulator debugger supports the external I F to create peripheral simulation modules This section describes external I F function E Outline of External I F DLL The Simulator Debugger for SOFTUNE Workbench supports the I O simulation function ports interrupts for aiding in debugging applications using microcontroller resources However this function is simple so that it cannot cover the simulation of complicated microcontroller resources therefore providing interface between the instruction set simulator ISS and a microcontroller resource simulator that the user describes in the C language This microcontroller resource simulator is created by the dynamic link library DLL file for Windows E Configuration 1 External I F module The microcontroller resource simulator is read only when the Simulator Debugger for SOFTUNE Workbench is started The interface between the ISS and the microcontroller re

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

334102E, ProMix PD2K Color Change Kits, Instructions      Adendo No.1 - Hospital Universitario Erasmo Meoz    VisionMAX Herbicide Sylvicole  SERVICE MANUAL - RadioDatabase.nl  8260A Operating Manual  Highpoint RocketRAID 3560  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file